Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit M18-0006 - LOOMIS - RTUS AND VENTILATION SYSTEM
LOOMIS 15450 NELSON PL MI 9-0006 Parcel No: Address: City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Inspection Request Line: 206-438-9350 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.gov MECHANICAL PERMIT 2423049090 Permit Number: 15450 NELSON PL Project Name: LOOMIS Issue Date: Permit Expires On: M 18-0006 4/27/2018 9/14/2019 Owner: Name: Address: Contact Person: Name: Address: Contractor: Name: Address: License No: Lender: Name: Address: INDUSTRIAL CRATING & PACKIN PO BOX 88299 , TUKWILA, WA, 98188 PAUL HARRINGTON 3421 S HENRY RD , GREENACRES, WA, 99016 ACE COMMUNICATION SERVICES INC PO BOX 1286 , ROSEBURG, OR, 97470 ACECOSI036KL 111 Phone: (509) 714-6301 Phone: (503) 807-1477 Expiration Date: 9/29/2019 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 3 NEW RTU'S AND 1 VENTILATION SYSTEM W/CO SENSOR Valuation of Work: $80,000.00 Type of Work: REPLACEMENT Fuel type: GAS Fees Collected: $1,585.53 Electrical Service Provided by: PUGET SOUND ENERGY Water District: TUKWILA Sewer District: TUKWILA Current Codes adopted by the City of Tukwila: International Building Code Edition: International Residential Code Edition: International Mechanical Code Edition: Uniform Plumbing Code Edition: International Fuel Gas Code: Permit Center Authorized Signature: 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 uta National Electrical Code: WA Cities Electrical Code: WAC 296-46B: WA State Energy Code: 2017 2017 2017 2015 r4 Date: 9- \)-' t y I hearby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development permit annditions attached to this permit. Signature: � Date: 2 Print Name: ��/v /7746 This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days for the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. PERMIT CONDITIONS: 1: The attached set of mechanical plans have been reviewed by The Tukwila Fire Marshals Office and are acceptable with the following concerns: 2: H.V.A.C. units rated at greater than 2,000 cfm require auto -shutdown devices. These devices shall be separately zoned in the alarm panel and local U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #2437) 3: H.V.A.C. systems supplying air in excess of 2,000 cubic feet per minute to enclosed spaces within buildings shall be equipped with an automatic shutoff. Automatic shutoff shall be accomplished by interrupting the power source of the air -moving equipment upon detection of smoke in the main return -air duct served by such equipment. Smoke detectors shall be labeled by an approved agency for air -duct installation and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. (IMC 606.1, 606.2.1) 4: Remote indicator lights are required on all above ceiling smoke detectors. (City Ordinance #2437) 5: Duct detectors shall send a supervisory signal only upon activation. (City Ordinance #2437) 6: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2437) (IFC 901.2) 7: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206-431-3670) is required for this project. 8: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2436 and #2437) 33: The installation of flammable /combustible liquid storage tanks, both aboveground and underground, requires a separate fire department permit for each tank. Permits can be obtained from the Fire Marshal's Office at 6300 Southcenter BI , Suite 209 Tukwila, WA 98188. 206-575-4407. 34: All flammable/combustible liquid tank installations and piping shall comply with 2015 International Fire Code Chapter 57 and NFPA 30. 35: Generator installation shall comply with NFPA 30, chapter 22, NFPA 31, NFPA 37, NFPA 110, NFPA 111, NFPA 70, article 445 and manufacturers installation guidelines. 36: A stamped licensed engineers' letter may be submitted to the fire inspector at the time of inspection certifying compliance with the referenced code requirements. 9: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 10: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575-4407. 11: Work shall be installed in accordance with the approved construction documents, and any changes made during construction that are not in accordance with the approved construction documents shall be resubmitted for approval. 12: All permits, inspection record card and approved construction documents shall be kept at the site of work and shall be open to inspection by the Building Inspector until final inspection approval is granted. 13: Readily accessible access to roof mounted equipment is required. 14: All construction shall be done in conformance with the Washington State Building Code and the Washington State Energy Code. 15: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 16: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206-431-3670). 17: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center. 18: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 19: ***MECHANICAL PERMIT CONDITIONS*** 20: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431-3670). 21: Manufacturers installation instructions shall be available on the job site at the time of inspection. 22: Work shall be installed in accordance with the approved construction documents, and any changes made during construction that are not in accordance with the approved construction documents shall be resubmitted for approval. 23: All permits, inspection record card and approved construction documents shall be kept at the site of work and shall be open to inspection by the Building Inspector until final inspection approval is granted. 24: Readily accessible access to roof mounted equipment is required. 25: All construction shall be done in conformance with the Washington State Building Code and the Washington State Energy Code. 26: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 27: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206-431-3670). 28: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center. 29: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 30: ***MECHANICAL PERMIT CONDITIONS*** 31: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431-3670). 32: Manufacturers installation instructions shall be available on the job site at the time of inspection. PERMIT INSPECTIONS REQUIRED Permit Inspection Line: (206) 438-9350 1400 FIRE FINAL 0703 MECH EQUIP EFF 1800 MECHANICAL FINAL 1800 MECHANICAL FINAL 1800 MECHANICAL FINAL 1800 MECHANICAL FINAL 1800 MECHANICAL FINAL 0609 PIPE/DUCT INSULATION 0705 REFRIGERATION EQUIP 0701 ROUGH -IN MECHANICAL 0701 ROUGH -IN MECHANICAL 0701 ROUGH -IN MECHANICAL 0702 SMOKE DETECTOR TEST Parcel No: Address: c City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Inspection Request Line: 206-438-9350 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.gov MECHANICAL PERMIT 2423049090 Permit Number: M18-0006 15450 NELSON PL Project Name: LOOMIS Issue Date: 4/27/2018 Permit Expires On: 10/24/2018 Owner: Name: Address: Contact Person: Name: Address: Contractor: Name: Address: License No: Lender: Name: Address: INDUSTRIAL CRATING & PACKIN PO BOX 88299 , TUKWILA, WA, 98188 PAUL HARRINGTON 34215 HENRY RD, GREENACRES, WA, 99016 ACE COMMUNICATION SERVICES INC PO BOX 1286 , ROSEBURG, OR, 97470 ACECOSI036KL Phone: (509) 714-6301 Phone: (503) 807-1477 Expiration Date: 9/29/2019 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 3 NEW RTU'S AND 1 VENTILATION SYSTEM W/CO SENSOR Valuation of Work: $80,000.00 Type of Work: REPLACEMENT Fuel type: GAS Fees Collected: $1,239.52 Electrical Service Provided by: PUGET SOUND ENERGY Water District: TUKWILA Sewer District: TUKWILA Current Codes adopted by the City of Tukwila: International Building Code Edition: International Residential Code Edition: International Mechanical Code Edition: Uniform Plumbing Code Edition: International Fuel Gas Code: 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 National Electrical Code: WA Cities Electrical Code: WAC 296-46B: WA State Energy Code: 2017 2017 2017 2015 Permit Center Authorized Signature:titidAt VIN Date: (-11—/ Oak I hearby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating co ii ruction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development permit ane conditions attached to this permit. Signature: Print Name: ask, ���e�,Le✓^ Date: V-7-7 - This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days for the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. PERMIT CONDITIONS: 1: The attached set of mechanical plans have been reviewed by The Tukwila Fire Marshals Office and are acceptable with the following concerns: 2: H.V.A.C. units rated at greater than 2,000 cfm require auto -shutdown devices. These devices shall be separately zoned in the alarm panel and local U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #2437) 3: H.V.A.C. systems supplying air in excess of 2,000 cubic feet per minute to enclosed spaces within buildings shall be equipped with an automatic shutoff. Automatic shutoff shall be accomplished by interrupting the power source of the air -moving equipment upon detection of smoke in the main return -air duct served by such equipment. Smoke detectors shall be labeled by an approved agency for air -duct installation and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. (IMC 606.1, 606.2.1) 4: Remote indicator lights are required on all above ceiling smoke detectors. (City Ordinance #2437) 5: Duct detectors shall send a supervisory signal only upon activation. (City Ordinance #2437) 6: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2437) (IFC 901.2) 7: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206-431-3670) is required for this project. 8: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2436 and #2437) 9: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 10: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575-4407. 11: Work shall be installed in accordance with the approved construction documents, and any changes made during construction that are not in accordance with the approved construction documents shall be resubmitted for approval. 12: All permits, inspection record card and approved construction documents shall be kept at the site of work and shall be open to inspection by the Building Inspector until final inspection approval is granted. 13: Readily accessible access to roof mounted equipment is required. 14: All construction shall be done in conformance with the Washington State Building Code and the Washington State Energy Code. 15: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 16: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206-431-3670). 17: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center. 18: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 19: ***MECHANICAL PERMIT CONDITIONS*** 20: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431-3670). 21: Manufacturers installation instructions shall be available on the job site at the time of inspection. 22: Work shall be installed in accordance with the approved construction documents, and any changes made during construction that are not in accordance with the approved construction documents shall be resubmitted for approval. 23: All permits, inspection record card and approved construction documents shall be kept at the site of work and shall be open to inspection by the Building Inspector until final inspection approval is granted. 24: Readily accessible access to roof mounted equipment is required. 25: All construction shall be done in conformance with the Washington State Building Code and the Washington State Energy Code. 26: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 27: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206-431-3670). 28: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center. 29: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 30: ***MECHANICAL PERMIT CONDITIONS*** 31: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431-3670). 32: Manufacturers installation instructions shall be available on the job site at the time of inspection. PERMIT INSPECTIONS REQUIRED Permit Inspection Line: (206) 438-9350 1400 FIRE FINAL 0703 MECH EQUIP EFF 1800 MECHANICAL FINAL 0609 PIPE/DUCT INSULATION 0705 REFRIGERATION EQUIP 0701 ROUGH -IN MECHANICAL 0702 SMOKE DETECTOR TEST CITY OF TUKWIC) Community Development Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 hap://www.TukwilaWA.gov 0 Mechanical Permit No, M 1 J / 00N Project No. Date Application Accepted: Date Application Expires: 1 (For office use only) MECHANICAL PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. **please print** SITE LOCATION Site Address: /5715/7 /41.4( Ace -- Tenant Name: L/,S King Co Assessor's Tax No.:...2q2 2 317'1 -?LSC ° Suite Number: PROPERTY OWNER Name: gib" ��pn ,/06 lI 1 Address: Name: Address: 34a S././ Gam(/ �k _ ` Address: City: Cir �� 1rt4 State:tat Phone: Fax: City: State: Zip: CONTACT PERSON — person receiving all project communication Name: gib" ��pn ,/06 lI 1 Address: Address: 34a S././ Gam(/ �k _ ` :: City: Cir �� 1rt4 State:tat Phone: Fax: Zip: 7 4i Phone: 9)7 7/q Email: Q/1L`L�if/i 11q-41 a J tu! "h ic'y' &, (CM Valuation of project (contractor's bid price): $ Describe the scope of work in detail: IA)/ Floor: New Tenant: , Yes 0.. No MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: 7'50 Address: City: State: Zip: Phone: Fax: Contr Reg No.: Exp Date: Tukwila Business License No.: gpi-c 6.) trEitne, "sti,7017 Use: Residential: New Commercial: New Replacement Replacement Fuel Type: Electric ❑ Gas ,!J Other: HAApplications On Line \2016 Applications\Mechanical Permit Application Revised 1-4-16.docx Revised: January 2016 bh Page 1 of 2 Indicate type of mechanical work being installed and the quantity below: Unit Type Qty Furnace <100k btu Residential, Nighttime Furnace >100k btu Industrial Floor fumace 55 dB(A) Suspended/wall/floor mounted heater 57 dB(A) Appliance vent / Repair or addition to heat/refrig/cooling system 47 dB(A) Air handling unit .� <10,000 cfm 60 dB(A) Noise: Unit Type Qty Air handling unit Residential, Nighttime >10,000 cfm Industrial Evaporator cooler 55 dB(A) Ventilation fan connected to single duct 57 dB(A) Ventilation system / Hood and duct 47 dB(A) Incinerator — domestic 65 dB(A) Incinerator — comm/industrial 60 dB(A) Unit Type Qty Fire damper Residential, Nighttime Diffuser Industrial Thermostat 55 dB(A) Wood/gas stove 57 dB(A) Emergency generator Commercial Other mechanical equipment 47 dB(A) 60 dB(A) 65 dB(A) Boiler/Compressor Qty 0-3 hp/100,000 btu 3-15 hp/500,000 btu 15-30 hp/1,000,000 btu 30-50 hp/1,750,000 btu 50+ hp/1,750,000 btu Mechanical units need to be in compliance with the Tukwila Noise Code. Maximum permissible sound levels are based on from where the sound is created and where the sound is heard. Additionally, if sound can be heard from within a house at night in a residential zone it may not be allowed. For more details, see TMC 8.22 District of Sound Producing Source District of Receiving Property Residential, Daytime* Residential, Nighttime Commercial Industrial Residential 55 dB(A) 45 dB(A) 57 dB(A) 60 dB(A) Commercial 57 dB(A) 47 dB(A) 60 dB(A) 65 dB(A) Industrial 60 dB(A) 50 dB(A) 65 dB(A) 70 dB(A) *Daytime means 7AM-10PM, Monday through Friday and 8AM-10PM, Saturday, Sunday and State -recognized holidays. A few sounds are exempt from the noise code, including: • Warning devices; • Construction and propert .maiutenancduring the daytime hours (7am-lOpm); • Testing of backup generators during the day. PERMIT APPLICATION. NOTES - Value of construction — in all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the permit center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of plan review — applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The building official may grant one extension of time for additional periods not to exceed 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OW O' .ORIZED Signature: j Print Name: / 2'J/ / 7 Mailing Address: 32/ H:\ApplicationsForms-Applications On Linc\2016 Applications\Mechanical Permit Application Revised 1-4-16.docx Revised: January 2016 bh Date: / /V Day Telephone: r 771 17e 7c7 6ozvetti ceiL Yfo- City Zip Page 2 of 2 Indicate type of mechanical work being installed and the quantity below: Unit Type Qty Furnace <100k btu Residential, Nighttime Furnace >100k btu Industrial Floor furnace 55 dB(A) Suspended/wall/floor mounted heater 57 dB(A) Appliance vent Commercial Repair or addition to heat/refrig/cooling system 47 dB(A) Air handling unit 65 dB(A) <10,000 cfm 60 dB(A) Unit Type Qty Air handling unit Residential, Nighttime >10,000 cfm Industrial Evaporator cooler 55 dB(A) Ventilation fan connected to single duct 57 dB(A) Ventilation system Commercial Hood and duct 47 dB(A) Incinerator — domestic 65 dB(A) Incinerator — comm/industrial 60 dB(A) Unit Type Qty Fire damper Diffuser 6? Thermostat 3 Wood/gas stove Emergency generator I Other mechanical equipment Boiler/Compressor Qty 0-3 hp/100,000 btu 3-15 hp/500,000 btu 15-30 hp/1,000,000 btu 30-50 hp/1,750,000 btu 50+ hp/1,750,000 Jptu 4); Noise: Mechanical units need to be in compliance with the Tukwila Noise Code. Maximum permissible sound levels are based on from where the sound is created and where the sound is heard. Additionally, if sound can be heard from within a house at night in a residential zone it may not be allowed. For more details, see TMC 8.22 District of Sound Producing Source District of Receiving Property Residential, Daytime* Residential, Nighttime Commercial Industrial Residential 55 dB(A) 45 dB(A) 57 dB(A) 60 dB(A) Commercial 57 dB(A) 47 dB(A) 60 dB(A) 65 dB(A) Industrial 60 dB(A) 50 dB(A) 65 dB(A) 70 dB(A) *Daytime means 7AM-10PM, Monday through Friday and 8AM-10PM, Saturday, Sundzy, and State -recognized holidays. A few sounds are exempt from the noise code, including: • Warning devices; • Construction and property maintenance during the daytime hours (7am-10pm); • Testing of backup generators during the day. PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES - RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA APR 112018 PERMIT CENTER Value of construction — in all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applt is subject to possible revision by the permit center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of plan review — applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The building official may grant one extension of time for additional periods not to exceed 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OW ORIZED AG T• Signature: Date: Print Name: jed1 / f % /2' Mailing Address: 392/ g_ HAApplications\Forms-Applications On LinM2016 ApplicationalMcchanical Permit Application Revised 1.4-16.docx Revised: January 2016 hh DayTelephone: City t 52�P S ate Zip Page 2 of 2 CITY OF TUKWILA Community Development Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://www.TukwilaWA.gov Mechanical Permit No. M 1 / DV 0Q) Project No. Date Application Accepted: Date Application Expires: 1\ \ (For office use on y) CHANICAL PERMIT APPLICATION Applicata s and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan rev' plications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. **please print** Site Address: //.5 /4 A Tenant Name: 1-0744/ 5 King Co Asses < "` s Tax No.: -24/2 3H "LLMC ° to Number: New Tenant: PROPERTY OWNER =Mk 6/r40 ANN Address: ' Acad.-iv AM" Name: Phone: l H /, Email: D i4 //444i a 50h a, C `/ Address: ity: State: City: State: Zip: CONTACT PERSON -person receiving all projec communication =Mk 6/r40 ANN Address: ' Acad.-iv AM" iL.it a, ._ ZiP:9f Phone: l H /, Email: D i4 //444i a 50h a, C `/ <J Valuation of project (co actor's bid price): $ Describe the scope of ork in detail: Ity CO Floor: Yes 0.. No MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name:.71-DD Address: ity: State: Zip: Ph e: Fax: Contr eg No.: Exp Date: Tukwila siness License No.: Use: Residential: New ❑ Replacement ❑ Commercial: New ❑ Replacement 0 Fuel Type: Electric 0 Gas A Other: H: ApplicationsWorms-Appl cations On Lin&2016 ApplicationsM cchanical Permit Application Revised I.4-16.docx o.,.a...a. l,,....a... Page 1 of 2 Cash Register Receipt City of Tukwila DESCRIPTIONS PermitTRAK I ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID $346.01 M18-0006 Address: 15450 NELSON PL Apn:2423049090 $346.01 Credit, Card Fee $10.08 Credit Card Fee R000.369.908.00.00 0.00 $10.08 MECHANICAL $323.33 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $252.03 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.322.102.00.00 0.00 $71.30 TECHNOLOGY FEE $12.60 TECHNOLOGY FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R18306 R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $12.60 $346.01 Date Paid: Monday, August 12, 2019 Paid By: DAN RUSHING Pay Method: CREDIT CARD 005234 Printed: Monday, August 12, 2019 7:34 AM 1 of 1 SYSTEMS Cash Register Receipt City of Tukwila DESCRIPTIONS ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID PermitTRAK D18-00 dress: -15450 NEi.! ON`F n:-2 04909' DEVELOPMENT $10,529.61; PERMIT FEE WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE STRUCTURAL CONSULTANT R000.322.100.00.00 B640.237.114 R000.345.830.01.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 $8,574.43 $4.50 $1,950.68 TECHNOLOGY FEE $428;72 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $428.72 VI18-0006 Addr ss: 5450 NELSON PL pn: 242304909 MECHANICAL $501.87 PERMIT ISSUANCE BASE FEE PERMIT FEE -00 R000.322.100.00.00 R000.322,100.00.00 49 0.00 0.00 $33.15 $468.72 GAS PERMIT ISSUANCE BASE FEE PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 0.00 $99.45 $33.15 $66.30 PLUMBING $516.54 PERMIT FEE PERMIT ISSUANCE BASE FEE R000.322.100.00.00 R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 0.00 $483.39 $33.15 TECHNOLOGY FEE TECHNOLOGY FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R13926 R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $30.80 $12,106.99 Date Paid: Monday, March 05, 2018 Paid By: LOOMIS Pay Method: CHECK 2888597 Printed: Monday, March 05, 2018 1:03 PM 1 of 1 I?W SYSTEMS DESCRIPTIONS PermitTRAK Cash Register Receipt City of Tukwila ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID EL18-0033 Address: 15450 NELSON PL ptts 2423049090 Credit Card Fee $43.90 Credit Card Fee R000.369.908.00.00 0.00 $43.90 ELECTRICAL $1,393.53 PERMIT FEE MULTI-FAM/COMM R000.322.101.00.00 0.00 $1,393.53 TECHNOLOGY FEE $69.68 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $69.68 M18-0006 Address: 15450 NELSON PL Apn: 2423049090 Credit Card Fee $14.62 Credit Card Fee R000.369.908.00.00 0.00 $14.62 MECHANICAL $440.36 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $440.36 TECHNOLOGY FEE TECHNOLOGY FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R14085 R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $47.11 $2,009.20 Date Paid: Tuesday, March 27, 2018 Paid By: DAN RUSHING Pay Method: CREDIT CARD 87637G Printed: Tuesday, March 27, 2018 9:03 AM 1 of 1 CSYSTEMS DESCRIPTIONS PermitTRAK Cash Register Receipt City of Tukwila ACCOUNT ( QUANTITY PAID 6,157.32 D18-0010 Address: 15450 NELSON PL Apn: 2423049090 5,573.38 DEVELOPMENT $5,573.38 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.345.830.00.00 0.00 $5,573.38 EL18-0033 Address:15450'NELSON PL Apn: 2423049090 348.38 ELECTRICAL $348.38 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.345.832.00.00 0.00 $348.38 M18-0006 Address: 15450 NELSON PL Apn: 2423049090 $235.56 MECHANICAL $235.56 PLAN CHECK FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R13259 R000.322.102.00.00 0.00 $235.56 $6,157.32 Date Paid: Tuesday, January 09, 2018 Paid By: LOOMIS Pay Method: CHECK 2882853 Printed: Tuesday, January 09, 2018 12:18 PM 1 of 1 SYSTEMS 0 CO TUKWILA ETRAKIT 6200 SOUTHCENTER BLVD TUKWILA, WA 98188 206-433-1870 CITY OF TUKWILA 0017340000802374464500 Date: 08/12/2019 VISA CARD NUMBER: TAN AMOUNT: APPROVAL CD: RECORD #: CLERK ID: X 07:33:25 AM CREDIT CARD SALE **********6044 K $346.01 005234 000 Bill {CARDHOLDER'S SIGNATURE} I AGREE TO PAY THE ABOVE TOTAL AMOUNT ACCORDING TO THE CARD ISSUER AGREEMENT (MERCHANT AGREEMENT IF CREDIT VOUCHER) Thank you! Merchant Copy INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 - Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: Type of Inspection: Address: Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: e.-1-,...„ 0\ a.m. p.m. Requester: Phone No: pproved per applicable codes. E1 Corrections required prior to approval. OMMENTS: Inspector: Date: n REINSPECTION FEE R UIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 IV apc& Project: Loom's Type of Inspection: Ma6(.ttOvcC41, V Sc - Address: / Oict, nk5S PL.. Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: s- fie. I,,,, a.m. c' Requester: Phone No: 6b3 607 /1t77 Approved per applicable codes. LJ Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: LP -TA) 14144C 0-Y- fAt7;Zr-kil rivLe- eizn-1-4 izfr 1L 70 iLsu� c Inspector: Date: ? _/s _ zo`9 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION ocob 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 (206) 431-3670 Project: e,c� ion: Type of Insp,� Address:(� (s` `0 . 'PL.-- Date Called: Special 1. • • ns: 14 Ke7exvt fri . Date Wanted: 2,-"‘t". I/ p.m. Requester: Phone No: EiApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: It) S �41r'V , iI / �c (AP cet (e l Fig l 44,44,c.t, e> r -c- tA.7 I g' Atte Qu2 A*44 is Ic7; fleV SCC a /P (ecJ (r b Dl c g5ki►"- EL P 4-tv Joa 1 iii AL.�I.. Vtgize Rfu`S ReoFi f REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. c �p aL / ,,�_ R o4 ►(i) �4�►�%LNISD f/ N les2of t�.:� INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: % 1420/46 Type of Inspection: plIc I i 4cm - i'"/%44" --- Address: /5450 /IJ et__ Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: 7: Z(a-tcli C7a.rry. p.m. Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: mttoillisi L..�4-�, 11 oek0 14-R21 (s/b /Aida govL- 24 PuiL tazdeAe_. rciA- 3, - 5 - mit• fs Q4 L "</iis ��%� Gr Cc>IOTn�i L 'S/ - c Inspector: C Date: n REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION azio 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 (206) 431-3670 Project: L"4./2 NM's% Type of Inspection: e. at_ `RA.4-4- Address: 5115'3 nlel.ca- PL. - Date Called: Special nstructions: Date Wanted: 2r2J p.m. Requester: Phone No: ElApproved per applicable codes. a Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: IVWC4 icy to -0 - Inspector: Date: "'2(D REINSPECTIO F- REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit 1 M IF bf-00 INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 (206) 431-3670 Project: 1 s of Inspection: Reiiar Sti247,1tc Addr r j Date CaII 0 to Wanted:a.m. -�'7-- p.m. i�� =_=s_ ir� -- — _; i - Special Instructions: 15.11.5 '" pz. �- Requester: Phone No: 0 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. ilrepvet 57- FL ? - )Vo4- rc.• 10- F18 2, / r , s sue' geo# Inspector:--gTD(C21 Date: %-Z% REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. b31N3O 11Wa3d ieuueoSweo Lapin peuueoS O 1—Orilmj z j fZ)a. m k— (83 —--�--c - • SD080 1 4.5L 1 80 kW INDUSTRIAL DIESEL GENERATOR SET EPA Certified Stationary Emergency STANDBY POWER RATING 80 kW, 100 kVA, 60 Hz PRIME POWER RATIN 72 kW, 90 kVA, 60 Hz * REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIAN APPROVED FIL GENERAC* INDUSTRIAL LNGINLEHro & BUM' O *Built in the USA using domestic and foreign parts *EPA Certified Prime ratings are not available in the U.S. or its Territories. **Certain options or customization may not hold certification valid. CODES AND STANDARDS Generac products are designed to the following standards: DORRECTION TR# C us NFPA ISO vsa;; 4() NOWA ANS/ Arde.. N.bW SEWN* Intifada UL2200, UL508, UL142, UL498 NFPA70, 99,110, 37 NEC700, 701, 702, 708 IS09001, 8528, 3046, 7637, Pluses #2b, 4 NEMA ICS10, MG1, 250, ICS6, AB1 ANSI C62.41 0 0 Image used for illustration purposes only POWERING AHEAD For over 50 years, Generac has led the industry with innovative design and superior manufacturing. Generac ensures superior quality by designing and manufacturing most of its generator components, including alternators, enclosures and base tanks, control systems and communications software. Generac's gensets utilize a wide variety of options, configurations and arrangements, allowing usto meet the standby power needsof practically every application. Generac searched globally to ensure the most reliable engines power our generators. We choose only enginesthat have already been proven in heavy-duty industrial application under adverse conditions. Generac iscommitted to ensuring our customers' service support continues after their generator purchase. REVSION NO.{ t1/44(0 -000p RECEIVE[) CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 262019 PERMIT CENTER SD080 1 4.5L 1 80 kW INDUSTRIAL DIESEL GENERATOR SET EPA Certified Stationary Emergency STANDARD FEATURES ENGINE SYSTEM General • Oil Drain Extension • Air Cleaner • Fan Guard • Stainless Steel flexible exhaust connection • Critical Exhaust Silencer (enclosed only) • Factory Filled Oil • Radiator Duct Adapter (open set only) Fuel System • Fuel lockoff solenoid • Primary fuel filter Cooling System • Closed Coolant Recovery System • UV/Ozone resistant hoses • Factory -Installed Radiator • Radiator Drain Extension • 50/50 Ethylene glycol antifreeze • 120 VAC Coolant Heater Engine Electrical System • Battery charging alternator • Battery cables • Battery tray • Solenoid activated starter motor • Rubber -booted engine electrical connections ALTERNATOR SYSTEM • UL2200 GENprotecttM • 12 leads (3-phase, non 600 V) • Class H insulation material • Vented rotor • 2/3 pitch • Skewed stator • Auxiliary voltage regulator power winding • Amortisseur winding • Brushless Excitation • Sealed Bearings • Automated manufacturing (winding, insertion, lacing, varnishing) • Rotor dynamically spin balanced • Full load capacity alternator • Protective thermal switch GENERAC• GENERATOR SET • Internal Genset Vibration Isolation • Separation of circuits - high/low voltage • Separation of circuits - multiple breakers • Silencer Heat Shield • Wrapped Exhaust Piping • Silencer housed in discharge hood (enclosed only) • Standard Factory Testing • 2 Year Limited Warranty (Standby rated Units) • 1 Year Limited Warranty (Prime rated Units) • Silencer mounted in the discharge hood (enclosed only) INDUSTRIAL ENCLOSURE (IF SELECTED) • Rust -proof fasteners with nylon washers to protect finish • High performance sound -absorbing material • Gasketed doors • Stamped air-intake louvers • Air discharge hoods for radiator -upward pointing • Stainless steel lift off door hinges • Stainless steel lockable handles • Rhino Coat""- Textured polyester powder coat TANKS (IF SELECTED) • UL 142 • Double wall • Vents • Sloped top • Sloped bottom • Factory pressure tested (2 psi) • Rupture basin alarm • Fuel level • Check valve in supply and return lines • Rhino Coat'"- Textured polyester powder coat • Stainless hardware CONTROL SYSTEM Control Panel • Digital H Control Panel - Dual 4x20 Display • Programmable Crank Limiter • 7 -Day Programmable Exerciser • Special Applications Programmable PLC • RS -232/485 • All -Phase Sensing DVR • Full System Status • Utility Monitoring • Low Fuel Pressure Indication • 2 -Wire Start Compatible • Power Output (kW) • Power Factor • kW Hours, Total & Last Run • ReaVReactive/Apparent Power • All Phase AC Voltage • All Phase Currents • Oil Pressure • Coolant Temperature • Coolant Level • Engine Speed • Battery Voltage • Frequency • Date/Time Fault History (Event Log) • Isochronous Governor Control • Waterproof/sealed Connectors • Audible Alarms and Shutdowns • Not in Auto (Flashing Light) • Auto/Off/Manual Switch • E -Stop (Red Mushroom -Type) • NFPA110 Level I and 1I (Programmable) • Customizable Alarms, Wamings, and Events • Modbus protocol • Predictive Maintenance algorithm • Sealed Boards • Password parameter adjustment protection • Single point ground • 15 channel data logging • 0.2 msec high speed data logging • Alarm information automatically comes up on the display Alarms • Oil Pressure (Pre -programmable Low Pressure Shutdown) • Coolant Temperature (Pre-programmed High Temp Shutdown) • Coolant Level (Pre-programmed Low Level Shutdown) • Low Fuel Pressure Alarm • Engine Speed (Pre-programmed Over speed Shutdown) • Battery Voltage Waming • Alarms & warnings time and date stamped • Alarms & wamings for transient and steady state conditions • Snap shots of key operation parameters during alarms & warnings • Alarms and warnings spelled out (no alarm codes) SD080 1 4.5L 1 80 kW INDUSTRIAL DIESEL GENERATOR SET EPA Certified Stationary Emergency CONFIGURABLE OPTIONS ENGINE SYSTEM General o Oil Heater o Industrial Exhaust Silencer Fuel System O Flexible fuel lines O Primary fuel filter Engine Electrical System o 10A UL battery charger O 2.5A UL battery charger O Battery Warmer ALTERNATOR SYSTEM O Alternator Upsizing O Anti -Condensation Heater O Tropical coating O Permanent Magnet Excitation ENGINEERED OPTIONS CIRCUIT BREAKER OPTIONS O Main Line Circuit Breaker O 2nd Main Line Circuit Breaker O Shunt Trip and Auxiliary Contact O Electronic Trip Breaker GENERATOR SET O Gen -Link Communications Software (English Only) O IBC Seismic Certification O 8 Position Load Center O 2 Year Extended Warranty O 5 Year Warranty O 5 Year Extended Warranty ENCLOSURE 0 Weather Protected O Level 1 Sound Attenuation O Level 2 Sound Attenuation O Steel Enclosure O Aluminum Enclosure O 150 MPH Wind Kit O 12 VDC Enclosure Lighting Kit O 120 VAC Enclosure Lighting Kit 0 AC/DC Enclosure Lighting Kit O Door Alarm Switch GENERAC INDUSTRIAL TANKS (Size on last page) O Electrical Fuel Level O Mechanical Fuel Level O 8" Fill Extension O 13" Fill Extension O 19" Fill Extension CONTROL SYSTEM O 21 -Light Remote Annunciator O Remote Relay Panel (8 or 16) O Oil Temperature Sender with Indication Alarm O Remote E -Stop (Break Glass -Type, Surface Mount) O Remote E -Stop (Red Mushroom -Type, Surface Mount) O Remote E -Stop (Red Mushroom -Type, Flush Mount) _ O Remote Communication - Modem O Remote Communication - Ethernet O 10A Run Relay O Ground Fault Indication and Protection Functions ENGINE SYSTEM O Coolant heater ball valves O Block Heaters O Fluid containment pans ALTERNATOR SYSTEM O 3rd Breaker Systems CONTROL SYSTEM O Spare inputs (x4) / outputs (x4) - H Panel Only O Battery Disconnect Switch GENERATOR SET O Special Testing ENCLOSURE O Motorized Dampers O Door switched for intrusion alert O Enclosure ambient heaters TANKS 0 Overfill Protection Valve O UL2085 Tank O ULC S-601 Tank 0 Stainless Steel Tank O Special Fuel Tanks (MIDEQ and FL DEP/DERM, etc.) O Vent Extensions RATING DEFINITIONS Standby - Applicable for a varying emergency load for the duration of a utility power outage with no overload capability. Prime - Applicable for supplying power to a varying load in lieu of utility for an unlimited amount of running time. A 10% overload capacity is available for 1 out of every 12 hours. The Prime Power option is only available on International applications. Power ratings in accordance with ISO 8528-1, Second Edition 1- W W V W O. N 30F6 SD080 1 4.5L 1 80 kW INDUSTRIAL DIESEL GENERATOR SET EPA Certified Stationary Emergency APPLICATION MID ENGINEERING OATA ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS General Make Iveco/FPT EPA Emissions Compliance Stationary Emergency EPA Emissions Reference See Emissions Data Sheet Cylinder # 4 Type In -Line Displacement - L (cu In) 4.5 (274.6) Bore - mm (in) 105 (4.1) Stroke - mm (in) 132 (5.2) Compression Ratio 17.5:1 Intake Air Method Turbocharged/Aftercooled Cylinder Head Type 2 Valve Piston Type Aluminium Crankshaft Type Engine Goveming Governor Forged Steel Electronic Isochronous Frequency Regulation (Steady State) Lubrication System Oil Pump Type +/- 0.25% Gear Oil Filter Type Full Flow Crankcase Capacity - L (qts) 13.6 (14.4) Cooling System Cooling System Type GENERAL` INDUSTRIAL Closed Water Pump Belt Driven Centrifugal Fan Type Pusher Fan Speed (rpm) 2538 Fan Diameter mm (in) 660.4 (26) Coolant Heater Wattage 1500 Coolant Heater Standard Voltage Fuel System Fuel Type Fuel Specifications Fuel Filtering (microns) 120 V /240 V Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel ASTM 5 Fuel Injection Stanadyne Fuel Pump Type Engine Driven Gear Injector Type Mechanical Fuel Supply Line mm (in) 12.7 (0.5) NPT Fuel Return Line mm (in) Engine Electrical System System Voltage 12.7 (0.5) NPT 12 VDC Battery Charging Alternator 20 A Battery Size See Battery Index 0161970SBY Battery Voltage 12 VDC Ground Polarity Negative ALTERNATOR SPECIFICATIONS Standard Model 390 Poles 4 Field Type Revolving Insulation Class - Rotor H Insulation Class - Stator H Total Harmonic Distortion <3% Telephone Interference Factor (TIF) Standard Excitation Synchronous Brushless Bearings One -Pre Lubed & Sealed Coupling Direct, Flexible Disc Load Capacity - Standby 100% Prototype Short Circuit Test Yes Voltage Regulator Type Digital <50 Number of Sensed Phases 3 Regulation Accuracy (Steady State) ±0.25% SD080 1 4.5L 1 80 kW INDUSTRIAL DIESEL GENERATOR SET EPA Certified Stationary Emergency OPERATING DATA POWER RATINGS Single -Phase 120/240 VAC @1.Opf Three -Phase 120/208 VAC @0.8pf Three -Phase 120/240 VAC @0.8pf Three -Phase 277/480 VAC @0.8pf Three -Phase 346/600 VAC @0.8pf 80 kW 80 kW 80 kW 80 kW 80 kW GENERAC Standby Amps: 333 Amps: 278 Amps: 241 Amps: 120 Amps: 96 INDUSTRIAL STARTING CAPABILITIES (sKVA) 480 VAC sKVA vs. Voltage Dip 208/240 VAC Alternator la 10% 15% 20% 25% 30% 35% 10% 15% 20% 25% 30% 35% Standard 80 59 88 117 147 176 205 44 66 88 110 132 154 Upsizel 100 79 118 157 197 236 275 59 89 118 148 177 206 Upsize 2 130 116 174 232 290 348 406 87 131 174 218 261 305 FUEL CONSUMPTION RATES* Fuel Pump Lift - ft (m) 3 (1) Total Fuel Pump Flow (Combustion + Return) 13.6 gavhr Diesel - gal/hr (Vhr) Percent Load Standby 25% 50% 75% 100% 2.1 (7.9) 3.7 (14.0) 5.2 (19.7) 6.3 (23.8) * Fuel supply installation must accommodate fuel consumption rates at 100% load. COOLING Standby Coolant Flow per Minute gaVmin (Vmin) 32.7 (123.8) Coolant System Capacity gal (L) 4.5 (17.44) Heat Rejection to Coolant BTU/hr 232,270 Inlet Air cfm (m3/hr) 6360 (180) Max. Operating Radiator Air Temp F° (C°) 122 (50) Max. Ambient Temperature (before derate) F° (Co) 104 (40) Maximum Radiator Backpressure in H2O 0.5 COMBUSTION AIR REQUIREMENTS Standby Flow at Rated Power cfm (m3/min) 306 (8.67) ENGINE EXHAUST Standby Rated Engine Speed rpm 1800 Horsepower at Rated kW** hp 131 Piston Speed fVmin (m/min) 1559 (475) BMEP psi 210 •` Refer to 'Emissions Data Sheet" for maximum bHP for EPA and SCAOMD permitting purposes. Standby Exhaust Flow (Rated Output) cfm (m3/min) 782 (22.14) Max. Backpressure (Post Silencer) inHg (Kpa) 1.5 (5.1) Exhaust Temp (Rated Output) °F (°C) 887 (475) Exhaust Outlet Size (Open Set) mm (in) 76.2 (3.0) Deration — Operational characteristics consider maximum ambient conditions. Derate factors may apply under atypical site conditions. Please consult a Generac Power Systems Industrial Dealer for additional details. All performance ratings in accordance with IS03046, BS5514, IS08528 and DIN6271 standards. tt— W W Cl) LU W 0— C.0) 50F6 SD080 1 4.5L 1 80 kW INDUSTRIAL DIESEL GENERATOR SET EPA Certified Stationary Emergency DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS* L L L L W o[ W W W H H OPEN SET RUN TIME HOURS USABLE CAPACITY GAL (L) GENERAC" LxWxHin(mm) INDUSTRIAL WT lbs (kg) -Tank & Open Set NO TANK 13 79 (299) 30 189 (715.4) 48 300 (1135.6) 56 350(1325) 93 (2362.2) x 40 (1016) x 49 (1244.6) 93 (2362.2) x 40 (1016) x 62 (1574.8) 93 (2362.2) x 40 (1016) x 74 (1879.6) 93 (2362.2) x 40 (1016) x 86 (2184.4) 110 (2794) x 40 (1016) x 86 (2184.4) 2425(1100) 2947 (1201) 3183 (1444) 3407(1545) NA 81 510 (1930.5) 93 589 (2229.6) 117 (2971.8) x 47 (1193.8) x 86 (2184.4) 128 (3251.2) x 49 (1244.6) x 86 (2184.4) STANDARD ENCLOSURE RUN TIME HOURS USABLE CAPACITY GAL (L) LxWxHin(mm) 3790 (1719) 4269 (1936) WT lbs (kg) -Enclosure Only Steel Aluminum NO TANK 13 30 48 56 81 93 79 (299) 189 (715.4) 300 (1135.6) 350 (1325) 510 (1930.5) 589 (2229.6) 112 (2844.8) x 41 (1041.4) x 56 (1422.4) 112 (2844.8) x 41 (1041.4) x 69 (1752.6) 112 (2844.8) x 41 (1041.4)x 81 (2057.4) 112 (2844.8) x 41 (1041.4) x 93 (2362.2) 425 (193) 112 (2844.8) x 41 (1041.4) x 93 (2362.2) 117 (2971.8) x 47 (1193.8) x 93 (2362.2) 128 (3251.2) x 49 (1244.6) x 93 (2362.2) " LEVEL 1 ACOUSTIC ENCLOSURE YOUR FACTORY RECOGNIZED GENERAC INDUSTRIAL DEALER RUN TIME USABLE HOURS CAPACITY GAL (L) LxWxHin(mm) 155 (70) WT lbs (kg) - Enclosure Only Steel Aluminum NO TANK 13 30 48 56 81 93 79 (299) 189 (715.4) 300 (1135.6) 350 (1325) 510 (1930.5) 589 (2229.6) 130 (3302) x 41 (1041.4) x 56 (1422.4) 130 (3302) x 41 (1041.4) x 69 (1752.6) 130 (3302) x 41 (1041.4) x 81 (2057.4) 130 (3302) x 41 (1041.4) x 93 (2362.2) 450 (204) 130 (3302) x 41 (1041.4) x 93 (2362.2) 130 (3302) x 47 (1193.8) x 93 (2362.2) 130 (3302) x 49 (1244.6) x 93 (2362.2) LEVEL 2 ACOUSTIC ENCLOSURE RUN TIME USABLE HOURS CAPACITY GAL (L) LxWxHin(mm) 285 (129) WT lbs (kg) - Enclosure Only Steel Aluminum NO TANK 13 30 48 56 81 93 79 (299) 189 (715.4) 300 (1135.6) 350 (1325) 510 (1930.5) 589 (2229.6) 112 (2844.8) x 41 (1041.4) x 69 (1752.6) 112 (2844.8) x 41 (1041.4) x 82 (2082.8) 112 (2844.8) x 41 (1041.4) x 94 (2387.6) 112 (2844.8) x 41 (1041.4) x 106 (2692.4) 625 (284) 112 (2844.8) x 41 (1041.4) x 106 (2692.4) 117 (2971.8) x 47 (1193.8) x 106 (2692.4) 128 (3251.2) x 49 (1244.6) x 106 (2692.4) 395 (180) *All measurements are approximate and for estimation purposes only. Sound dBA can be ound on the sound data sheet. Enclosure Only weight is added to Tank & Open Set weight to determine total weight. Specification characteristics may change without notice. Dimensions and weights are for preliminary purposes only. Please consult a Generac Power Systems Industrial Dealer for det led installation drawings. Generac Power Systems, Inc. I P.O. Box 8 1 Waukesha, WI 53187 Part No OK5092 P: (262) 544-4811 © 2017 Generac Power Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. All specifications are subject to change without notice. Rev. F 01/26/17 t - W W Z V W 60F6 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 2 6 2019 PERMIT CENTER C755540200 E HERTZ160 ENG. PROD. R.P.M.18DATE L 05/27/08 GENERAC POWER SYSTEMS, INC. WAUKESHA, WI ATOR WINDING INSULATION AT 40°C AMBIENT, " *0140,411;(0414#4,1" v , ..... • 1 ^ . . • ���„".,.„µ� �.i�9liieu i ShopTek" CORREC-1ON LTR#--- , 4-0 Lubricated Rotary Screw Air Compressors W 1 5-50 hp a'v �'^5�����1 -�.___ JUL 26 2019 SULLAIR® Always air. Always there.® Sullair: An Industry Leader Sullair Leadership Since 1965, Sullair has been recognized worldwide as an innovator and leader in rotary screw compression and vacuum technology. Sullair designs and manufactures its own rotors and air end assemblies. The award-winning rotary screw design sets the industry standard and delivers the quality and reliability you expect from a leader. Sullair Technology Using the most modern technologies, equipment and advanced manufacturing techniques, Sullair designs, manufactures, assembles, and tests the most innovative compressed air and vacuum products in the industry. Sullair products are known around the world for their universally applicable design, outstanding craftsmanship and superior quality. Sullair Commitment to Innovation Underlying Sullair leadership is a dedication to excellence and a commitment to innovation. We are constantly exploring new ideas and seeking new ways to meet the industry's need for increasingly energy efficient compressed air and vacuum solutions. All rotors are engineered and machined in the USA. Stationary Air Power Systems With our expertise in analyzing, managing and controlling compressed air, Sullair offers total compressed air solutions to help you reduce energy costs and improve productivity. • Plant air audits • Energy efficient products • Compressed air system controls • Equipment to monitor and manage air systems • Air treatment products • After -purchase support Plus a full complement of OEM parts and lubricants to help keep your compressors running optimally. Each component of the system is carefully matched for capacity and pressure to provide maximum performance and energy efficiency. Higher Than the IndustStandard.__ Sullair ShopTekTm air compressors redefine industry standards for continuous duty compressors in the 5 to 50 hp range. Designed with the end customer in mind, ShopTek compressors feature a small footprint and are built to provide exceptional reliability and extremely low maintenance. All ShopTek air compressors come standard with: • Legendary Sullair air end • 10,000 hour Genuine Sullube® factory fill • 5 -year Emerald Warranty — providing coverage on major components including the air end; air/fluid receiver; main drive motor; fluid cooler; and aftercooler Legendary Sullair Air End A continuous supply of compressed air. It's your biggest expectation in an air compressor. The legendary Sullair air end, at the heart of tens of thousands of compressors worldwide, will help keep your operation pumping, worry -free. Proven Reliability Bulletproof. It's a word often used in conjunction with the Sullair air end. Although the principle of rotary screw compression remains the same, as does the durability, Sullair continuously improves the materials, engineering and design of its air ends and compressor packages. Longer air end life Controlled pressure lubrication and bearing fluid reservoirs assure a reliable supply of fluid to rotating elements - helping extend air end life. Sallair.com 3 ShopirekTM 5-50 hp Compressors Superior Features and Benefits That Set Sullair Apart Simple, Compact Design Sullair compressors utilize design simplicity to provide exceptional reliability and extremely low maintenance. Designed with a small footprint, these compact machines redefine industry standards for continuous duty compressors in the 5 to 50 hp range. Reliable Sullair Air End • Patented rotor design • Bearing fluid reservoirs • Long life bearings Sound Enclosure for Quiet Operation • Reduces sound levels to as low as 66dBA • Easily removable for service Intelligent Electronic Controls Sullair ShopTek compressors are fitted with the latest technology microprocessor controller to ensure uniform operation and uninterrupted production. Deluxe Monitoring All essential parameters of the compressor are conveniently displayed on the controller. Pressure is controlled using transducers to minimize off-load running and reduce over -compression to help ensure optimum performance and savings in energy costs. Energy Efficient Features All ShopTek motors are designed for improved energy efficiency and a compact footprint. That's why Sullair provides premium efficient motors as standard. Plus, the Sullair air end is designed to deliver maximum output with minimum power consumption, giving ShopTek compressors a superior energy advantage. 4 All ShopTek compressors are factory -filled with biodegradable Genuine Sullube®10,000 hour fluid. • Protects and cleans (no varnish) • Controls operating temperatures • Optimal viscosity • Environmentally friendly • Reduces fluid loss • High flash point (263°C) ShopTek compressors are covered by the 5 year Emerald Warranty — which provides coverage on major components including: • Air end • Air/fluid receiver • Main Drive Motor • Fluid cooler • Aftercooler For more information, contact your local authorized Sullair distributor. The ®SULLAIRAdvantage ShopTek' Performance Air System All ShopTek 5-20 hp compressors may be upgraded to the ShopTek Performance Air System by adding matching dryers, filters and receiver tanks. Compressed air is a vital source of energy for applications such as general manufacturing, cabinet and trim shops, auto body and tire shops, and commercial laundries. To meet varying air quality requirements, Sullair responds to your needs by developing a total compressed air package. The Sullair Solution We've taken the guesswork out of putting your system together. Sullair offers the Performance Air System which includes a ShopTek compressor; a refrigerated dryer; a liquid and particulate filter; and a receiver tank. AU components of the System have been perfectly sized to provide maximum performance. Plus, the Performance Air System is simple to install and requires a minimum amount of floor space. Clean, Dry Air is Essential Quality air treatment - the removal of condensate and particulate — is essential to protect your plant air system and air -using equipment. Plus, quality air can help improve the quality of your product and process. The Performance Air System helps achieve your goals with: • Matched refrigerated dryer — to help remove water vapor found in compressed air. The Sullair dryer features an oversized demister separator, dew point indicator and easy drain access. And the unit features environmentally compatible refrigerant. • High efficiency filter — to remove particles down to 1.0 micron. The filter also helps to remove coalesced liquid and lubricants. Features of the Receiver Tank Include: • ASME and CRN approval • 80 and 120 gallon tank availability • Pressure relief and ball valve as standard Sullair.com 5 6 ShopTek 5-20 hp Compressors V -Belt System • Protective belt guard • Easily adjusted and aligned Easy Separator Maintenance • Simply unbolt the cover and lift it off • No tubing to disconnect • "0" Ring seal prevents leaking • Reduces service time Fluid and Air Coolers) • Easy access for maintenance • Air-cooled • Aftercooler on 15 hp and 20 hp models Heavy Duty Air Filter • Protects key components from premature failure • Extends separator, fluid filter and fluid life • Easy access for maintenance • Filter efficiency: 99.9% @ 4.9 Micron Environmental Protection Pan • Fully -sealed • Captures spills Fluid Sight Glass • Easily check fluid level IEC Motor • TEFC (IP54) • Available voltages include 208V, 230V, 460V and 575V Control Panel • Integrated full -voltage starter • ST Controller - Simple user interface - Clear and concise graphic display - Monitors status of key operating parameters ShopTek 25-50 hp Compressors Separator • ASME certified tank • High quality/low carryover (<2 ppm) • Access panel for easy removal and serviceability • Fluid sight glass Fluid and Air Coolers • Easy access for maintenance • Thermostatically controlled oil cooler helps eliminate condensation in oil at lower temps • Efficient combo cooler design • Aftercooler is single pass Control Panel • EC Controller - Clear and concise graphic display - Monitors status of key operating parameters • Modulation Control - Stabilizes system pressure - Reduces cycling — extends life of wearing components • Wye -Delta starter Heavy Duty Inlet Filter • Protects key components from premature failure • Extends separator, fluid filter and fluid life • Easy access for maintenance Direct -Coupled Gear Drive • Provides efficient power transmission • Ensures alignment and smooth operation • Filter efficiency: 99.9% @ 4.9 Micron Premium Motor • Slow -running, premium efficient 1800 RPM Sullair.com 7 Model Motor HP (kW) 60 HZ Pressure psig (bar) Capacity acfm (m3/min) dBA` Length in (mm) BASE MOUNTED Width in (mm) Height in (mm) Weight Ibs (kg) ST410 5 (4) 150 (10) 16 (0.47) 66 32.5 (825.5) 21.5 (546.1) 37 (939.8) 524 (237.7) ST510 7.5 (5) 150 (10) 26.5 (0.76) 67 546 (247.7) ST709 10 (7.5) 125 (9) 35.5 (1.06) 68 567 (255.8) ST712 175 (12) 30.1 (0.89) 68 ST1109 15 (11) 125 (9) 63.5 (1.8) 69 39.3 (998.2) 24.3 (617.2) 40.7 (1033.8) 772 (350.2) ST1112 175 (12) 46.5 (1.26) 69 ST1509 20 (15) 125 (9) 80.1 (2.2) 70 805 (365.1) ST1512 175 (12) 62 (1.7) 70 ST1808 25 (18) 115 (8) 103 (2.9) 75 53 (1340) 29 (740) 51 (1300) 1280 (580) ST2208 30 (22) 115 (8) 127 (3.6) 75 1433 (650) ST3008 40 (30) 115 (8) 160 (4.6) 80 63 (1600) 34 (860) 56.7 (1440) 1984 (900) ST3708 50 (37) 115 (8) 219 (6.2) 80 2205 (1000) Model Length in (mm) TANK MOUNT Width in (mm) Height in (mm) Weight Ibs (kg) TANK Length in (mm) MOUNT WITH Width in (mm) DRYER AND Height in (mm) FILTER Weight lbs (kg) ST410 64 (1625.6) 23 (584.2) 63 (1600.2) 854 (387.4) 64 (1625.6) 23 (584.2) 63 (1600.2) 935 (424.1) ST510 876 (397.3) 955 (433.2) ST7XX 897 (406.9) 981 (444.0) ST11XX 66 (1676.4) 25.5 (647.7) 71.5 (1816.1) 1192 (540.7) 66 (1676.4) 25.5 (647.7) 71.5 (1816.1) 1288 (584.2) ST15XX 1225 (555.6) 1321 (599.1) To learn more about ShopTek, contact your Sullair distributor today. Q Sullair.com Always air. Always there.' c di`visit5n61A[eudynalndusfric$ LIT SAPST550EN201602-2 L 2016 Sullair, LLC. A!1 nghts reserved Spec cations subject to ch ithoul ounce. SULLAIR. USER MANUAIFILE INDUSTRIAL AIR COMPRESSOR SHOPTEKTM ST400, ST500, ST700, ST1100, ST1500 4, 5, 7, 11 &15 Kw: 5, 7.5, 10, 15 & 20 HP REVISION NOJL RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWIL-A JUL 26 2019 PERMIT CENTER WARRANTY NOTICE Failure to follow the instructions and procedures in this manual or, misuse of this equipment will VOID its warranty! • MI8OOO 0 PART NUMBER: 02250180-090 R01 KEEP FOR FUTURE REFERENCE ©SULLAIR CORPORATION The information in this manual is current as of its publication date, and applies to compressor serial number: Base Mount: CO3-C20350 Tank Mount: 200811010000 and all subsequent serial numbers. SULLAIR. AIR CARE SEMINAR TRAINING Sullair Air Care Seminars are courses that provide hands-on instruction for the proper operation, maintenance, and servicing of Sullair products. Individual seminars on Industrial compressors and compressor electrical systems are offered at regular intervals throughout the year at Sullair's corporate headquarters training facility located at Michigan City, Indiana. Instruction includes training on the function and installation of Sullair service parts, troubleshooting common faults and malfunctions, and actual equipment operation. These seminars are recommended for maintenance, contractor maintenance, and service personnel. For detailed course outlines, schedule, and cost information contact: SULLAIR CUSTOMER CARE TRAINING DEPARTMENT 1-888-SULLAIR or 219-879-5451 (ext. 5623) www.sullair.com - Or Write - Sullair Corporation 3700 E. Michigan Blvd. Michigan City, IN 46360 Attn: Service Training Department. .: st,. fj Jfi .r:'..: ��.: 4 t 1 1 ;..P... �„ rte). TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 -SAFETY 3 1.1 GENERAL 3 1.2 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 3 1.3 PRESSURE RELEASE 4 1.4 FIRE AND EXPLOSION 4 1.5 MOVING PARTS 5 1.6 HOT SURFACES, SHARP EDGES AND SHARP CORNERS 5 1.7 TOXIC AND IRRITATING SUBSTANCES 6 1.8 ELECTRICAL SHOCK 6 1.9 LIFTING 7 1.10 ENTRAPMENT SECTION 2 -DESCRIPTION 9 2.1 INTRODUCTION 9 2.2 COMPRESSOR COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 14 2.3 COMPRESSOR COOLING AND LUBRICATION SYSTEM - FUNC- TIONAL DESCRIPTION 14 2.4 COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE SYSTEM -FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 14 2.5 CONTROL SYSTEM - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 17 2.6 AIR INLET SYSTEM, FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 18 2.7 CONTROLLER/KEYPAD 18 2.8 LCD DISPLAY 19 2.9 LED LIGHTS SECTION 3 -SPECIFICATIONS 21 3.1 TABLE OF SPECIFICATIONS 22 3.2 COMPRESSOR SPECIFICATIONS 22 3.3 LUBRICATION GUIDE 22 3.4 APPLICATION GUIDE 23 3.5 LUBRICATION CHANGE RECOMMENDATIONS AND MAINTENANCE, FLUID FILTER AND SEPARATOR 36 3.6 TANK MOUNT AND DRYER OPTIONS SECTION 4 -INSTALLATION 49 4.1 COMPRESSOR MOUNTING - SUPPORT AND LOCATION 49 4.2 VENTILATION AND COOLING 51 4.3 SERVICE AIR PIPING 52 4.4 BELT CHECK 52 4.5 FLUID LEVEL CHECK 53 4.6 ELECTRICAL PREPARATION 53 4.7 MOTOR ROTATION DIRECTION CHECK SULLAIR® TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 5 -OPERATION 55 5.1 ROUTINE OPERATION SECTION 6 -MAINTENANCE 57 6.1 GENERAL 57 6.2 MAINTENANCE AFTER INITIAL 50 HOURS OF OPERATION 58 6.3 MAINTENANCE EVERY 2000 HOURS 58 6.4 FLUID MAINTENANCE 58 6.5 FILTER MAINTENANCE 59 6.6 AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE 60 6.7 SEPARATOR MAINTENANCE 61 6.8 BELT MAINTENANCE 65 6.9 REPLACEMENT AND ALIGNMENT OF BELT PULLEYS 66 6.10 HOSE MAINTENANCE 66 6.11 TANK MOUNT PACKAGE MAINTENANCE 66 6.12 TROUBLESHOOTING - INTRODUCTION SULLAIR® Section 1 SAFETY OPERATOR IS REQUIRED TO READ ENTIRE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. 1.1 GENERAL Sullair Corporation and its subsidiaries design and manufacture all of their products so they can be operated safely. However, the responsibility for safe operation rests with those who use and maintain these products. The following safety precautions are offered as a guide which, if conscientiously followed, will minimize the possibility of accidents throughout the useful life of this equipment. The compressor should be operated only by those who have been trained and delegated to do so, and who have read and understood this Operator's Manual. Failure to follow the instructions, procedures and safety precautions in this manual may result in accidents and injuries. NEVER start the compressor unless it is safe to do so. DO NOT attempt to operate the compressor with a known unsafe condition. Tag the compressor and render it inoperative by disconnecting and locking out all power at source or otherwise disabling its prime mover so others who may not know of the unsafe condition cannot attempt to operate it until the condition is corrected. Install, use and operate the compressor only in full compliance with all pertinent OSHA regulations and/ or any applicable Federal, State, and Local codes, standards and regulations. DO NOT modify the compressor and/or controls in any way except with written factory approval. While not specifically applicable to all types of compressors with all types of prime movers, most of SULLAIR. the precautionary statements contained herein are applicable to most compressors and the concepts behind these statements are generally applicable to all compressors. 1.2 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT A. Prior to installing or operating the compressor, owners, employers and users should become familiar with, and comply with, all applicable OSHA regulations and/or any applicable Federal, State and Local codes, standards, and regula- tions relative to personal protective equipment, such as eye and face protective equipment, respiratory protective equipment, equipment intended to protect the extremities, protective clothing, protective shields and barriers and elec- trical protective equipment, as well as noise exposure administrative and/or engineering con- trols and/or personal hearing protective equip- ment. 1.3 PRESSURE RELEASE A. Install an appropriate flow-limiting valve between the service air outlet and the shut-off (throttle) valve, either at the compressor or at any other point along the air line, when an air hose exceed- ing 1/2" (13mm) inside diameter is to be con- nected to the shut-off (throttle) valve, to reduce pressure in case of hose failure, per OSHA Stan- dard 29 CFR 1926.302(b)(7) and/or any applica- ble Federal, State and Local codes, standards and regulations. B. When the hose is to be used to supply a mani- fold, install an additional appropriate flow-limiting valve between the manifold and each air hose exceeding 1/2" (13mm) inside diameter that is to be connected to the manifold to reduce pressure in case of hose failure. C. Provide an appropriate flow-limiting valve at the beginning of each additional 75 feet (23m) of hose in runs of air hose exceeding 1/2" (13mm) 3 inside diameter to reduce pressure in case of hose failure. D. Flow-limiting valves are listed by pipe size and flow -rated. Select appropriate valves accordingly, in accordance with their manufacturer's recom- mendations. E. DO NOT use air tools that are rated below the maximum rating of the compressor. Select air tools, air hoses, pipes, valves, filters and other fittings accordingly. DO NOT exceed manufac- turer's rated safe operating pressures for these items. F. Secure all hose connections by wire, chain or other suitable retaining device to prevent tools or hose ends from being accidentally disconnected and expelled. G. Open fluid filler cap only when compressor is not running and is not pressurized. Shut down the compressor and bleed the receiver tank to zero internal pressure before removing the cap. H. Vent all internal pressure prior to opening any line, fitting, hose, valve, drain plug, connection or other component, such as filters and line oilers, and before attempting to refill optional air line anti -icer systems with antifreeze compound. I. Keep personnel out of line with and away from the discharge opening of hoses or tools or other points of compressed air discharge. J. DO NOT use air at pressures higher than 2.1 bar for cleaning purposes, and then only with effec- tive chip guarding and personal protective equip- ment per OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1910.242 (b) and/or any applicable Federal, State, and Local codes, standards and regulations. K. DO NOT engage in horseplay with air hoses as death or serious injury may result. 1.4 FIRE AND EXPLOSION A. Clean up spills of lubricant or other combustible substances immediately, if such spills occur. B. Shut off the compressor and allow it to cool. Then keep sparks, flames and other sources of ignition away and DO NOT permit smoking in the vicinity when checking or adding lubricant or when refilling air line anti -icer systems with anti- freeze compound. C. DO NOT permit fluids, including air line anti -icer system antifreeze compound or fluid film, to 4 D. E. F. SECTION 1 accumulate on, under or around acoustical mate- rial, or on any external surfaces of the air com- pressor. Wipe down using an aqueous industrial cleaner or steam clean as required. If necessary, remove acoustical material, clean all surfaces and then replace acoustical material. Any acous- tical material with a protective covering that has been torn or punctured should be replaced immediately to prevent accumulation of liquids or fluid film within the material. DO NOT use flam- mable solvents for cleaning purposes. Disconnect and lock out all power at source prior to attempting any repairs or cleaning of the com- pressor or of the inside of the enclosure, if any. Keep electrical wiring, including all terminals and pressure connectors in good condition. Replace any wiring that has cracked, cut, abraded or oth- erwise degraded insulation, or terminals that are worn, discolored or corroded. Keep all terminals and pressure connectors clean and tight. Keep grounded and/or conductive objects such as tools away from exposed live electrical parts such as terminals to avoid arcing which might serve as a source of ignition. G. Remove any acoustical material or other material that may be damaged by heat or that may sup- port combustion and is in close proximity, prior to attempting weld repairs. Keep suitable fully charged Class BC or ABC fire extinguisher or extinguishers nearby when ser- vicing and operating the compressor. Keep oily rags, trash, leaves, litter or other com- bustibles out of and away from the compressor. DO NOT operate the compressor without proper flow of cooling air or water or with inadequate flow of lubricant or with degraded lubricant. DO NOT attempt to operate the compressor in any classification of hazardous environment unless the compressor has been specially designed and manufactured for that duty. H. J. K. 1.5 MOVING PARTS A. B. Keep hands, arms and other parts of the body and clothing away from couplings, belts, pulleys, fans and other moving parts. DO NOT attempt to operate the compressor with the fan, coupling or other guards removed. SULLAIR. SECTION 1 C. Wear snug -fitting clothing and confine long hair when working around this compressor, especially when exposed to hot or moving parts. D. Keep access doors, if any, closed except when making repairs or adjustments. E. Make sure all personnel are out of and/or clear of the compressor prior to attempting to start or operate it. F. Disconnect and lock out all power at source and verify at the compressor that all circuits are de - energized to minimize the possibility of acciden- tal start-up, or operation, prior to attempting repairs or adjustments. This is especially impor- tant when compressors are remotely controlled. G. Keep hands, feet, floors, controls and walking surfaces clean and free of fluid, water or other liquids to minimize the possibility of slips and falls. 1.6 EDGES AND SHARPARP CORNERS A. Avoid bodily contact with hot fluid, hot coolant, hot surfaces and sharp edges and corners. B. Keep all parts of the body away from all points of air discharge. C. Wear personal protective equipment including gloves and head covering when working in, on or around the compressor. D. Keep a first aid kit handy. Seek medical assis- tance promptly in case of injury. DO NOT ignore small cuts and burns as they may lead to infec- tion 1.7 TOXIC AND IRRITATING SUBSTANCES A. DO NOT use air from this compressor for respi- ration (breathing) except in full compliance with OSHA Standards 29 CFR 1910 and/or any appli- cable Federal, State or Local codes or regula- tions. SULLAIR. A DANGER Death or serious injury can result from inhaling compressed air without using proper safety equipment. See OSHA stan- dards and/or any applicable Federal, State, and Local codes, standards and regulations on safety equipment. B. DO NOT use air line anti -icer systems in air lines supplying respirators or other breathing air utili- zation equipment and DO NOT discharge air from these systems into unventilated or other confined areas. C. Operate the compressor only in open or ade- quately ventilated areas. D. Locate the compressor or provide a remote inlet so that it is not likely to ingest exhaust fumes or other toxic, noxious or corrosive fumes or sub- stances. E. Coolants and lubricants used in this compressor are typical of the industry. Care should be taken to avoid accidental ingestion and/or skin contact. In the event of ingestion, seek medical treatment promptly. Wash with soap and water in the event of skin contact. Consult Material Safety Data Sheet for information pertaining to fluid of fill. F. Wear goggles or a full face shield when adding antifreeze compound to air line anti -icer systems. G. If air line anti -icer system antifreeze compound enters the eyes or if fumes irritate the eyes, they should be washed with large quantities of clean water for fifteen minutes. A physician, preferably an eye specialist, should be contacted immedi- ately. H. DO NOT store air line anti -icer system antifreeze compound in confined areas. I. The antifreeze compound used in air line anti- freeze systems contains methanol and is toxic, harmful or fatal if swallowed. Avoid contact with the skin or eyes and avoid breathing the fumes. If 5 swallowed, induce vomiting by administering a tablespoon of salt, in each glass of clean, warm water until vomit is clear, then administer two teaspoons of baking soda in a glass of clean water. Have patient lay down and cover eyes to exclude light. Call a physician immediately. 1.8 ELECTRICAL SHOCK A. This compressor should be installed and main- tained in full compliance with all applicable Fed- eral, State and Local codes, standards and regulations, including those of the National Elec- trical Code, and also including those relative to equipment grounding conductors, and only by personnel that are trained, qualified and dele- gated to do so. B. Keep all parts of the body and any hand-held tools or other conductive objects away from exposed live parts of electrical system. Maintain dry footing, stand on insulating surfaces and DO NOT contact any other portion of the compressor when making adjustments or repairs to exposed live parts of the electrical system. Make all such adjustments or repairs with one hand only, so as to minimize the possibility of creating a current path through the heart. C. Attempt repairs in clean, dry and well lighted and ventilated areas only. D. DO NOT leave the compressor unattended with open electrical enclosures. If necessary to do so, then disconnect, lock out and tag all power at source so others will not inadvertently restore power. E. Disconnect, lock out, and tag all power at source prior to attempting repairs or adjustments to rotating machinery and prior to handling any ungrounded conductors. 6 SECTION 1 Q DANGER All field equipment must be tested for elec- trostatic fields prior to servicing or making contact with the machine using the follow- ing or equivalent test equipment: • 90-600 VAC: Volt detector such as Fluke Model 1AC-A • 600-7000 VAC: Voltage detector such as Fluke Networks Model C9970 It is the responsibility of each organization to provide/arrange training for all their associates expected to test for electrostatic fields. 1.9 LIFTING A. If the compressor is provided with a lifting bail, then lift by the bail provided. If no bail is provided, then lift by sling. Compressors to be air -lifted by helicopter must not be supported by the lifting bail but by slings instead. In any event, lift and/or handle only in full compliance with OSHA stan- dards 29 CFR 1910 subpart N and/or any appli- cable Federal, State, and Local codes, standards and regulations. B. Inspect points of attachment for cracked welds and for cracked, bent, corroded or otherwise degraded members and for loose bolts or nuts prior to lifting. C. Make sure entire lifting, rigging and supporting structure has been inspected, is in good condi- tion and has a rated capacity of at least the weight of the compressor. If you are unsure of the weight, then weigh compressor before lifting. D. Make sure lifting hook has a functional safety latch or equivalent, and is fully engaged and latched on the bail or slings. E. Use guide ropes or equivalent to prevent twisting or swinging of the compressor once it has been lifted clear of the ground. F. DO NOT attempt to lift in high winds. G. Keep all personnel out from under and away from the compressor whenever it is suspended. H. Lift compressor no higher than necessary. SULLAIR. SECTION 1 I. Keep lift operator in constant attendance when- ever compressor is suspended. J. Set compressor down only on a level surface capable of safely supporting at least its weight and its loading unit. K. When moving the compressor by forklift truck, utilize fork pockets if provided. Otherwise, utilize pallet if provided. If neither fork pockets or pallet are provided, then make sure compressor is secure and well balanced on forks before attempting to raise or transport it any significant distance. L. Make sure forklift truck forks are fully engaged and tipped back prior to lifting or transporting the compressor. M. Forklift no higher than necessary to clear obsta- cles at floor level and transport and corner at minimum practical speeds. SULLAIR. N. Make sure pallet -mounted compressors are firmly bolted or otherwise secured to the pallet prior to attempting to forklift or transport them. NEVER attempt to forklift a compressor that is not secured to its pallet, as uneven floors or sud- den stops may cause the compressor to tumble off, possibly causing serious injury or property damage in the process. 1.10 ENTRAPMENT A. B. If the compressor enclosure, if any, is Targe enough to hold a man and if it is necessary to enter it to perform service adjustments, inform other personnel before doing so, or else secure and tag the access door in the open position to avoid the possibility of others closing and possi- bly latching the door with personnel inside. Make sure all personnel are out of compressor before closing and latching enclosure doors. 7 SHOPTEB"" USER MANUAL Section 2 DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION The design of the Sullair ShopTek line of compressor units is a single stage, positive displacement, flooded rotary screw. A complete package includes the: • Compressor unit • Electric motor • Starter • Compressor inlet and discharge systems • Compressor lubrication and cooling system • Controller • Aftercooler (ST1100 and ST1500 only) • Heavy gauge steel mounting frame A CAUTION Use only one type of a recommended com- pressor lubricant. Adding a different one, or mixing lubricants can cause damage and/or malfunctions, and will void the compres- sor's warranty. New compressors are shipped from the factory fully charged with Sullube lubrication fluid. The SPECIFICATIONS Section 3.3 and Section 3.4 describe lubrication requirements and recommendations for each compressor package. NOTE The compressor requires no internal inspections or maintenance actions. Open- ing the compressor's housing may void its warranty. (This does not apply to the shaft seal or inlet valve which are replaceable.) SULLAIR. External piping, connectors, and the enclosure should be inspected and maintained in accordance with the procedures and recommendations in this manual. 2.2 COMPRESSOR COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The ShopTek compressor (Figure 2-1 and Figure 2- 2) uses a fan to draw outside air into the enclosure, cooling the motors, the combined radiator fluid cooler, and air aftercooler. This hot air is then vented out of the top of the enclosure. Fluid is injected into the compressor, and mixes directly with the air as the rotors turn which compresses the air. The fluid flow has three basic functions: 1. As a coolant, it controls the air temperature rise normally associated with the heat of compression. 2. Seals the clearance paths between the rotors and the stator, and also between the two rotors. 3. Provdes a lubricating film between the rotors allowing one rotor to directly drive the other, which is an idler, and also lubricates the beariings. After the air/fluid mixture is discharged from the compressor unit, the fluid is separated from the air. At this time, the air flows through an aftercooler and separator, and then to the service line while the fluid is cooled and filtered in preparation for reinjection. 02250180-090 R00 9 SHOPTEIr USER MANUAL 10 SECTION 2 Figure 2-1: Main Components, ST400, ST500, ST 700, 5 -10 HP 1. Fluid Filter 7. E -Stop Button 2. Fluid Cooler 8. Controller 3. Air Inlet Filter 9. Main Motor 4. Separator Tube 10. Compressor Unit 5. Fluid Fill Sight Glass 11. Cooler Fan Motor 6. Fluid Fill 02250180-090 R00 SULLAIR. SECTION 2 SHOPTEKn' USER MANUAL Figure 2-2: Main Components, ST1100, ST1500, 15-20 HP 1. Fluid Filter 7. E -Stop Button 2. Aftercooler/Fluid Cooler 8. Controller 3. Air Inlet Filter 9. Main Motor 4. Separator Tube 10. Compressor Unit 5. Fluid Fill Sight Glass 11. Cooler Fan Motor 6. Fluid Fill SULLAIR. 02250180-090 R00 11 SHOPTEIC USER MANUAL SECTION 2 12 COOLING/LUBRICATION SYSTEM 0 0 ♦ 0 DISCHARGE SYSTEM Figure 2-3: Cooling/Lubrication and Discharge System ST400, ST500 and ST700 5-10 HP 1. Separator Tube 5. Separator Element 2. Cooler 6. Air 3. Fluid Filter 7. Air/Fluid Mix 4. Compressor Unit 8. Fluid 02250180-090 R00 SULLAIR. SECTION 2 SHOPTKV USER MANUAL COOLING/LUBRICATION SYSTEM 0 0 0 DISCHARGE SYSTEM Figure 2-4: Cooling/Lubrication and Discharge System ST1100 and ST1500 15 8 20 HP 1. Separator Tube 5. Separator Element 2. Cooler 6. Air 3. Fluid Filter 7. Air/Fluid Mix 4. Compressor Unit 8. Fluid SULLAIR. 02250180-090 R00 13 SHOPTEKT" USER MANUAL SECTION 2 2.3 COMPRESSOR COOLING AND LUBRICATION SYSTEM - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Refer to Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4. The cooling and lubrication system consists of a fan, fan motor, aftercooler (ST1100/ST1500 15-20HP only) /fluid cooler, full flow fluid filter, thermal valve, interconnecting hoses and separator tube. The pressure in the separator tube starts the fluid flow by forcing the fluid from the high pressure area of the tube to an area of lower pressure in the compressor unit. Fluid flows from the bottom of the separator/tube to the thermal valve that is fully open when the fluid temperature is below 185°F (85°C) [195°F (91°C) for pressures rated above 150 psig]. The fluid passes through the thermal valve, the fluid filter, and directly to the compressor where it lubricates, cools and seals the rotors, and the compression chamber. As the discharge temperature rises above 185°F (85°C), due to the heat of compression, the thermal valve begins to adjust and a portion of the fluid then flows through the cooler. From the cooler the fluid flows to the fluid filter and on to the compressor. A portion of the fluid flow to the compressor is routed to the anti -friction bearings which support the compressor rotors. The fluid filter must be replaced. Refer to Section 3.5: Lubrication Change Recommendations and Maintenance, Fluid Filter And Separator on page 23. 2.4 COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE SYSTEM -FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Refer to Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4. The compressor discharges the compressed air/fluid mixture into the separator/tube. The separator/tube has three basic functions: 1. It acts as a primary fluid separator. 2. Serves as the compressor fluid sump. 3. Houses the final fluid separator. The compressed air/fluid mixture enters the separator/tube and flows through an internal baffle system that changes the flow's direction and velocity, which causes most of the fluid to fall to the bottom of the separator tube. A small amount of fluid remaining in the compressed air collects on the surface of the 14 separator element as the air flows through the separator. A return line (or scavenge tube) leads from the dry side of the separator tube to the medium pressure region. Scavanged fluid is returned by a pressure differential between the separator tube and compressor. The separator system reduces the fluid carry-over to Tess than 2 ppm at nominal rated pressures. The Controller will shut down the compressor if the discharge temperature reaches 235°F (113°C). A minimum pressure/check valve located downstream from the separator maintains the separator tube pressure at 50 psig (3.4 bar) during load conditions. This pressure level is necessary for proper air/fluid separation and sufficient fluid circulation. A terminal check valve is a sub -component of the minimum pressure/check valve that prevents compressed air in the service line from back -flowing into the separator tube on shutdown or when the compressor is operating in an unload condition. Also, a pressure relief valve on the compressor's wet side opens if the separator tube pressure exceeds its rating. Q WARNING Stop the compressor and relieve all internal pressure before removing caps, plugs, and/ or other components when the compressor is running or pressurized. Add fluid to the separator tube through the capped fluid fill port. There is also a sight glass that enables the user to check the separator tube fluid level. See Fluid Level Check on page 52. 2.5 CONTROL SYSTEM - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Refer to Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6. The compressor control system regulates its output to match the demand. This system consists of a solenoid valve and an inlet valve that control the compressor's operational modes. The following descriptions of operational modes apply to a compressor whose operating range is 112 to 127 psig (7.7 to 8.8 bar) 02250180-090 R00 SULLAIR® SECTION 2 Other pressure settings can be selected depending on compressor application or rating. START MODE - 0 TO 50 PSIG (0 TO 3.5 BAR) There is no Toad on the compressor at startup, the solenoid valve is open and the inlet valve is closed. When the compressor 0 (START) pad is pressed, the separator tube pressure rises from 0 to 50 psig (0 - 3.4 bar). When it reaches its full operating speed (maximum rpm), the compressor switches to the Full Load Mode. SHOPTEKT" USER MANUAL FULL LOAD MODE - 50 TO 127 PSIG (3.4 TO 8.8 BAR) When the compressed air pressure rises above 50 psig (3.4 bar), the minimum pressure valve opens allowing compressed air to flow into the service line. From this point on, the Controller continuously monitors the line air pressure. The solenoid valve remains closed in this mode. As long as the compressor is running at 127 psig (8.8 bar) or lower, the inlet valve is fully open_ UNLOAD MODE - GREATER THAN 127 PSIG (8.8 BAR) When there is no, or only a small demand, the Figure 2-5: Control System, ST400, ST500, ST700, 5-10 HP 1. Air Outlet 5. Separator Tube 2. Unload Solenoid Valve 6. Pressure Transducer 3. Air Inlet 7. Controller 4. Minimum Pressure/Check Valve 8. Check Valve SULLAIR® 02250180-090 R00 15 SHOPTErm USER MANUAL SECTION 2 Figure 2-6: Control System, ST1100, ST1500, 15-20 HP 1. Air Outlet 5. Separator Tube 2. Unload Solenoid Valve 6. Pressure Transducer 3. Air Inlet 7. Controller 4. Minimum Pressure/Check Valve service line pressure will rise. The Controller de - energizes the solenoid valve when the pressure exceeds 127 psig (8.8 bar) allowing the separator tube air pressure to be supplied directly which closes the inlet valve. At the same time the solenoid valve exhausts the system pressure to the atmosphere and lowers the separator tube pressure to approximately 29 psig (2.0 bar). A check valve in the air service line prevents air from back -flowing to the separator tube. 16 When the pressure drops to the low setting: (cut -in pressure) usually 112 psig (7.7 bar) for high pressure (9 bar) compressors, 137 psig (9.4 bar) for (10 bar) compressors, 161 psig (11.1 bar) for (12 bar) compressors: the Controller energizes the solenoid valve and prevents line pressure from reaching the inlet control valve. 02250180-090 R00 SULLAIR® SECTION 2 2.6 AIR INLET SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Refer to Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8. The compressor inlet system consists of a dry -type air filter and an air inlet valve. Figure 2-7: Air Inet System-ST400, ST500, ST700, 5-10 HP 1. Air Inlet Filter 4. Clamp 2. Clamp 5. Compressor Unit 3. Inlet Tube SULLAIR. SHOPTEKT" USER MANUAL Figure 2-8: Air !net System-ST1100, ST1500, 15-20 HP 1. Air Inlet Filter 3. Inlet Adaptor 2. Clamp 4. Compressor Unit The poppet -type air inlet valve controls the compressor's air intake volume. Refer to Full Load Mode - 50 to 127 psig (3.4 to 8.8 bar) on page 15. The air inlet valve also acts as a check valve to prevent reverse rotation when the compressor is shut down. A WARNING "The Plastic Pipe Institute recommends against the use of thermoplastic pipe to transport compressed air or other com- pressed gases in exposed above ground locations, e.g. in exposed plant piping." (1) Sullube should not be used with PVC piping systems. It may affect the bond at cemented joints. Certain other plastic materials may also be affected. (1) Plastic Pipe Institute, Recommendation B, Adopted January 19, 1972. 02250180-090 R00 17 SHOPTEKT" USER MANUAL SECTION 2 Figure 2-9: Controller Panel 1. Run Mode Indicator Light (Green) 6. Start Button 2. Power On Indicator Light (Red) 7. Return/Reset Button 3. Fault Warning Indicator Light (Red) 8. Cursor/Confirm Button 4. Display Panel 9. Up Button 5. Stop Button 10. Down Button 11. Set/Load/Unload Button 2.7 CONTROLLER/KEYPAD Refer to Figure 2-9. The Controller keypad has two main pads for compressor control. To start the compressor operation, press the green Start pad �. To stop compressor operation, press the red Stop pad ©. The Run mode indicator lights up whenever the control is in an operating mode. 2.8 LCD DISPLAY The display's normal view shows the compressor 18 package's discharge pressure, internal temperature, operating mode, and Toad status. The modes are MANUAL, STOP, AUTOMATIC, or FAULT. Refer to Figure 2-10. If a machine fault occurs, the red fault ® indicator will light up, and the display will indicate that a fault has occurred. STOP: RTD Fault 02250180-090 R00 Figure 2-10 SULLAIR. SECTION 2 The lower line will display the cause of the fault. Refer to service instructions to correct the cause. Press and hold the Return/Reset pad to reset the controller. Refer to Figure 2-11. Press the Down arrow V to display additional information about the compressor. The upper line will indicate the name of the temperature, pressure, or other measurement. The lower line indicates the present reading. TOTAL RUN TIME: 337H 20M Figure 2-11 Refer to Figure 2-12. When you continue beyond the status information, the display will show a list of control settings. There are customer and factory settings. The upper line will indicate the name of the setting. The lower line displays the present value. LOAD PRESS: 0110PSI Figure 2-12 Refer to Figure 2-13 and 2-14. To change a selected setting press and an interface will display where a password is needed. Use A and V to change values of each digit. Use to move to next digit. After all digits of the password have been accepted, press 0. Upon acceptance of password, the setting can be modified. Use buttons as above to change values. Press changes. to accept PASSWORD ****** Figure 2-13 SULLAIR. SHOPTEIC USER MANUAL LOAD PRESS: 0110PSI Figure 2-14 Refer to Figure 2-14. If there is no keypad activity, the display will return to normal view in about one minute. If the Start, Stop or Return/Reset buttons are pressed, the display also returns to normal view. If any of these occur, the setting will not be altered. If there are any warnings or recommended service instructions, these will be periodically displayed on the normal view. The list of displays may be navigated from either direction by using the Up A or Down V arrow keys. The Emergency Stop button located near the controller overrides all electronic functions to turn off the control devices. The controller senses this and will display E -stop. To reset, twist and pull out the Emergency Stop button. 2.9 LED LIGHTS The three LED lights indicate the general conditions of the machine. The Power indicator indicates power is supplied to the controller. The Run mode indicator 0 indicates compressor operation is enabled. It lights steadily if the motor is running. The red Fault indicator I® indicates that a compressor fault has occurred and needs to be repaired before further operation. The text display will indicate the cause of the fault. 02250180-090 R00 19 SHOPTEKT" USER MANUAL Section 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 TABLE OF SPECIFICATIONS ST in Length mm in Width mm in Height mm Weight lbs kg ST410 5 60 32.5 826 21.5 546 37 940 524 238 ST410 5 50 32.5 826 21.5 546 37 940 524 238 ST500 ST510 7.5 60 32.5 826 21.5 546 37 940 546 248 ST510 7.5 50 32.5 826 21.5 546 37 940 546 248 ST709 10 60 32.5 826 21.5 546 37 -940 567 258 ST712 10 60 32.5 826 21.5 546 37 940 567 258 ST708 10 50 32.5 826 21.5 546 37 940 567 258 ST713 10 50 32.5 826 21.5 546 37 940 567 258 STI 00 ST1109 15 60 39.3 998 24.3 618 40.7 1035 772 350 ST1112 15 60 39.3 998 24.3 618 40.7 1035 772 350 ST1108 15 50 39.3 998 24.3 618 40.7 1035 772 350 ST1113 15 50 39.3 998 24.3 618 40.7 1035 772 350 STI500 Se ST1509 20 60 39.3 998 24.3 618 40.7 1035 805 365 ST1512 20 60 39.3 998 24.3 618 40.7 1035 805 365 ST1508 20 50 39.3 998 24.3 618 40.7 1035 805 365 ST1513 20 50 39.3 998 24.3 618 40.7 1035 805 365 (1) Rated pressure designations appearing after model number are as folllows: 08 - 115 psig (7.9 bar) 12 - 175 psig (12.0 bar) 09 - 125 psig (8.6 bar) 13 - 188 psig (13.0 bar) 10 - 150 psig (10.3 bar) 60HZ 10 - 145 psig (10 bar) 50HZ Unload pressure is the same as rated pressure. Load pressure is rated pressure minus 15 psig (1 bar) (11) For tankmount and dryer dimensions see Figure 3.6 on page 36. SULLAIR. 02250180-090 R00 21 SHOPTEK M USER MANUAL 3.2 COMPRESSOR SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 3 COMPRESSOR: STANDARD MODELS: Type: Fluid Flooded Rotary Screw Standard Operating Pressure: 115 psig (8 bar) / 125 psig (8.6 bar)/145 psig (10.0 bar)/ 150 psig (10.3 bar) 175 psig (12.0 bar)/188 psig (13.0 bar) Bearing Type: Anti -friction Ambient Temperature (Max.) 104°F (40°C) 3.3 LUBRICATION GUIDE Refer to Figure 3-1 for the fluid fill port location. Sullair's ShopTek series compressors are filled and tested at the factory with Sullube lubricant. A CAUTION Do not mix different types of lubricants. Mixing lubricants can cause malfunctions or compressor damage: will void the compressor's warranty. A CAUTION Contamination of compressor fluids with mineral oil or other fluids can cause foaming, filter plugging, or orifice line obstruction. 3.4 APPLICATION GUIDE Sullair encourages its customers to participate in a fluid analysis program with the fluid suppliers. In some cases the analysis results suggest a fluid change interval which differs from the User Manual. Contact a Sullair representative for details. 22 02250180-090 R00 SULLAIR. SECTION 3 SHOPTEK M USER MANUAL NOTE When performing a fluid change or topping off: With machine off, fill to the bottom of the fill port. Sight glass will be com- pletely full. Mixing, changing or add- ing other lubricants within the compressor unit may void the air -end warranty. Figure 3-1: Fluid Fill Location 1. Separator Tube 3. Fluid Fill Port 2. Sight Glass 4. TO DRAIN -disconnect oil line from cooler 3.5 LUBRICATION CHANGE RECOMMENDATIONS AND MAINTENANCE, FLUID FILTER AND SEPARATOR A - 8000 hours or 1 year, whichever occurs first. B - 2000 Hours C - 4000 Hours (I) ST400, ST500, ST700 - 1 Gallon (4 Liters) ST1100, ST1500 - 1.3 gallon (5 Liters) SULLAIR® 02250180-090 R00 23 SHOPTEKT' USER MANUAL Figure 3-2: Identification - ST400, ST500, ST700, 5-10HP 24 N In • co N 02250180-090 R00 SECTION 3 02250179-432 R00 SULLAIR• SECTION 3 $HOPTEKTM USER MANUAL Identification - ST400, ST500, ST700, 5-10HP SEE TABLE NOTES: 1. ALLOW 4.00 FEET [1.25 METERS] MINIMUM CLEARANCE AROUND MACHINE FOR ACCESS AND FREE CIRCULATION OF AIR. 2. A FOUNDATION OR MOUNTING CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING THE WEIGHT OF PACKAGE, AND RIGID ENOUGH TO MAINTAIN THE COMPRESSSOR FRAME LEVEL IS REQUIRED. 3. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE +/- .50" [12.7MM] 4. RECOMMENDED INCOMING CUSTOMER POWER SUPPLY IS SHOWN ON DRAWING. 5. DOORS ARE REMOVABLE USING LIFT-OFF PINS. 6. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN INCHES WITH MILLIMETER DIMEN- SIONS IN BRACKETS. Al: EXHAUST AIR OUT IA2: AIR INLET A3: INCOMING CUSTOMER POWER SUPPLY 1.96[50]DIA IA4: AIR OUT CONNECTION 3/4"NPT IA5: SERIAL PLATE [A6: HAND HOLD A7: CONTAINMENT PAN DRAIN 1/4"NPT A8: E -STOP IA9: CONTROLLER [MACHINE WEIGHTS 524LBS[238KG] 546LBS[248KG] 567LBS[258KG] CO o o o o o TrLON- (/) U) (/) SULLAIR. 02250180-090 R00 25 SHOPTEB'" USER MANUAL Figure 3-3: Identification - ST1100, ST1500, 15-20HP 26 N N in N SECTION 3 N ' O 1 u � u >a 0 z 0 0 2 LA H 02250180-090 R00 02250179-435 R01 SULLAIR® A0( r LENGTH OF FRAME 39.1 r994.21 1 N -i,, � u >a 0 z 0 0 2 LA H 02250180-090 R00 02250179-435 R01 SULLAIR® SECTION 3 SHOPTEIC USER MANUAL Identification - ST1100, ST1500, 15-20HP SEE TABLE NOTES: 1. ALLOW 4.00 FEET [1.25 METERS] MINIMUM CLEARANCE AROUND MACHINE FOR ACCESS AND FREE CIRCULATION OF AIR. 2. A FOUNDATION OR MOUNTING CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING THE WEIGHT OF PACKAGE, AND RIGID ENOUGH TO MAINTAIN THE COMPRESSSOR FRAME LEVEL IS REQUIRED. 3. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE +/- .50" [12.7MM] 4. RECOMMENDED INCOMING CUSTOMER POWER SUPPLY IS SHOWN ON DRAWING. 15. DOORS ARE REMOVABLE USING LIFT-OFF PINS. 6. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN INCHES WITH MILLIMETER DIMEN- SIONS IN BRACKETS. Al: EXHAUST AIR OUT IA2: AIR INLET IA3: INCOMING CUSTOMER POWER SUPPLY 1.96[50]DIA A4: AIR OUT CONNECTION 1"NPT A5: SERIAL PLATE A6: HAND HOLD IA7: CONTAINMENT PAN DRAIN 1/4"NPT A8: E -STOP 1A9: CONTROLLER MACHINE WEIGHTS 772LBS[350KG] 805LBS[365KG] 001.61S O 0 in 1- SULL.AIR. 02250180-090 R00 27 SHOPTEIr USER MANUAL SECTION 3 Figure 3-4: Piping and Instrumentation - ST400, ST500, ST700, 5-10HP 28 02250180-090 R00 L __J 02250179-804 R01 SULLAIR. SECTION 3 SHOPTEK"" USER MANUAL Piping and Instrumentation - ST400, ST500, ST700, 5-10HP ZOF-W DESCRIPTION FILTER,AR VALVE,INLET INTEGRAL MOTOR,ELECTRIC UNIT,COMPRESSOR PROBE,TEMP SEPARATOR TUBE ELEMENT,OIL SEPARATOR OIL SIGHT GLASS VALVE,MINIMUM PRESSURE SENSOR, PRESSURE VALVE,RELIEF FILTER,RETURN OIL VALVE,THERMAL COOLER,OIL FILTER,OIL VALVE,SOLENOID ORIFICE, 0.062" VALVE,CHECK 1TANK,RECEIVER 80 GAL VALVE,PRE$SURE RELIEF 200# VALVE,BALL 1/4"NPT FILTER,SCF DRYER,SRS VALVE, BALL VALVE,BALL 3/4"NPT o F- >. ,- - ,- - ,- r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r N PART NO. 88290014-486 i VARIOUS 02250171-669 88290014-534 88290015-814 88290015-049 88290014-222 02250046-338 88290014-514 VARIOUS 188290015-890 VARIOUS 88290015-765 88290014-484 88290015-219 40127 02250110-557 02250170-199 250006-938 LO A- N. - ti Nr VARIOUS VARIOUS VARIOUS 47118 W Z r N CO CO CO CO O r r N r M.- r r .- r CO r N- CO r c- N N N N N N SULLAIR® 02250180-090 R00 29 SHOPTEH'" USER MANUAL SECTION 3 Figure 3-5: Piping and Instrumentation - ST1100 and ST1500, 15-20HP 30 02250180-090 R00 02250179-805 R02 SULLAIR. SECTION 3 SHOPTEB'h USER MANUAL Piping and Instrumentation - ST1100 and ST1500, 15-20HP zOI- w DESCRIPTION FILTER,AIR VALVE,INLET INTEGRAL MOTOR,ELECTRIC UNIT,COMPRESSOR PROBE,TEMP SEPARATOR TUBE ELEMENT,OIL SEPARATOR OIL SIGHT GLASS VALVE,MINIMUM PRESSURE COMBINATION AIR/OIL COOLER SENSOR,PRESSURE VALVE,RELIEF FILTER,RETURN OIL VALVE,THERMAL FILTER,OIL VALVE,SOLENOID ORIFICE, 0.062" jTANK,RECEIVER 120 GAL VALVE,PRESSURE RELIEF 200# VALVE,BALL 1/4"NPT FILTER,SCF DRYER,SRS VALVE,BALL 3/4"NPT aH>- •-- r- r- r r r r r r r r r a-- r e- r r r r r r r N PART NO. 88290014-485 1 VARIOUS 88290015-893 88290014-534 88290014-226 88290015-567 88290014-222 02250046-338 88290014-225 88290014-514 VARIOUS 88290015-890 VARIOUS 88290014-484 88290015-219 040127 02250170-200 1250006-938 047115 VARIOUS VARIOUS 047118 UJ Z r N Cr)COCO O O r r r N r M r LO r CO CO O O N r N N N M N SULLAIR, 02250180-090 R00 31 SHOPTEKT" USER MANUAL SECTION 3 z 0 1- 1— Z - 1— om -0 U O W I -N O F 0_ Or f– < W H J W CC O 3 W CC W a W (n N Z CC CC D Q O CC O • p O H ul U1 W C-) O Figure 3-6: Wiring Diagram - ST400-ST1500 208V -460V Full Voltage 32 5131,9:10-- (S.1=011 V S84H& S 2 YI00 d01S-3 0V01113A0 -- { °'tai N tN t� — ry d01S/l1JVJS 310M3ti m O O re 0 0 L) N m —Z YI03 zo 1- <0 t All g 0 :;31 —I Isco X ZH09/OS Ha 39V110A 3NI1 DESCRIPTION COMPRESSOR MOTOR COMPRESSOR OVERLOAD COOLER FAN MOTOR FAN MOTOR OVERLOAD TRANSFORMER PRIMARY FUSES TRANSFORMER SECONDARY FUSE PACKAGE DISCHARGE PRESSURE SENSOR UNIT DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE RTD LOAD CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCK CONTROL VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONTACTOR a O 0 KN t,. 4.IUd Ota. la. t- >OvX >- XrX 02250180-090 R00 W O O O n CO (2) 88290015-618 RO SULLAIR. SECTION 3 SHORTKr" USER MANUAL Figure 3-7: Wiring Diagram - ST400-ST1500 575V Full Voltage Z 0 1- 1- om U 0 W H U7 O N c a_ cc - < W 1— J J (-) W fYH W W II U)0 w�� Z CC CC D D W LL W0 CC0 <wW C) :E O • H • 01 01 W• OO 8 SebSa.-- N j® v sebS8o ON N L N N8 N N N 11103 d01S-3 avora3no m Ia N t — dO1S/II V1S 3101138 — w c1c wr MO o> • wrcz NWO_ <Or OL O wwz WOO COLO O O 0 CD wEe— zo -1- Gi) 22 2 ZHO9/09 HdC 3OV110A 3NI1 SULLAIR® E1 DESCRIPTION COMPRESSOR MOTOR COMPRESSOR OVERLOAD COOLER FAN MOTOR FAN MOTOR OVERLOAD TRANSFORMER PRIMARY FUSES TRANSFORMER SECONDARY FUSE AUXILLIARY MOTOR BRANCH FUSES 'PACKAGE DISCHARGE PRESSURE SENSOR UNIT DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE RTD LOAD CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCK CONTROL VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER FAN MOTOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONTACTOR CL (•)u_ O ,_ =i N h 1=i l=ia~ .- O NXFHY .- N - 02250180-090 R00 CIL CO O O O N OD u0 1.0 88290017-537 R03 33 SHOPTEK'" USER MANUAL SECTION 3 Z 0 1- 1— ZD O m I—a_ O W I— In O N CC TL Er W ♦— JU) Z W 1- cc O 3 W U) 0CC _ W (_ W Z - CC D OIOi�' WCC O O lr p O 1— W O L=) N Figure 3-8: Wiring Diagram - ST400, ST500, ST700 400V/50Hz CE Full Voltage 34 958493 jV 9B45210 l® T 1"103 dOlS-3 OVO1tl3A0 ro I21d N —. &1S/DAIS 31011311 2 N3 • N zo F <0 ii IAA ZHO9/OS Hd£ 3DV/10A 3NI1 02250180-090 R00 0 0 0 r CD I DESCRIPTION COMPRESSOR MOTOR COMPRESSOR OVERLOAD COOLER FAN MOTOR NORMALLY CLOSED SWITCH CONTACT TRANSFORMER PRIMARY FUSES TRANSFORMER SECONDARY FUSE FAN MOTOR BRANCH FUSES PACKAGE DISCHARGE PRESSURE SENSOR UNIT DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE RTD LOAD CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCK CONTROL VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONTACTOR I a MM. ->I— I� U W NlL LL U- Nx V- IC 88290014-361 R07 SULLAIR. SECTION 3 z 0 1- 1– om ►= O W H In O N W 1- J W W cc 0H- 3 W u) aCC _ W N N Z CC C LL. O CC 1– _1 W ir p O Z II Ln N V U O ~N s sei•sao– N® V 9BVsau.a 1 l0 3 dOJS-3 --�— 0V01H3A0 LNAd015/IHVIS 310113a �o— un O D l ZH09/O3 Hd£ 39V110A 3NI1 SULLAIR. 02250180-090 R00 SHOPTEKTm USER MANUAL 1- F X uJ O CO 0 O O r CD w DESCRIPTION WYE -DELTA STARTER WYE -DELTA RUN CONTACTOR WYE -DELTA START CONTACTOR CQMPRE SQR OVERL.QAP COMPRESSOR MOTOR COOLER FAN MOTOR NORMALLY CLOSED SWITCH CONTACT TRANSFORMER PRIMARY FUSES TRANSFORMER SECONDARY FUSE FAN MOTOR BRANCH FUSES PACKAGE DISCHARGE PRESSURE SENSOR UNIT DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE RTD LOAD CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCK CONTROL VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER I --mmmw,_N3»ja1->- 0YYYI�. NNU L I )-)(I-- 88290014-360 R09 35 SHOPTEr" USER MANUAL 3.6 TANK MOUNT AND DRYER OPTIONS SECTION 3 I 1� t w"aK �. �� �Nq� ;,- 4� � � � �.SH : �,� mak; a Len • th s s. i,i � • � � �'mIl � '} xi 1°k(�', Bh '��<v`"`.: Width Hei ht '§` .zs. i. � J � Wei • ht _ ' in mm in mm in mm lbs kg ,'019iffi ' =g '_ 1 � v "'� 1ir ST400R 5 64 1616 23 591 63 1605 854 388 ST400RD 5 69 1748 23 591 63 1605 935 424 IFN d .� # ..P,�#11FPiSiiF ,i"i1:ry7.of1F',J`'" '� A �y`. - ( ^,�rh £`✓ '- ":4Ni'P�iSI Y#i''s'..��J`h -t"'tF"d'`" ST500R 7.5 64 1616 23 591 63 1605 876 398 SryyT500RDea 7.5 69 1748 23 5�94 1 6ci•3 1605 9'r 54 .J 5 434 1 1&g p S ,a _i 1 ~ _,d. -•_.J 0 nF ST700R 10 64 1616 23 591 63 1605 _5 897 408 ST700RD 10 69 1748 23 591 63 1605 981 446 _ a —� Yo .ad g . ST1100R 15 66 1676 25.5 645.5 71.5 1813.5 1192 541 ST1100RD 15 71 1797 25.5 645.5 71.5 1813.5 1288 584 M E�" '� dN �,� n�a a �a .,.F F 4 ��.�. ST1500R 20 66 1676 25.5 645.5 71.5 1813.5 1225 556 ST1500RD 20 71 1797 25.5 645.5 71.5 1813.5 1321 599 (1) R - Mounted on Reciever Tank RD - Mounted on Reciever Tank with Dryer (11) For package pressure ratings see Table 3-1 36 02250180-090 R00 SULLAIR. NOTES SULLAIR® 02250180-090 R00 37 SECTION 3 Figure 3-10: Identification - ST400, ST500, ST700, 5-10HP Tank Mount SHOPTEK USER MANUAL SULLAIR® 02250180-090 R00 02250179-433 R00 38 SECTION 3 SHOPTERT" USER MANUAL Identification - ST400, ST500, ST700, 5-10HP Tank Mount 'SEE TABLE NOTES: 1. ALLOW 4.00 FEET [1.25 METERS] MINIMUM CLEARANCE AROUND MACHINE FOR ACCESS AND FREE CIRCULATION OF AIR. '2. A FOUNDATION OR MOUNTING CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING THE WEIGHT OF PACKAGE, AND RIGID ENOUGH TO MAINTAIN THE COMPRESSSOR FRAME LEVEL IS REQUIRED. 3. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE +/- .50" [12.7MM] 4. RECOMMENDED INCOMING CUSTOMER POWER SUPPLY IS SHOWN ON DRAWING. 15. DOORS ARE REMOVABLE USING LIFT-OFF PINS. 6. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN INCHES WITH MILLIMETER DIMEN- SIONS IN BRACKETS. Al: EXHAUST AIR OUT A2: AIR INLET A3: INCOMING CUSTOMER POWER SUPPLY 1.96[50]DIA A4: AIR OUT CONNECTION 1 1/4"NPT IAS: SERIAL PLATE A6: HAND HOLD 1A7: CONTAINMENT PAN DRAIN 1/4"NPT A8: E -STOP A9: CONTROLLER `A10: TANK MOUNT SERIAL PLATE All: TANK DRAIN 1/4"NPT 'MACHINE WEIGHTS 1854LBS[388KG] 876LBS[398KG] 897LBS[408KG] 0 0 0 0 0 0 �LO N- V)COCf) SULLAIR. 02250180-090 R00 39 SECTION 3 Figure 3-11: Identification - ST400, ST500, ST700, 5-10HP Tank Mount with Dryer SHOPTEK'" USER MANUAL SULLAIR. 02250180-090 R00 02250179-434 R00 40 SECTION 3 SHOPTEKTM USER MANUAL Identification - ST400, ST500, ST700, 5-10HP Tank Mount with Dryer SEE TABLE NOTES: 1. ALLOW 4.00 FEET [1.25 METERS] MINIMUM CLEARANCE AROUND MACHINE FOR ACCESS AND FREE CIRCULATION OF AIR. 2. A FOUNDATION OR MOUNTING CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING THE WEIGHT OF PACKAGE, AND RIGID ENOUGH TO MAINTAIN THE COMPRESSSOR FRAME LEVEL IS REQUIRED. 3. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE +/- .50" [12.7MM] 4. RECOMMENDED INCOMING CUSTOMER POWER SUPPLY IS SHOWN ON DRAWING. 5. DOORS ARE REMOVABLE USING LIFT-OFF PINS. 6. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN INCHES WITH MILLIMETER DIMEN- SIONS IN BRACKETS. Al: EXHAUST AIR OUT A2: AIR INLET A3: INCOMING CUSTOMER POWER SUPPLY 1.96[50]DIA 1 A4: AIR OUT CONNECTION 3/4"NPT A5: SERIAL PLATE A6: HAND HOLD A7: CONTAINMENT PAN DRAIN 1/4"NPT A8: E -STOP A9: CONTROLLER A10: TANK MOUNT SERIAL PLATE All: TANK DRAIN 1/4"NPT MACHINE WEIGHTS 935.2LBS[423.7KG] J 954.5LBS[433.7KG] 981.2LBS[446KG] 0 0 Ntin (i) 0 0 Ci) OOLLS SULLAIR. 02250180-090 R00 41 SHOPTEIr USER MANUAL Figure 3-12: Identification - ST1100, ST1500, 15-20HP Tank Mount 42 N F n w J Z Ili • K P d — N O Q M u W U J Z d 0 • K . SECTION 3 d m N • N N ' m u° O � u � n X 0 02250180-090 R00 d 1-7 02250179-436 R01 SULLAIR. SECTION 3 SHOPTEIr USER MANUAL Identification - ST1100, ST1500, 15-20HP Tank Mount (SEE TABLE NOTES: 1. ALLOW 4.00 FEET [1.25 METERS] MINIMUM CLEARANCE AROUND MACHINE FOR ACCESS AND FREE CIRCULATION OF AIR. 2. A FOUNDATION OR MOUNTING CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING THE WEIGHT OF PACKAGE, AND RIGID ENOUGH TO MAINTAIN THE COMPRESSSOR FRAME LEVEL IS REQUIRED. 13. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE +/- .50" [12.7MM] 4. RECOMMENDED INCOMING CUSTOMER POWER SUPPLY IS SHOWN ON DRAWING. 15. DOORS ARE REMOVABLE USING LIFT-OFF PINS. 6. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN INCHES WITH MILLIMETER DIMEN- SIONS IN BRACKETS. Al: EXHAUST AIR OUT IA2: AIR INLET IA3: INCOMING CUSTOMER POWER SUPPLY 1.96[50]DIA IA4: AIR OUT CONNECTION 1 1/4"NPT IA5: SERIAL PLATE A6: HAND HOLD `A7: CONTAINMENT PAN DRAIN 1/4"NPT IA8: E -STOP A9: CONTROLLER A10: TANK MOUNT SERIAL PLATE IA11: TANK DRAIN 1/4"NPT (MACHINE WEIGHTS 1192LBS[541 KG] 1225LBS[556KG] o 00 0 (0cr) SULLAIR. 02250180-090 R00 43 SHOPTEK'" USER MANUAL Figure 3-13: Identification - ST1100, ST1500, 15-20HP Tank Mount with Dryer 44 SECTION 3 a ^<=O V ,-; P � . • IM` @(D NO N O N N , ) 02250180-090 R00 02250179-437 R01 SULLAIR. SECTION 3 SHOPTKK"" USER MANUAL Identification - ST1100, ST1500, 15-20HP Tank Mount with Dryer SEE TABLE NOTES: 1. ALLOW 4.00 FEET [1.25 METERS] MINIMUM CLEARANCE AROUND MACHINE FOR ACCESS AND FREE CIRCULATION OF AIR. 2. A FOUNDATION OR MOUNTING CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING THE WEIGHT OF PACKAGE, AND RIGID ENOUGH TO MAINTAIN THE COMPRESSSOR FRAME LEVEL IS REQUIRED. 3. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE +/- .50" [12.7MM] 4. RECOMMENDED INCOMING CUSTOMER POWER SUPPLY IS SHOWN ON DRAWING. 5. DOORS ARE REMOVABLE USING LIFT-OFF PINS. 6. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN INCHES WITH MILLIMETER DIMEN- SIONS IN BRACKETS. Al: EXHAUST AIR OUT A2: AIR INLET A3: INCOMING CUSTOMER POWER SUPPLY 1.96[50]DIA A4: AIR OUT CONNECTION 3/4"NPT IA5: SERIAL PLATE A6: HAND HOLD A7: CONTAINMENT PAN DRAIN 1/4"NPT IAB: E -STOP A9: CONTROLLER A10: TANK MOUNT SERIAL PLATE Al1: TANK DRAIN 1/4"NPT MACHINE WEIGHTS 3. 1321 LBS[599KG] Y co co in CO OD J oo CO N O 009 IdS 0 H CO SULLAIR. 02250180-090 R00 45 SHOPTEY'" USER MANUAL SECTION 3 Figure 3-14: Wiring Diagram - SRS 25-100 115-230V/1/60 46 1VNO11d0 fa ZS H i' 1N3MdI003 JO 111,01 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION - 3 3 COMPRESSOR MOTOR 0 0 0 0 0 3 o 0 0 0w 3 C z 3 0 U > O Z U 3 w ui 0 0 0 L 0 > Q UD FLA 0.46 0.035kW FLA 0.46 0.035kW FLA 1.00 0.076kW KA STARTING RELAY FLA 1.00 0.076kW COMPRESSOR START CAPACITOR FLA 1.00 0.076kW TV FAN THERMOSTATIC SWITCH HT HIGH TEMPERATURE SAFETY SWITCH 0 0 0a > 00 rnZ a FLA 0.50 0.076kW 02250180-090 R00 QY INSTALLER - RESIDUAL CURRENT SUPPLY LINE SULLAIR. SECTION 3 SHOPTEL" USER MANUAL Figure 3-15: Wiring Diagram - SRS 9-18 220-240W1/50 ea za 10 Hi 3d O SULLAIR. 1N3Wdif103 30 11W11 02250180-090 R00 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS O5 MAIN SWITCH CN ELECTRONIC DRAIN POWER SUPPLY MC COMPRESSOR MOTOR EV FAN MOTOR O 10 C ca 9 ON O 00 fN Z J Q C w D LL N CL KO ON coN uJ\ w0 N CL OC 7 SRS -9 FLA 1.70 0.325kW TV FAN THERMOSTATIC SWITCH FLA 0.16 0.029kW SRS -12 FLA 2.05 0.355kW RC SPIKES SUPPRESSION FILTER FLA 0.23 0.035kW SRS -18 FLA 3.20 0.550kW COMPRESSOR OVERLOAD PROTECTOR KA STARTING RELAY HT HIGH TEMPERATURE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLER ELECTRICAL crW E N y W • m U n 47 SHOPTBK'" USER MANUAL SECTION 3 Figure 3-16: Wiring Diagram - SRS 24-30 220-240V/1/50 48 za ca N 7 3d H I I 220/240V 1Ph RECOMMENDED 0 1N311dif103 30 1I01I1 02250180-090 R00 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS OS MAIN SWITCH COMPRESSOR OVERLOAD PROTECTOR STARTING RELAY STARTING CAPACITOR Z w r `&' U 1 N U 0 O a > CC -4- 0 0 0 00 N Z 03 tl � FLA 0.23 0.035kW FLA 4.80 0.880kW FLA 0.23 0.035kW FLA 4.16 0.721kW HT HIGH TEMPERATURE SAFETY SWITCH BY INSTALLER z )- 0- + , LO 0 Q LJ U 1 w U ✓� W W W N • E N N m U U n SULLAIR. SHOPTEir USER MANUAL Section 4 INSTALLATION 4.1 COMPRESSOR MOUNTING - SUPPORT AND LOCATION The compressor must have a stable firm foundation, or mounting structure that is rigid enough to keep the compressor frame level, and maintain the alignment of the compressor and motor. Tie -down bolts of sufficient size must be used to ensure that the compressor frame is firmly anchored to its foundation. Rubber, cork, or other pliable materials can be inserted between the foundation and compressor frame to provide a uniform contact surface. • Use flex connectors to prevent piping loads from being transmitted to the compressor. • National and local electrical codes specify- ing the required clearances for the area around the electrical panel must be com- plied with. • Ensure the lighting at the compressor's location is sufficient for safe operation and maintenance. • The compressor's location should be one that allows access for maintenance vehi- cles and lifting equipment. • The clearances around the compressor should permit easy access to all compres- sor components. • Walls and ceilings with soft or porous sur- faces absorb sound and reduce ambient noise levels. Hard surfaces reflect noise and have little effect on ambient noise lev- els. NOTE Do not install compressors where the machine will be exposed to temperatures lower than 32°F (0°C). Contact Sullair Customer Care regarding operation in sub -freezing temperatures. SULLAIR. 4.2 VENTILATION AND COOLING • ShopTek compressors require a three foot (one meter) clearance around their perime- ter. • The location should be free from standing water. • Clean air should be supplied to the com- pressor, free from exhaust and paint fumes, dust, metal particles, or caustic chemical vapors. • Hot exhaust air should be vented out of the area to prevent its recirculation back into the compressor's cooling system. • Ducting or some other means must be used to ensure that hot exhaust air is vented away from the compressor if the compressor's housing has minimal over- head clearance.. NOTE Remove the red shipping straps/shipping studs before operating the drive assem- bly.See Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2. NOTE Housing the compressor in an inade- quately ventilated enclosure will cause higher compressor operating tempera- tures. 02250180-090 R00 49 SHOPTEIr USER MANUAL SECTION 4 Table 4-1: Ventilation Requirements Model Ventilation Air Required cfm m3/hr ST400 612 1040 ST500 612 1040 ST700 612 1040 ST1100 1471 2500 ST1500 1471 2500 Figure 4-1: ST400, ST500, ST700 Shipping Strap 1. Shipping Strap 50 OUTDOOR INSTALLATION (SHELTERED) ShopTek packages are equipped with TEFC motors and have water tight controls that are NEMA 4 rated and are suitable for sheltered outdoor installation. The compressor should be mounted on a concrete pad. If the pad is not level, the compressor must be mounted in such a manner that its base or skid is level in relation to the pad's surface and fully supported. If the compressor will be exposed to blowing rain or snow, it should be housed in a covered, four -walled enclosure. • Sheltered air-cooled machines must have their exhaust air vented outside of the enclosure. • Installations consisting of more than one compressor should be done in such a man- ner that each compressor's exhaust is directed away from the air intakes of other compressors or air dryers. • A standard compressor should not be started if the ambient temperature is 35°F (1.7°C) or lower. Compressor must not be operated in sub- freezing conditions. 02250180-090 R00 SULLAIR. SECTION 4 SHOPTEIC USER MANUAL Figure 4-2: ST1100, ST1500 Shipping Studs 1. Belt Guard 3. Shipping Studs (2) 2. Nut (2) 4.3 SERVICE AIR PIPING Before installing the compressor, review the service air system's layout including: pipe sizes, auxiliary separator tube, drip legs, line filter(s), and isolation valves (See Figure 4-3). NOTE Systems using both reciprocating and rotary screw compressors must isolate the two types from each other through the use of a common receiver tank. Air lines from each individual compressor should be connected directly to the common receiver tank. SULLAIR. PIPE SIZING Pipes should be sized as a minimum to match the dimensions of the compressor's discharge connection. All piping and fittings should be rated for the discharge pressure. AUXILIARY RECEIVER TANK An auxiliary receiver tank should be installed in systems where large demand fluctuations will occur. 02250180-090 R00 51 SHOPTER'" USER MANUAL SECTION 4 ISOLATION VALVES Install isolation valves where isolation of the compressor from the service lines is required. These valves should have drip legs that drain at an angle downward from the base. A vent to the piping should be installed downstream of the compressor outlet connection. When two compressors are installed to operate in parallel with a common receiver tank, an isolation valve and drain trap for each compressor should be installed before the common separator/sump. NOTE Compressors not equipped with a receiver tank may need to have their response times adjusted. Contact Sullair Customer Care for assistance. 52 FLUID CONTAINMENT Compressors have a fluid containment pan to collect fluid leaks or spills. The pan has a drain located on the front side of the machine. 4.4 BELT CHECK Tension of drive belts should be checked upon installation and after 0.5 to 2 hours of run time. This is essential to proper performance of the compressor unit as well as to ensure long belt life. In addition, belt tension should be checked every 2000 hours and adjusted if necessary. Refer to Section 6: Belt Maintenance for detailed instructions. 4.5 FLUID LEVEL CHECK The compressor is shipped fully charged with the proper amount of fluid. However, it is necessary to check the fluid level at the time of installation and Figure 4-3: Typical Service Air Piping 1. Sullair Compressor 5. Standard Gate Valve 2. Sullair Dryer 6. By-pass Gate Valve 3. Shut-off Gate Valve Al: Condensate Drain 4. Sullair Filter A2: Air Outlets 02250180-090 R00 SULLAIR. SECTION 4 SHOPTEir USER MANUAL during compressor operation. Check the fluid level by looking at the sight glass on the separator tube when the compressor is in the SHUT DOWN MODE (fluid level may not be visible when operating). In this condition the sight glass should be completely full. Add fluid if the level is visible or if no fluid is visible at all. 4.6 ELECTRICAL PREPARATION Interior electrical wiring is installed at the factory. Required customer wiring should be done by a qualified electrician in compliance with OSHA, National Electric Code and/or any applicable local electrical codes applying to isolation switches, fused disconnects, etc. Refer to Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-4. Sullair provides a wiring diagram for use by the installer. An electrical check should be made to ensure that the first start-up will be successful. The compressor and drive should be properly grounded/ earthed in accordance with applicable codes, regulations, and requirements. Feeder cables should be sized by the customer/ electrical contractor to ensure that the circuit is balanced and not overloaded by other electrical equipment. The length of wiring from a suitable electrical power source is critical because voltage drops can adversely effect the performance of the compressor. Cable sizes may vary considerably so the mains terminals will accept up to 120 mm2 (4/0 awg) (75kw) cable. Feeder cable connections to incoming terminals L1- L2 -L3 should be tight and clean. The applied voltage must conform to the motor and compressor data plate ratings. A starter hole is provided for an incoming power connection. If it is necessary to make a hole in the control box in a different location, care should be taken to not allow metal shavings to enter the starter and other electrical components within the box. If another hole is used, the original hole must be blocked off with a sealed plug. SULLAIR. A WARNING Energized internal components are a poten- tially FATAL SHOCK HAZARD. Disconnect all power before performing any work on the compressor's electrical system. 1. Check incoming voltage. The incoming voltage must match the compressor's wire rating/specifications. 2. Check motor starter and overload heater sizes. 3. Check all electrical connections for tightness. 4.7 MOTOR ROTATION DIRECTION CHECK Motor rotation check must be done at compressor start-up after the wiring has been installed. See Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5. The compressor can be damaged if it runs in the wrong direction for more than a few seconds. Motor rotation can be viewed through the openings in the belt guard. Pull out the EMERGENCY STOP button and press once, quickly and in succession, the © (START) pad and OO (STOP) pad. This action will bump start the motor. When looking at the motor from the compressor unit, the shaft should turn clockwise for ST400, ST500 and ST700 and counterclockwise for ST1100 and ST1500. If reverse rotation occurs, disconnect the power to the starter and exchange any two of the three power input leads, then re -check rotation. A "Direction of Rotation" decal is located on the motor drive housing to show proper motor/compressor rotation. Fan motor rotation should also be checked. It should rotate counter -clockwise when viewing the fan motor from the backside of the motor. 02250180-090 R00 53 SHOPTEIr USER MANUAL SECTION 4 54 Figure 4-4: Fan Motor/Main Motor Rotational Direction ST400, ST500, ST700, 5-10HP 1. Main Motor Rotational Direction 2. Fan Motor Rotational Direction Figure 4-5: Fan Motor/Main Motor Rotational Direction ST1100, ST1500, 15-20HP 1. Main Motor Rotational Direction 2. Fan Motor Rotational Direction 02250180-090 R00 SULLAIR. SHOPTEK'" USER MANUAL Section 5 OPERATION 5.1 ROUTINE OPERATION Before starting the compressor, check the fluid level in the separator tube. If sight glass is not completely full, add the required amount of fluid to bring it to its proper level. Frequent addition of fluid indicates the presence of a leak or a condition causing excessive fluid consumption. See the Troubleshooting — Introduction on page 66 under EXCESSIVE COMPRESSOR FLUID CONSUMPTION for a probable cause and corrective action. A WARNING HIGH-PRESSURE HAZARD! DO NOT remove caps, plugs, and/or other components when compressor is running or pressurized. Stop compressor and relieve all internal pressure before doing so. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. SULLAIR® After a routine start, observe the controller display for the proper indications for this phase of operation. After the compressor has warmed up, check all compressor operation indications to ensure that it is running properly. 02250180-090 R00 55 SHOPTERT" USER MANUAL Section 6 MAINTENANCE A WARNING Before any repairs are attempted, refer to Section 1: Safety before proceeding. 6.1 GENERAL This compressor requires a minimal amount of inspections and maintenance. The Controller and other indicators alert the operator to situations requiring maintenance, or fault conditions. 6.2 MAINTENANCE AFTER INITIAL 50 HOURS OF OPERATION After the initial 50 hours of operation, maintenance is required to clean the system of any foreign materials. At this time the return line strainer should be cleaned. Refer to Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2. SULLAIR. 02250180-090 R00 Figure 6-1: Return Line Strainer ST400, ST500, ST700, 5-10HP 1. Strainer 2. Separator Tube 57 SHOPTEIr USER MANUAL SECTION 6 Figure 6-2: Return Line Strainer ST1100, ST1500, 15-20HP 1. Strainer 2. Separator Tube 6.3 MAINTENANCE EVERY 2000 HOURS After 2000 hours of operation: 1. Clean the return line strainer. Refer to Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2. 2. Replace the fluid filter. Refer to Figure 6-3 and Section 6.5. 3. Pull fluid sample for analysis. 4. Replace air filter. Refer to Figure 6-4 and Figure 6-5 and Section 6.6. 5. Check belt tension. Re -tension or replace as necessary. Refer to Section 6.8. 6.4 FLUID MAINTENANCE Drain the separator tube and change the compressor fluid using instructions shown in the Lubrication Guide. 58 6.5 FILTER MAINTENANCE Refer to Figure 6-3. Replace the fluid filter under any of the following conditions, or whichever occurs first: 1. Every 2000 hours a display on the Controller indicates the need for replacement 2. Every fluid change. FLUID FILTER REPLACEMENT Refer to Figure 6-3. 1. Use a strap wrench to remove the filter and gasket. 2. Dispose of filter properly. 3. Clean gasket seating surface. 4. Apply a light film of fluid to the filter gasket. 5. Hand tighten until gasket is seated. 6. Continue tightening filter an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn. 7. Replace any lost fluid. Do not overfill. 8. Restart compressor and check for leaks. Figure 6-3: Fluid Filter Assembly 1. Fluid Filter NOTE Dispose of fluids in accordance with applicable federal, state and local regulations. 02250180-090 R00 SULLAIR. SECTION 6 6.6 AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE Refer to Figure 6-4 and Figure 6-5. Air filter maintenance should be performed every 2000 hours or sooner if necessary. AIR FILTER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT 1. Remove enclosure panels to gain access to filter. 2. Loosen hose clamp and remove filter. 3. Install new filter and tighten hose clamp. Figure 6-4: Air Filter Assembly 5-10HP 1. Air Filter Element 2. Clamp 3. Hose SULLAIR. SHOPTEK"' USER MANUAL O ©O Figure 6-5: Air Filter Assembly 15-20HP 02250180-090 R00 1. Air Filter Element 2. Clamp 3. Hose 59 SHOPTEr" USER MANUAL 6.7 SEPARATOR MAINTENANCE Replace the separator elements every 2 years or 4000 hours, whichever occurs first. The separator elements must be replaced. DO NOT attempt to clean and reinstall the separator elements. SEPARATOR ELEMENT REPLACEMENT OO Refer to Figure 6-6. Use the following procedure below to change the separator: A CAUTION Relieve all pressure from the separator/ sump tank and all compressor lines. 60 1. Loosen and remove the six (6) hex head capscrews (M12 x 45mm) from the cover plate. 2. Lift the cover plate from the separator tube. 3. Remove the separator element. 4. Inspect the separator tube for rust, contamination, or damage. 5. Reinsert the separator elements into the separator tube taking care not to dent the element against the tank opening. 6. Install a new lubricated 0 -ring in the 0 -ring groove on the underside of the separator/ tube cover. 7. Replace the cover plate, washers and capscrews. Torque to 28 ft•Ibs. (38 N•m). 8. Clean the return line strainer before restarting the compressor. Refer to Figure 6- 1 and Figure 6-2. 9. Check condition of grounding spring on lid, ensure it is clean and provides good contact. SECTION 6 02250180-090 R00 Figure 6-6: Separator Element Assembly 5-10HP 1. Cover 2. Cover Gasket 3. Separator Element 4. Separator Tube SULLAIR. SECTION 6 Figure 6-7: Separator Element Assembly 15-20HP 1. Cover 2. Cover Gasket 3. Separator Element 4. Separator Tube 6.8 BELT MAINTENANCE The correct drive belt tension is essential to ensure that full motor power is transmitted to the compressor unit. The belt tension is achieved by raising the compressor unit which has the effect of increasing belt tension. Refer to Figure 6-10 and Figure 6-11. SULLAIR. SHOPTErm USER MANUAL Belt tension must be re -adjusted 0.5 to 2 hours after a new set of belts are fitted. This will ensure that the belts have completed their initial stretch. Subsequent to this, belt tension needs to be checked and adjusted if necessary every 2000 hours for the duration of the belt life. There are two recommended methods for checking the belt tension. The test methods will be detailed as follows. BELT TENSION MEASUREMENT WITH OPTIKRIK TENSION METER. Refer to Figure 6-8. Follow instructions as follows: A. Ensure the indicator arm is pushed down prior to starting. B. Gently place the meter on the flat side of one belt at the midpoint between the motor and compres- sor unit pulleys. C. Slowly press on the push pad. Avoid contacting the meter with other fingers as this may affect the reading. D. Once a definite click is detected, immediately release pressure and! the indication arm will remain in the measuring position. E. Carefully lift the meter without moving indicating arm. F. Read the measurement at the exact point where the top surface of the indicator arm crosses the scale. G. Rotate the motor pulliey through at least one complete revolution and measure the tension again, recording the results. H. Repeat G for a total of 3 measurements. I. Average the three measurements to obtain the true belt tension. J. Repeat for remaining belts. K. Compare the results to the belt tension specifica- tion in Table 6-1 and adjust if necessary. 02250180-090 R00 61 SHOPTEr" USER MANUAL Rubber ring Push pad SECTION 6 Pressure spring Figure 6-8: Optikrik Belt Tension Meter BELT TENSION MEASUREMENT WITH FREQUENCY METER Refer to Figure 6-9. Follow instructions as follows: A. Turn on the meter. B. Hold the meter so that the probe is >10mm (3/8") away from the belt being tested. Do not touch the belt with tester probe. C. Pluck a single belt at the midpoint between the motor and compressor unit pulleys. Try not to disturb any adjacent belts, as this will give a false reading.As the probe detects a vibration, the meter will display the frequency. Record data. D. Rotate the motor pulley through at least one complete revolution and measure the belts again, recording the results. E. Repeat D for a total of 3 measurements. F. Average the three measurements to obtain the true belt tension. 62 G. Repeat for remaining belts. H. Compare the resuls to the belt tension specifica- tion in Table 6-1 and adjust if necessary. 02250180-090 R00 Figure 6-9: Belt Tension Frequency Meter SULLAIR. SECTION 6 Table 6-1: Belt Tension Requirements SHOPTEKT' USER MANUAL .ta.r -•-- a tlm $- @�P ����i! �IJ�pjO� � Y� ' e } , a' -- a' .t'. r.. '§ ! 6 i M s,a a ! %�%' tt First Time Re -tension First Time Re -tension Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) Force (N) Force (N) ST410 5 60 80 70 233 180 ST410 5 50 82 72 232 178 I , 'I b i 1 1 11-1p 1+"a 5,! ST510 7.5 60 78 68 214 165 ST510 7.5 50 84 74 215 165e 5 �”` i,.i� � ani ,maa rI tµr, MHS !x '�F r£ t 4s ,:- un � '„y .- ,!,a y ' a„�' h ST709 10 60 87 76 250 192 ST712 10 60 81 71 242 186 ST708 10 50 90 79 237 182 ST713 10 50 85 79 230 191 A.4; .�� 7s ; m ni n _ i�5j 17 I 1111 ST1109 15 60 85 75 245 189 ST1112 15 60 85 74 254 195 ST1108 15 50 92 81 248 191 ST1113 15 50 89 78 255 196 STI500.-Sedes = ST1509 20 60 92 80 283 217 ST1512 20 60 101 88 276 212 ST1508 20 50 92 81 261 201 ST1513 20 50 91 80 274 210 BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT Refer to Figure 6-10 and Figure 6-11. Adjust the belt tension according to the following procedure: A. Shut down the compressor and isolate all electric power. B. Open the side panel and remove belt guard. C. Loosen the locking nut. D. Loosen the four compressor unit mounting plate bolts 3/4 of a turn. SULLAIR® E. Adjust the belt tension by turning the jacking nut clockwise to tighten or counterclockwise to loosen. F. Measure belt tension and ensure it meets the specifications in Table 6-1. G. Tighten the locking nut., H. Tighten the four compressor unit mounting plate adjusting bolts. I. Ensure that the discharge hose is not kinked, bent, or has been placed under undue stress or strain. J. Replace the belt guard and the side panel. 02250180-090 R00 63 SHOPTEir USER MANUAL 64 Figure 6-10: Belt Tension Adjustment, ST400, ST500, ST700, 5-10HP SECTION 6 1. Belt Guard 5. Comp. Unit Mounting Plate Bolts (4) 2. Belt Tension Adjustment Screw 6. Comp. Unit Pulley 3. Locking Nut 7. Belts 4. Jacking Nut 8. Motor Pulley 02250180-090 R00 SULLAIR. SECTION 6 SHOPTEr" USER MANUAL Figure 6-11: Belt Tension Adjustment, ST1100, ST1500, 15-20HP 1. Belt Guard 5. Comp. Unit Mounting Plate Bolts (4) 2. Belt Tension Adjustment Screw 6. Comp. Unit Pulley 3. Locking Nut 7. Belts 4. Jacking Nut 8. Motor Pulley 6.9 REPLACEMENT AND ALIGNMENT OF BELT PULLEYS In the event of the motor or compressor unit having been removed and replaced, pulley alignment will have to be checked and adjusted. Misalignment of pulleys can cause rapid wear of the V belt form, considerably shortening the service life of both belts and pulleys. Due to Sullair's innovative design, only parallel alignment of the drive pulleys needs to be checked SULLAIR. PARALLEL ALIGNMENT CAN BE CHECKED BY TWO METHODS. 1. Placing a straight edge against the pulleys near their centers. For correct alignment, the straight edge must be sitting flat against both pulleys, i.e. full face contact. There should be no more than 0.5mm misalign- ment. 2. Using a laser, ensure misalignment is no greater than 0.5°. 02250180-090 R00 65 SHOPTEKT" USER MANUAL To correct parallel misalignment, first check that the rear face of the compressor unit pulley is positioned 0.3in (7.5mm) off the mounting face. This is required to ensure that the belts clear all mounting bolt heads. With the compressor unit pulley correctly positioned, move the motor pulley on the shaft to achieve correct alignment. INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLING A PULLEY: 1. Clean all surfaces of shaft, pulley and taper lock bushing. 2. Fit taper lock bushing inside pulley. 3. Spray oil or anti -seize compound on the grub screw threads and gently screw in. 4. Slide the pulley/bushing assmebly on to the shaft to the correct position, aligning the keyway. 5. Tighten the grub screws in stages to the specification in Table 6-2. 6. Check pulley alignment. 7. Install belts and tension as outlined in the belt tensioning procedure. 8. Run machine for 0.5-1 hour and check the tightening torque of the grub screws. Tighten if necessary; INSTRUCTIONS FOR REMOVING A PULLEY: 1. Loosen and remove both grub screws. 2. Install one grub screw into the jacking/disas- sembly hole. Refer to Figure 6-12. 3. Tighten grub screw to release taper lock hub from pulley. 4. Slide pulley and bushing from shaft. SECTION 6 Figure 6-12: Diagram of belt pulley and taper lock bushing assembly 1. Jacking/Disassembly Hole 2. Installation Hole 6.10 HOSE MAINTENANCE Fluid and air hose replacement is recommended after three (3) years or 16,000 hours of operation. 6.11 TANK MOUNT PACKAGE MAINTENANCE Receiver tank should be drained daily. Change SCF filters when indicated by gauge on housing. Refer to dryer documentation for maintenance requirements. 6.12 TROUBLESHOOTING - INTRODUCTION The information in the Troubleshooting Guide describe symptoms and usual causes for the listed discrepancies. However, DO NOT assume that these are the only malfunctions or fault conditions that may occur. NOTE For additional troubleshooting guidelines, consult the Controller manual. Table 6-2: Pulley Tightening Torque Specification Tapered Hub Size of Hex Key (mm) Number of Grub Screws Tightening Torque ft•Ibs N•m 1210/1610 5 2 14.8 20.0 2012 6 2 22.1 30.0 66 02250180-090 R00 SULLAIR. SECTION 6 SHOPTEK'm USER MANUAL Table 6-3: Troubleshooting Guide SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY Compressor will not start Main disconnect switch open Close switch. Line fuse blown Replace fuse. Motor starter overload tripped Reset - if fault persists, check motor contacts for proper function. Low incoming line voltage Check voltage - in the case of low voltage, check power source, or contact local power company. Compressor shuts down under service Toad conditions Loss of control voltage Check 110V AC power supply. Low incoming line voltage Check voltage - in the case of low voltage, check power source, or contact local power company. High operating pressure Reset - if fault persists, check line pressure and ensure that it does not exceed the compressor's maximum operating pressure. Compressor shuts down under service load conditions - High Pressure Fault Compressor pressure setting incorrect Change setting in Controller. Control line strainer clogged Clean or replace strainer. Minimum pressure valve malfunction Repair or replace minimum pressure valve. Control line air leak Repair leak Defective unload solenoid valve Check valve — if it does not operate when energized, replace the valve coil or the entire valve if defective. Compressor shuts down under service load conditions - High Temperature Fault Cooling air flow restricted Clean cooler and check for proper ventilation. Ambient temperature too high Check ventilation and increase if too low. Low fluid level Add fluid. Clogged fluid filter Change the fluid filter element. Thermal valve malfunction Replace thermal valve element. Temperature sensor RTD malfunction Check connection and sensor — replace if sensor is defective. Cooling fan rotational direction is reversed. Reconnect fan motor cables for proper rotational direction. SULLAIR. 02250180-090 R00 67 SHOPTEKTm USER MANUAL SECTION 6 Table 6-3: Troubleshooting Guide SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY Compressor cannot produce full discharge pressure Air demand too high Check service lines for leaks or open valves. Dirty air filter Replace filter. Inlet valve bleed orifice obstructed/plugged Check the control line bleed orifice inside the inlet valve for blockage or obstructions. Defective unload solenoid valve Check the valve - if it does not operate when energized, replace the valve coil or the entire valve if defective. Minimum pressure valve malfunction Repair or replace minimum pressure valve Pressure sensor malfunction Check connection and sensor — replace if sensor is defective. Belts slipping due to lack of tension Ckeck belts. Re -tension or replace as necessary. Line pressure rises above unload pressure set -point Control system leak causing loss of pressure signals Check for leaks. Inlet valve stuck open Remove the intake hose and check the inlet valve for proper operation. Defective unload solenoid valve Check the valve for proper operation - open when energized - replace if necessary Plugged/obstructed control line strainer Clean or replace strainer Pressure sensor malfunction Check connection and sensor— replace if sensor is defective. High compressor fluid consumption Clogged return line or orifice Clean or replace the strainer. Separator element damaged or malfunctioning Change separator. Lubrication system leak Check all pipes, connections, and components. Excess fluid foaming Drain fluid and change. Fluid level too high Drain and change - check that the compressor temperature has not dropped below 170°F (76.7°C). Pressure relief valve opens frequently Pressure relief valve defective Replace. Plugged/obstructed separator Check separator differential. Pressure sensor malfunction Check connection and sensor - replace if sensor is defective. 68 02250180-090 R00 SULLAIR. NOTES SULLAIR. 69 SULLAIR® WORLDWIDE SALES AND SERVICE SULLAIR ASIA, LTD. Zuo Pao Tai Road, No. 1 Chiwan, Shekou Shenzen, Guangdong PRV. PRC POST CODE 518068 Telephone: 755-6851686 Fax: 755-6853473 www.sullair-asia.com SULLAIR CORPORATION 3700 East Michigan Boulevard Michigan City, Indiana, 46360 U.S.A. www.sullair.com Telephone: 1-800-SULLAIR (U.S.A. only) Fax: 219-874-1273 CUSTOMER CARE for PARTS and Service 1-888-SULLAIR (7855247) 219-874-1835 Champion Compressors, LTD. 324-332 Frankston Dandenong Road Dandenong VIC Australia 3175 Ph:+61397039000 Fx:+61397039053 www.championcompressors.com.au Printed in the U.S.A. Specifications subject to change without prior notice. ElOEP SULLAIR EUROPE, S.A. Zone Des Granges BP 82 42602 Montbrison, France Telephone: 33-477968470 Fax: 33-477968499 www.sullaireurope.com 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K 1 4 FRONT VIEW TSC900 GHC DISPLAY .s . PROGRAMMABLE I/O CONNECTIONS ATS CONTROL PLATE VIEWED FROM REAR (INSIDE) OF DOOR 43 HINGE ,SIDE 14.75" 3.. DRIP PROVISIO STANDARD ATS — GSD 0 0 2.16"—..... 1y 30" III- WALL MOUNTING SLOTS / (3/8" HARDWARE) 11 't' POWER PLUG O. I VIIaX{/ I ' 01 SD INST 0 TS 87xA-400 • qI :ISI° PL15 ISOLATION POWER CHASSIS PLUG ce nc TRANSFER _ .....7 t . TdW.# .a TAWiF 25.000 PER PHASE o TSC900 GHC g.0 �■�.1■r.l ee—ed 00 0 MI..1J_[IA_ p ( DISPLAY Tex R. .Z• 4 l 00) W1 W3 44 5,' 4 00 21_B1_ I I I I i I =1, ,E. ]OQ on - ThoJmson Power Systems Thomson OQ O 0 0 0 0.75"� 1 , U ,D A B C TO LOAD FRONT VIEW TSC900 GHC DISPLAY .s . PROGRAMMABLE I/O CONNECTIONS ATS CONTROL PLATE VIEWED FROM REAR (INSIDE) OF DOOR 43 HINGE ,SIDE 14.75" 3.. DRIP PROVISIO ALLOW AT LEAST 1.5" CLEARANCE FOR UNIMPEDED OPENING OF THE DOOR TO AT LEAST 90' LHS VIEW (SIDE COVER REMOVED) REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 0 9 2019 +p. City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 5. AVAILABLE CABLE ENTRY LOCATION STANDARD ATS — GSD 0 0 A A A A • A • • PL12 VOLTAGE SENSING/AC CONTROL ISOLATION I� 11 't' POWER PLUG 14" I 2) NEUTRAL BUS N I ' 01 •-• TS 87xA-400 • qI :ISI° PL15 ISOLATION POWER CHASSIS PLUG ce nc TRANSFER _ .....7 t . TdW.# .a TAWiF 25.000 PER PHASE ALLOW AT LEAST 1.5" CLEARANCE FOR UNIMPEDED OPENING OF THE DOOR TO AT LEAST 90' LHS VIEW (SIDE COVER REMOVED) REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 0 9 2019 +p. City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 5. AVAILABLE CABLE ENTRY LOCATION STANDARD ATS — GSD 0 0 SERVICE ENTRANCE ATS — USD E_ O EE O E o p GROUND _ SLUGS Q Q O 0 NEUTRAL BOND C GROUND TERMINAL FROM (SOURCE SUPPLY B GENERATOR A 2) NEUTRAL BUS N _OPTIONAL NCT FROM UTILITY (SOURCE 1) SUPPLY 'N A B C 460 4.00 0480V 0600V TS 87xA-400 600 400 .l ce nc TRANSFER _ .....7 t . TdW.# .a TAWiF 25.000 PER PHASE - g.0 �■�.1■r.l ee—ed 00 0 MI..1J_[IA_ � Tex R. .Z• 4 6O 00) Oo 0 00 Q OQ O 0 0 0 N A B C TO LOAD 0 0 AVAILABLE CABLE ENTRY LOCATION INTERIOR FRONT VIEW (DOOR NOT SHOWN). 34.31" W W = QU w0 / CUSTOMER CONNECTION 12.81" TOP VIEW (DOOR OPEN) 90" D 46.71" BASIC MODEL TS87xA STANDARD ATS — GSD BASIC MODEL TS87xA SERVICE ENTRANCE ATS — USD RATED CURRENT (A) CLOSING AND INTERRUPTING RATING AVAILABLE AMPS (RMS) CLOSING & INTERRUPTING RATINGS SHOWN ARE ONLY FOR ATS UTILITY AND/OR GENERATOR POWER SWITCHING DEVICE(S) THAT ARE FACTORY SUPPLIED WITH INTEGRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION. PLEASE REFER TO PRODUCT INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON UPSTREAM PROTECTION REQUIREMENT. MAX. VOLTAGE RATED CURRENT (A) NO UPSTREAM OVERCURRENT PROTECTION REQUIRED 0240V 0480V 0600V TS 87xA-400 600 400 65,000 50,000 25.000 PER PHASE NEUTRAL BASIC MODEL TS87xA STANDARD ATS — GSD CLOSING AND WITHSTAND RATING AVAILABLE AMPS (RMS) CLOSING & WITHSTAND RATINGS SHOWN ARE ONLY FOR ATS UTILITY AND/OR GENERATOR POWER SWITCHING DEVICE(S) THAT ARE NOT FACTORY SUPPLIED WITH INTEGRAL OVERCURRENT FRUfECTION. PLEASE REYLR 19 FRODUC IA3TRUC1iON MANUAL FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON UPSTREAM PROTECTION REQUIREMENT. MAX. VOLTAGE RATED CURRENT (A) 0240V 0480V 0600V TS 87xA-400 600 400 65.000 50,000 35,000 CONNECTION DATA 1 UTILITY 1-2C, 2/0-500MCM Cu/AI ENCLOSURE FINISH : ASA #61 GREY (SRC1) PER PHASE GENERATOR 1-2C. 2/0-500MCM Cu/AI (SRC2) PER PHASE 400A ATS 1-2C, 2/0-500MCM Cu/AI LOAD PER PHASE NEUTRAL 1-2C. 2/0-500MCM Cu/AI PER SOURCE GROUND 60, #6-250MCM Cu/AI GENERAL NOTES 1 POWER SWITCHING DEVICES ARE MECHANICALLY INTERLOCKED SO THAT ONLY ONE DEVICE IS CLOSED AT A TME 2 ENCLOSURE FINISH : ASA #61 GREY pPmTL.RLe non Rased la mzdw,ir.dponeou la w WE.I' PPE'NEPA TOE par Is REFER PROJECT SPECIFIC OPTIONS LIST FOR SELECTED ENCLOSURE TYPE CORRECTION LTR# 2.5" x 5" DANGER PELIGRO ti 3)N, Aarm *REM Flay We me EA •ro And Shock Hazard _ r Eason. D.mwl W w.a m.wv EWE among. Ta Rion+ W M a WSW r Edw. oro' RE.* Emla wow. dM+9.. wok prwEr we ppmnr Peru. Rwd. Eept.w to NPA FRYE..AT PPE . Ran E Easy my Elul n oREEF Rtlx purernmm RRA. CAR EYeOW,w a CEModvutlen Pr a_r ON Frkrolls UTU PIERRE. w/I Wow. - Eames TaIromblion•AMI WareLwow GmminA dm.mamMWi lu••P Y mP. EWEyWM. G Mow awayEWER. wwdu.. a Pela r6ogr.. a amdvn AWERE. pPmTL.RLe non Rased la mzdw,ir.dponeou la w WE.I' PPE'NEPA TOE par Is Rim., da Arae y Cheque EWMw S. mow. Wan pay o waft Ws de m L.. minylado.Ar diagram Ouantlf may l.ansa EWER WE dr PEEK nvErnnunlo En ERIE/WE RR MEREcEAPIE perm. wµlap 104R,Ix4My—J .wwwwamaamnww W mar RAPE Can W V Y NFPA 10E pm los EWER WEER a ndpo a pmnmf Ewa IPPEI QTY = 1 FOIL LABEL BLACK LETTERS ON SILVER BACKGROUND WARNING TO ENSURE SAFETY OF PERSONNEL DOOR MUST BE LOCKED CLOSED WHEN USING THE "SERVICE DISCONNECT" SWITCH TO ISOLATE LOAD CIRCUITS. FASTEN DOOR SECURELY WITH SCREWS BEFORE LOCKING. QTY = 1 0.75" x 2" (TYPICAL) WHITE LETTERS ON BLACK BACKGROUND SDL SERVICE DISCONNECTED =1 SERVICE DISCONNECT OTT" Gx E' r�iEurnAL DSCONNEC<D 435D vSiONNO.__L FOR RECEIVER, CITY OF TUI.V ILA JUL 26 2019 PERMIT CENTER W1 W3 14° 0 ° (0 DRAWINGS AND OR OTHER TECHNICAL INFORMATION SUPPLIED BY THOMSON POWER SYSTEMS AS A PART OF A SALE OF EQUIPMENT ARE FOR THE PURCHASER'S USE REVIEW ONLYCONJUNCTION O O NO OTHERWISEWITH THAT E 05 T 1 P M UNLESS SPECIFICALLYAGREED THE TERMS OF SALE. ❑ APPROVED FOR 0 MASTER COPY ❑ MULTIPLE UNIT ❑ RELEASED FOR AUTH. BY: CONSTRUCTION ❑ REFERENCE COPY OF WORK ORDER INFORMATION DATE: CROSS REFERENCE LEGEND 50C–C-1 GRID COORDINATE SHEET No. DRAWING No. REFERENCE DRAWINGS No. REVISIONS BY AUTH DATE rRnon- Thomson Power Systems AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH MODEL TS 870 PHYSICAL LAYOUT & INSTALLATION DETAILS 400A, 2P/3P, NEMA 1/2/12/3R, SINGLE DOOR, SE CUSTOMER THOMSON POWER SYSTEMS CUSTOMER ORDER No. C—XXXXXX WORK ORDER No W–XXXXXX DRANK BY AP AUTH BY OG DATE 16-01-26 REV 0 DRAWING/FILE No. SHEET MCS870M224 10A A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0THE INFORMATION ON THIS DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF THOMSON POWER SYSTEMS. IT IS NOT TO BE USED DETRIMENTALLY TO OUR INTERESTS Electrical Data H-100 6.8L 12VDC QTA (Uidustriai QT) Electrical Schematic - Drawing Na. 0F5259 (30 ONLY) L' L2 L3 00 MLCB I � AUX CONTACT1 OPTIONAL MLCP ACCESSORIES SHUNT TRIP _ FOR CUSTOMER USE. 0 0 E2 0 �3 1033 NOI i I° x ! NC 3J-*-$ d Kl 2 I4 LCOM 3 t j I (a6+ ` { ` ' ISA NOTES �1NI NOS--rs • x i s 1 (: A-3 OCE J2 a nt 4 LCQM 6 • I NO ' x NC s' '. ▪ NO r i NC" ‘rt "-3 005 J2 0 yr W G z CUSTOMER CONNECTION BOX Tf NERAT- S`T i m 0 -13 NOTE2 DUAL FUEL ONLY! NON -DUAL FUEL I ONLY• _ 0 00 GROUNDED NEUTRAL OF SO EQUIPPED) 0 0 J2 183 0 183 1330 I 391 SH -D J2, 013 0 8 0 RS485*� 0 RS485- 0 SHLD2 0 0 D13 1 L+ / 014 0 D14 0-0 0 LI --11.1 (HOT) i IF R LY ti --I N (NEUT) ,.. r-=— 505 42 GMD--1C44°. ` GND--1 1 T,- 0 • 13 — 1, + (P05) 1 I 1 0- , (NEC) , �f <� if ! GFCI ' cH ARGE T-{ O T -i— 803 41 1 L1 BLOCK HEATER E to I I _-�_ �- OTHER �: - OPTIONAL <' ------ 120VAC LOAD 1 LEGEND 11 00 - NEUTRAL AHI - ALARM HORN II ALT - CHARGE ALTERNATOR AVR - AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR BAT - BATTERY (12VDC) BCH - BATTERY CHARGER CAO - CAMSHAFT SENSOR CB_ - CIRCUIT BREAKER COM - COMMUNICATION CONNECTOR CRK - CRANKSHAFT SENSOR CT_ - CURRENT TRANSFORMER CUST CON - CUSTOMER CONNECTION Cr. - CYLINDER IGNITION COIL DPE - EXCITER EST - E -STOP SWITCH F - FUSE FS_ - FUEL SOLENOID GA - GOVERNOR ACTUATOR GD - GOVERNOR DRIVER ICM - IGNITION CONTROL MODULE IFT - INTERFACE IRAN WORMER ISO - ISOLATED (ELECTRICALLY) J_ -• NONE CONTROLLER CONNECTIONS MLCB MAIN UNE CIRCUIT BREAKER MPU - MAGNETIC PICK -UF OPS_ - 011. PRESSURE SENDER OTS_ - OIL TEMPERATURE SENDER R_ - RESISTOR RB_ - RELAY BOARD SC - STARTER CONTACTOR SHLD - SHIELD SM - STARTER MOTOR S _ - SPARK PLUG - SHUNT TRIP SW1 AUTO/MANUAL SW W.S_- WATER LEVEL SENSOR WTS_ - WATER TEMPERATURE SENDE PAGE 4 OF 4 Ii r Minerac* Power Systems, inc. 55 GROUP G WIRE HARNESS 0r� SENSING MODULE 1 2 3 (<4 2 (< 1 2 « - 00 - N2 - N1 2 6 4 OPTION 1 - SINGLE PHASE, H -PANEL OR G -PANEL CONTROL PANEL, DIRECT DRIVE LEGEND AR - ALTERNATOR ROTOR AS - ALTERNATOR STATOR AVR - AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR CT._ - CURRENT TRANSFORMER EF - EXCITER FIELD MLCB - MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER NB - NEUTRAL BLOCK PME - PERMANENT MAGNET EXCITER I - 1 -BLACK 4 - RED 1 -BLACK 4 - RED 398A -WHITE 399A 398B -WHITE 399B AR DIRECT BRUSHLESSI CORRECT)ON X1 0 © EVJSIONN�'l X1 H1} CT1 CT2 El E3 00 22 33 GENERATOR OUTPUT CUSTOMER CONNECTION E1 -E3 •240VAC E1 -N OR E3 -N *120VAC *NOTE: THE 8TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS BEFORE 2010 THE 7TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS 2010 TO PRESENT "A" = 120/240VAC 60HZ "M" = 110/220VAC 50HZ PAGE 1 OF 12 L REVISION: J -8640-C DATE: 05/06/14 11 22 33 BILE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 0 9 2019 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION DIRECT DRIVE *NOTE: #5 WIRE (OPTIONAL) USED ECT Y ED STATOR THERMAL PROTECT -sr. Y CITY of ruKWtu► JUL 26 2019 1 eil° 000 ! _ PERMIT CENTER PAGE 1 OF 12 J WIRING - DIAGRAM ALTERNATOR G/H-PANEL DRAWING #: OH9846 GROUP G r 1 OPTION 10 - THREE PHASE PARALLEL WYE, H -PANEL OR G -PANEL CONTROL PANEL, DIRECT DRIVE WIRE HARNESS 5r 0 TO H -PANEL OR G -PANEL 1 2 3 «4 2 « 1 2 «1 0 z N3 N2 - N1 J 0 2 6 4 LEGEND AR - ALTERNATOR ROTOR AS - ALTERNATOR STATOR AVR - AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR CT_ - CURRENT TRANSFORMER EF - EXCITER FIELD MLCB - MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER NB - NEUTRAL BLOCK 398A -WHITE 399A 398B -WHITE 399B 398C -WHITE 399C 2 6 DIRECT BRUSHLESSI N1 N2 - N3 MLCB 0 0 0 El E2 E3 GENERATOR OUTPUT CUSTOMER CONNECTION El TO E21 E2 TO E3 *208VAC El TO E3 E1 -N OR E2 -N OR E3 -N = *120VAC *NOTE: THE 8TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS BEFORE 2010 THE 7TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS 2010 TO PRESENT "G" = 120/208VAC 60HZ X1 X1 CT2 CT3 N3 N2 N1 S2 S8 S3 S7 S1 S4 S4 -I S5 S5 S6 S6 S10 S10 S11 S71 512 S12 DIRECT DRIVE AS PAGE 10 OF 12 J L REVISION: J -8640-C DATE: 05/06/14 PAGE 10 OF 12 WIRING - DIAGRAM ALTERNATOR G/H-PANEL DRAWING #: OH9846 T GROUP G OPTION 11 - THREE PHASE SERIES DELTA, H -PANEL OR G -PANEL CONTROL PANEL, GEARBOX (REVERSE ROTATION) WIRE HARNESS TO H -PANEL OR G -PANEL SENSING MODULE 1 2 3 « 4 2 « 2 1 2 « 1 - N3 - N2 - N1 1 2 6 4 LEGEND AR - ALTERNATOR ROTOR AS - ALTERNATOR STATOR AVR - AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR CT_ - CURRENT TRANSFORMER EF - EXCITER FIELD MLCB - MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER NB - NEUTRAL BLOCK I - 1 -BLACK 4 - RED 1 -BLACK 4 - RED 398A -WHITE 399A 3988 -WHITE 399B 398C -WHITE 399C 2 6 Ni N2 - N3 MLCB 0 0 0 El E2 E3 X1 X1 X1 DIRECT BRUSHLESSI 1 1 CT2 CT3 N3 CT1 N2 N1 S9 S3 S2 S8 S1 S7 S4 S4 S5 S5 S6 S6 S10 S10 S11 S11 S12 S12 GENERATOR OUTPUT CUSTOMER CONNECTION El TO E2 E2 TO E3 *208VAC El TO E3 E1 -N OR E2 -N OR E3 -N = *120VAC *NOTE: THE 8TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS BEFORE 2010 THE 7TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS 2010 TO PRESENT 'G- = 120/208VAC 60HZ PAGE 11 OF 12 L REVISION: J -8640-C DATE: 05/06/14 PAGE 11 OF 12 AS J WIRING - DIAGRAM ALTERNATOR G/H-PANEL DRAWING #: 0119846 7 REVISION: J -8640-C DATE: 05/06/14 PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY PAGE 12 OF 12 GROUP G 7 PAGE 12 OF 12 WIRING - DIAGRAM ALTERNATOR G/H-PANEL DRAWING #: 0119846 WIRE HARNESS TO H -PANEL OR G -PANEL TO VOLTAGE SENSING MODULE r 1 <C 3 «4 2 SC 1 2 «1 - N3 - N2 - N1 1 2 6 4 OPTION 2 - THREE PHASE, H -PANEL OR G -PANEL CONTROL PANEL, DIRECT DRIVE, 6 LEAD 1 1 - 1 -BLACK 4 - RED LEGEND AR - ALTERNATOR ROTOR AS - ALTERNATOR STATOR AVR - AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR CT_ - CURRENT TRANSFORMER EF - EXCITER FIELD MLCB - MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER NB - NEUTRAL BLOCK PME - PERMANENT MAGNET EXCITER AR 398A -WHITE 399A 3988 -WHITE 399B 398C -WHITE 399C 2 6 DIRECT BRUSHLESSI S1 S2 - S3 MLCB 0 0 0 El E2 E3 GENERATOR OUTPUT CUSTOMER CONNECTION El TO E2 E2 TO E3 *208VAC OR *480VAC OR *600VAC El TO E3 E1, E2 OR E3 TO NB = *120VAC OR *277VAC OR *346VAC *NOTE: THE 8TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS BEFORE 2010 THE 711-1 DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS 2010 TO PRESENT "G" = 120/208VAC 60HZ "K" = 277/480VAC 60HZ L "L" = 346/600VAC 60HZ X1 X1 X1 H1 CT2 S1 CT1 S2 H CT3 S4 S5 S6 NB S3 S4 S5 S6 6- S15 a- S16 DIRECT DRIVE *NOTE: S15 AND S16, WHERE PRESENT, ARE CAPPED OFF AND NOT USED AS GROUP G T PAGE 2 OF 12 J REVISION: J -8640-C DATE: 05/06/14 PAGE 2 OF 12 WIRING - DIAGRAM ALTERNATOR G/H-PANEL DRAWING #: OH9846 GROUP G WIRE HARNESS 0 1 2 (<4 2 « 1 « 21 OPTION 3 - SINGLE PHASE, H -PANEL OR G -PANEL CONTROL PANEL, GEARBOX (REVERSE ROTATION) 2 6 4 LEGEND AR - ALTERNATOR ROTOR AS - ALTERNATOR STATOR AVR - AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR CT_ - CURRENT TRANSFORMER EF - EXCITER FIELD MLCB - MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER NB - NEUTRAL BLOCK PME - PERMANENT MAGNET EXCITER 398A—WHITE 399A 3988—WHITE 399B 2 6 DIRECT BRUSHLESSI 0 O oz z 00 wr N2 N N1 o 1- I- 0 _o O MLCB O O O 44 11 00 X1 X1 J1 CT1 (1)) CT2 11 22 22 33 El E3 GENERATOR OUTPUT CUSTOMER CONNECTION E1 -E3 •240VAC E1 -N OR E3 -N *120VAC 'NOTE: THE 8TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS BEFORE 2010 THE 711-1 DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS 2010 TO PRESENT "A" = 120/240VAC 60HZ "M" = 110/220VAC 50HZ PAGE 3 OF 12 L REVISION: J -8640-C DATE: 05/06/14 PAGE 3 OF 12 33 s GEARBOX DRIVE AS GEAlRBOX DRIVE PME *NOTE: #5 WIRE (OPTIONAL) USED TO BYPASS STATOR THERMAL PROTECTOR OPTIONAL J WIRING - DIAGRAM ALTERNATOR G/H-PANEL DRAWING #: 0149846 WIRE HARNESS <5r 1- 0 TO H -PANEL OR G -PANEL TO VOLTAGE SENSING MODULE GROUP G 7 OPTION 4 - THREE PHASE, H -PANEL OR G -PANEL CONTROL PANEL, GEARBOX (REVERSE ROTATION), 6 LEAD 1 2 3 CC 4 2 « 1 CC I CC - N3 - N2 - Ni 1 2 6 4 i I - 1 -BLACK 4 - RED 1 -BLACK 4 - RED 398A -WHITE 399A 398B -WHITE 399B 398C -WHITE 399C 2 6 LEGEND AR - ALTERNATOR ROTOR AS - ALTERNATOR STATOR AVR - AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR CT_ - CURRENT TRANSFORMER EF - EXCITER FIELD MLCB - MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER NB - NEUTRAL BLOCK PME - PERMANENT MAGNET EXCITER AR DIRECT 1 BRUSHLESSI S3 S2 - S1 - MLCB 0 0 0 El E2 E3 X1 X1 X1 1 H1 CT2 S3 CT1 S2 H1 CT3 S4 S5 S6 NB GENERATOR OUTPUT CUSTOMER CONNECTION El TO E2 E2 TO E3 *208VAC OR *480VAC OR *600VAC El TO E3 El, E2 OR E3 TO NB = *120VAC OR *277VAC OR *346VAC *NOTE: THE 8TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS BEFORE 2010 THE 7TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS 2010 TO PRESENT "G" = 120/208VAC 60HZ "K" = 277/480VAC 60HZ L "L" = 346/600VAC 60HZ S1 S4 S5 S6 0- S15 13- S16 GEARBOX DRIVE *NOTE: S15 AND S16, WHERE PRESENT, ARE CAPPED OFF AND NOT USED AS PAGE 4 OF 12 J REVISION: J -8640-C DATE: 05/06/14 PAGE 4 OF 12 WIRING - DIAGRAM ALTERNATOR G/H-PANEL DRAWING #: 0119846 GROUP G WIRE HARNESS TO H -PANEL OR G -PANEL SENSING MODULE 0 1 2 3 C 4 2 «1 2 C< 1 2 C 1 N3 N2 N1 OPTION 5 - THREE PHASE, H -PANEL OR G -PANEL CONTROL PANEL, GEARBOX (REVERSE ROTATION) 2 6 4 I - 1 -BLACK 4 - RED 1 -BLACK 1 4 - RED 398A -WHITE 399A 398B -WHITE 3998 398C -WHITE 399C 2 6 LEGEND AR - ALTERNATOR ROTOR AS - ALTERNATOR STATOR AVR - AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR CT_ - CURRENT TRANSFORMER EF - EXCITER FIELD MLCB - MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER NB - NEUTRAL BLOCK PME - PERMANENT MAGNET EXCITER AR DIRECT BRUSHLESS S3 S2 - S1 MLCB 0 0 0 I El E2 E3 GENERATOR OUTPUT CUSTOMER CONNECTION El TO E2 El TO E2 E2 TO E31*480VAC E2 TO E3 R400VAC El TO E3 El TO E3 E1, E2 OR E3 TO NB = *277VAC El, E2 OR E3 TO NB = *231VAC *NOTE: THE 8TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS BEFORE 2010 THE 7TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS 2010 TO PRESENT "K" = 277/480VAC 60HZ "R" = 231/400VAC 50HZ X1 X1 X1 CH1 CT1 H1 CT2 H CT3 S10 S11 S12 PAGE 5 OF 12 REVISION: J -8640-C DATE: 05/06/14 PAGE 5 OF 12 S3 S2 S1 S10 S11 S12 S4 , S7 S5 cS8 S6 S9 AS GEARBOX DRIVE PME S15 -a S16 -a 1 / I OPTIONAL *NOTE: S15 AND S16, WHERE PRESENT, ARE CAPPED OFF AND NOT USED J WIRING - DIAGRAM ALTERNATOR G/H-PANEL DRAWING #: 0119846 GROUP G (- OPTION 6 - THREE PHASE SERIES DELTA, H -PANEL OR G -PANEL CONTROL PANEL, GEARBOX (REVERSE ROTATION) WIRE HARNESS TO H -PANEL OR G -PANEL SENSING MODULE J 0 1 2 3 CC 2 • •1 CC 2 2 (1 N3 N2 N1 2 6 4 1 LEGEND AR - ALTERNATOR ROTOR AS - ALTERNATOR STATOR AVR - AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR CT_ - CURRENT TRANSFORMER EF - EXCITER FIELD MLCB - MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER NB - NEUTRAL BLOCK I - 1 -BLACK 4 - RED 1 -BLACK 4 - RED 398A -WHITE 399A 398B -WHITE 3998 398C -WHITE 399C 2 6 AR DIRECT BRUSHLESSI N1 N2 -N3--I MLCB X1 X1 X1 ()-31 H1 H1 CT2 H1 CT3 S4 S7 NB 0 0 0 El E2 E3 GENERATOR OUTPUT CUSTOMER CONNECTION El TO E2 El TO E2 E2 TO E3 •240VAC E2 TO E3 *200VAC El TO E3 El TO E3 E1 -N OR E2 -N OR E3 -N = *120VAC E1 -N OR E2 -N OR E3 -N = *100VAC *NOTE: THE 8TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS BEFORE 2010 THE 7TH DIGIT ON THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS 2010 TO PRESENT N3 CT1 N2 2 6 N1 S10S3 S2 S12 S1 S11 S4 S7 S5 S8 S6 L S9 GEARBOX DRIVE REVISION: J -8640-C DATE: 05/06/14 'D' = 120/240VAC 10/30 60HZ = 120/240VAC 60HZ 'P' = 100/200VAC 50HZ PAGE 6 OF 12 AS PAGE 6 OF 12 J WIRING - DIAGRAM ALTERNATOR G/H-PANEL DRAWING #: OH9846 r OPTION 7 - THREE PHASE, H -PANEL OR G -PANEL CONTROL PANEL, DIRECT DRIVE w z_ a 0 0 -J z a I 0 TO VOLTAGE SENSING MODULE 3 C 4 2 «1 2 « 1 2 C 1 — N3 — N2 — N1 2 6 4 LEGEND AR — ALTERNATOR ROTOR AS — ALTERNATOR STATOR AVR — AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR CT_ — CURRENT TRANSFORMER EF — EXCITER FIELD MLCB — MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER NB — NEUTRAL BLOCK I — 1 —BLACK 4 — RED 1 —BLACK 4 — RED 398A—WHITE 399A 398B—WHITE 399B 398C—WHITE 399C 2 6 AR DIRECT BRUSHLESSI S1 S2 — S3 MLCB 0 0 0 El E2 E3 X1 X1 CH I X1 H1 CT1 CT2 H1 CT3 El TO E2 E2 TO E3 *480VAC El TO E3 GENERATOR OUTPUT CUSTOMER CONNECTION S1 S2 S3 S10 S10 S11 S11 S12 S12 El TO E2 E2 TO E3 •400VAC El TO E3 GROUP G S4 S7 E1—N OR E2—N OR E3—N = *277VAC E1—N OR E2—N OR E3—N = *231VAC *NOTE: THE 8TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS BEFORE 2010 THE 7TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS 2010 TO PRESENT "K" = 277/480VAC 60HZ "R" = 231/400VAC 50HZ PAGE 7 OF 12 L - REVISION: J -8640-C DATE: 05/06/14 PAGE 7 OF 12 (S8 ' I iS6S9 S15 —a S16 —0 *NOTE: S15 AND S16, WHERE PRESENT, ARE CAPPED OFF AND NOT USED J WIRING - DIAGRAM ALTERNATOR G/H-PANEL DRAWING #: 0119846 GROUP G OPTION 8 - THREE PARALLEL ZIG ZAG, H -PANEL OR G -PANEL CONTROL PANEL, DIRECT DRIVE, 12 LEAD WIRE HARNESS !r 1 2 3 « 4 2 « 1 2 « 1 0 0 m 0 z Zr N3 LLI t' L N1 0 a 1- _1 1 O 1- 1 2 6 4 LEGEND AR - ALTERNATOR ROTOR AS - ALTERNATOR STATOR AVR - AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR CT_ - CURRENT TRANSFORMER EF - EXCITER FIELD MLCB - MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER NB - NEUTRAL BLOCK I I — 1 —BLACK 4 — RED 1 —BLACK 4 — RED 398A—WHITE 399A 398C—WHITE 399C 2 AR I DIRECT BRUSHLESS 2 6 6 N1 N3 X1 X1 H1 H1 GENERATOR OUTPUT CUSTOMER CONNECTION El TO 00 *115VAC OR *120VAC E3 TO 00 El TO E3]*200VAC OR •240VAC *NOTE: THE 811-1 DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS BEFORE 2010 THE 7TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS 2010 TO PRESENT "A" = 120/240VAC 60HZ "N" = 115/200VAC 50HZ 00 CT3 N1 S7 S1 S4 S5 ii€ S10 S11 S3 S9 REVISION: J -8640-C DATE: 05/06/14 PAGE 8 OF 12 S2 S6 S8 S12 AS PAGE 8 OF 12 J WIRING - DIAGRAM ALTERNATOR G/H-PANEL DRAWING #: OH9846 GROUP G WIRE HARNESS OPTION 9 - THREE PHASE SERIES DELTA, H -PANEL OR G -PANEL CONTROL PANEL, DIRECT DRIVE TO H -PANEL OR G -PANEL SENSING MODULE 1 2 3 (<4 2 «1 C2 1 N3 N2 N1 2 6 4 LEGEND AR - ALTERNATOR ROTOR AS - ALTERNATOR STATOR AVR - AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR CT_ - CURRENT TRANSFORMER EF - EXCITER FIELD MLCB - MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER NB - NEUTRAL BLOCK 1 - 1 -BLACK 4 - RED 1 -BLACK 4 - RED 398A -WHITE 399A 398B -WHITE 399B 398C -WHITE 399C 2 6 DIRECT BRUSHLESSI Ni N2 -N3---{ X1 X1 X1 H1 H1� CT2 H CT3 S4 S7 N3 CT1 N2 N1 S2 S12 S3 S10 S4 S7 MLCB O NB SS8 O 0 0 / 6 S9 E1 E2 E3 1 GENERATOR OUTPUT CUSTOMER CONNECTION El TO E2 El TO E2 E2 TO E3 *240VAC E2 TO E3 *200VAC El TO E3 El TO E3 E1 -N OR E2 -N OR E3 -N = *120VAC E1 -N OR E2 -N OR E3 -N = *100VAC *NOTE: THE 8TH DIGIT OF THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS BEFORE 2010 THE 7TH DIGIT ON THE MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES OUTPUT VOLTAGE ON UNITS 2010 TO PRESENT PAGE 9 OF 12 L REVISION: J -8640-C DATE: 05/06/14 "D" = 120/240VAC 10/30 60HZ "J" = 120/240VAC 60HZ "P" = 100/200VAC 50HZ PAGE 9 OF 12 AS J WIRING - DIAGRAM ALTERNATOR G/H-PANEL DRAWING #: OH9846 E 4 GROUP G DPE OR PME STATOR Nw\T1 �w\T3 ALTERNATOR "—MAIN TERMINALS L1K (CTT11 J L L3 CT2 _t -T+1.7 FIELD FIELD 00 k I N CO U 5 5 O Z < < m 07 M M M M I I CORRECTION LTR# 224 — J2 225 — 227 — IFr VI N ALTERNATOR CONNECTIONS FOR 10 UNITS 1 3 00 STATOR T1 DPE OR PME ALTERNATOR "—MAIN TERMINALS L1K (CT1 L J L 1T2 L2 rsrsrsr CT2 , T3 L3 em M FIELD 00 N U 5 5 F1 O Z CO 00) !n y 1/1 M M ALTERNA OR CREMEWEVVINit CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED Ml' AtG 01,2019 • 10 10 City of TI,i kwila g ILDINDIVISION... M 1. O O r1 r1 �1 O r1 01Z CDDC>O a0 Z �> O CD * CO CO OLO N N 0) 01 0) 2 O O nn ao nn COC roan o co > tD CO CO 0) N 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 09 010 0 11 012 IN CONTROL PANEL NCOCCONN m NNNN N LP AGE 1 OF 6 D 8 REVISION: J -1105-B DATE: 10/24/14 co -01 -02 ATS1 03 N 04 Q 321 OPS1 0) A-- EP MPU1 frl(Ooob PAGE 1 OF 6 L' -011 -02 -03 04 WLS1 WTS1 RECE1VEI) °S CITY OF TUKWILA -01 -02 03 04 05 -06 JUL 2 6 2019 I 1 > NN L1 L2 L3 00 I ¢ n N 0 I I I OTS1 OPTIONAL J PERMIT CEIMATIC - DIAGRAM G9.0L G18 TURBO H -PANEL DRAWING #: OK9430 L3 00 -0 El ---0 E2 30 ONLY AUX CONTACT I OPTIONAL MLCB ACCESSORIES SHUNT TRIP FOR CUSTOMER USE. RB3 - 2 005 J2 A-1 15A NOTE 5 - 3 006 J2 007 J2 F RB3-6 — 14 — E o RB3-4 —14L 1 N o RB3-3 — 14 — w z RB3-1 —14N — E600 I- FOR DUAL FUEL UNITS ONLY NOTE 1 0 0 NOTE 2 13 13 — SUPPRESSION DIODE! ili! r L GROUP G (30 ONLY) L1 MLCB L2 / i \ 30 ONLY SPARE OUTPUTS BCH - E3 -9 00 GROUNDED NEUTRAL I (IF SO EQUIPPED) -.J 6 GND MAIN OUTPUT La I 0 0 lx re Q J2 183 0 183 ] 1 1- 0 N 390 0 RS485+ coo J2 391 V 0 RS485- i , o SHLD SHLD J2[ 0 00 ] Z D13 0 D13 j o J2 [ D14 o D14 ] 0 0 0 o oZ W a NOTE 5 15A NOTE 3 14 a I 0 FUSED DC 0 ENGINE RUNNING BLOCK HEATER W/GFCI STANDARD RUN RELAY COM1 NCt i0—NO1 COM2 NC2 10— NO2 NOTE 1 0 ® 14 NOTE 3 I UTILITY POWERED - - OPTIONAL OPTIONAL STATOR CAN HEATER BATTERY WARMER US & CANADA ONLY OIL HEATER US & CANADA ONLY GFCI US & CANADA ONLY 240V RECEPTACLE US & CANADA ONLY w z O a D CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS PAGE 2 OF 6J REVISION: J -1105-B DATE: 10/24/14 PAGE 2 OF 6 SCHEMATIC - DIAGRAM G9.0L G18 TURBO H -PANEL DRAWING #: OK9430 r GROUP G LFP co z M CO0 CL CO 0 FOR DUAL FUEL NG/LPV UNITS ONLY M D_' N 14L RB3-4 N 0 c0 Q z m 0 a N O z O z 0 FOR DUAL FUEL NG/LPL UNITS ONLY I I UNITS ONLY LI_ _ FORUNITSONLY LP AGE 3 OF 6 REVISION: J -1105-B DATE: 10/24/14 PAGE 3 OF 6 J SCHEMATIC - DIAGRAM G9.0L G18 TURBO H -PANEL DRAWING #: OK9430 r t L GROUP G AH1 229 RB1 NOTE 1 03 ES1 15E 44 0 NOTE 5 15A 6 NOTE 3 14 NOTE 5 15A 9 SC 5610 0 1 NOTE 5 15A 12 RB2 4 o DIST 25A 1�0 NOTE 4 15 ° 10 n 0 12 9 PIN D -SUB COM <5 <3 A-2 445 Jt A-1 15B NOTE 6 A-3 R15B J1/ESI A -S 256 J1 A-415 NOTE 4 A-6 56A J1 A-2 A-1 A-3 A-625 J1-22 A-415 NOTE 4 A-6 i"i 389 i i 388 J2 V 387 1 FIELD - 194 J2 NOTE 3 14 6 DPE/PME R1 4 4— 29 4 FIELD+ ALT J2 49 404 J2 406 J2 405 J2 CB 162 —162 2 DPE/PME OFF AUTO MAN r 175 SW1 MAN J2 L 174 AUTO RB1-1 229 AH1 g+ J2 R15 NOTE 4 15 NOTE 2 13 E -STOP ES1 i.` F F1.. 15A NOTE 2 13 F2 10A BCH L1— L1 (HOT) UTILITY N — N (NEUT) GND — GND NOTE 1 0 - (NEG) NOTE 2 13 — + (POS) 10A CHARGER ONLY WW1 ee o -t- maU ma CHARGE CURRENT 0 NOTE 1 15A NOTE 5 R15B J1 15E RB1-4 15A NOTE 5 15B NOTE 6 505 J2 0 NOTE 1 — 803 J1 INS L— 25A RB2-7 REVISION: J -1105-B DATE: 10/24/14 PAGE 4 OF 6 PAGE 4 OF 6j SCHEMATIC - DIAGRAM G9.0L G18 TURBO H -PANEL DRAWING #: 01(9430 r GROUP G AVR CONNECTOR PIN WIRE TO FUNCTION 1 1 FIELD - F ELD 2 194 J2-31 +12VDC 3 6 DPE PME EXCITER OUTPUT 4 4 R1/FIELD + FIELD 5 4 R1/FIELD + FIELD 6 403 J2-8 GATE TRIGGER B 7 404 J2-20 GATE TRIGGER A 10 406 J2-30 ZERO CROSSING INPUT 11 405 J2-19 GROUND (ISO) 13 162 CB EXCITER OUTPUT (AFTER CB) GD CONNECTOR PIN WIRE TO FUNCTION 1 0 GND NOTE 1 4 14 RB1-7 NOTE 3 8 771 GA1-1 THROTTLE DRIVE LO 9 770 GA1-4 THROTTLE DRIVE HI 10 0 GND NOTE 1 12 769 J1-33 THROTTLE PULSE WIDTH MODULATION J1 NOTES: 1) WIRE# 0 IS CHASSIS GROUND (BATTERY-) UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 2) WIRE# 13 IS UNFUSED +12VDC (BATTERY+). 3) WIRE# 14 IS FUSED +12VDC WHEN GENERATOR IS CRANKING OR RUNNING. 4) WIRE# 15 IS FUSED +12VDC WHEN E -STOP IS NOT ACTIVATED. 5) WIRE# 15A IS FUSED +12VDC FOR GENERAL USE. 6) WIRE# 15B IS FUSED +12VDC FOR THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE. 7) WIRE# 15E IS FUSED +12VDC CONTROLLED BY ENGINE CONTROL MODULE PRIOR TO E -STOP. ENGINE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTIONS PIN WIRE TO FUNCTION 1 3 810 MOD -2 MODEM SIGNAL RETURN 4 805 OS -A OXYGEN SENSOR RETURN 5 804 OS -B OXYGEN SENSOR + 8 523R OTS -2 OIL TEMPERATURE RETURN 9 523V OTS -1 OIL TEMPERATURE + 10 R15B RB1A-3/ES1 OVERSPEED/WATCHDOG AVR-6 11 256 RB1A-5 FUEL RELAY GENERATOR C PHASE CURRENT - 12 0 GND NOTE 1 11 14 811 MOD -3 MODEM DATA CARRIER DETECT 15 68V WTS-1 COOLANT TEMPERATURE + 16 803 BCH BATTERY CHARGER CURRENT 17 766R GA -2 THROTTLE POSITION RETURN 18 766V GA -1 THROTTLE POSITION + 19 69R OPS1-3 OIL PRESSURE RETURN 20 69V OPS1-2 OIL PRESSURE + 21 808 AFS AIR/FUEL SOLENOID 22 25 RB2A-5 DELAYED IGNITION RELAY 23 56A RB1A-6 STARTER RELAY 24 0 MPU1-2 MPU1 SIGNAL (-) 25 79 MPU1-3 MPU1 SIGNAL (+) 26 812 MOD -4 MODEM ENABLE 27 754R ATS -2 AIR TEMPERATURE RETURN 28 754V ATS -1 AIR TEMPERATURE + 29 573R WLS-2 COOLANT LEVEL RETURN 30 573V WLS-1 COOLANT LEVEL + 31 68R WTS-2 COOLANT TEMPERATURE RETURN 32 809 MOD -1 MODEM 12V POWER 33 769 GD -12 THROTTLE PULSE WIDTH MODULATION 34 445 RB1A-2 ALARM RELAY 35 15B F2 NOTE 6 J2 PIN WIRE TO FUNCTION 1 391 CUST CON RS485- (TRANSFER SWITCH) 2 388 COM -3 RS232 TX (GENUNK) 3 DI3 CUST CON UNE POWER SIGNAL 4 183 CUST CON REMOTE START 5 174 SW1 "AUTO" START 6 224 IFT V SENSE GENERATOR A PHASE 7 227 IFT V SENSE RETURN 8 403 AVR-6 AVR GATE TRIGGER B 9 399C CT3 GENERATOR C PHASE CURRENT - 10 398C CT3 GENERATOR C PHASE CURRENT + 11 399A CT1 GENERATOR A PHASE CURRENT - 12 398A CT1 GENERATOR A PHASE CURRENT + 13 390 CUST CON RS485+ (TRANSFER SWITCH) 14 387 COM -2 RS232 RX (GENUNK) 15 601 LFP LOW FUEL PRESSURE 16 R15 ES1 EMERGENCY STOP 17 226 IFT V SENSE GENERATOR C PHASE 19 405 AVR-11 AVR GROUND 20 404 AVR-7 AVR GATE TRIGGER A 21 008 RB3A-6 SPARE OUTPUT 4 22 006 RB3A-3 SPARE OUTPUT 2 23 005 RB3A-2 SPARE OUTPUT 1 24 SHLD CUST CON RS485 DRAIN (TRANSFER SWITCH) 25 389 COM -5 RS232 COM (GENUNK) 26 DI4 CUST CON GENERATOR POWER SIGNAL 27 505 BCH BATTERY CHARGER FAIL 28 175 SW1 "MANUAL" START 29 225 IFT V SENSE GENERATOR B PHASE 30 406 AVR-10 AVR ZERO CROSSING INPUT 31 194 AVR-2 AVR +12VDC 33 007 RB3A-5 SPARE OUTPUT 3 34 3998 CT2 GENERATOR B PHASE CURRENT - 35 398B CT2 GENERATOR 6 PHASE CURRENT + LEGEND AFS - AIR/FUEL SOLENOID AH1 - ALARM HORN ALT - DC CHARGE ALTERNATOR ATS_ - AIR TEMPERATURE SENDER AVR - AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR BAT - BATTERY BCH - BATTERY CHARGER CB - CIRCUIT BREAKER COM - COMMUNICATIONS PORT CT_ - CURRENT TRANSFORMER CUST CON - CUSTOMER CONNECTION DB - DIODE BRIDGE DIST - DISTRIBUTOR DPE - EXCITER ES1 F_ FS_ GA_ GD GFCI GND IFT INS J_ LFP MLCB MOD MPU1 - EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH - FUSE - FUEL SOLENOID - GOVERNOR ACTUATOR - GOVERNOR DRIVER - GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPT - GROUND - INTERFACE TRANSFORMER - IGNITION NOISE SUPPRESSION - ENGINE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR - LOW FUEL PRESSURE SWITCH - MAIN UNE CIRCUIT BREAKER - MODEM CONNECTOR - MAGNETIC PICKUP OPS1 - OIL PRESSURE SENDER OS - OXYGEN SENSOR OTS_ - OIL TEMPERATURE SENDER PME - PERMANENT MAGNET EXCITER R1 - RESISTOR RB_ - RELAY BOARD RB_A - RELAY BOARD CONNECTOR SC - STARTER CONTACTOR SM - STARTER MOTOR SW1 - OFF/AUTO/MANUAL SWITCH WLS_ - COOLANT LEVEL SENSOR WTS_ - COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENDER LPAGE 5 OF 6 REVISION: J -1105-B DATE: 10/24/14 PAGE 5 OF 6 J SCHEMATIC - DIAGRAM G9.OL G18 TURBO H -PANEL DRAWING #: OK9430 r b L GROUP G PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK REVISION: J -1105-B DATE: 10/24/14 PAGE 6 OF 6 PAGE 6 OF 6J SCHEMATIC - DIAGRAM G9.0L G18 TURBO H -PANEL DRAWING #: OK9430 f M1TSUBISHi ilk ELECTRIC SPLIT- SYSTEM HEAT PUMP •tursi CERTIFIED® www.ahridirectory.org Unitary Small HP AHRI Standard 210/240 Certification applies Only when the complete system IS listed with AHRI. (G) usCONFORMS TO ANSI/UL STD, 1995 CERTIFIED TO CAN/CSA STD. C22.2 NO.236 MODEL MXZ-2C20NA2 SERVICE REF. MXZ-2C20NA2-U1 Hz MAX.VOLTAGE 253 VOLTS PHASE UNIT SUPPLY 208/230 1 60 MIN. VOLTAGE 198 APPROVED FOR HACR BREAKERS OR TIME DELAY FUSES. MAX.FUSE 20 AMPS MIN.CIRCUIT AMPACITY 17.2 W (OUTPUT) FAN MOTOR 64 R. L. A. L. R. A. COMPRESSOR 10.7 15.5 REFRIGERANT R410A FACTORY CHARGED IF THE LIQUID LINE EXCEED PER ADDITIONAL 5FT. LIQUIC INSTALLER TO MARK: TOT DESIGN PRESSURE * SUITABLE FOR OU WEIGHT J26. SERIAL NO. 5 LBS. 15 OZ. 1.2 FT., PLUS 1.08 01 WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAN CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH. DISCONNECT ALL REMOTE ELECTRIC POWER SUPPLIES BEFORE SERVICIV, A 1 II•••••••••, mtMITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Split -type Air -Conditioner MXZ-2C20NA2 Installation Manual • This manual only describes the installation of outdoor unit. When installing the indoor unit, refer to the installation manual of indoor unit. Any structural alterations necessary for installation must comply with local build- ing code requirements. FILE For INSTALLER Notice d'installation • Cette notice ne decrit que ['installation de l'appareil exterieur. Lors de ('installation de I'appareil interieur, consultez la notice d'installation de cet appareil. Toute alteration structureile requise pour ('installation doit etre conforme aux exi- gences du code du batiment local. Destinee a l'INSTALLMEUR' Manual de instalacion • En este manual solo se describe la instalacion de la unidad exterior. Para instalar la unidad interior, consulte el manual de instalacion de dicha unidad. Cualquier modificacion estructural necesaria para Ilevar a cabo la instalacion de- bera cumplir las normas de edificacion locales. Para el INSTALADOR CORRECTION LTR# BEVISION NOJ MI8OOO& REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 0 9 2019 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION English Francais Espanol RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 2 6 2019 PERMIT CENTER 1. BEFORE INSTALLATION 1 2. OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION 3 3. FLARING WORK AND PIPE CONNECTION 5 4. PURGING PROCEDURES, LEAK TEST, AND TEST RUN 5 5. PUMPING DOWN 7 1 Required Phillips screwdriver Level Scale Utility knife or scissors Torque wrench Wrench (or spanner) Tools for Installation 5/32 in. (4 mm) hexagonal wrench Flare tool for R410A Gauge manifold for R410A Vacuum pump for R410A Charge hose for R410A Pipe cutter with reamer 1. BEFORE INSTALLATION 1-1. THE FOLLOWING SHOULD ALWAYS BE OBSERVED FOR SAFETY • Be sure to read "THE FOLLOWING SHOULD ALWAYS BE OBSERVED FOR SAFETY" before installing the air conditioner. • Be sure to observe the wamings and cautions specified here as they include important items related to safety. • After reading this manual, be sure to keep it together with the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS for future reference. A WARNING (Could lead to death or serious injury etc ) • Do not install the unit by yourself (user). Incomplete installation could cause fire or electric shock, injury due to the unit falling, or leakage of water. Consult the dealer from whom you purchased the unit or a qualified installer. ■ Follow the instructions detailed in the installation manual. Incomplete installation could cause fire or electric shock, injury due to the unit falling, or leakage of water. ■ When installing the unit, use appropriate protective equipment and tools for safety. Failure to do so could cause injury. ■ Install the unit securely in a place that can bear the weight of the unit. If the installation location cannot bear the weight of the unit, the unit could fall causing injury. ■ Perform electrical work according to the installation manual and be sure to use an exclusive circuit Do not connect other electrical appliances to the circuit If the capacity of the power circuit is insufficient or there is incomplete electrical work, it could result in a fire or an electric shock. • Ground the unit correctly. Do not connect the ground wire to a gas pipe, water pipe, lightning rod or telephone ground. Defective grounding could cause electric shock. ■ Do not damage the wires. Damaged wires could cause fire. ■ Be sure to shut off the main power when setting up the indoor P.C. board or wiring. Failure to do so could cause electric shock. ■ Use the specified wires to securely connect the indoor and outdoor units. Attach the wires firmly to avoid applying stress to the terminal block. Improper connection could cause fire. ■ Do not install the unit in a place where flammable gas may leak. If gas leaks and accumulates around the unit, it could cause an explosion. ■ Do not use intermediate connection of the power cord or the extension cord. Do not connect many devices to one AC outlet. It could cause a fire or an electric shock. ■ Use the parts provided or specified parts for the installation work. The use of defective parts could cause an injury or leakage of water due to a fire, an electric shock, the unit falling, etc. • When plugging the power supply plug into the outlet, make sure that there is no dust, blockage, or loose parts both in the outlet and on the plug. Verify that the power supply plug is completely in the outlet. If there is dust, blockage, or loose parts on the power supply plug or the outlet, it could cause electric shock or fire. If loose parts are found on the power supply plug, replace it. • Securely attach the electrical cover to the indoor unit and the service panel to the outdoor unit. If the electrical cover of the indoor unit and/or the service panel of the outdoor unit are not attached securely, dust, water, etc. could collect in the unit and could cause a fire or an electric shock. ■ When installing, relocating, or servicing the unit, make sure that no substance other than the specified refrigerant (R410A) enters the refrigerant circuit. Any presence of foreign substance such as air can cause abnormal pressure rise and may result in explosion or injury. The use of any refrigerant other than that specified for the system will cause mechanical failure, system malfunction, or unit breakdown. In the worst case, this could lead to a serious impediment to securing product safety. • Do not discharge the refrigerant into the atmosphere. Check that the refrigerant gas does not leak after installation has been completed. If refrigerant leaks during installation, ventilate the room. If refrigerant comes in contact with a fire, harmful gas could be generated. If refrigerant gas leaks indoors, and comes into contact with the flame of a fan heater, space heater, stove, etc., harmful gases will be generated. • Use appropriate tools and piping materials for installation. The pressure of R410A is 1.6 times higher than R22. Not using the appropri- ate tools and materials, or improper installation could cause the pipes to burst causing an injury. ■ When pumping down the refrigerant, stop the compressor before discon- necting the refrigerant pipes. If the refrigerant pipes are disconnected while the compressor is running and the stop valve is open, air could be drawn in and the pressure in the refrigera- tion cycle could become abnormally high, causing the pipes to burst. • When installing the unit, securely connect the refrigerant pipes before starting the compressor. If the compressor is started before the refrigerant pipes are connected and the stop valve is open, air could be drawn in and the pressure in the refrigeration cycle could become abnormally high, causing the pipes to burst. ■ Fasten a flare nut with a torque wrench as specified in this manual. If fastened too tight, a flare nut could break and cause refrigerant leakage. • Install the unit according to national wiring regulations. • Be sure to install a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) circuit breaker. Failure to install a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) circuit breaker may result in electric shock or fire. A CAUTION (Could lead to serious injury when operated incorrectly ) • Perform the drainage/piping work securely according to the installation manual. If there is defect in the drainage/piping work, water could drip from the unit, and damage household items. ■ Do not touch the air inlet or the aluminum fins of the outdoor unit. This could cause injury. • Do not install the outdoor unit where small animals may live. If small animals enter the unit and damage its electrical parts, it could cause a malfunction, smoke emission, or fire. Keep the area around the unit clean. 1-2. SPECIFICATIONS Model Power supply Pipe length and height difference *1, *2, *3, *4, *5, *6, *8 Rated Voltage Frequency Max. pipe length per indoor unit / for multi -system Max. height difference Max. no. of bends per indoor unit / for multi system Refrigerant adjustment A'7 MXZ-2C20NA2 208 / 230 V 60 Hz 82 ft. (25 m) / 164 ft. (50 m) 49 ft. (15 m) 25 / 50 1.08 oz each 5 ft. (20 g/m) *1 Never use pipes w'th thickness less than specified The pressure resistance will be insufficient. *2 Use a copper pipe or a copper -alloy seamless pipe. *3 Be careful not to crush or bend the pipe during pipe bending. *4 Refrigerant pipe bending radius must be 4 in. (100 mm) or more. *5 Insulation material : Heat resisting foam plastic 0.045 specific gravity *6 Be sure to use the insulation of specified thickness. Excessive thickness may cause incorrect installation of the indoor unit and insufficient thickness may cause dew drippage. *7 If pipe length exceeds 131.2 ft. (40 m), additional refrige ant (R410A) charge is required. (No additional charge is required for pipe length less than 131.2 ft. (40 m).) Additional refrigerant (ft.) = A x (pipe length (ft.) - 131.2) 5 Additional refrigerant (m) = A x (pipe length (m) - 40) *8 The piping specification table does not provide a minimum line set length. However, indoor units with connected piping length less than 10 ft. (3m) could produce intermittent noise during normal system operation in very quiet envi- ronments. Please be aware of this important information when installing and locating the indoor unit within the conditioned space. Note: When connecting the MFZ-KJ series indoor unit(s) to this outdoor unit, charge additional refrigerant according to the instructions in the table below. No. of MFZ-KJ indoor units Pipe length (L ) 40 m or less More than 40 m 1 unit 100 g additional (Total 2800 g) 100 g + {(L -40) m x 20 g/m)} 2 units 200 g additional (Total 2900 g) 200 g + {(L -40) m x 20 g/m)} En -1 1-3. SELECTING OPTIONAL DIFFERENT -DIAMETER JOINTS If the diameter of connection pipe does not match the port size of outdoor unit, use optional different -diameter joints according to the following table. (Unit: inch (mm)) Port size of outdoor unit Optional different -diameter joints (port size of outdoor unit —• diameter of connection pipe) MXZ-2C20NA2 Liquid / Gas 3/8 (9.52) —, 1/2 (12.7) : MAC-A454JP-E Refer to the installation manual of indoor unit for the diameter of connection pipe of indoor unit. A, B UNIT 1/4 (6.35) / 3/8 (9.52) 1-4. SELECTING THE INSTALLATION LOCATION • Where it is not exposed to strong wind. If the outdoor unit is exposed to a wind during defrosting, the defrosting time will be longer. • Where airflow is good and dustless. • Where rain or direct sunshine can be avoided as much as possible. • Where neighbours are not annoyed by operation sound or hot (or cool) air. • Where rigid wall or support is available to prevent the increase of operation sound or vibration. • Where there is no risk of combustible gas leakage. • When installing the unit, be sure to secure the unit legs. • Where it is at least 10 ft. (3 m) away from the antenna of TV set or radio. Op- eration of the air conditioner may interfere with radio or TV reception in areas where reception is weak. An amplifier may be required for the affected device. • Install the unit horizontally. • Please install it in an area not affected by snowfall or blowing snow. In areas with heavy snow, please install a canopy, a pedestal and/or some baffle boards. Note: It is advisable to make a piping loop near outdoor unit so as to reduce vibration transmitted from there. FREE SPACE REQUIRED AROUND OUTDOOR UNIT 1. Obstacles above When there is no obstacle in front and on the sides of the unit, it is allowed to install the unit where an obstacle is above the unit only if the space shown in the figure is provided. 19.11/16 (500) or more 3-15/16 (100) or more 3. Obstacles in front (blowing) only When there is an obstacle in front of the unit as shown in the figure, open space above, behind, and on the sides of the unit is required. 19-11/16 (500) or more 5. Obstacles in front, behind and on side(s) • When installing the unit in an area that is enclosed with walls such as a verandah, be sure to have enough space as shown below. In this case, the air conditioning capacity and power consumption might deteriorate. • When installing two or more units, do not install the units in front or behind each other. 7-7/8 (200) or more 3-15/16 (100) or more TIM 0 19-11/16 (500) 11111174 or more Height of the obstacle is 47-1/4 (1200) or less 13-25/32 (350) or more 19-11/16 (500) or more Note: When operating the air conditioner in low outside temperature, be sure to follow the instructions described below. • Never install the outdoor unit in a place where its air inlet/outlet side may be exposed directly to wind. • To prevent exposure to wind, install the outdoor unit with its air inlet side facing the wall. • To prevent exposure to wind, it is recommended to install a baffle board on the air outlet side of the outdoor unit. Avoid the following places for installation where air conditioner trouble is liable to occur. • Where flammable gas could leak. • Where there is much machine oil. • Salty places such as the seaside. • Where sulfide gas is generated such as hot spring, sewage, waste water. • Where there is high -frequency or wireless equipment. • Where there is emission of high levels of VOCs, including phthalate com- pounds, formaldehyde, etc., which may cause chemical cracking. 2. Front (blowing) side open As long as space indicated in the figure is provided, it is allowed to install the unit where obstacles are behind and on the sides of the unit. i (No obstacle above the unit) 3-15/16 (100) or more 7-7/8 (200) or more 4. Obstacles in front and behind 13-25/32 (350) or more The unit can be used by attaching an optional outdoor blowing guide (MAC-856SG) (but both sides and top are open). i3-15/16 (100) or more ////////////// 19-11/ 6 (500) or more 6. Service space Blowing guide (MAC-856SG) Provide space for service and maintenance as shown in the figure. Service space 3-15/16 (100) or more 3-15/16 (100) or more 13-25/32 (350) or more 19-11/16 (500) or more 13-25/32 (350) or more (Unit: inch (mm)) En -2 1-5. INSTALLATION DIAGRAM (D) Open as a rule More than 19-11/16 in. (500 mm) if the front and both sides are open (C) (E) (J) More than 3-15/16 in. (100 mm) Open as a rule More than 19-11/16 in. (500 mm) if the back, both sides and top are open After the leak test, apply insulat- ing material tightly so that there is no gap. When the piping is to be attached to a wall containing metals (tin plated) or metal netting, use a chemically treated wooden piece 25/32 in. (20 mm) or thicker between the wall and the piping or wrap 7 to 8 turns of insulation vinyl tape around the piping. To use existing piping, perform COOL operation for 30 minutes and pump down before removing the old air conditioner. Remake flare according to the dimension for new refrigerant. More than 3-15/16 in. (100 mm) More than 7-7/8 in. (200 mm) if there are obstacles to both sides (F) More than 13-25/32 in. (350 mm) 6-1/2 Air inlet Outdoor unit installation 37-7/8 2 -U -shape notched holes (Base bolt M8) 2-3/8 x 13/16 f Air outlet oval holes (Base bolt M8) Unit : inch PARTS TO BE PROVIDED AT YOUR SITE (A) Power supply cord' 1 (B) Indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire* 1 (C) Extension pipe 1 (D) Wall hole cover 1 (E) Piping tape 1 (F) Extension drain hose (or soft PVC hose, 19/32 in. (15 mm) inner diameter or hard PVC pipe VP16) 1 (G) Refrigeration oil Little amount (H) Putty 1 (I) Pipe fixing band 2 to 7 (J) Fixing screw for (I) 2 to 7 (K) Wall hole sleeve 1 (L) Soft PVC hose, 15 mm inner diameter or hard PVC pipe VP16 for drain socket (1) 1 ' Note: Place indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (B) and power supply cord (A) at least 3 ft. (1 m) away from the TV antenna wire. The "Q'ty" for (B) to (K) in the above table is quantity to be used per indoor unit. Units should be installed by licensed contractor according to local code requirements. Air inlet 4-10 x 21 oval holes (Base bolt M8) Outdoor unit installation 840 2 -U -shape notched holes (Base bolt M8) Unit: mm 1-6. DRAIN PIPING FOR OUTDOOR UNIT Please perform the drain piping work only when draining from one place. 1) Choose one hole to discharge drain and install the drain socket (1) to the hole. 2) Close the rest of the holes with the drain caps (2). 3) Connect the soft PVC hose (L) of 15 mm in the inside diameter on the market with the drain socket (1) and lead drain. Note: Install the unit horizontally. Do not use the drain socket (1) and the drain caps (2) in the cold regions. Drain may freeze and it makes the fan stop. The outdoor unit produces condensate during the heating operation. Select the installation place to ensure to prevent the outdoor unit and/or the grounds from being wet by drain water or damaged by frozen drain water. 2. OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION 2-1. INSTALLING THE UNIT • Be sure to fix the unit's legs with bolts when installing it. • Be sure to install the unit firmly to ensure that it does not fall by an earthquake or a gust. • Refer to the figure in the below for concrete foundation. Make the foundation MI: deeper. 1 ���� .... En -3 ////A Fix here with M8 bolts. Make the foundation wider. 2-2. CONNECTING WIRES FOR OUTDOOR UNIT • Be sure to use special circuits for room air conditioner. • Wiring work should be based on applicable technical standards. • Wiring connections should be made following the diagram. • Screws should be tightened so they won't loosen. 1) Remove the service panel. 2) Remove the conduit plate. 3) Attach the conduit connector to conduit plate with lock nut then secure it to the unit with screws. Be sure to attach the conduit connectors in the correct locations according to their sizes. 4) Connect ground wires to the TB bed. 5) Loosen terminal screw, and connect indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (B) from the indoor unit correctly on the terminal block. Be careful not to make mis-wiring. Fix the wire to the terminal block securely so that no part of its core is appeared, and no external force is conveyed to the connecting section of the terminal block. 6) Firmly tighten the terminal screws to prevent them from loosening. After tightening, pull the wires lightly to confirm that they do not move. 7) Perform 5) and 6) for each indoor unit. 8) Connect power supply cord (A). 9) Close the service panel securely. Make sure that 3-2. PIPE CONNEC- TION is completed. Screws ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS OUTDOOR UNIT MXZ-2C20NA2 Power supply (V, PHASE, Hz) 208/230, 1, 60 Max. Fuse size (time delay) (A) 20 Min. Circuit Ampacity (A) 17.2 Fan motor (FLA)1.77 Com- pressor (R.L.A) 10.7 (L.R.A) 15.5 Control voltage Indoor unit -Remote controller : (Wireless) Indoor unit -Outdoor unit : DC 12-24 V Conduit connector Trade size of conduit (a) Power supply 3/4 in. (b) Indoor/outdoor 1/2 in. Service panel Remark: • Use a ring tongue terminal in order to connect a ground wire to terminal. INDOOR UNIT Terminal block 1 S1S2Sa QR • to to to 208/230 V AC 1 phase 60 Hz\ 7 Terminal block � n Grounding terminal * Disconnect switch Grounding terminal' Terminal block SHS253 C: • ,?o 4 / Terminal block 1-3/8 in. (35 mm) 5/8 in. (15 mm) Lead wire Power supply 208/230 V AC 1 phase 2 wires 60 Hz rte, Grounding .1___'_ terminal OUTDOOR UNIT Terminal block Ground J Note: • Removing the handle increases the effectiveness of the wiring operation. • Be sure to reinstall the handle. Screw Conduit connector Conduit plate • Connect wires to the matching numbers of terminals. • Be sure to attach each screw to its correspondent terminal when securing the cord and/or the wire to the terminal block. CONNECTING WIRES AND CONNECTING GROUND WIRE • Use solid conductor Min. AWG14 or stranded conductor Min. AWG14. • Use double insulated copper wire with 600 V insulation. • Use copper conductors only. Follow local electrical code. POWER SUPPLY CABLE • Use solid or stranded conductor Min. AWG8. • Use copper conductors only. • Follow local electrical code. GROUND WIRE • Use solid or stranded conductor Min. AWG8. • Use copper conductors only. • Follow local electrical code. 8 WARNING: • Use the indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire that meets the Stand- ards to connect the indoor and outdoor units and fix the wire to the terminal block securely so that no extemal force is conveyed to the connecting section of the terminal block. An incomplete connection or fixing of the wire could result in a fire. For future servicing, give extra length to the connecting wires. • Turn on the main power when the ambient temperature is -4°F (-20°C) or higher. • Under conditions of -4°F (-20°C), it needs at least 4hr stand by before the units operate in order to warm the electrical parts. En -4 A WARNING When installing the unit, securely connect the refrigerant pipes before starting the compressor. ,3. FLARING WORK AND PIPE CONNECTIO 3-1. FLARING WORK 1) Cut the copper pipe correctly with pipe cutter. (Fig. 1, 2) 2) Completely remove all burrs from the cut cross section of pipe. (Fig. 3) • Aim the copper pipe downward while removing burrs to prevent burrs from dropping in the pipe. 3) Remove flare nuts attached to indoor and outdoor units, then put them on pipe having completed burr removal. (Not possible to put them on after flaring work.) 4) Flaring work (Fig. 4, 5). Firmly hold copper pipe in the dimension shown in the table. Select A inch (mm) from the table according to the tool selected. 5) Check • Compare the flared work with Fig. 6. • If flare is noted to be defective, cut off the flared section and do flaring work again. Copper pipe � Fig. 1 Good 90° No good lightening torque Copper pipe Copper Spare reamer * Pipe cutter I 1 Fig. 3 9 !13Burr Tilted Uneven Burred Fig. 2 Flaring tool - -, y r� ° Clutch type Wing nut type Fig. 4 Die Flare A J kgf•cm pipe Smooth all around Inside is shin- ing without any sseshin- scratches. Even length all around Fig. 6 0.04 to 0.06 (1.0 to 1.5) W '- V nut 13.7 to 17.7 Fig. 5 Pipe diameter [inch (mm)1 B [inch (mm)] A [inch (mm)] lightening torque Clutch type tool for R410A Clutch type tool for R22 Wing nut type tool for R22 ft -Ib N•m kgf•cm 1/4 (06.35) 21/32 (17) 0 to 0.02 (0 to 0.5) 0.04 to 0.06 (1.0 to 1.5) 0.06 to 0.08 (1.5 to 2.0) 10 to 13 13.7 to 17.7 140 to 180 3/8 (09.52) 7/8 (22) 25 to 30 34.3 to 41.2 350 to 420 1/2 (012.7) 1-1/32 (26) 0.08 to 1.0 (2.0 to 2.5) 36 to 42 49.0 to 56.4 500 to 575 5/8 (015.88) 1-5/32 (29) 54 to 58 73.5 to 78.4 750 to 800 3-2. PIPE CONNECT ON 1) Apply a thin coat of refrigeration oil (G) to the flared ends of the pipes and the pipe connections of the outdoor unit. 2) Align the center of the pipe with that of the pipe connections of the outdoor unit, then hand tighten the flare nut 3 to 4 turns. 3) Tighten the flare nut with a torque wrench as specified in the table. • Over -tightening may cause damage to the flare nut, resulting in refrigerant leakage. • Be sure to wrap insulation around the piping. Direct contact with the bare piping may result in bums or frostbite. 3-3. INSULATION AND TAPING 1) Cover piping joints with pipe cover. 2) For outdoor unit side, surely insulate every piping including valves. 3) Using piping tape (E), apply taping starting from the entry of outdoor unit. • Stop the end of piping tape (E) with tape (with adhesive agent attached). • When piping have to be arranged through above ceiling, closet or where the temperature and humidity are high, wind additional commercially sold insulation to prevent condensation. A CAUTION When there are the ports which are not used, make sure their nuts are tightened securely. 4. PURGING PROCEDURES, LEAK TEST, AND TEST RUN 4-1. PURGING PROCEDURES AND LEAK TEST 1) Remove service port cap of stop valve on the side of the outdoor unit gas pipe. (The stop valves are fully closed and covered in caps in their initial state.) 2) Connect gauge manifold valve and vacuum pump to service port of stop valve on the side of the outdoor unit gas pipe. 3) Run the vacuum pump. (Vacuumize for more than 15 minutes.) 4) Check the vacuum with gauge manifold valve, then close gauge manifold valve, and stop the vacuum pump. 5) Leave as it is for one or two minutes. Make sure the pointer of gauge manifold valve remains in the same position. Confirm that pressure gauge shows -14.7 psi [Gauge] (-0.101 MPa). 6) Remove gauge manifold valve quickly from service port of stop valve. 7) Fully open all stop valves on the gas pipe and the liquid pipe. Operating without fully opening lowers the performance and this causes trouble. 8) Refer to 1-2., and charge the prescribed amount of refrigerant if needed. Be sure to charge slowly with liquid refrigerant. Otherwise, composition of the refrigerant in the system may be changed and affect performance of the air conditioner. 9) Tighten cap of service port to obtain the initial status. 10)Leak test En -5 4 to 5 tums *Close •Openr" Hexagonal wrench Stop valve cap (Torque 19.6 to 29.4 N•m, 200 to 300 kgf•cm) -0.101MPa Compound pressure (-760 mmHg) gauge (for R410A) Pressure gauge (for R410A) 4" -valve Gauge manifold (for R410A) Handle High Charge hose (for R410A) Service port cap (Torque 13.7 to 17.7 N•m, 140 to 180 kgf•cm) Handle Low Stop valve Stop valve for GAS for LIQUID Precautions when us- ing the control valve A Close Open Control valve Body Service port Charge hose (for R410A) //tN/// '/1 Vacuum'' pump (for R410A) When attaching the control valve to the service port. valve core may deform or loosen if excess Pres- sure is applied. This may cause gas leak. When attaching the control valve to the service port, make sure that the valve core is in closed position, and then tighten part A. Do not tighten part A or tum the body when valve core is in open position. 4-2. GAS CHARGE Perform gas charge to unit. 1) Connect gas cylinder to the service port of stop valve. 2) Perform air purge of the pipe (or hose) coming from refrigerant gas cylinder. 3) Replenish specified amount of the refrigerant, while operating the air conditioner for cooling. Note: In case of adding refrigerant, comply with the quantity specified for the refrigerating cycle. CAUTION: When charging the refrigerant system with additional refrigerant, be sure to use liquid refrigerant. Adding gas refrigerant may change the composition of the refrigerant in the system and affect normal operation of the air conditioner. Also, charge the liquid refrigerant slowly, otherwise the compressor will be locked. To maintain the high pressure of the gas cylinder, warm the gas cylinder with warm water (under 104°F (40°C)) during cold season. But never use naked fire or steam. 4-3. REMOVING THE MAINTENANCE PANEL The setting of Dip Switch on the outdoor controller board can be changed without removing the front panel. Follow the procedures below to remove the maintenance panel and set the Dip Switch. 1) Remove screw(s) which fix the maintenance panel. 2) Remove the maintenance panel, and perform necessary settings. 3) Install the maintenance panel. Note: Make sure to fix the maintenance panel securely. Incomplete installation could cause malfunction. Union - Union Union Union Refrigerant gas cylinder operating valve (for R410A) Model Indoor unit MXZ-2C20NA2 ®—© OA CI 11 0 I^ 1_Refrigerantgas cylinder fo R410A with siphon Charge hose (for R410A) Refrigerant (liquid) Electronic scale for refrigerant charging Maintenance panel 4-4. LOCKING THE OPERATION MODE OF THE AIR CONDITIONER (COOL, DRY, HEAT) • Description of the function: With this function, once the operation mode is locked to either COOUDRY mode 9 0 0 ❑ od+ or HEAT mode, the air conditioner operates in that mode only. U o LED • Changing the setting is required to activate this function. Please explain about 8 E /3 this function to your customers and ask them whether they want to use it. D D /SW1 o .000 •66 OCO 00 1 141 SW8711 SW2 [How to lock the operation mode] 1) Be sure to tum off the main power for the air conditioner before making the setting. 2) Set the "3" of SW1 on the outdoor controller board to ON to enable this function. 3) To lock the operation mode in COOUDRY mode, set the "4" of SW1 on the outdoor controller board to OFF. To lock the operation in HEAT mode, set the same switch to ON. 4) Tum on the main power for the air conditioner. SW1 9 00El 1 2 3 4 5 61 COOUDRY SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 HEAT 4-5. LOWERING THE OPERATION NOISE OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT • Description of the function: With this function, the operating noise of the outdoor unit can be lowered by reducing the operation load, for example, during nighttime in COOL mode. However, please note that the cooling and heating capacity may lower if this function is activated. • Changing the setting is required to activate this function. Please explain about this function to your customers and ask them whether they want to use it. [How to lower the operating noise] 1) Be sure to turn off the main power for the air conditioner before making the setting. 2) Set the "5" of SW1 on the outdoor controller board to ON to enable this function. 3) Turn on the main power for the air conditioner. Sw1 Tunon 1 2 3 4 6 6 Lower the operating noise En -6 A WARNING 4-6. TEST RUN • Test runs of the indoor units should be performed individually. See the installation manual coming with the indoor unit, and make sure all the units operate properly. • If the test run with all the units is performed at once, possible erroneous connections of the refrigerant pipes and the indoor/outdoor unit connecting wires cannot be detected. Thus, be sure to perform the test run one by one. About the restart protective mechanism Once the compressor stops, the restart preventive device operates so the compressor will not operate for 3 minutes to protect the air conditioner. Wiring/piping correction function This unit has a wiring/piping correction function which corrects wiring and piping combination. When there is possibility of incorrect wiring and piping combination, and confirming the combination is difficult, use this function to detect and correct the combination by following the procedures below. Make sure that the following is done. • Power is supplied to the unit. • Stop valves are open. Note: During detection, the operation of the indoor unit is controlled by the outdoor unit. During detection, the indoor unit automatically stops operation. This is not a mal- function. Procedure Press the piping/wiring correction switch (SW871) 1 minute or more after tuming on the power supply. • Correction completes in 10 to 15 minutes. When the correction is completed, its result is shown by LED indication. Details are described in the following table. • To cancel this function during its operation, press the piping/wiring correction switch (SW871) again. • When the correction completed without error, do not press the piping/wiring correction switch (SW871) again. When the result is "Not completed", press the piping/wiring correction switch (SW871) again to cancel this function. Then, confirm the wiring and piping combination in a conventional manner by operating the indoor units one by one. • The operation is done while the power is supplied. Make sure not to contact parts other than the switch, including the P.C. board. This may cause electric shock or burn by hot parts and live parts around the switch. Contacting the live parts may cause P.C. board damage. • To prevent electronic control P.C. board damage, make sure to perform static elimination before operating this function. • This function does not operate when the outside temperature is 0°C or below. LED indication during detection: LED1 LED2 LED3 (Red) (Yellow) (Green) Lighted Lighted Once Result of piping/wiring correction function LED1 (Red) LED2 (Yellow) LED3 (Green) Result Lighted Not lighted Lighted Completed (Problem corrected or normal) Once Once Once Not completed (Detection failed) Other indications Refer to "SAFETY PRE - CAUTIONS WHEN LED BLINKS" located behind the top panel. 4-7. EXPLANATION TO THE USER • Using the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, explain to the user how to use the air conditioner (how to use the remote controller, how to remove the air filters, how to remove or put the remote controller in the remote controller holder, how to clean, precautions for operation, etc.). • Recommend the user to read the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS carefully. �5. PUMPINGDOWN When relocating or disposing of the air conditioner, pump down the system following the procedure below so that no refrigerant is released into the atmosphere. 1) Turn off the breaker. 2) Connect the gauge manifold valve to the service port of the stop valve on the gas pipe side of the outdoor unit. 3) Fully close the stop valve on the liquid pipe side of the outdoor unit. 4) Turn on the breaker. 5) Start the emergency COOL operation on all the indoor units. 6) When the pressure gauge shows 0.1 to 0 psi [Gauge] (0.05 to 0 MPa), fully close the stop valve on the gas pipe side of the outdoor unit and stop the operation. (Refer to the indoor unit installation manual about the method for stopping the operation.) * If too much refrigerant has been added to the air conditioner system, the pressure may not drop to 0.1 to 0 psi [Gauge] (0.05 to 0 MPa), or the protection function may operate due to the pressure increase in the high-pressure refrigerant circuit. If this occurs, use a refrigerant collecting device to collect all of the refrigerant in the system, and then recharge the system with the correct amount of refrigerant after the indoor and outdoor units have been relocated. 7) Turn off the breaker. Remove the pressure gauge and the refrigerant piping. When pumping down the refrigerant, stop the compressor before disconnecting the refrigerant pipes. The compressor may burst and cause injury if any foreign substance, such as air, enters the pipes. En -7 1. AVANT L'INSTALLATION 1 2. INSTALLATION DE L'APPAREIL EXTERIEUR 3 3. TRAVAUX D'EVASEMENT ET RACCORDEMENT DES TUYAUX 5 4. PROCEDURES DE PURGE, TEST DE CONTROLE DES FUITES ET ESSAI DE FONCTIONNEMENT 5 5. PURGE 7 Outils necessaires a ('installation Toumevis Phillips Cle hexagonale de 5/32 po. (4 mm) Niveau Outil d'evasement pour le modele R410A Regle graduee Tubulure de jauge pour le modele R410A Couteau tout usage ou paire de ciseaux Pompe a vide pour le modele R410A Cle dynamometrique Tuyau de charge pour le modele R410A Ce a ouverture fixe (ou cls simple) Coupe-tuyau avec alesoir 1. AVANT LINSTALLATION 1-1. INSTRUCTIONS A RESPECTER A TOUT MOMENT PAR MESURE DE SECURITE • Veuillez lire les "INSTRUCTIONS A RESPECTER A TOUT MOMENT PAR MESURE DE SECURITE" avant de proceder a ('installation du climatiseur. • Veuillez respecter scrupuleusement les mises en garde contenues dans cette notice car elles concement des points essentiels a la securite. • Apres avoir Iu Ia presente notice, veuillez Ia conserver avec les NOTICE D'UTILISATION de ('appareil pour pouvoir Ia consulter ulterieurement. A AVERTISSEMENT (Peut entrainer la mort ou des blessures graves etc r ■ N'installez pas ('unite vous-mime (utilisateur). Une installation incomplete peut etre a I'origine d'un incendie, d'une electrocution, de blessures suite ala chute de l'appareil ou de fuites d'eau. Consulter un revendeur local ou un installateur agree. • Suivez les instructions detaillees dans le manuel d'installation. Une installation incomplete peut etre a I'origine d'un incendie, d'un choc elec- trique ou de blessures a la suite de la chute de 1' unite ou de fuites d'eau. ■ Lors de ('installation de ('appareil, utiliser I'equipement de protection et les outils adequats, par mesure de securite. Le non -respect de ces recommandations peut etre a I'origine de blessures. • Installez solidement ('unite dans un endroit capable de supporter son poids. Si l'emplacement d'installation ne peut pas supporter le poids de ('unite, celle-ci risque de tomber et de provoquer des blessures. • Executez les travaux electriques selon le manuel d'installation et veillez a utiliser un circuit unique. Ne branchez pas d'autres appareils electriques au circuit. Un circuit electrique d'une capacite insuffisante ou des travaux electriques incomplets peuvent etre a I'origine d'un incendie ou d'un choc electrique. • Raccordez correctement ('unite a Ia terre. Ne branchez pas le fil de terre a un tuyau de gaz ou d'eau, a un paratonnerre ou a la ligne de terre telephonique. Une mise a la terre defectueuse peut entrainer un choc electrique. • Veillez a ne pas endommager les cables. Des cables endommages peuvent provoquer un incendie. • Veillez a toujours couper ['alimentation principale lors de Ia configuration de Ia carte a circuits imprimis inteme ou du cablage. Le non -respect de cette recommandation peut entrainer un choc electrique. • Utilisez les cables specifies pour raccorder en touts securite les unites interne et externe. Fixez les cables solidement pour eviter toute pression sur le bloc de raccordement. Un raccordement incorrect peut provoquer un incendie. • N'installez pas ('unite dans un endroitexpose a des fuites de gaz inflammable. La fuite ou ('accumulation de gaz autour de ('unite peut entrainer une explosion. ■ N'utilisez pas de raccord intermediaire ou de rallonge pour brancher le cordon d'alimentation. Ne branchez pas plusieurs appareils a une prise secteur. Cela peut provoquer un incendie ou un choc electrique. ■ Utilisez les pieces fournies ou specifiees lors des travaux d'installation. L'utilisation de pieces defectueuses peut etre a I'origine de blessures ou de fuites d'eau dues a un incendie, un choc electrique, la chute de ('unite, etc. • Lors du branchement de Ia fiche d'alimentation dans la prise secteur, verifrez qu'aucune poussiere, salete ni d'element desserre n'est present sur la prise et Ia fiche. Veillez a enfoncer a fond la fiche d'alimentation dans la prise secteur. La presence de poussiere, de salete ou d'elements desserres sur la fiche d'alimentation ou la prise secteur peut entrainer un choc electrique ou un incendie. Remplacez les eventuels elements desserres. • Fixez correctement le couvercle du boitier electrique de ('unite inteme et le panneau de service de ('unite exteme. Si le couvercle du bolter electrique de ('unite inteme et/ou le panneau de service de ('unite exteme sont mal fixes, ils risquent de provoquer un incendie ou un choc electrique en raison de la poussiere, de ('eau, etc. presentes dans le circuit. ■ Lors de l'installation, du deplacement ou de l'entretien de ('appareil, veiller a ce qu'aucune substance autre que le refrigerant specifre (R410A) ne penetre dans le circuit de refrigeration. La presence dune substance etrangere, comme de ('air dans le circuit, peut provoquer une augmentation anormale de la pression et causer une explo- sion, voire des blessures. L'utilisation de refrigerant autre que celui qui est specifre pour le systeme provoquera une defaillance mecanique, un mauvais fonctionnement du systeme, ou une panne de l'appareil. Dans le pire des cas, la securite du produit pourrait etre gravement mise en danger. • Ne Iiberez pas le refrigerant dans ('atmosphere. Verifrez ('absence de fuites de gaz refrigerant une fois ('installation termines. En cas de fuite de refrigerant pendant ('installation, aerez Ia piece. Si le refrigerant entre en contact avec un feu, des substances toxiques peuvent se degager. Si le refrigerant entre en contact avec la flamme d'un appareil de chauffage a ventilation, chauffage d'appoint, poele, etc., des substances toxiques peuvent se degager. ■ Utilisez les outils et I'equipement de tuyauterie adaptes a l'installation. La pression du refrigerant R410A est 1,6 fois superieure a celle du R22. L'uti- lisation d'outils et d'equipements non adaptes ou une installation incomplete peut provoquer I'eclatement des tuyaux et blesser quelqu'un. • Pendant ('operation d'aspiration du refrigerant, arretez le compresseur avant de debrancher les tuyaux de refrigerant. Si les tuyaux de refrigerant sont debranches alors que le compresseur fonc- tionne et si le robinet d'arret est ouvert, de l'air pourrait etre aspire et la pression du cycle de refrigeration pourrait augmenter de fagon anormale, entrainant ('explosion des tuyaux. ■ Pendant ('installation de ['unite, branchez correctement les tuyaux de refrigerant avant de lancer le compresseur. Si le compresseur demarre avant le branchement des tuyaux de refrigerant et si le robinet d'arret est ouvert, de ('air pourrait etre aspire et la pression du cycle de refrigeration pourrait augmenter de fagon anormale, entrainant ('explosion des tuyaux. ■ Fixez un ecrou &vase avec une cle dynamometrique comme specifie dans ce manuel. S'il est trop serve, tl risque de se rompre et de provoquer une fuite de refrigerant. ■ Installez ('unite conformement aux normes electriques nationales. • S'assurer d'installer un disjoncteur de fuites a la terre. L'absence d'un disjoncteur de fuites a la terre peut entrainer un choc electrique ou un incendie. A ATTENTION Pouvant entrainer des blessures graves si I unite n pas utbsee correctement i • Realisez les travaux de vidange/tuyauterie conformement au manuel Cela peut provoquer des blessures d'installation. • N'installez pas ('unite exteme a proximite de ('habitat de petits animaux. Si les travaux de vidange/tuyauterie ne sont pas realises correctement, de ('eau Si des petits animaux entrent dans ('unite et endommagent ses composants pourrait s'ecouler de ('unite et endommager le mobilier. electriques, ils peuvent provoquer un dysfonctionnement, des emissions de • Ne touchez ni ('entree d'air ni les ailettes en aluminium de ('unite externe. fumee ou un incendie. Nettoyez regulierement la peripherie de ('unite. 1-2. FICHE TECHNIQUE Modele Alimentation Longueur des tuyaux et difference de hauteur *1 *2, *3, *4, *5, *6, *8 Tension nominate Frequence Longueur max. des tuyaux par appareil interieur / pour systeme a plusieurs appareilshauteur Difference de max. Nombre max. de coudes par appareil interieur / pour systeme a plusieurs appareils Dosage du refrigerant A'7 MXZ-2C20NA2 208 / 230 V 60 Hz 82 pi. (25 m) / 164 pi. (50 m) 49 pi. (15 m) 25 / 50 1,08 once tous les 5 pi. (20 g/m) *1 N'utilisezjamais des tuyaux dont I'epaisseur est inferieure a celle recommandee. Leur resistance a la pression serait insuffisante. *2 Utilisez un tuyau en cuivre ou en alliage de cuivre sans soudure. '3 Veillez a ne pas ecraser ou tordre le tuyau lors du cintrage. *4 Le rayon du cintrage d'un tuyau de refrigerant dolt etre de 4 po. (100 mm) minimum. *5 Materiau d'isolation : mousse plastique resistante a la chaleur dune densite de 0,045 •6 Utilisez toujours un materiau isolant de I'epaisseur specifiee. Une isolation trop epaisse pourrait etre a I'origine dune installation incorrecte de ['unite interne alors qu'une isolation trop fine pourrait provoquer des fuites. *7 Si la longueur du tuyau depasse 131,2 pi. (40 m), une quantite supplementaire de refrigerant (R410A) doit etre ajoutee. (Aucune quantite supplementaire n'est necessaire pour une longueur de tuyau inferieure a 131,2 pi. (40 m).) Remarque : Pour le raccordement de ('appareil/des appareils interieur(s) de la serie MFZ-KJ a cet appareil exterieur, augmentez la charge de refrigerant conformement aux instructions du tableau ci-dessous. Quante supplementaire de refrigerant (pi.) = A x (longueur de tuyau (pt.) —131,2) 5 Quantite supplementaire de refrigerant (m) = A x (longueur de tuyau (m) — 40) '8 Le tableau des specifications de tuyauterie n'indique pas de longueur de ligne minimum. Cependant, les appareils interieurs dont la longueur de tuyauterie connectee est inferieure a 10 pi. (3 m) pourraient produire un bruit intermittent pendant le fonctionnement normal du systeme dans des environnements Cres calmes. Tenez compte de cette information importante lors de ('installation et du positionnement de ('appareil interieur dans l'espace climatise. Nbre d'appareils interieurs MFZ-KJ Longueur des tuyaux (L) 40 m maximum 40 m minimum 1 appareil 100 g supplementaires (Total 2800 g) 100 g + {(L -40) m x 20 g/m)} 2 appareils 200 g supplementaires (Total 2900 g) 200 g + {(L -40) m x 20 g/m)} Fr -1 1-3. SELECTION DE JOINTS DE DIAMETRE DIFFERENT EN OPTION Si le diametre des tuyaux de connexion ne correspond pas au diametre de passage de I'appareil exterieur, utiliser des joints de diametre different en option selon le tableau suivant. (unite :pouce (mm DiameVe de passage de l'appareil exterieur Joints de diametre different en option (diametre de passage de I'appareil exterieur —. diametre du tuyau de connexion) MXZ-2C20NA2 Liquide / Gaz 3/8 (9,52) —. 1/2 (12,7) : MAC-A454JP-E Se reporter au manuel d'installation de I'appareil interieur pour connaitre le diametre du tuyau de connexion de I'appareil interieur. APPAREILS A, B 1/4 (6,35) / 3/8 (9,52) 1-4. CHOIX DE L'EMPLACEMENT D'INSTALLATION • Emplacement ne favorisant pas une exposition a des vents violents. Si ('unite exteme est exposee au vent pendant le degivrage, ce dernier sera plus long. • Emplacement favorisant une bonne circulation d'air sans poussiere exces- sive. • Emplacement ne favorisant pas une exposition a la pluie ou aux rayons directs du soleil. • Emplacement ne generant pas de nuisance pour le voisinage (bruit de fonc- tionnement ou pulsation d'air chaud ou froid). • Emplacement sur un mur ou un support rigides pour eviter toute propagation du bruit de fonctionnement ou vibration de I'appareil. • Emplacement qui ne risque pas d'etre expose a des fuites de gaz combus- tible. • Lors de ('installation, pensez a fixer les supports de l'appareil. • Emplacement a 10 pi. (3 m) minimum de I'antenne TV ou radio. Le fonction- nement du climatiseur peut interferer avec la reception des ondes radio ou TV dans des regions o6 la reception est faible. II peut s'averer necessaire de brancher un amplificateur sur I'appareil concerne. • Toujours installer l'appareil a l'horizontale. • Installer le climatiseur dans un endroit a I'abri du vent et de la neige. Dans un endroit soumis a de fortes chutes de neige, installer un abri, un socle et/ou des ecrans de protection. Remarque : II est conseille de faire une boucle avec le tuyau le plus pres possible de ('unite exteme de fapon a reduire les vibrations transmises par ('unite. ESPACE REQUIS AUTOUR DE L'APPAREIL EXTERIEUR 1. Obstacles au-dessus de I'appareil En ('absence d'obstacle sur le devant et d'un cote ou de I'autre de I'appareil, ce dernier peut etre installe meme si un obstacle se trouve au-dessus de lui a condition que I'espace qui separe I'appareil de ['obstacle soit au moins equivalent a celui indique sur ('illustration. 3-15/16 (100) ou plus 19-11/16 (500) ou plus 3. Obstacles sur le devant (soufflerie) uniquement En presence d'un obstacle sur le devant de I'appareil comme indique sur ('illustration, it est indispensable de laisser un espace libre au-dessus, derriere et sur les cotes de I'appareil. 19-11/16 (500) ou plus 5. Obstacles sur le devant, derriere et sur le(s) cote(s) • Si vous devez installer I'appareil dans un endroit ceint de murs de type veranda, veillez a disposer de suffisamment d'espace comme indique ci-dessous. Si ce n'est pas le cas, les performances du climatiseur risquent de se deteriorer et la consommation d'electricite pourrait augmenter. • Si vous installez au moins deux appareils, veillez a ne pas les poser les uns devant ou derriere les autres. 7-7/8 (200) ou plus /////////0/////////: y// %r V� 3-15/16 (100) ou plus Fr -2 //.y/.7//////////////I// 1MMI19/16 (500) ou plus 13-25/32 (350) ou plus 19-11/16 (500) ou plus La hauteur de 1'obstacle est inferieure ou egale a 47-1/4 (1200) Remarque : Si vous utilisez le climatiseur alors que la temperature exterieure est basse, veillez a observer les instructions ci-dessous. • N'installez jamais ('unite exteme dans un endroit ou le cote presentant I'entree/la sortie d'air risque d'etre directement expose au vent. Pour proteger ('unite externe du vent, installez-la de fapon a ce que ['entree d'air soit face au mur. Pour eviter toute exposition au vent, it est recommande d'installer un ecran de protection du cote de la sortie d'air de ('unite exteme. Pour eviter tout probleme de fonctionnement, evitez d'installer le climatiseur dans les endroits suivants : • En presence de fuites de gaz inflammable. • En presence d'une grande quantite d'huile de machine. • Dans les regions ou ('air est Cres salin, comme en bord de mer. • En presence de gaz sulfures qui se degagent par exemple des sources chaudes ou des eaux usees. • En presence d'equipements haute frequence ou sans fil. • En presence d'emissions importantes de COV (composes organiques volatiles), dont les composes de phtalate, le formaldehyde etc., qui peuvent provoquer un craquage chimique. 2. Devant (soufflerie) ouvert Tant que I'espace qui spare I'appareil de ('obstacle est au moins equiva- lent a celui indique sur ('illustration, I'appareil peut etre installe meme si des obstacles se trouvent derriere lui et d'un cote ou de I'autre. (Absence d'obstacle au-dessus de I'appareil) 7-7/8 (200) ou plus 3-15/16 (100) ou plus 13-25/32 (350) ou plus 4. Obstacles sur le devant et derriere L'appareil peut etre utilise en fixant un guidage de sortie d'air exterieur en option (MAC-856SG) (avec les deux cotes et le haut ouverts). ////////////// 13-15/16 (100) ou plus 19-11/16 (500) ou plus Guidage de sortie (MAC-856SG) 6. Espace d'entretien Laissez un espace pour les travaux d'entretien comme indique sur ('illus- tration. Espace d'entretien 3-15/16 (100) ou plus 3-15/16 (100) ou plus 13-25/32 (350) ou plus 19-11/16 (500) ou plus 13-25/32 (350) ou plus (Unite : pouce (mm)) 1-5. SCHEMA D'INSTALLATION (D) En regle generale, ouvrir (C) d'au moins le devant po. (500 mm) si le devant et les (E) deux cotes sont ouverts (J) (I) 3-15/16 po. (100 mm) minimum En regle generale, ouvrir d'au moins 19-11/16 po. (500 mm) si I'arriere, les deux cotes et le haut sont ouverts Apres le test de contr6le des fuites, appliquer soigneusement du mate- riau isolant pour obstruer les Vous. Si la tuyauterie doit etre fixee sur un mur contenant des metaux (de I'etain p. ex.) ou un treillis metal- lique, utiliser un morceau de bois traite d'une epaisseur de 25/32 po. (20 mm) minimum entre le mur et la tuyauterie ou isoler la tuyauterie en lui appliquant 7 a 8 couches de ruban isolant en vinyle. Pour utiliser la tuyauterie existante, effectuer un cycle COOL (REFROI- DISSEMENT) de 30 minutes et lan- cer respiration avant de proceder a la depose de ('ancien climatiseur. Reformer recrou evase en respec- tent les dimensions des nouveaux tuyaux de refrigerant. Plus de 3-15/16 po. (100 mm) Plus de 7-7/8 po. (200 mm) si des obstacles sont presents de chaque cote (F) 13-25/32 po. (350 mm) minimum Installation de I'appareil exterieur 2 orifices a encoche en U (boulon de base M8) Entree d'air 2-3/8 x 13/16 / -0Evacuation d'air orifices ovales (boulon de base M8) Unite : pouce PIECES A FOURNIR SUR PLACE (A) Cable d'alimentation' 1 (B) Cable de connexion interieur/ex- terieur' 1 (C) Tuyau telescopique 1 (D) Cache de ('orifice mural 1 (E) Ruban de tuyauterie 1 F ()vinyle Rallonge du tuyau flexible d'eva- cuation (ou tuyaue flexible dre chlorure de dun diametre interieur de 19/32 po. (15 mm) ou tuyau VP16 de chlorure de vinyle) 1 (G) Huile refrigerants Petite quantite (H) Mastic 1 (I) Attache de fixation pour tuyau 2 a 7 (J) Vis de fixation pour (I) 2 a 7 (K) Manchon d'ouverture murale 1 ( L) Tuyau flexible en PVC (chlorure de vinyle) dun diametre interieur de 15 mm ou tuyau rigide VP16 en PVC pour la douille d'evacuation (1) 1 * Remarque : Placer le cable de connexion interieur/exterieur (B) et le cable d'alimentation (A) a 3 pi. (1 m) minimum du cable de I'antenne TV. La "quantite" pour (B) a (K) ci-dessus est la quan- tite a utiliser pour I'appareil interieur. Ces appareils doivent etre intends par des entrepreneurs agrees conformement aux reglementations locales en vigueur. Entree d'air Installation de I'appareil exterieur 840 2 orifices a encoche en U (boulon de base M8) 4-10 x 21 ' Evacuation d'air orifices ovales (boulon de base M8) Unite : mm 1-6. TUYAU DE VIDANGE DE L'APPAREIL EXTERIEUR Veillez proceder aux travaux d'ecoulement a partir d'un seul endroit. 1) Choisir un seul orifice pour ('evacuation et installer la douille d'evacuation (1) sur cet orifice. 2) Fermer les autres orifices avec leur capuchon d'evacuation (2). 3) Raccorder un flexible en PVC souple (L) de 15 mm de diametre interieur, en vente dans le commerce, a la douille d'evacuation (1) et a ('evacuation principale. Remarque : Toujours installer I'appareil a I'horizontale. Ne pas utiliser la douille d'evacuation (1) ni les bouchons d'evacuation (2) dans les regions froides. Le liquide evacue pourrait geler et provoquer I'arret du ventilateur. L'unite exterieure produit de la condensation en mode de chauffage. Choisir I'endroit ou le climatiseur sera monte de maniere a eviter que ('unite exterieure et/ou les sols ne soient mouilles par ('eau d'evacuation ou endommages en cas de gel de cette derniere. 2. INSTALLATION DE L'APPAREIL EXTERIEUR 2-1. INSTALLATION DE L'APPAREIL • S'assurer de bien attacher les pieds de I'appareil avec les boulons lors de ('installation. • S'assurer d'installer I'appareil fermement pour qu'il ne tombe pas lors d'un tremblement de terre ou d'une tempete. • Se referer a la figure ci-dessous pour les fondations en beton. Augmenter la profondeur des fondations. ((III'": '11111 Fixer ici avec des boulons M8. Augmenter la argeur des fondations. Fr -3 2-2. BRANCHEMENT DES CABLES DE L'APPAREIL EXTERIEUR • Veiller a utiliser des circuits speciaux pour le climatiseur. • Le cablage dolt etre conforme aux normes techniques applicables. • Le cablage doit etre connecte conformement au schema. • Les vis doivent etre serrees de fagon a eviter leur desserrage. 1) Retirer le panneau de service. 2) Deposer la plaque de conduit. 3) Fixer le connecteur du conduit sur la plaque de conduit a ['aide d'un contre-ecrou, puis le fixer sur I'appareil a l'aide de vis. Veillez a fixer les connecteurs de conduit aux emplacements corrects selon leur taille. 4) Raccorder les fils de terre au banc TB. 5) Retirer la vis de fixation du bloc de sortie et connecter le cable de connexion interieur/exterieur (B) depuis I'appareil interieur au bloc de sortie. Veiller a ne pas effectuer d'erreur de branchement. Fixer ferme- ment le cable au bloc de sortie pour ne faire apparaitre aucune partie de son noyau et n'appliquer aucune force exterieure a la section de raccordement du bloc de sortie. 6) Serrer fermement les vis de fixation du bloc de sortie afin d'eviter tout faux contact. Apres ['operation de serrage, tirer legerement sur les cables pour s'assurer qu'ils sont bien fixes. 7) Effectuer les etapes 5) et 6) pour chaque appareil interieur. 8) Brancher le cable d'alimentation (A). 9) Refermer le panneau de service. Verifier que I'etape 3-2. RACCORDE- MENT DES TUYAUX a ate effectuee. Vis SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRIQUES APPAREIL EXTERIEUR MXZ-2C20NA2 Alimentation (V, PHASE, Hz) 208/230, 1, 60 Calibre max. de fusible (temporise) (A) 20 Courant admissible min. du circuit (A) 17,2 Moteur de ventilateur (F.L.A) 1,77 Compresseur (R.L.A) 10,7 (L.R.A) 15,5 Tension de commands Unite interne-Telecommande : (sans fil) Appareil interieur-Appareil exterieur : DC12-24V Connecteur du conduit Taille commerciale du conduit (a) Alimentation 3/4 pouce (b) Interieur/exterieur 1/2 pouce Panneau de service Remarque: • Connecter un cable de terre a une bome a ('aide d'une cosse a anneau. APPAREIL INTERIEUR 208/230 V AC Monophase 60 Hz Bloc de sortie S1S2S3:: i Bloc de sortie sis2��o Borne de •___•___ terre • Sectionneur Bome de terre * 447 Bloc de sortie A 1-3/8 po. (35 mm) 5/8 po. (15 mm) Remarque : • Si la poignee est deposee, ['operation de cablage sera plus efficace. • S'assurer de reposer la poignee. Cable de sortie/ Alimentation 208/230 V AC Monophase 2 fils 60 Hz rti Bome de terre • Contra-ecrou Plaque de conduit Vis Connecteur du conduit • Raccorder les fits aux bomes associees aux numeros correspondants. • Lors du raccordement du cordon et/ou du fil au bloc de sortie, veiller a fixer cheque vis a la borne correspondante. RACCORDEMENT DES FILS ET DU CABLE DE TERRE • Utiliser un conducteur massif min. AWG14 ou un conducteur toronne min. AWG14. • Utiliser un fil en cuivre a double isolation 600 V. • Utiliser des conducteurs en cuivre uniquement. * Respecter le code electrique local. CABLE D'ALIMENTATION ▪ • Utiliser un conducteur massif ou toronne min. AWG8. • Utiliser des conducteurs en cuivre uniquement. Respecter le code electrique local. CABLE DE TERRE • Utiliser un conducteur massif ou toronne min. AWG8. • Utiliser des conducteurs en cuivre uniquement. * Respecter le code electrique local. Terre 8 AVERTISSEMENT : i • Utiliser le cable de connexion conforme aux normes techniques pour raccorder les unites inteme et exteme, et fixer le cable fer- mement sur la bloc de sortie de fagon que le cote raccordement de ce dernier ne soit soumis a aucune contrainte exterieure. Un raccordement incomplet ou une fixation incorrecte risqueraient de provoquer un incendie. Bloc de sortie APPAREIL EXTERIEUR Fr -4 Prevoir une longueur de cable de raccordement supplementaire en vue des entretiens ulterieurs. • Brancher ['alimentation principals lorsque la temperature ambiante est inferieure a -4°F (-20°C). • A -4°F (-20°C) ou en -delta, I'appareil a besoin d'au moins 4 heures de veille avant de pouvoir foncfionner afin de chauffer les pieces electriques. A AVERTISSEMENT Pendant ('installation de I'appareil, bran - chez correctement les tuyaux de refri- gerant avant de lancer le compresseur. TRAVAUX sEVASEI /TENT ET RACCORDEAilENT DES TUYAUX 3-1. TRAVAUX D'EVASEMENT 1) Coupez correctement le tuyau en cuivre avec un coupe- tuyaux. (Fig. 1, 2) 2) Ebarbez parfaitement la pantie trongonnee du tuyau. (Fig. 3) • Dirigez le tuyau en cuivre vers le bas lors de I'ebarbage de faron a eviter que les bavures ne penetrent dans le tuyau. 3) Retirez les ecrous a evasement fixes sur les unites inteme et externe, puis posez-les sur le tuyau apres avoir &limine toutes les bavures. (II est impossible de les poser apres les travaux d'evasement.) 4) Travaux d'evasement (Fig. 4, 5). Tenez fermement le tuyau de cuivre dans la dimension indiquee dans le tableau. Selectionnez A en pouce (mm) dans le tableau en fonction de l'outil que vous utilisez. 5) Controle • Comparez les travaux d'evasement avec la Fig. 6. • Si I'evasement n'est pas conforme a ['illustration, coupez la partie evasee et refaites I'evasement. �\ / � - Tuyau en 6�,�'��e�'/ cuivre Fig. 1 Conforme Non conforme 90° Bavures Tuyau en cuivre Alesoirsupplementairge�''� ♦ Coupe- » [ 1 Bk NN tuyaux\ Fig. 3 L9 0 Incline Irregu- Ebar- lier be Fig. 2 Outil d'evasement � r y r� s- • Model& avec 0 Modele a ecrous a manivelle ailette Fig. 4 A i �� i7 r Tuyau cuivre en Fig.5 Poncez le pour- tour du to au tuyau Interieur brillant et sans ra ures. Egalisez la longueur tout le tour du tuyau Fig. 6 Filiere ,-„ �wn. um is MN Ecrou evase 0,04 a 0,06 (1,0 a 1,5) Diametre du tuyau [pouce (mm)] B [pouce (mm)] A [pouce (mm)] Couple de serrage Outil type d'embrayage pour le modele R410A Outil type d'embrayage pour le modele R22 Ecrou a oreilles pour le modele R22 pi -Ib N•m kgf•cm 1/4 (36,35) 21/32 (17) 0 a 0,02 (0 a 0,5) 0,04 a 0,06 (1,0 a 1,5) 0,06 a 0,08 (1,5 a 2,0) 10 a 13 13,7 a 17,7 140 a 180 3/8 (39,52) 7/8 (22) 25 a 30 34,3 a 41,2 350 a 420 1/2 (012,7) 1-1/32 (26) 0,08 a 1,0 (2,0 a 2,5) 36 a 42 49,0 a 56,4 500 a 575 5/8 (315,88) 1-5/32 (29) 54 a 58 73,5 a 78,4 750 a 800 3-2. RACCORDEMENT DES TUYAUX 1) Appliquez une fine couche d'huile refrigerante (G) sur les embouts &vases des tuyaux ainsi que sur les raccords de tuyau de l'appareil exterieur. 2) Alignez la partie mediane du tuyau sur les raccords de tuyau de l'appareil exterieur et serrez les ecrous &vases a la main de 3 a 4 tours. 3) Serrez I'ecrou vas avec une cls dynamometrique comme indique dans le tableau. • Un serrage excessif pourrait endommager I'ecrou evase et provoquer une fuite de refrigerant. • Veillez a proteger la tuyauterie avec une gaine isolante. Tout contact direct avec la tuyauterie nue peut se traduire par des br0lures ou des engelures. 3-3. ISOLATION THERMIQUE ET RUBANAGE 1) Recouvrez les raccords de tuyauterie d'une bande isolante pour tuyaux. 2) Du cote de ['unite exteme, isolez correctement cheque tuyau, vannes incluses. 3) Appliquez du ruban adhesif de tuyauterie (E) en commengant par ['entree de ('unite externe. • Collez I'extremite du ruban adhesif (E) (avec le produit adhesif fourni). • Si la tuyauterie dolt passer dans le plafond, les toilettes ou dans un endroit o0 la temperature et I'humidite sont &levees, ajoutez une couche supplementaire de bande isolante disponible dans le commerce pour eviter toute formation de condensation. A PRECAUTION Lorsque certains orifices ne sont pas utilises, veuillez les obstruer en serrant correctement leur ecrou respectif. 4. PROCEDURES DE PURGE, TEST DE CONTROLE DES FU ES ET ESSA1 DE FONCTIONNEMENT 4-1. PROCEDURES DE PURGE ET TEST DE CONTROLE DES FUITES 1) Retirez le bouchon de I'ouverture de service du robinet d'arret du cote du conduit de gaz de ['unite exteme. (A I'origine, les robinets d'arret sont com- pletement fermes et recouverts d'un capuchon.) 2) Raccorder la vanne du collecteur a jauge et la pompe a vide a I'ouverture de service du robinet d'arret a cote du conduit de gaz de I'appareil exterieur. 3) Mettez la pompe a vide en marche. (Faites le vide pendant 15 minutes minimum.) 4) Controlez la depression ainsi obtenue avec la vanne du collecteur a jauge, puis fermez la vanne et arretez la pompe a vide. 5) Patientez pendant une minute ou deux. Assurez-vous que I'aiguille de la vanne du collecteur a jauge reste dans la meme position. Verifiez que le manometre indique une pression de -14,7 psi [Jauge] (-0,101 MPa). 6) Retirez rapidement la vanne du collecteur a jauge de I'ouverture de service du robinet d'arret. 7) Ouvrez completement les robinets d'arret des tuyaux de liquide et de gaz. La mise en service sans ouvrir completement les robinets d'arret diminue le rendement de ('unite et peut etre source de panne. 8) Reportez-vous aux stapes 1-2. et chargez la quantite de refrigerant recom- mandee si necessaire. Veillez a charger lentement le liquide refrigerant. Sinon, la composition de refrigerant dans le systeme peut changer et affecter les performances du climatiseur. 9) Serrez le bouchon de I'ouverture de service pour reciter les conditions d'origine. 10)Test de controle des fuites. '4 a 5 tours 'Fenner 'Ouvrirr" Cie hexagonale Bouchon du robinet d'arret -0,101 MPa Manometre combine (Couple de 19,6 a (-760 mmHg) (pour le modele R410A) 29,4 N•m, 200 a 300 kgf•cm) Manometre (pour le modele R410A) Vanne du collecteur jauge (pour le modele R410A) Poignee haute Tuyau de charge (pour le modele R410A) Poignee basse Bouchon de I'ouverture de service (Couple de 13,7 a 17,7 N•m, 140 a 180 kgf•cm) Robinet Robinet d'arret d'arret pour pourGAZ LIQUIDE Precautions a prendre lors de ('utilisation de la vanne de commande A Fermer Vanne de commande Corps Ouvri Ouverture de ervice Tuyau de charge modele R410A) UY///'/1 Pompe a vide (pour le modele R410A) Lorsaue vous fixez la vanne de commande a I'ouverture de service le noyau de vanne oeut se deformer ou se relacher en cas de pression excessive. Cela oeut entralner une fuite de gaz. Lorsque vous fixez la vanne de commande a I'ouverture de service, veillez a ce que le noyau de vanne soit en position fermee, puis serrez la partieA. Ne serrez pas la partieA ou ne tournez pas le corps lorsque le noyau de vanne est en position ouverte. • Fr -5 4-2. RECHARGE DE GAZ Charger du gaz pour l'appareil. 1) Relier la bouteille de gaz sur ('orifice de service du robinet d'arret. 2) Effectuer la purge d'air de la canalisation (ou du flexible) venant du cylindre de refrigerant. 3) Charger la quantite de refrigerant specifiee tout en laissant fonctionner le climatiseur en mode de refroidissement. Remarque: En cas d'ajout de refrigerant, respecter la quantite precisee pour le cycle de refrigeration. PRECAUTION : En cas de supplement de charge, assurez-vous de charger le refrigerant sous sa forme liquide. Si le refrigerant est charge sous sa forme gazeuse, sa composition risque de se modifier a I'interieur du systeme et le fonctionnement normal du climatiseur peut s'averer impossible. II convient, en outre, de remplir le systeme de refrigerant le plus Ientement possible car une charge trop rapide risque de bloquer le compresseur. Pour maintenir une pression elevee dans le cylindre de gaz, le rechauffer avec de Peau chaude (d'une temperature inferieure a 1 04°F (40°C)) pendant la saison froide. Ne jamais utiliser une flamme vive ou de la vapeur pour effectuer cette operation. 4-3. RETRAIT DU PANNEAU D'ENTRETIEN Le reglage du commutateur Dip du panneau de commande exterieur peut etre modifre sans retrait du panneau frontal. Suivez les procedures ci-apres pour retirer le panneau d'entretien et regler le commutateur Dip. 1) Retirez la ou les vis de fixation du panneau d'entretien. 2) Retirez le panneau d'entretien et effectuez les reglages necessaires. 3) Installez le panneau d'entretien. Remarque: Assurez-vous de fixer correctement le panneau d'entretien. Une installation incomplete risque- rait de provoquer un dysfonctionnement. Raccord Raccord Raccord Raccord Modele Appareil interieur MXZ-2C20NA2 ❑A—❑e Robinet d'arret Vanne de fonction- nement du cylindre de refrigerant (pour le R410A) Conduite de liquide A Appareilinterieur I. Vanne d'arret Conduit avec port de gaz d'entretien refrigerant 0 4-4. VERROUILLAGE DU MODE DE FONCTIONNEMENT DU CLIMATISEUR (REFROIDISSEMENT, DESHUMIDIFICATION, CHAUFFAGE) • Description de la fonction : Lorsque cette fonction est selectionnee, si le mode de fonctionnement est blo- que sur COOUDRY (REFROIDISSEMENT/DESHUMIDIFICATION) ou HEAT (CHAUFFAGE), le climatiseur fonctionne uniquement dans ce mode. g o * II est necessaire de modifier la configuration pour pouvoir selectionner cette fonction. Presenter cette fonction aux clients et les inviter a ('utiliser. ❑ D [Procedure de verrouillage du mode de fonctionnement] 1) Veiller a couper ('alimentation secteur du climatiseur avant de proceder a la programmation. 2) Regler le commutateur "3" du SW1 du panneau de commande exterieur sur ON pour activer cette fonction. 3) Pour verrouiller le fonctionnement en mode COOUDRY (REFROIDISSEMENT/ DESHUMIDIFICATION), regler le commutateur "4" du SW1 du panneau de commande exterieur sur OFF. Pour verrouiller le fonctionnement en mode HEAT (CHAUFFAGE), regler le meme commutateur sur ON. 4) Mettre le climatiseur sous tension. otoG ••• 000 SW871 SW2 Jauge collectrice (pour le R410A) Appareil exterieur ▪ Conduite flexible de chargement Cylindre de gaz refrigerant (pour le R410A) pour R410A, avec siphon Refrigerant (liquide) Echelle electronique pour vi'� la charge de refrigerant Panneau d entretien SW1 N 1 2 3 4 5 6 REFROIDISSEMENT/ DESHUMIDIFICATION SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 CHAUFFAGE 4-5. REDUCTION DU BRUIT DE FONCTIONNEMENT DE L'APPAREIL EXTERIEUR • Description de la fonction : Lorsque cette fonction est selectionnee, it est possible de limiter le bruit de fonctionnement de l'appareil exterieur en reduisant la charge de fonctionnement, par exemple, pendant la nuit en mode COOL (REFROIDISSEMENT). Cependant, veuillez noter que les performances de refroidissement et de chauffage peuvent diminuer si cette fonction est selectionnee. * II est necessaire de modifier la configuration pour pouvoir selectionner cette fonction. Presenter cette fonction aux clients et les inviter a ('utiliser. [Procedure de reduction du bruit de fonctionnement] 1) Veiller a couper ['alimentation secteur du climatiseur avant de proceder a la programmation. 2) Regler le commutateur "5" du SW1 du panneau de commande exterieur sur ON pour activer cette fonction. 3) Mettre le climatiseur sous tension. Fr -6 sw1 nonu 1 2 3 4 5 6 Reduire le bruit de fonctionnement 4-6. ESSAI • Cheque appareil interieur doit etre soumis a un essai de fonctionnement. Veuillez consulter la notice d'installation des appareils interieurs et vous assurer que les appareils fonctionnent correctement. • Si vous soumettez simultanement tous les appareils a un essai de fonctionnement, i1 ne vous sera pas possible de detecter les eventuelles erreurs de raccordement des tuyaux de refrigerant et de cablage des appareils interieurs/exterieurs. Vous devez dont lancer les essais de fonctionnement l'un apres I'autre. Concernant le mecanisme de protection contre une remise en marche trop rapide Lorsque le compresseur s'arrete, le dispositif de protection contre la remise en marche a trop breve echeance s'enclenche. Le compresseur restera arrete trois minutes avant de se remettre en marche, afin de proteger le climatiseur. Fonction de correction de cablageltuyauterie L'appareil est quip dune fonction qui permet de corriger les branchements de cablage et de tuyauterie. En cas de branchement incorrect de cablage et de tuyauterie ou de probleme de verification, utiliser cette fonction pour detecter et corriger le branchement en respectant la procedure suivante. Verifier que les stapes suivantes ont ete effectuees. • L'appareil est aliments. • Les vannes d'arret sont ouvertes. Remarque : Lors de la detection, le fonctionnement de l'appareil interieur est controls par l'appareil exterieur. Lors de la detection, I'appareil interieur s'arrete automatiquement. II ne s'agit pas d'un dysfonctionnement. Procedure Appuyez sur le commutateur de correction de tuyauterie/cablage (SW871) pendant 1 minute minimum apres la mise sous tension de l'appareil. • La correction s'effectue en 10 a 15 minutes. Une fois la correction terminee, le resultat est indique par un voyant DEL. Les details sont decrits dans le tableau suivant. • Pour annuler cette fonction en cours de fonctionnement, appuyer de nouveau sur le com- mutateur de correction de cablage/tuyauterie (SW871). • Lorsque la correction est effectuee sans erreur, ne pas appuyer de nouveau sur le commu- tateur de correction de cablage/tuyauterie (SW871). Lorsque le resultat est "non realise", appuyer de nouveau sur le commutateur de correction de cablage/tuyauterie (SW871) pour annuler cette fonction. Verifier ensuite les raccordements de cablage et tuyauterie de maniere conventionnelle en faisant fonctionner les appareils interieurs l'un apres I'autre. • Pour utiliser cette fonction, l'appareil dolt etre aliments. Veiller a ne pas toucher des elements autres que le commutateur, notamment le panneau de commande. Cela peut entrainer un choc electrique ou des br0lures par des elements chauds ou sous tension situes autour du commutateur. Le contact avec des elements sous tension peut endommager le tableau de commande. • Pour eviter les dommages electroniques du panneau de commande, veiller a eliminer I'electricite statique avant d'utiliser cette fonction. • Cette fonction ne peut pas etre utilisee lorsque la temperature exterieure est egale ou inferieure a 0°C. Voyant DEL lors de la detection DELI DEL2 DEL3 (Rouge) (Jaune) (Verte) Allume Allume Une fois Resultat de la fonction de correction de cablage/tuyauterie DELI (Rouge) DEL2 (Jaune) DEL3 (Verte) Rssultat Allume Eteint Allume Termine (Probleme corrige ou situation normale) Une fois Une fois Une fois on termine NA. (tchec de la detection) Autres indications Se reporter a ('etiquette "PRECAU- TIONS DE SECURITY A SUIVRE LORSQUE LA DEL CLIGNOTE" situee au dos du panneau superieur. 4-7. EXPLICATIONS DESTINEES A L'UTILISATEUR • A l'aide de la NOTICE D'UTILISATION, expliquez a I'utilisateur I'emploi du climatiseur (utilisation de la telecommande, remplacement des filtres a air, enlevement ou placement de la telecommande sur son support, nettoyage, precautions a prendre pour le fonctionnement, etc.). • Recommandez a I'utilisateur de lire attentivement la NOTICE D'UTILISATION. ,5. PURGE Lors du deplacement ou de la mise au rebut du climatiseur, it est necessaire de purger le systeme en suivant la procedure ci-dessous de fa¢on a ne pas liberer le refrigerant dans ('atmosphere. 1) Coupez le disjoncteur. 2) Raccordez la vanne du collecteur a jauge a I'ouverture de service du robinet d'arret du cote du conduit de gaz de ('unite exteme. 3) Fermez completement le robinet d'arret du cote du conduit de liquide de ('unite exteme. 4) Enclenchez le disjoncteur. 5) Demarrez le fonctionnement en mode COOL (REFROIDISSEMENT) sur tous les appareils interieurs. 6) Lorsque le manometre indique 0,1 a 0 psi [jauge] (0,05 a 0 MPa), fermez completement le robinet d'arret du cote du tuyau de gaz de I'appareil exterieur et arretez le systeme. (Reportez-vous au manuel d'installation de I'appareil interieur pour la methode d'arret du systeme.) * Si trop de refrigerant a �t� ajoute au systeme de climatisation, iI se peut que la pression ne parvienne pas a baisserjusqu'a 0,1 a 0 psi (jauge) (0,05 a 0 MPa) ou la fonction de protection pourrait se declencher en raison de la montee de pression dans le circuit de refrigerant a haute pression. Dans ce cas, utilisez un dispositif de collecte du refrigerant pour recueillir la totalite du refrigerant du systeme, puis rechargez la quantite de refrigerant correcte dans le systeme apres avoir deplac4 les unites internes et extemes. 7) Coupez le disjoncteur. Retirez le manometre et la tuyauterie du refrigerant. A AVERTISSEMENT Pendant ('operation d'aspiration du refrigerant, arretez le compresseur avant de debrancher les tuyaux de refrigerant. Le compresseur risque d'eclater et de provoquer des blessures si une substance etrangere, comme de l'air, penetre dans les tuyaux. Fr -7 1 O a to W 1. ANTES DE LA INSTALACION 1 2. INSTALACION DE LA UNIDAD EXTERIOR 3 3. TRABAJOS DE ABOCARDADO Y CONEXION DE TUBERIAS 5 4. PROCEDIMIENTOS DE PURGADO, PRUEBA DE FUGAS Y FUNCIONAMIENTO DE PRUEBA 5 5. BOMBED DE VACIADO 7 Herramientas necesarias para la instalaci6n Destomillador Phillips Abocardador para R410A Nivel Valvula colectora de Bascula man6metro para R410A Cuchilla o tijeras Bomba de vacio para R410A Llave dinamometrica Manguera de carga para R410A Llave (o (lave de tuercas) Cortador de tuberias con escariador Llave hexagonal de 5/32 pulg. (4 mm) ANTES DE`SLA JNTAL 1-1. POR RAZONES DE SEGURIDAD, DEBERA OBSERVARSE SIEMPRE LO SIGUIENTE • Antes de instalar el acondicionador de aire, lea atentamente el apartado "POR RAZONES DE SEGURIDAD, DEBERA OBSERVARSE SIEMPRE LO SIGUIENTE". • Observe los mensajes de atenci6n y cuidado indicados en el, ya que se refieren a cuestiones de seguridad importantes. • Cuando haya acabado de leer el manual, no olvide dejarlo junto al MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES para su futura referencia. A ATENCION (Podria causal la muerte o lesiones graves etc • El usuario no debe instalar Ia unidad. Una instalacion defectuosa podria causar incendios, descargas electricas o lesiones debidos a una caida de la unidad o escapes de agua. Para hacer la instalaci6n, consulte al concesionario en el que adquiri6 esta unidad o a un instalador cualificado. • Siga las instrucciones incluidas en el manual de instalacion. Una instalaci6n defectuosa podria causar incendios, descargas electricas, lesiones debidas a una caida de la unidad o escapes de agua. ■ Al instalar la unidad, use equipos y herramientas de protection adecuadas para garantizar Ia seguridad. De no hacerlo, podria sufrir dartos corporales. • Asegurese de que el lugar de instalacion puede soportarel peso de la unidad. Si el lugar de instalaci6n no puede aguantar el peso de la unidad, esta podria caerse y causar dartos. ■ Realice la instalacion electrica siguiendo las instrucciones del manual de instalacion y asegurandose de emplear un circuito exclusivo. No conecte otros dispositivos electricos al circuito. Si el circuito de alimentation no tiene suficiente capacidad o la instalacion electrica es insuficiente, podria producirse un incendio o una descarga electrica. ■ Conecte correctamente la unidad a tierra. No conecte el cable de tierra a una tuberia de gas, de agua, pararrayos o al cable de tierra de un telefono. Una conexion a tierra defectuosa podria provocar una descarga electrica. ■ Evite darter los cables. Unos cables dafados podrian provocar incendios. ■ Asegurese de desconectar el conmutador de alimentation general al instalar la place de circuito impreso o el cableado. De no hacerlo, podria provocar una descarga electrica. • Utilice los cables indicados para conectar de forma segura las unidades interiores y exteriores. Conecte bien los cables de modo que no queden tensos en el panel de terminales. Una conexion incorrecta podria provocar un incendio. ■ No instals la unidad en un lugar donde pueda haber fugas de gas inflamable. Si hay fugas de gas y se acumula alrededor de la unidad, podria producirse una explosion. ■ No emplee conexiones intermedias del cable de alimentation ni tampoco un cable de extension. Evite tambien conectar demasiados aparatos a una sola toma de CA. Esto podria provocar un incendio o una descarga electrica. ■ Utilice las piezas suministradas o indicadas para efectuar Ia instalacion. El empleo de piezas defectuosas podria provocar lesiones o escapes de agua a causa de un incendio, una descarga electrica, la tarda de la unidad, etc. • Al conectar el enchufe de alimentation en la toma, asegurese de que no hay polvo, obstrucciones o piezas sueltas ni en la toma ni en el enchufe. Compruebe que el enchufe de alimentation esti' completamente insertado en la toma. Si hay polvo, obstrucciones o piezas sueltas en el enchufe de alimentation o la toma, podria provocar incendios o descargas electricas. Si el enchufe de alimentation presenta piezas sueltas, sustittiyalo. • Fije firmemente Ia cubierta de la instalacidn electrica a la unidad interior y el panel de servicio, a la unidad exterior. Si no se fijan con firmeza la cubierta de instalacion electrica de la unidad interior y el panel de servicio de la unidad exterior, podria acumularse polvo, agua, etc. en la unidad y producirse un incendio o una descarga electrica. • Al instalar, reubicar o reparar Ia unidad, asegurese de que en el circuito de refrigeration no entra ninguna otra sustancia que no sea el refrigerante especificado (R410A). La presencia de cualquier otra sustancia extrafia, como aire por ejemplo, puede provocar una elevation an6mala de la presi6n, una explosion o dartos corporales. El uso de un refrigerante distinto al especificado por el sistema ocasionara fallos mecanicos, malfuncionamiento del sistema o averias en la unidad. En el peor de los casos, esto podria Ilegar a ser un serio impedimento para garantizar el uso seguro del producto. • No descargue el refrigerante en el ambiente. Una vez acabada la instala- cion, compruebe que no haya fugas de gas refrigerante. Si se producen fugas de refrigerante durante la instalacidn, ventile la habitation. Si el refrigerante entra en contacto con una llama, podria generarse gas nocivo. Si se produjeran perdidas de gas refrigerante en un interior y entraran en con- tacto con la llama de un calefactor con ventilador, un calentador, una estufa, etc. se generarian gases nocivos. • Utilice las herramientas apropiadas y los materiales de conduction adecuados para la instalacion. La presi6n del refrigerante R410A es 1,6 veces mayor que la del R22. Si no se utilizan herramientas o materiales apropiados, o si se realiza una instalacibn defectuosa, las tuberias podrian estallar y provocar lesiones. • Al bombear el refrigerante, detenga el compresor antes de desconectar las tuberias de refrigerante. Si las tuberias de refrigerante se desconectan con el compresor en marcha y la valvula de retention se abre, podria entrar aire y la presi6n del ciclo de re- frigeraci6n aumentaria de forma an6mala, lo que podria hacer que las tuberias estallaran. ■ Al instalar la unidad, conecte las tuberias de refrigerante de forma fija antes de poner en marcha el compresor. Si el compresor se pone en marcha antes de que las tuberias de refrigerante esten conectadas y la valvula de retention se abre, podria entrar aire y la presi6n del ciclo de refrigeration aumentaria de forma anomala, lo que podria hacer que las tuberias estallaran. • Apriete la tuerca abocardada mediante una Have dinamometrica tal y como se especifica en el presente manual. Si la aprieta demasiado, la tuerca abocardada podria romperse y causar perdidas de refrigerante. ■ Instals la unidad de acuerdo con la normative para instalaciones electri- cas. ■ Asegurese de instalar un disyuntor del Interruptor de fallo de conexion a tierra (GFI). De no instalar un disyuntor del Interruptor de fallo de conexion a tierra (GFI) se podria producir una descarga electrica o incendio. A CUIDADO (Podria causar lesiones graves si se manipula incorrectamente) ■ Para efectuar un drenaje y una instalacion de tuberias seguros, siga las indicaciones del manual de instalacion. Un drenaje o una instalaci6n de tuberias defectuosos podria causar un escape de agua en la unidad y daflar los enseres del hogar. • No toque la entrada de sire ni las aletas de aluminio de Ia unidad exterior. Esto podria causar lesiones. ■ No instals Ia unidad exterior donde puedan vivir animales pequerios. Si los animales penetran en la unidad y danan las piezas electricas podrian provocar fallos de funcionamiento, humos o incendios. Mantenga limpia el area alrededor de la unidad. 1-2. ESPECIFICACIONES Modelo Alimentation Longitud de tuberia y diferencia de altura *1, *2, *3, `4, '5, '6, *8 Tension de regimen Frecuencia Longitud maxima del tubo por uni- dad interior / para sistema multiple Diferencia maxima de altura N° max. de codos por unidad interior / para sistema multiple Ajuste de refrigerante A *7 MXZ-2C20NA2 208 / 230 V 60 Hz 82 pies (25 m) / 164 pies (50 m) 49 pies (15 m) 25 / 50 1,08 onzas por cada 5 pies (20 g/m) '1 Nunca utilice tuber as de grosor menor que el especificado. La resistencia a la presi6n seria insuficiente. •2 Utilice una tuberia de cobre o una tuberia de aleacion de cobre sin costuras. Tenga cuidado de no romper o doblar la tuberia cuando la flexione. '4 El radia de curvatura de la tuberia de refrigerante debe ser de 4 pulg. (100 mm) o mas. *5 Material aislante: Plastico de espuma termorresistente con un peso especifico de 0,045 *6 Asegurese de utilizar un aislamiento de grosor especificado. Un grosor excesivo puede alterar la correcta instalacibn de la unidad interior y un grosor insuficiente puede generar goteo de rocio. Nota: *7 S' la longitud de la tuberia es superior a 131,2 pies (40 m) sera necesario emplear mas refrigerante (R410A). (Si la longitud de la tuberia es inferior a 131,2 pies (40 m), no es necesario mas refrigerante). Refrigerante adicional (pies) = A x (longitud de la tuberia (pies) — 131,2) 5 Refrigerante adicional (m) = A x (longitud de la tuberia (m) — 40) `8 La tabla de especificaciones de las tuberias no indica una longitud minima del conjunto de conducciones. No obstante, las unidades interiores cuyas tuberias conectadas tengan una longitud inferior a 10 pies (3 m) pueden producir ruidos intermitentes durante el funcionamiento normal del sistema en entornos muy silenciosos. Tenga en cuenta esta importante information cuando instale y coloque la unidad interior dentro del espacio correspondiente. Al conectar la(s) unidad(es) interior(es) de la serie MFZ-KJ a esta unidad exterior, cargue refrigerante adicional siguiendo las instrucciones de la tabla siguiente. N.° de unidades interiores MFZ-KJ Longitud de la tuberia (L) 40 m o menos Mas de 40 m 1 unidad 100 g adicionales (total 2800 g) 100 g + {(L -40) m x 20 g/m)} 2 unidades 200 g adicionales (total 2900 g) 200 g + {(L -40) m x 20 g/m)} Sp -1 1-3. SELECCION DE LAS JUNTAS PARA DISTINTOS DIAMETROS OPCIONALES Si el diametro del tubo de conexibn no coincide con el tamaflo de puerto de la unidad exterior, utilice las juntas para distintos diametros opcionales de acuerdo con la siguiente tabla. (Unidad: pulg. (mm)) TamaRo de puerto de la unidad exterior Juntas para distintos diametros opcionales (tamafio de puerto de la unidad exterior —. diametro del tubo de conexibn) MXZ-2C20NA2 Liquido/gas 3/8 (9,52) —• 1/2 (12,7) : MAC-A454JP-E Consulte en el manual de instalacibn de la unidad interior el diametro del tubo de conexibn de la unidad interior. UNIDAD A, B 1/4 (6,35) / 3/8 (9,52) 1-4. SELECCION DEL LUGAR DE INSTALACION • Donde no este expuesta a un viento fuerte. Si durante la descongelacibn la unidad exterior queda expuesta al viento, el tiempo de descongelacibn sera superior. • Donde haya un buen flujo de aire sin polvo. • Donde se pueda evitar todo to posible la Iluvia o la luz directs del sol. • Donde el ruido o el aire caliente (o frio) causados por el funcionamiento no moleste a los vecinos. • Donde haya una pared o un punto de apoyo firma para evitar un mayor ruido o vibracibn durante el funcionamiento. • Donde no exista riesgo de fugas de gas combustible. • Asegurese de fijar las patas de la unidad a la hora de instalarla. • Donde este a una distancia minima de 10 pies (3 m) de cualquier antena de television o radio. En las zonas con mala recepci�n, el funcionamiento del aparato de aire acondicionado puede provocar interferencias en estos apa- ratos. Puede ser necesario conectar el receptor afectado a un amplificador. • Instale la unidad en horizontal. • Instalela en un area donde no sufra el efecto provocado por una nevada, viento o nieve. En zonas de intensa nieve, le rogamos que instale un toldo, pedestal y/o algunas pantallas acusticas planas. Nota: Se recomienda establecer el circuito cerrado de la tuberia cerca de la unidad exterior para reducir la vibracibn que pudiera transmitirse desde ese punto. ESPACIO LIBRE NECESARIO EN TORNO A LA UNIDAD 1. Obstaculos sobre la unidad Si no hay obstaculos por la parte delantera ni en los lados, es posible instalar la unidad si hay alglin obstaculo por encima de la unidad siempre que haya el espacio que se muestra en la figura. 19-11/16 (500) o mas 3-15/16 (100) o mils 3. Obstaculos solamente por la parte frontal (ventilacion) Si hay un obstaculo por la parte frontal de la unidad como se muestra en la ilustracibn, ambos lados, la parte superior y la parte trasera deben quedar libres. V 19-11/16 (500) o mas \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ 5. Obstaculos por Ia parte frontal, trasera y en los lados • Si la unidad se instala en un area encerrada entre paredes, como una galeria, asegurese de dejar espacio suficiente tal y como se muestra a continuacibn. En este caso, la capacidad de acondicionamiento de aire y el consumo electrico pueden empeorar. • Si se instalan dos o mas unidades, no deben instalarse una frente a la otra ni una detras de la otra. 3-15/16 o mas 7-7/8 (200) o mas //////////f//////////i.%/i/ %///////II/.%//////////////�// II o 19-11/16 is1k 16(500) /. 13-25/32 (350) o mas 19-11/16(500)0 mas La altura del obstaculo es 47-1 4 (1200) o menos Nota: Si utiliza el acondicionador de aire cuando la temperatura exterior sea baja, observe las instrucciones siguientes. • No instale nunca la unidad exterior en un lugar en el que el lado de entrada/ salida de aire quede expuesto directamente al viento. • Para evitar la exposicibn al viento, instale la unidad exterior con el lado de entrada de aire hacia la pared. • Para evitar la exposicibn al viento, se recomienda instalar una plata de- flectora en el lado de salida de aire de la unidad exterior. Para instalar el aparato de aire acondicionado, evite los lugares siguientes donde es mas probable que ocurran problemas. • Donde pueda haber una fuga de gas inflamable. • Donde haya demasiado aceite para maquinaria. • En ambientes salobres, como las zonas costeras. • Donde haya gas sulfurico, como en zonas de baflos termales, alcantarillas o aguas residuales. • Donde haya algtin equipo inalambrico o de alta frecuencia. • Donde haya elevadas emisiones de COV, incluidos compuestos de ftalato, aldehido formico, etc., que puedan causar craqueos. EXTERIOR 2. Parte frontal (ventilacion) abierta Siempre que se mantenga fibre un espacio como el que se muestra en la ilustracibn, no importa que haya obstaculos detras y a los lados de la unidad. (Sin obstaculo sobre la unidad) 7-7/8 (200) o mils 3-15/16 (100) o mas 13-25/32 (350) o mas 4. Obstaculos en Ia parte delantera y trasera La unidad se puede utilizar si se agrega una gula de ventilacion exterior opcional (MAC-856SG) (si ambos lados y la parte superior estan fibres). # 3-15/16 (100) o mas ////////////// 19-11/16 (500) o mas Gula de ventilacion (MAC-856SG) 6. Espacio de servicio Mantenga el espacio de servicio y mantenimiento que se muestra en la siguiente figura. Espacio de servicio / 3-15/16 (100) o mas 3-15/16 (100) o mas 19-11/16 (500) o mas 13-25/32 (350) o mas. • 13-25/32 (350) o mas (Unidad: pulg. (mm)) Sp -2 1-5. DIAGRAMA DE INSTALACION )(D Despues de la prueba de fugas, aplique /1 material aislante de modo que no queden huecos. Abra siguiendo el procedimiento habitual Mas de 19-11/16 pulg. (500 mm) si la parte delantera y ambos lados estan abiertos (C) (E) (J) Mas de 3-15/16 pulg. (100 mm) Abra siguiendo el procedimiento habitual Mas de 19-11/16 pulg. (500 mm) si la parte trasera, los lados y la parte superior estan abiertos Cuando los tubos deban instalarse en una pared con contenido mettlico (placas de laton) o rejillas metalicas, ponga un trozo de madera tratada quimicamente de 25/32 pulg. (20 mm) o mos de grosor entre la pared y los tubos o envuelva los tubos con 7 u 8 vueltas de cinta aislante de vinilo. Para utilizar tuberias ya existentes, active el modo COOL (REFRIGERA- CION) durante 30 minutos y realice el bombeo de vadado antes de retirar el acondicionador de aire antiguo. Adapte el abocardado a las dimensiones para el nuevo refrigerante. Mas de 3-15/16 pulg. (100 mm) Mas de 7-7/8 pulg. (200 mm) si hay obstaculos a ambos lados (F) Mas de 13-25/32 pulg. (350 mm) Instalacion de la unidad exterior 37-7/8 2 orificios rayados en forma de U (pemo base M8) Entrada de aire I Salida de aire 2-3/8 x 13/16 orificios ovales (perno base M8) Unidad: pulg. COMPONENTES QUE DEBERA ADQUIRIR LOCALMENTE (A) Cable de alimentacion* 1 (B) Cable de conexion interior/exterior* 1 (C) Tubo de conexion 1 (D) Cubierta del orificio de la pared 1 (E) Cinta para las conexiones 1 (F) Prolongacion del tubo de drenaje a de blando de 19/32 1pulg. (5C mm) en el interior o tuberia VP16 de PVC duro) 1 (G) Aceite refrigerante P°°a cantidad (H) Masilla 1 (I) Banda de fijacion del tubo 2 a 7 (J) Tornillo de fijacion para (I) 2 a 7 (K) Manguito del orificio de la pared 1 (L) Manguera de PVC blando de 15 mm en el interior o tubera VP16 de PVC duro para tapa de desagiie (1) 1 * Nota: Tienda el cable de conexion de la unidad interior/ex- terior (B) y el cable de alimentacion (A) al menos a 3 pies (1 m) de distancia del cable de la antena de television. Las "cantidades" referenciadas (6) y (K) indican el n° de componentes que debera utilizar por unidad interior. La unidad debe ser instalada por el servicio oficial de acuerdo con la normativa local. Entrada de aire Instalacion de la unidad exterior 840 2 orificios rayados en forma de U (pemo base M8) 4-10 x 21 orificios ovales (pemo base M8) Salida de aire Unidad: mm 1-6. TUBERIA DE DRENAJE PARA LA UNIDAD EXTERIOR La tarea de las tuberias de drenaje solo debe realizarse cuando se deba drenar desde un tinico sitio. 1) Elija uno de los orificios para drenaje e instale la boquilla de drenaje (1) en el mismo. 2) Cierre el resto de los orificios con los tapones (2). 3) Conecte la manguera de PVC blando (L) de 15 mm disponible en el mercado en el diametro interior con la boquilla de drenaje (1) y el tubo de desague. Nota: Instale la unidad en horizontal. No utilice la boquilla de drenaje (1) ni los tapones (2) en zonas frias. El agua de drenaje se puede congelar y provocar la parada del ventilador. La unidad exterior produce condensacion durante la funcion de calefaccion. Seleccione un lugar para la instalacion en el que la unidad exterior y las tomas de tierra no se humedezcan con el agua de drenaje ni se danen debido a la congelacion de dicha agua. 2. INSTALACION DE LA UNIDAD EXTERIOR 2-1. INSTALACION DE LA UNIDAD • Asegurese de fijar los pies de la unidad con tomillos cuando la instale. • Asegurese de instalar firmemente la unidad para evitar su desprendimiento en caso de terremoto o rafaga de viento. • Consulte la ilustracion a continuacion para ver un cimiento de hormigon. Aumente la profundidad del cimiento. Sp -3 Fije la unidad aqui con tomillos M8. Amplle el cimiento. 2-2. CABLES DE CONEXION PARA LA UNIDAD EXTERIOR • Asegurese de utilizar circuitos especificos para el aire acondicionado de la sala. • Los trabajos de cableado se deben basar en los estandares tecnicos aplicables. • Las conexiones de cableado deben realizarse segtin el siguiente diagrama. • Los tornillos deben apretarse de forma que no se suelten. 1) Extraiga el panel de servicio. 2) Extraiga la placa de conduction. 3) Acople el conector de conduction a la placa de conduction con la tuerca de bloqueo y, a continuation, fijelo a la unidad con tornillos. Asegurese de colocar los conectores de conduction en las ubicaciones correctas segtin sus tamaSos. 4) Conecte los cables de tierra a la caja de terminales TB. 5) Afloje el tomillo del terminal y conecte correctamente el cable de conexi6n de la unidad interior/exterior (B) desde la unidad interior en el bloque de terminales. Procure no equivocarse al hacer las conexiones. Fije con firmeza el cable al bloque de terminales de modo que no quede a la vista ninguna parte del alma, y que no se aplique ninguna fuerza externa a la section de conexi6n del bloque de terminales. 6) Apriete bien los tomillos de los terminales para que no se aflojen. Una vez apretados, tire ligeramente de los cables para confirmar que no se mueven. 7) Siga los pasos 5) y 6) para cada unidad interior. 8) Conecte el cable de alimentation (A). 9) Cierre firmemente el panel de servicio. Asegurese de que 3-2. CO- NEXION DE TUBERIAS ha terminado. Tomillos ESPECIFICACIONES ELECTRICAS UNIDAD EXTERIOR MXZ-2C20NA2 Alimentation (V, FASE, Hz) 208/230, 1, 60 Taman() max. fusible (retardo) (A) 20 Amperaje min. del circuito (A) 17,2 Motor del ventilador (F.L.A) 1,77 Compresor (R.L.A) 10,7 (L.R.A) 15,5 Tension de control Unidad interior-controlador remoto: (inalambrico) Unidad interior-unidad exterior: 12-24 V CC Conector de wnducci6n Tama8o comercial para el conector de conduction (a) Alimentation 3/4 pulg. (b) Interior/exterior 1/2 pulg. Panel de servicio Observation: • Utilice un terminal en anillo para conectar el cable de tierra al terminal. UNIDAD INTERIOR Paneldetenninales 1 ...... s2$3 208/230 V AC, monofasica, 60 Hz Terminal de tierra' Interruptor de desconexion Terminal de terra* Panel de terminales � n Panel de terminates rgg 1-3/8 pulg. (35 mm) 5/8 pulg.I (15 mm) Cable conductor Alimentation de 208/230 V AC monofasica, 2 conductores, 60Hz rti Terminal de terra* Panel de terminales // Panel de terminales UNIDAD EXTERIOR Tierra Nota: • La elimination de la manivela incrementa la efectividad de la operation de cableado. • Asegurese de volver a instalar la manivela. Tuerca de bloqueo Tomillo Conector de conduction Placa de conduction • Conecte los cables al numero correspondiente de terminales. • Asegurese de conectar cada tornillo con su terminal correspon- diente cuando fije los cables al panel de terminales. CONEXION DE CABLES Y CONEXION DEL CABLE DE TIERRA • Use un conductor solido min. AWG14 o un conductor trenzado min. AWG14. • Use un cable con aislamiento doble, aislamiento de 600 V. • Use tinicamente conductores de cobre. * Siga Ia normativa electrica local. CABLE DE ALIMENTACION • Utilice un conductor solido o trenzado min. AWG8. • Use unicamente conductores de cobre. * Siga la normative electrica local. CABLE DE TIERRA • Utilice un conductor solido o trenzado min. AWG8. • Use unicamente conductores de cobre. * Siga Ia normativa electrica local. Q ATENCION: • Conecte las unidades interior y exterior con el cable de conexi6n norma- lizado destinado a este fin y sujete bien el cable al panel de terminales de modo que no quede tenso en la zona de conexiones del panel. Una conexi6n y fijacion defectuosas podrian provocar un incendio. Con vistas a un futuro mantenimiento, prolongue los cables de conexi6n. • Conectar la corriente cuando la temperatura ambiente sea -4°F (-20°C) o inferior. • En conditions de -4°F (-20°C) o temperaturas inferiores, son necesa- rias al menos 4 horas de reposo antes de que las unidades entren en funcionamiento para que se calienten los componentes electricos. Sp -4 A CUIDADO Si quedan puertos sin utilizar, ase- gurese de apretar firmemente sus tuercas. A ATENCION AI instalar la unidad, conecte las tube - rias de refrigerante de forma fija antes de poner en marcha el compresor. • TRAB/ POS A .�� Y CONE flN DE TUBERIAS. 3-1. TAREAS DE ABOCARDAMIENTO 1) Corte el tubo de cobre correctamente con un cortador de tubos. (Fig. 1, 2) 2) Elimine completamente las rebabas del corte transversal del tubo. (Fig. 3) • Oriente la tuberia de cobre hacia abajo para evitar que las rebabas caigan dentro de la misma. 3) Una vez eliminadas las rebabas, extraiga las tuercas abocardadas colocadas en las unidades interior y exte- rior y pbngalas en el tubo. (Cuando se ha terminado el proceso de abocardado ya no se pueden poner). 4) Labores de abocardamiento (Fig. 4, 5). Sujete firmemen- te el tubo de cobre de la dimension que se muestra en la tabla. Seleccione la medida A pulg. (mm) en la tabla de acuerdo con la herramienta seleccionada. 5) Compruebe • Compare el abocardado con la Fig. 6. • Si el abocardado se ve defectuoso, corte la section abocardada y repita el proceso de abocardado. Tuberia r, Tuberia cobre ., � Fig. 1 Bien Mal 90' Rebaba Tuberia de cobre / KEscadada de nserva,�{-,, »\�r °� Cortador » de tuberias Fig. 3 L� Inclinado Irregular Con g rebabas Fig. 2 Abocardador • • vr • I f'=� Tipo manguito Tipo tuerca de de embrague aletas Fig. 4 A Tuberia cobre de Fig. 5 Reborde liso Interior lustroso sin aranazos. • %/,�/ Pieza de ,-�1 �� P. QRebordede longitud uniforme Fig. 6 lljaci6n Tuerca abocardada 0,04 a 0,06 (1,0 a 1,5) Diametro del tubo [pulg. (mm)] B [pulg. (mm)] A [pulg. (mm)] Par de torsion Herramienta tipo em- brague para R410A Herramienta tipo em- brague para R22 Herramienta tipo tuerca de mariposa para R22 pies -Ib N•m kgf•cm 1/4 (06,35) 21/32 (17) 0 a 0,02 (0 a 0,5) 0,04 a 0,06 (1,0 a 1,5) 0,06 a 0,08 (1,5 a 2,0) 10 a 13 13,7 a 17,7 140 a 180 3/8 (09,52) 7/8 (22) 25 a 30 34,3 a 41,2 350 a 420 1/2 (012,7) 1-1/32 (26) 0,08 a 1,0 (2,0 a 2,5) 36 a 42 49,0 a 56,4 500 a 575 5/8 (015,88) 1-5/32 (29) 54 a 58 73,5 a 78,4 750 a 800 3-2. CONEXION DE TUBERIAS 1) Aplique una capa fina de aceite refrigerante (G) a los extremos abocardados de las conexiones de la tuberia de la unidad exterior. 2) Alinee el centro de la tuberia con el centro de las conexiones de la tuberia de la unidad exterior y apriete a mano las primeras 3 o 4 vueltas de la tuerca abocar- dada. 3) Apriete la tuerca abocardada con una Have dinamometrica tal y como se especiflca en la tabla. • Si la aprieta demasiado podria danarse la tuerca abocardada, causando perdidas de refrigerante. • No olvide envolver las tuberias con cinta aislante. El contacto directo con la tuberia descubierta podria causar quemaduras o congelation. 3-3. AISLAMIENTO TERMICO Y FORRADO CON CINTA 1) Cubra las uniones de tuberias con cubiertas de tuberia. 2) En el lado de la unidad exterior, aisle bien cada una de las tuberias y valvulas. 3) Aplique cinta de tuberias (E) a partir de la entrada de la unidad exterior. • Sujete con cinta (adhesiva) el extremo de la cinta de tuberias (E). • Cuando las tuberias deban colocarse por encima del techo, en un annario empotrado o en lugares con una temperature y humedad elevadas, tendra que aplicar una cantidad suplementaria de aislante para evitar la condensation. 4. PROCEDIMIENTOS DE PURGADO, PRUEBA DE FUGAS Y FUNCIONAMIENTO DE PRUEBA 4-1. PROCEDIMIENTO DE PURGADO Y PRUEBA DE FUGAS 1) Retire la tapa de la abertura de servicio de la valvula de retenci6n situada en el lado de la tuberia de gas de la unidad exterior. (Inicialmente, las valvulas de retenci6n ester" completamente cerradas y cubiertas con sus tapas). 2) Conecte la valvula colectora de man6metro y la bomba de vacio al puerto de servicio de la valvula de retenci6n en el lado de la tuberia del gas de la unidad exterior. 3) Ponga en funcionamiento la bomba de vacio. (Dejela funcionar durante mas de 15 minutos). 4) Compruebe el vacio con la valvula colectora de man6metro, cierre luego esta valvula y detenga la bomba de vacio. 5) Espere asi uno o dos minutos. Asegurese de que el indicador de la valvula colectora de man6metro permanece en la misma position. Compruebe que el man6metro de presi6n marca -14,7 psi [man6metro] (-0,101 MPa). 6) Extraiga rapidamente la valvula colectora de man6metro del puerto de servicio de la valvula de retenci6n. 7) Abra por completo todas las valvulas de retenci6n de la tuberia de gas y de la tuberia de liquido. Si no se Ileva a cabo este operation abriendo dichas val- vulas por completo, el rendimiento disminuira y se produciran problemas. 8) Consulte 1-2., e introduzca la cantidad indicada de refrigerante si fuera necesario. Introduzca el refrigerante liquido con lentitud. De lo contrario, la composition del refrigerante en el sistema puede cambiar y afectar al rendimiento del equipo de aire acondicionado. 9) Apriete la tapa del puerto de servicio para volver al estado initial. 10)Prueba de fugas Sp -5 •4 a 5 vueltas 'Cerrado Abiertaf-,' Llave hexagonal Tapa de la abertura de servicio (Par 13,7 a 17,7 N•m 140 a 180 kgf•cm) Tapa de la valvula de -0,101 MPa retenci6n (-760 mmHg) (Par 19,6 a 29,4 N•m, 200 a 300 kgf•cm) Valvula de Valvula de retenci6n para retenci6n para LIQUIDO GAS Manivela hada abajo Precauciones al utilizar la valvula de control Cerrado AAbierta Vdlvula decontrol ,�11 Cuerpo Puerto de servicio Indicador de presi6n compuesto (para R410A) Man6metro (para R410A) �r Valvula colectora de man6metro (para R410A) Manivela hacia arriba Manguera de carga (para R410A) Bomba de vacio (para R410A) Al conectar la valvula de control al puerto de servicio, la 'plaza interior de la valvula podria deformarse o soltarse si se a0lica demasiada presion. Esto podria orovocar fugas de gas. Al conectar la valvula de control al puerto de servicio, asegurese de Manguera que la pieza interior de la valvula rarga (para esta cerrada, y a continuation R410A) apriete la pieza A. No apriete la pieza A ni gire la pieza interior cuando este abierta la valvula. 4-2. CARGA DE GAS Efecttie la carga de gas en la unidad. 1) Conecte el cilindro de gas a la abertura de servicio de la valvula de retenci6n. 2) Purgue el aire de la tuberia (o manguera) procedente del cilindro del refrigerante. 3) Anada la cantidad de refrigerante indicada mientras el equipo de aire acondicionado funciona en modo de refrigeraci6n. Nota: Si anade refrigerante, no sobrepase la cantidad especificada para el ciclo de refrigeraci6n. CUIDADO: Al anadir mas refrigerante al sistema, asegurese de utilizar refrigerante en estado liquido. Recuerde que si carga el refrigerante en estado gaseoso, su composici6n puede alterarse en el sistema y afectar a la operaci6n normal del acondicionador del aire. Recuerde tambi&n cargar el refrigerante liquido poco a poco, ya que de to contrario puede bloquear el compresor. Para mantener alta la presi6n del cilindro de gas, caliente el cilindro de gas con agua caliente (a menos de 104°F (40°C)) en las estaciones frias. Nunca utilice fuego o vapor. 4-3. EXTRACCION DEL PANEL DE MANTENIMIENTO El ajuste del interruptor Dip del panel del controlador exterior puede modificarse sin extraer el panel delantero. Siga los procedimientos que aparecen a continuacion para extraer el panel de mantenimiento y ajustar el interruptor Dip. 1) Extraiga el tornillo o tornillos que sujetan el panel de mantenimiento. 2) Extraiga el panel de mantenimiento y realice los ajustes necesarios. 3) Instate el panel de mantenimiento. Nota: Asegurese de fijar el panel de mantenimiento de forma segura. Si no se instala correctamente podrian surgir problemas de funcionamiento. Union Union Union Union Modelo Unidad interior MXZ-2C20NA2 —o Valvula de retenci6n Vdlvula de reten- ci6n con abertura Tuberla de servicio de gas Valvula de acciona- miento del cilindro de gas refrigerante (para R410A) Valvula multiple del man6metro (para R410A) Cilirxiro de gas refrigerante del R410A con sif6n Refrigerante (liquido) Balanza electr6nica para la rarga de refrigerante Panel de mantenimiento Manguera de carga (para R410A) 4-4. BLOQUEAR EL MODO DE FUNCIONAMIENTO DELAIRE ACONDICIONADO (COOL (REFRIGERACION), DRY(DESHUMIDIFICACION), HEAT (CALEFACCION)) • Descripci6n de la funcion: Con esta funcion, una vez que el modo de funcionamiento se ha bloqueado en COOUDRY(REFRIGERACI6N/DESHUMIDIFICACI6N) o HEAT (CALEFAC- CIbN), el acondicionador de aire funciona unicamente en ese modo. ' Es necesario cambiar el ajuste para activar esta funci6n. Explique esta funci6n a sus clientes y pregunteles si desean usarla. [Como bloquear el modo de funcionamiento] 1) Asegurese de apagar el acondicionador de aire antes de realizar este ajuste. 2) Ajuste el interruptor "3" de SW1 en el panel del controlador exterior en la posicion ON para habilitar esta funcion. 3) Para bloquear el funcionamiento en el modo COOUDRY (REFRIGERAC16N/ DESHUMIDIFICAC16N), ajuste el interruptor "4" de SW1 en el panel del contro- lador exterior en la posicion OFF. Para bloquear el funcionamiento en el modo HEAT, ajuste el mismo interruptor en la posicion ON. 4) Encienda el acondicionador de aire. Bo ❑ El 0000 ••• SW871 SW2 LED SW1 SW1 ririnriQ 1 2 3 4 5 6 COOUDRY SW1 ronloo 1 2 3 4 5 6 HEAT 4-5. REDUCIR EL RUIDO DE FUNCIONAMIENTO DE LA UNIDAD EXTERIOR • Descripcion de la funci6n: Con esta funci6n, que reduce la carga de funcionamiento, puede limitarse el ruido de la unidad exterior durante la noche en modo COOL (REFRIGERACI6N). Sin embargo, tenga en cuenta que la capacidad de refrigeracion y calefaccion puede reducirse al activar esta funcion. * Es necesario cambiar el ajuste para activar esta funcion. Explique esta funcion a sus clientes y pregunteles si desean usaria. [Como reducir el ruido de funcionamiento] SWI 1) Asegrirese de apagar el acondicionador de aire antes de realizar este ajuste. 2) Ajuste el interruptor "5" de SW1 en el panel del controlador exterior en la posicion ON para habilitar esta funcion. 3) Encienda el acondicionador de aire. CHEI Reducir el ruido de funciorramiento Sp -6 4-6. COMPROBACION DE FUNCIONAMIENTO • Deben realizarse pruebas de funcionamiento de las unidades interiores de forma individual. Consulte el manual de instalaci6n que acompana a la unidad interior y asegurese de que todas las unidades funcionan correctamente. • Si se realiza la prueba de funcionamiento de todas las unidades al mismo tiempo, no podran detectarse posibles conexiones erroneas de las tuberias de refrigerante ni de los cables que conectan las unidades interiores y la exterior. Por to tanto, asegurese de realizar la prueba de funcionamiento de las unidades una a una. Acerca del mecanismo de protection de la reanudacion Una vez se haya detenido el compresor, el dispositivo de prevention de la reanudaci6n se activa de forma que el compresor no vuelve a ponerse en funcionamiento durante 3 minutos para proteger el acondicionador de aire. Funcion de correction de conexiones/tuberias Esta unidad tiene una funcion de correcci6n de conexiones/tuberias que corrige la combination de las mismas. Cuando exista la posibilidad de una combination de conexiones y tuberias incorrecta y resulte dificil confirmarla, use esta funcion para detectarla y corregirla siguiendo estos procedimientos. Asegurese de lo siguiente. • La unidad recibe corriente. • Las valvulas de retenci6n estan abiertas. Nota: Durante la detection, el funcionamiento de la unidad interior estara controlado por la unidad exterior. Durante la detection, la unidad interior dejara de funcionar au- tomaticamente. Esto no es un fallo de funcionamiento. Procedimiento Mantenga presionado el interruptor de correcci6n de tuberias/conexiones (SW871) 1 minuto o mos tras conectar la alimentation. • La correction tarda entre 10 y 15 minutos en efectuarse. Cuando la correcci6n ha finalizado, su resultado se muestra por medio de indicadores luminosos. La tabla siguiente describe los detalles. • Para cancelar esta funcion antes de que finalice, vuelva a pulsar el interruptor de correction de tuberias/conexiones (SW871). • Cuando la correcci6n finalice sin error, no vuelva a pulsar el interruptor de correcci6n de tuberias/ conexiones (SW871). Cuando el resultado sea "No completado", vuelva a pulsar el interruptor de correction de tuberias/ conexiones (SW871) para cancelar esta funcion. Seguidamente, confirme la combination de conexiones y tuberias de la forma habitual, haciendo funcionar las unidades interiores una a una. • Mientras la operation se Ileva a cabo, la unidad recibe corriente. Asegurese de no tocar nada mos que el interruptor; tampoco la placa de circuito impreso. Podria sufrir una descarga electrica o quemaduras de las partes que reciben corriente o que estan calientes en torno al interruptor. Si toca las partes que reciben corriente, puede dear la placa de circuito impreso. • Para evitar danar la placa de circuito impreso de control electronico, elimine la electricidad estatica antes de utilizar esta funcion. • Esta funcion no se puede utilizar cuando la temperatura en el exterior es de 0•C o menos. Indicadores luminosos durante Ia detection LED1 (Rojo) LED2 (Amarillo) LED3 (Verde) Iluminado Iluminado Parpadea una vez Resultado de Ia funcion de correction de tuberias/conexiones LED1 (Rojo) LED2 (Amarillo) LED3 (Verde) Resultado Iluminado Apagado Iluminado Completado (Problems corregido o normal) Parpadea una vez Parpadea una vez Parpadea una vez No completado (No se ha detectado) Otras indicaciones Consulte las "PRECAU- CIONES DE SEGURIDAD CUANDO EL INDICADOR PARPADEA", situadas detras del panel superior. 4-7. EXPLICACION PARA EL USUARIO • Basandose en el MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES, explique al usuario como utilizar el equipo de aire acondicionado (corm utilizar el controlador remoto, tomo retirar los filtros de aire, tomo retirar o colocar el control remoto en el soporte para el controlador remoto, tomo limpiar, precauciones para el funcionamiento, etc.) • Aconseje al usuario que lea atentamente el MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES. 5. BOMBED DE VACIADO Cuando traslade o se deshaga del aire acondicionado, bombee para vaciar el sistema siguiendo el procedimiento indicado a continuation para que no escape nada de refrigerante a la atmosfera. 1) Desactive el disyuntor. 2) Conecte la valvula colectora de man6metro al puerto de servicio de la valvula de retenci6n en el lado de la tuberia del gas de la unidad exterior. 3) Cierre completamente la valvula de retenci6n en el lado de la tuberia de liquido de la unidad exterior. 4) Active el disyuntor. 5) Inicie el funcionamiento de REFRIGERACION de emergencia en todas las unidades interiores. 6) Cuando el medidor de presion indique de 0,1 a 0 psi [man6metro] (de 0,05 a 0 MPa), cierre completamente la valvula de retenci6n en el lateral del tubo de gas de la unidad exterior y detenga la operation. (Consulte el manual de instalacibn de la unidad interior para mos detalles acerca del metodo de detention de la operation). * Si se ha anadido demasiado refrigerante al sistema con acondicionador de aire, puede que la presion no baje de 0,1 a 0 psi [man6metro] (de 0,05 a 0 MPa), o que la funcion de protection se ponga en funcionamiento debido a la subida de presion en el circuito de refrigeration de presion elevada. Si esto ocurre, utilice el recogedor de refrigerante para recoger todo el refrigerante del sistema y, a continuation, una vez que las unidades interior y exterior se hayan reubicado, vuelva a recargar el sistema con la cantidad adecuada de refrigerante. 7) Desactive el disyuntor. Retire el medidor de presion y las tuberias de refrigerante. Sp -7 A ATENCION Al bombear el refrigerante, detenga el compresor antes de desconectar las tuberias de refrigerante. El compresor podria explotar y causar lesiones si penetrara alguna sustancia extrana, como por ejemplo aire, en las tuberias. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN BH79A325H02 M -SERIES SUBMITTAL DATA: MXZ-2C20NA2 1.5 -TON MULTI -ZONE INVERTER HEAT -PUMP SYSTEM MITSUBISHI /Mk ELECTRIC Job Name: Loomis Seattle Branch System Reference:Coin Office HVAC Unit Date: GENERAL FEATURES • Variable speed INVERTER -driven compressor • Energy Star® certified) (non -ducted) • M -NET connection through outdoor unit • Quiet outdoor unit operation as low as 50 dB(A) • New Intelligent Power Module (IPM) for reduced power loss • Selectable thermal lockout/restart function • Optional base pan heater • High pressure switch for additional protection • Thermal differential of +/-1° F from setpoint CORRECTION +0 VSON NO. frUPt000 (o FILE' REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 092019 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 1ENERGY STAR products are third -party certified by an EPA -recognized Certification Body. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 2 6 2019 PERMIT CENTER Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2018 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. SPECIFICATIONS: MXZ-2C24NA2 Model number Cooling*1 Outdoor unit Indoor unit type Maximum Capacity Btu/h MXZ-2C20NA2 Non- Mix Ducted Ducted 20,000 Rated Capacity Btu/h 18,000 19,000 20,000 Minimum Capacity Btu/h 5,700 Maximum Power Input W 2,245 Rated Power Input W 1,417 1,709 2,000 Power Factor % 98.7 99.3 99.9 Heating at 47° F*2 Maximum Capacity Btu/h 25,000 Rated Capacity Btu/h 22,000 Minimum Capacity Btu/h 7,400 Maximum Power Input W 2,455 Rated Power Input W 1,641 1,706 1,771 Power Factor % Btu/h 96.2 97.9 99.6 Heating at 17° F *3 Maximum Capacity 15,500 :. 15,000 ' 14,500 4 Rated Capacity Btu/h 12,500 13,000 13,500 Maximum Power Input W 1,750 1,780 1,810 Rated Power Input W 1,300 1,325 1,350 Heating at 5° F *4 Maximum Capacity Btu/h 11,100 11,000 10,900 Maximum Power Input W 1,600 1,625 1,650 Efficiency SEER 20.00 18.00 16.00 EER *1 12.70 11.35 10.00 HSPF (IV) 10.00 9.65 9.30 COP at 47° F *2 3.93 3.78 3.64 COP at 17° F *3 2.82 2.87 2.93 ENERGY STAR® Certified YES NO NO Electrical Voltage, Phase, Frequency Guaranteed Voltage Range _ 208 / 230V, 1 -phase, 60 Hz V AC 187 - 253 1iRecommended Voltage: Indoor - Outdoor, S1-S2 V AC 208V / 230 Voltage: Indoor - Outdoor, S2 -S3 V DC 12-24 Voltage: Indoor - Remote controller V DC 24 Fuse/Breaker Size A 20 Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2018 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. SPECIFICATIONS: MXZ-2C20NA2 Model number Outdoor unit Indoor unit type Recommended Wire Size (Indoor - Outdoor) Outdoor unit Outdoor unit operating temperature range MCA AWG A MXZ-2C20NA2 Non- Mix Ducted Ducted AWG 14 17.2 Fan Motor Full Load Amperage A 1.77 Fan Motor Output W 64 Airflow Rate CFM 1,342 / 1,458 Refrigerant Control Liner Expansion Valve Defrost Method Reverse Cycle Heat Exchanger Type Plate fin coil Sound Pressure Level, Cooling*1 dB(A) 50 Sound Pressure Level, Heating*2 dB(A) 54 Compressor Type Twin Rotary type Compressor Model SNB140FQUH2T Compressor Motor Output Compressor Rated Load Amps Compressor Locked Rotor Amps kW A A 1.5 10.7 15.5 Compressor Oil Type // Charge oz. NE022 / 20.3 External Finish Color Munsell 3.0Y 7.8/1.1 Base Pan Heater Optional Unit Dimensions W: In. [mm] 33-1/16 [840] D: In. [mm] 13 [330] H: In. [mm] 27-15/16 [710] Package Dimensions W: In. [mm] 40 [1,010] D: In. [mm] 18-1/2 [470] H: In. [mm] 33-1/2 [850] Unit Weight Lbs. [kg] 126 [57] Package Weight Lbs. [kg] 147 [67] Cooling Intake Air Temp °F 14 to 115 (Maximum / Minimum) Heating Intake Air Temp (Maximum / Minimum) °F 5 to 75 Thermal Lock -out / Re -start Temperatures °F Cooking: 10.4 / 14 Heating: 1.5 / 5 Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2018 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. SPECIFICATIONS: MXZ-2C20NA2 Model number Outdoor unit Indoor unit type Type Conditions (Rated *2 Heating at 47°F (Indoor //Outdoor) data is determined MXZ-2C20NA2 Non- Mix Ducted Ducted R410A Refrigerant °F 70°F DB, 60°F WB // 17°F DB, 15°F WB Conditions *4 Heating at 5°F (Indoor //Outdoor) °F 70°F DB, 60°F WB // -4°F DB, -5°F WB Charge Lbs., Oz. 3, 15 Indoor unit connection Maximum Number of Connected IDU 2 Minimum Number of Connected IDU 2 Maximum connected capacity Btu/h 24,000 Minimum connected capacity Btu/h 12,000 Piping Gas Pipe Size O.D. (Flared) In. [mm] L 3/8 [9.52] Liquid Pipe Size O.D. (Flared) In. [mm] Ft. [m] 1/4 [6.35] 164 [50] Total Piping Length Maximum Height Difference, ODU above IDU Ft. [m] 33 [10] Maximum Height Difference, ODU below IDU Ft. [m] 49 [15] Farthest Piping Length from ODU to IDU Ft. [m] 82 [25] Maximum Number of Bends 50 AHRI Rated *1 Cooling (Indoor // Outdoor) °F 80°F DB, 67°F WB // 95°F DB, 75°F WB Conditions (Rated *2 Heating at 47°F (Indoor //Outdoor) data is determined °F 70°F DB, 60°F WB // 47°F DB, 43°F WB ata fixed *3 Heating at 17°F (Indoor // Outdoor) compressor speed) °F 70°F DB, 60°F WB // 17°F DB, 15°F WB Conditions *4 Heating at 5°F (Indoor //Outdoor) °F 70°F DB, 60°F WB // -4°F DB, -5°F WB For reference to connected capacity charts, please refer MXZ-2C20NA2-U1 Operational Performance. Notes: Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2018 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. ACCESSORIES: MXZ-2C20NA2 Port Adapter size: 3/8" x 5/8" ❑ PAC-SG76RJ-E Port Adapter size: 1/4" x 3/8" ❑ PAC-493PI Joint Pipe Port Adapter size: 3/8" X 1/2" ❑ MAC-A454JP-E Port Adapter size: 1/2" X 3/8" ❑ MAC-A455JP-E Port Adapter size: 1/2" X 5/8" o MAC-A456JP-E Air Discharge Guide ❑ MAC-856SG Base Pan Heater ❑ PAC-646BH-E Control Cable ❑ CW162S 3 -pole Disconnect ❑ TAZ-MS303 M -NET Adapter ❑ PAC-IFO1MNT-E Wall Mounting Bracket (Powder -coated Steel) ❑ QSWB2000M-1 Wall Mounting Bracket (316 Series Stainless Steel) ❑ QSWBSS Outdoor Unit Mounting Pad 24" x 42" x 3" ❑ ULTRILITE2 MiniSplit Mounting Stand -Dual Fan models - 12" ❑ QSMS1202M MiniSplit Mounting Stand -Dual Fan models - 18" ❑ QSMS1802M MiniSplit Mounting Stand -Dual Fan models - 24" ❑ QSMS2402M 1/4 x 1/2 x 15' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) ❑ MLS141212T-15 1/4 x 1/2 x 30' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) ❑ MLS141212T-30 1/4 x 1/2 x 50' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) o MLS141212T-50 1/4 x 1/2 x 65' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) ❑ MLS141212T-65 1/4 x 1/2 x 100' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) ❑ MLS141212T-100 Diamondback 3/8 x 5/8 x 10' / 1/2" LinesetTwin-Tube Insulation)❑ Linesets ( MPLS385812T-10 3/8 x 5/8 x 15' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) ❑ MPLS385812T-15 3/8 x 5/8 x 30' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) ❑ MPLS385812T-30 3/8 x 5/8 x 50' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) o MPLS385812T-50 3/8 x 5/8 x 65' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) ❑ MPLS385812T-65 3/8 x 5/8 x 100' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) ❑ MPLS385812T-100 *1 Linesets are indoor unit specific and will be listed in the IDU information - the Joint Pipe adaptors are used in this application Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2018 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. DIMENSIONS: MXZ-2C20NA2 .t - 29/32" 1.FREE SPACE 3-15/16' or more 3 15/16' or more 2.SERVICE SPACE 3-15/16' or more 13-25/32' or 6-21/32" 19-11/16° 6-23/32 Air In et 3-e(1-5/18') Drain ho Handle 0 03 Ai 3-25/32' or more SERVICE SPACE 3-25/32' or more FORM# MXZ-2C20NA2 - 201805 O9et 4(13/32't13/16n Oval Hole (Foundation Bolt M8) 33-1/16° 1-3/16" 7-7/8° 11-25/32" Specifications are subject to change without notice. Unit: inch (mm) LI0 1e'Iaa.552(F51FURE Gi5 3,6(14 Wt3 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC COOLING & HEATING 1340 Satellite Boulevard, Suwanee, GA 30024 Toll Free: 800-433-4822 www.mehvac.com Intertek © 2018 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. -7CORRECTION • , • • , • _ • " • - . . „.• .4";4•-• "e-1 'CITYOF TUKWILA .161.-2 6 2019 LP ER T CENTER AN I/UL AVMC US CAN/OSA STD. C22.2 NO.238 Intertek 9700058 ! MODEL MUZ-GL18NA SERVICE REF. MUZ-GL1 SNA - u1 VOLTS PHASE Hz UNIT SUPPLY 208/230 1 60 MAX. VOLTAGE 253 MIN. VOLTAGE 187 APPROVED FOR HACR BREAKERS OR TIME DELAY FUSES. MAX. FUSE 15 AMPS MIN. CIRCUIT AMPACITY 14 FAN MOTOR 0.93 w 77 PUT) COMPRESSOR 10.0' X12.5 REFRIGERANT R410A FACTORY CHARGED LBS. 1OZ. IF THE LIQUID LINE EXCEEDS 225 FT., PER ADDITIONAL PLUS 12 OZ. DESIGN PRESSURE PSG L�Q1 HI LINE.D SIDE LO SIDE * SUITABLE FOR OUTDOOR INSTALLATION. WEIGHT 121 LBS. SERIAL NO. El "20ti 8 003537 T MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN THAILAND SG79V893H03 I I i� i Ir . mtMITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SPLIT -TYPE AIR CONDITIONERS INSTALLATION MANUAL JG79Y036H01 MSZ-GL06/09/12/15NA MSY-GL09/12/15NA When installing multi units, refer to the installation manual of the multi unit for outdoor unit installation. • Required Phillips screwdriver Level Scale Utility knife or scissors 3 in. (75 mm) hole saw Torque wrench Wrench (or spanner) Tools for Installation 5/32 in. (4 mm) hexagonal wrench Flare tool for R410A Gauge manifold for R410A Vacuum pump for R410A Charge hose for R410A Pipe cutter with reamer 1. BEFORE INSTALLATION • 1-1. THE FOLLOWING SHOULD ALWAYS BE OBSERVED FOR SAFETY • Be sure to read these safety precautions and instructions. • Be sure to observe the warnings and cautions specified here. • After reading this manual, be sure to store it with the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS for future reference. • Please report to your supply authority or obtain their consent before connecting this equipment to the power supply system. FILE WARNING (Could lead to death or serious injury.) ■ Do not install the unit by yourself (user). Improper or incomplete installation could cause fire, electric shock, injury due to the unit falling, or water leakage. Consult a qualified installer or the dealer from whom you purchased the unit. • Follow the instructions detailed in the installation manual. Incomplete installation could cause fire or electric shock, injury due to the unit fall- ing, or leakage of water. • When installing the unit, use appropriate protective equipment and tools for safety. Failure to do so could cause injury. • Install the unit securely in a place that can bear the weight of the unit. If the installation location cannot bear the weight of the unit, the unit could fall causing injury. • Perform electrical work according to the installation manual and be sure to use an exclusive circuit. Do not connect other electrical appliances to the circuit. If the capacity of the power circuit is insufficient or there is incomplete electrical work, it could result in a fire or an electric shock. ■ Ground the unit correctly. Do not connect the ground wire to a gas pipe, water pipe, lightning rod or tel- ephone ground. Defective grounding could cause electric shock. ■ Do not damage the wires. Damaged wires could cause fire. ■ Be sure to shut off the main power when setting up the indoor P.C. board or wiring. Failure to do so could cause electric shock. • Use the specified wires to securely connect the indoor and outdoor units. At- tach the wires firmly to avoid applying stress to the terminal block. Improper connection could cause fire. • Do not install the unit in a place where flammable gas may leak. If gas leaks and accumulates around the unit, it could cause an explosion. ■ Do not use intermediate connection of the power cord or the extension cord. Do not connect many devices to one AC outlet. It could cause a fire or an electric shock. ■ Use the parts provided or specified parts for the installation work. The use of defective parts could cause an injury or leakage of water due to a fire, an electric shock, the unit falling, etc. • When plugging the power supply plug into the outlet, make sure that there is no dust, blockage, or loose parts both in the outlet and on the plug. Verify that the power supply plug is completely in the outlet. If there is dust, blockage, or loose parts on the power supply plug or the outlet, it could cause electric shock or fire. If loose parts are found on the power supply plug, replace it ■ Securely attach the electrical cover to the indoor unit and the service panel to the outdoor unit. If the electrical cover of the indoor unit and/or the service panel of the outdoor unit are not attached securely, dust, water, etc. could collect in the unit and could cause a fire or an electric shock. IN When installing, relocating, or servicing the unit, make sure that no substance other than the specified refrigerant (R410A) enters the refrigerant circuit. Any presence of foreign substance such as air can cause abnormal pressure rise and may result in explosion or injury. The use of any refrigerant other than that specified for the system will cause mechanical failure, system malfunction, or unit breakdown. In the worst case, this could lead to a serious impediment to securing product safety. • Do not discharge the refrigerant into the atmosphere. Check that the refriger- ant gas does not leak after installation has been completed. If refrigerant leaks during installation, ventilate the room. If refrigerant comes in contact with a fire, harmful gas could be generated. If refrigerant gas leaks indoors, and comes into contact with the flame of a fan heater, space heater, stove, etc., harmful gases will be generated. ■ Use appropriate tools and piping materials for installation. The pressure of R410A is 1.6 times higher than R22. Not using the appropriate tools and materials, or improper installation could cause the pipes to burst causing an injury. IN When pumping down the refrigerant, stop the compressor before disconnecting the refrigerant pipes. If the refrigerant pipes are disconnected while the compressor is running and the stop valve is open, air could be drawn in and the pressure in the refrigeration cycle could become abnormally high, causing the pipes to burst. ■ When installing the unit, securely connect the refrigerant pipes before starting the compressor. If the compressor is started before the refrigerant pipes are connected and the stop valve is open, air could be drawn in and the pressure in the refrigeration cycle could become ab • Fasten a flare n If fastened too tig ■ Install the unit Si.au _R n yu i with�fl�p� V this tcc0szZajgrituatEal . APPROVED AUG 09 2019 A CAUTION (Could lea I to serious injury when operated incorrectly.) nanual. t leakage. • Depending on the installation area, install a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) circuit ■ Do not touch th air inlet - - outdo :r unit. breaker. This could cause ; ,JILt I�VG DIVISIOPJ If the Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) circuit breaker is not instated, an electric shock • Do not install th a nor ..n. tI anima c may ry :. could occur. If small animals enter the unit and damage its electrical parts, it could cause a ■ Perform the drainage/piping work securely according to the installation manual. malfunction, smoke emission, or fire. Keep the area around the unit clean. If there is defect in the drainage/piping work, water could drip from the unit, and damage household items. CORRECTION qFVISI�.N IMtI. I 'UB-OOO� RECEIVED CITY OF TU KWI LA JUL 262019 PERMIT CENTER 1-2. SELECTING THE INSTALLATION LOCATION INDOOR UNIT • Where airflow is not blocked. • Where cool (or warm) air spreads over the entire room. • On a rigid wall to reduce the possibility of vibration. • Where it is not exposed to direct sunlight. Do not expose to direct sunlight also during the period following unpack- ing to before use. • Where it can be easily drained. • At a distance 3 ft. (1 m) or more away from a TV and radio. Operation of the air conditioner may interfere with radio or TV reception. An amplifier may be required for the affected device. • In a place as far away as possible from fluorescent and incandescent lights (so the infrared remote control can operate the air conditioner normally). Where the air filter can be removed and replaced easily. Where it is away from the other heat or steam source. Note: Install the indoor unit high on the wall where air can distribute over the entire room. REMOTE CONTROLLER • Where it is convenient to operate and easily visible. • Where children cannot easily touch it. • Select a position about 4 ft. (1.2 m) above the floor. Check that signals from the remote controller from that position are received by the indoor unit (beep' or 'beep beep' receiving tone sounds). Then, attach remote controller holder to a pillar or wall and install wireless remote controller. Note: In rooms where inverter type fluorescent lamps are used, the signal from the wireless remote controller may not be received. OUTDOOR UNIT • Where it is not overly exposed to strong winds. If the outdoor unit is exposed to a wind during defrosting, the defrosting time will be longer. • Where airflow is good and dustless. • Where neighbours are not annoyed by operation sound or hot (or cool) air. • Where rigid wall or support is available to prevent the increase of operation sound or vibration. • Where there is no risk of combustible gas leakage. • If installing the unit in a location high above the ground, be sure to secure the unit legs. • Where it is at least 10 ft. (3 m) away from the antenna of TV set or radio. Operation of the air conditioner may interfere with radio or TV reception in areas where recep- tion is weak. An amplifier may be required for the affected device. • Install the unit horizontally. • Please install it in an area not affected by snowfall or blowing snow. In areas with heavy snow, please install a canopy, a pedestal and/or baffle boards. 1-3. SPECIFICATIONS 1-3-1. POWER SUPPLY AND INDOOR/OUTDOOR Electrical specifications WIRE CONNECTION • Power should be taken from an exclusive branched circuit. • Wiring work should be based on applicable technical standards. • Wiring connections should be made following the diagram. • Securely tighten screws. Connecting wires and the ground wire • Use solid conductor Min. AWG14 or stranded conductor Min. AWG14. • Use double insulated copper wire with 600 V insulation. • Use copper supply wire. * Follow local electrical codes. Power supply cable and ground wire • Use solid or stranded conductor Min. AWG14. • Use copper supply wire. * Follow local electrical codes. Note: When the indoor unit is powered from the outdoor unit, depend- ing on local code, a disconnect switch needs to be installed to a power supply circuit. 1-3-2. REFRIGERANT PIPES • To prevent condensation, insulate the two refrigerant pipes. • Refrigerant pipe bending radius must be 4 in. (100 mm) or more. L CAUTION Be sure to use the insulation of specified thickness (table on the right). Excessive insulation may cause incorrect installation of the indoor unit, and too little insulation may cause condensate to fore. • The unit has flared connections on both indoor and outdoor sides. • Remove the valve cover from the outdoor unit, then connect the pipe. • Refrigerant pipes are used to connect the indoor and outdoor units. • Be careful not to crush or over bend the pipe in pipe bending. • Refrigerant adjustment... If pipe length exceeds 25 ft. (7.5 m), additional refrigerant (R410A) charge is required. (The outdoor unit is charged with refrigerant for pipe length up to 25 ft. [7.5 m]) Note: • It is advisable to make a piping loop near outdoor unit so as to reduce vibration. For increased efficiency, install the outdoor unit in a location where continuous direct sunlight or excessive water can be avoided as much as possible. Note: When operating the air conditioner in low outside tem- perature, be sure to follow the instructions described below. • Never install the outdoor unit in a place where its air inlet/outlet side may be exposed directly to wind. • To prevent exposure to wind, install the outdoor unit with its air inlet side facing the wall and a baffle board on the air outlet side. Avoid the following places for installation where air conditioner trouble is liable to occur. • Where flammable gas could leak. • Where there is an excessive amount of machine oil in the air. • Where oil is splashed or where the area is filled with oily smoke (such as cooking areas and factories, in which the properties of plastic could be changed and damaged). • Salty places such as the seaside. • Where sulfide gas is generated such as hot spring, sewage, waste water. • Where there is high -frequency or wireless equipment. • Where there is emission of high levels of VOCs, includ- ing phthalate compounds, formaldehyde, etc., which may cause chemical cracking. MODEL MSZ-GL06NA MSZ-GL09NA MSY-GL09NA MSZ-GL12NA MSY-GL12NA MSZ-GL15NA MSY-GL15NA INDOOR UNIT Power supply (V, PHASE, Hz) 208/230, 1, 60 Min. Circuit Ampacity (A) 1.0 Fan motor (F.L.A.) (A) 0.76 OUTDOOR UNIT Power supply (V, PHASE, Hz) 208/230, 1, 60 Max. Fuse size (time delay) (A) * 15 15 15 Min. CircuitAmpacity (A) 9 9 10 Fan motor (F.L.A.) (A) * 0.50 0.50 0.50 Compressor (R.L.A) (A) MSZ * 6.2 6.6 7.4 MSY 4.9 4.9 6.8 (L.R.A) (A) MSZ * 7.7 8.2 9.3 MSY 6.1 6.1 8.5 Control voltage Indoor unit - Remote controller: (Wireless) Indoor unit - Outdoor unit: DC12-24 V (Polar) MSZ-GLO6NA is a dedicated indoor unit for multi system. Refer to the installation manual of the multi unit for details. Pipe Outside diameter Minimum wall thickness Insulation thickness Insulation material inch (mm) For liquid 1/4 (6.35) 0.0315 (0.8) 5/16 (8) Heat resistant foam plastic 0.045 Spe- cific gravity For gas 3/8 (9.52) 0.0315 (0.8) 5/16 (8) 1/2 (12.7) 0.0315 (0.8) 5/16 (8) Limits Pipe length MSZ/MSY-GL09/12/15NA 65 ft. (20 m) max. Height difference MSZ/MSY-GL09/12/15NA 40 ft. (12 m) max. No. of bends 10 max. Pipe length Up to 25 ft. (7.5 m) No additional charge is required. Exceeding 25 ft. (7.5 m) Additional charge is required. (Refer to the table below.) Refrigerant to be added MSZ/MSY-GL09/12/15NA 1.08 oz each 5 ft. (20 g/m) 1-4. INSTALLATION DIAGRAM ACCESSORIES Check the following parts before installation. <Indoor unit> (1) Installation plate 1 (2) Attachment screws for the installa- tion plate 4 x 25 mm 5 (3) Wireless remote controller 1 (4) Felt tape (For left or left -rear piping) 1 (5) Remote controller holder 1 (6) Screws for the remote controller holder 3.5 x 16 mm (Black) 2 (7) Battery (AAA) for (3) 2 (8) Air cleaning filter 2 FIELD -SUPPLIED PARTS (A) Indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire*1 1 (B) Extension pipe 1 (C) Wall hole sleeve 1 (D) Wall hole cover 1 (E) Pipe attachment strap 2 to 5 (F) Screw for (E) 4 • 20 mm 2 to 5 (G) Piping tape 1 (H) Putty 1 1 () Drain hose (or soft PVC hose, 19/32 in. [15 mm] inner diameter or hard PVC pipe VP16) 2 to 5 (J) Refrigerant oil 1 (K) Power supply cord *1 1 Note: *1 Place indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (A) and power supply cord (K) at least 3 ft. (1 m) away from the TV antenna wire. Use the wall hole sleeve (C) to prevent indoor/ outdoor connecting wire (A) from contacting metal parts in the wall and to protect the wiring from rodents. Indoor unit Wall hole sleeve (C) i Wall hole cover (D) Seal the wall hole gap with putty (H). Attach the pipe to wall with pipe at- tachment strap (E). Cut off the extra length. Pipe attachment strap (E) Attachment screw (F) (G) (E) (5) *2 4 in. (100 mm) or more when front and sides of unit are clear •3 When any 2 sides of left, right and rear of unit are clear Unit: inch 2-3/8 x 13/16 slot Air outlet Units should be installed by licensed contractor according to local code requirements. After the leak test, apply insulating mate- rial tightly so that there is no gap. When the piping is to be attached to a wall comprised of tin plate or metal netting, use chemically treated wooden piece 25/32 in. (20 mm) or thicker between the wall and the piping, or wrap insulation vinyl tape 7 to 8 tums around the piping. To use existing piping, perform COOL operation for 30 minutes and pump down before removing the old air conditioner. Remake flare according to the dimension for new refrigerant. Unit: mm 2-10 x 21 slot Air outlet Drain piping for outdoor unit Install the unit horizontally. Do not use drain socket in cold regions. Drain may freeze and make the fan stop. The outdoor unit produces condensate during the heating operation. Select the installation place to ensure to prevent the outdoor unit and/or the grounds from being wet by drain water or damaged by frozen drain water. 2. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION 2-1. ATTACHING THE INSTALLATION PLATE • Find a stud in the wall to attach installation plate (1) horizontally by tightening the fixing screws (2) firmly. • To prevent installation plate (1) from vibrating, be sure to install the attachment screws in the holes indicated in the illustration. For added support, additional screws may also be installed in other holes. • When the indoor unit is to be attached to a concrete wall using recessed bolts, secure installation plate (1) using 7/16 in. x 13/16 in. • 7/16 in. x 1 in. (11 mm x 20 mm • 11 mm x 26 mm) oval hole (17-3/4 in. [450 mm] pitch). • If the recessed bolt is too long, change it for a shorter one (field -supplied). 2-2. DRILLING 1) Determine where the holes will be located on the wall. 2) Drill a 0 3 in. (75 mm) hole. The outdoor side should be 6/32 to 9/32 in. (5 to 7 mm) lower than the indoor side. 3) Insert wall hole sleeve (C). 2-3. CONNECTING WIRES FOR INDOOR UNIT Note: When the indoor unit is powered from the outdoor unit, depending on local code, a discon- nect switch needs to be installed to a power supply circuit. 1) Remove the panel assembly. (Refer to 5-1.) 2) Place the upper part of the indoor unit on the installation plate. 3) Remove corner box and electrical cover. 4) Remove display panel, conduit cover and conduit plate. 5) Attach conduit pipe (for rear piping) / elbow joint (for right, left, or downward piping) to conduit plate with lock nut. The thread of the installed conduit pipe / elbow joint appearing inside should be less than 3/8 in. (10 mm). (Fig. 1) Elbow joint should appear less than 1-3/16 in. (30 mm) outside. (Fig. 2) 6) Process the end of ground wire (Fig. 3). Connect it to the ground terminal of electrical parts box. 7) Process the end of indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (A) (Fig. 3). Attach it to the terminal block. Be careful not to make mis-wiring. Attach the wire to the terminal block securely so that its core cannot be seen, and no extemal force affects the connecting section of the terminal block. 8) Firmly tighten the terminal screws. After tightening, verify that the wires are tightly fastened. 9) Reinstall conduit plate, conduit cover and display panel. 10)According to the piping direction, remove the shaded part of the left side of box (Fig. 4) or corner box (Fig. 5). Reinstall electrical cover, corner box and front panel. Remark: • A disconnect switch should be required. Check the local code. ** Use a ring tongue termi- nal in order to connect a ground wire to terminal. Power supply 208/230 V AC, 1 phase 2wires. .11 60 Hz INDOOR UNIT Grounding !Terminal block r terminal** i n 208/230 V AC 1phase, 60 Hz OUTDOOR UNIT r r 1 Ground Grounding terminal** Disconnect switch* rt W/all j Ceiling (Bind the line to the center hole. Installation plate (1) 3-7/8 in. (100 mm) or more Level 2-1/8 in. (54 mm) or more j 5-1/8 in. (130 mm) or more for left and left back piping (using spacer) " °: 4-3/8 in. (110 mm) or more Attachment screw (2) Align the plumb line with the mark V. Plumb Align the scale with the line. Center of o 3 in. (75 mm) hole * Same for left hole. Electrical cover Fixing screw Conduit cover Display panel Lock nut Conduit plate t, Indoor terminal block Conduit pipe (for rear piping) Elbow joint (for right, left, or downward piping) • Connect wires to the appropriate terminals • For future servicing, leave some slack in the connecting wires. Conduit plate Less than 3/8 in. (10 mm) Lock nut Conduit pipe or elbow joint Fig. 1 Conduit plate Less than 1-3/16 in. (30 mm) Elbow joint (for right, left, or downward piping) Fig. 2 19/32 in. (15 mm) Lead wire • Make ground wire a little longer than others. (More than 1-9/16 in. [40 mm]) Fig. 3 Remove box for piping on left side of unit Remove box for piping on bottom left side of unit Fig. 4 Remove comer box for piping on right side of unit Remove corner box tor piping on bottom Corner box right side of unit 14 r---, -# Fig. 5 2-4. PIPE FORMING AND DRAIN PIPING 2-4-1. PIPE FORMING • Place the drain hose below the refrigerant piping. • Make sure that the drain hose is not crowded or bent. • Do not pull the hose when applying the tape. • When the drain hose passes the room, be sure to wrap it with insulation material (field - supplied). Note: Make sure not to damage the cover of refrigerant pipe when attaching it back on with screws. Left or left -rear piping Note: Be sure to reattach the drain hose and the drain cap if the piping is being installed on left or bottom left of unit, otherwise, water could drip down from the drain hose. 1)Place the refrigerant piping and the drain hose together, then firmly apply felt tape (4) from the end. Felt tape (4) overlap width should be 1/3 the tape width. Use a bandage stopper at the end of felt tape (4). 2) Pull out the drain cap at the back right of the indoor unit. (Fig. 1) • Hold the convex section at the end and pull the drain cap. 3) Pull out the drain hose at the back left of the indoor unit. (Fig. 2) • Hold the claw marked by the arrows and pull out the drain hose forward. 4) Put the drain cap into the section to which the drain hose is to be attached at the rear of the indoor unit. (Fig. 3) • Insert a screwdriver into the hole on the cap and insert the cap fully into the drain pan. 5) Insert the drain hose fully into the drain pan at the back right of the indoor unit. (Fig. 4) • Check if the hose is hooked securely to the projection of its inserting part at the drain pan. 6) Insert the drain hose into wall hole sleeve (C), and attach the upper part of indoor unit onto the installation plate (1). Then, shift the indoor unit completely to the left to make placing the piping in the back of the unit easier. 7) Cut out a piece of cardboard from the shipping box, roll it up, hook it onto the back rib, and use it as a spacer to lift the indoor unit. (Fig. 5) 8) Connect the refrigerant piping with the extension pipe (B). 9) Attach the lower part of the indoor unit into the installation plate (1). Rear or bottom piping 1) Place the refrigerant piping and the drain hose together, then firmly apply piping tape (G) from the end. 2) Insert the piping and the drain hose into the wall hole sleeve (C), and attach the upper part of the indoor unit on the installation plate (1). 3) Check if the indoor unit is attached securely on the installation plate (1) by moving the unit to left and right. 4) Attach the lower part of the indoor unit into the installation plate (1). Right piping Note: Before performing the following, make sure that wiring is completed, and the conduit cover is installed. (Refer to 2-3.) 1) Place the refrigerant piping and the drain hose together, shift them to left side of the unit, and then firmly apply piping tape (G) from the end. 2) Insert the piping and the drain hose into the wall hole sleeve (C), and attach the upper part of the indoor unit on the installation plate (1). 3) Check if the indoor unit is attached securely on the installation plate (1) by moving the unit to left and right. 4) Attach the lower part of the indoor unit into the installation plate (1). 2-4-2. DRAIN PIPING • lithe extension drain hose has to pass through a room, be sure to wrap it with insulation (field -supplied). • The drain hose should point downward for easy drain. (Fig. 1) • If the drain hose provided with the indoor unit is too short, connect it with a field -supplied drain hose (I). (Fig. 2) • When connecting the drain hose to a hard vinyl chloride pipe, be sure to insert it securely into the pipe. (Fig. 3) Felt tape (4) Piping tape (G) Liquid pipe Gas pipe Indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (A) - —_ Piping tape (G) .Felt rtape (4) t ` el Remove box for piping on left side of unit. wok . . Drain cap r.___Th„ •,•.. ,fieke Drain hose Fig. 2 Fig. 1 'L3 Drain hose _ / l Drain cap Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 O taw Remove comer box for piping on bottom side of unit Remove comer box for piping on right side of unit To the left Downward slope Fig. 1 1-7 Drain hose Soft hose I.D. 19/32 in. (15 mm) Fig. 2 27-9/16 in. (70 cm) or more Different diameter joint Drain hose Hard vinyl chloride pipe I.D. 1-3/16 in. (30 mm) Insert securely Fig. 3 1 Do not make drain piping as shown below. Do not raise Water leakage Water leakage Waving Accumulated drain water Water leakage Tip of drain hose dipped in water Ditch At least 1-31/32 in. (50 mm) gap 3. OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION 3-1. CONNECTING WIRES FOR OUTDOOR UNIT 1) Remove the service panel. 2) Remove the conduit cover. 3) Attach the conduit connectors to the conduit plate with lock nuts then secure it against unit with screws. 4) Connect the ground wires of indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (A) and power supply cord (K) to the TB support. 5) Loosen the terminal screws, then attach indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (A) and power sup- ply cord (K) from the indoor unit correctly to the terminal block. Attach the wires to the terminal block securely so that the cores cannot be seen, and no external force affects the connecting section of the terminal block. 6) Firmly tighten the terminal screws. After tightening, verify that the wires are tightly fastened. 7) Install the conduit cover. 8) Install the service panel securely. 7(19/32 in. 15 mm) Lead wire Power supply cord (K) Service panel Lock nut Conduit cover Conduit plate Conduit pipe Terminal block TB support to conduit cover • Make earth wire a little longer than others. (More than 3-7/8 in. [100 mm]) • For future servicing, leave some slack in the connecting wires. Grounding ter in.l Indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (A) Power supply cord (K) 3-2. FLARE CONNECTION 1) Cut the copper pipe as straight as possible with a pipe cutter. (Fig. 1, 2) 2) Remove all burrs from the cut section of the pipe, ensuring that precautions are taken to avoid getting metal shavings into the piping. (Fig. 3) 3) Remove flare nuts attached to indoor and outdoor units, then put them on pipe. 4) Flaring work (Fig. 4, 5). Firmly hold copper pipe in the dimension shown in the table. Select A inch (mm) from the table according to the tool you use. 5) Check • Compare the flared work with Fig. 6. • If flare is defective, cut off the section and repeat procedure. Pipe diam- eter inch (mm) B inch (mm) A inch (mm) Tightening torque Clutch type tool for R410A Clutch type tool for R22 Wing nut type tool for R22 ft -Ib f (kg•cm ) N•m 0 1/4 (6.35) 21/32 (17) Oto 0.02 (0 to 0.5) 0.04 to 0.06 (1.0 to 1.5) 0.06 to 0.08 (1.5 to 2.0) 1010 13 (140 to 180) 13.7 to 17.7 0 3/8 (9.52)7/8 (22) 25 to 30 350 to 420 ( ) 34.3 to 41.2 01/2127 ( ) 1-1/32 (26) 0.08 to 0.10 (2.0 to 2.5) 361042 (500 to 575) 49.0 to 56.4 0 5/8 (15.88) 1-5/32 (29) 54 to 58 (750 to 800) 73.5 to 78.4 ( ...____— Copper 0 Fig. 1 Good No good 9 ( l In° .1/ [11 r<1 Tilted Uneven Burred Fig. 2 Burr Copper pipe { i + Spare reamer 1 i Pipe cutter Fig. 3 Flaring tool _ titi i II���a _cc.,q(� ,, `1 f Clutch type Wing nut type Fig. 4 A Die r Co e pp i pipe Fig. 5 „' Flare nut Smooth all around Inside is shin- ing without any scratches. Even length all around Fig. 6 A WARNING 3-3. PIPE CONNECTION • Fasten flare nut with a torque wrench as specified in the table (refer to 3-2.). • When fastened too tight, flare nut may eventually break and cause refrigerant leakage. • Be sure to wrap insulation around the piping. Direct contact with the bare piping may result in burns or frostbite. Indoor unit connection Connect both liquid and gas pipings to indoor unit. • Apply a thin coat of refrigeration oil (J) on the flared ends of the pipes. Do not apply re- frigeration oil on screw threads. Excessive tightening torque will result in damage on the screw. • To connect, first align the center, then tighten the first 3 to 4 tums of flare nut. • Use tightening torque table above as a guideline for indoor unit side joints, and tighten using two wrenches. Excessive tightening damages the flare section. Outdoor unit connection Connect pipes to stop valve pipe joint of the outdoor unit following the same procedure detailed in Indoor unit connection. • For tightening, use a torque wrench or spanner. When installing the unit, securely connect the refrigerant pipes before starting the compressor. 3-4. INSULATION AND TAPING 1) Cover piping joints with pipe cover. 2) For outdoor unit side, insulate the piping, including valves. 3) Apply piping tape (G) starting from the connection on the outdoor unit. • When piping has to be installed through a ceiling, closet or where the temperature and humidity are high, use additional field -supplied insulation to prevent condensation. ,r4 • 4. PURGING PROCEDURES, LEAK TEST, AND TEST RUN 4-1. PURGING PROCEDURES AND LEAK TEST 4-2. TEST RUN 1) Remove service port caps from stop valves on both sides of refrigerant lines. (The stop 1) Insert power supply plug into the power outlet and/or tum on valves are fully closed when shipped.) Leave closed. the breaker. 2) Connect gauge manifold to ports of stop valves. 2) Press the E.O. SW once. Test run will be performed for 30 •4 to 5 turns 'Close *Open Stop valve cap (Torque 15 to 22 ft -Ib, 19.6 to 29.4 N•m, 200 to 300 kgf•cm) —14.7 psi [Gauge] (-0.101 Mpa) Stop valve for LIQUID Compound pressure gauge (for R410A) Pressure gauge (for R410A) Gauge manifold valve (for R410A) Handle Low Stop valve for GAS Service port cap (Torque 10 to 13 ft -Ib, 13.7 to 17.7 N•m, 140 to 180 kgf•cm) Adapter for preventing the back flow Handle High Charge hose (for R410A) //I/N//// // Vacuum pump (or the vacuum pump with the function to prevent the back flow) Precautions when using the control valve Service port A Control valve Open. Close Charge hose Body When attachina the control valve to the service Dort. valve core mav deform or loosen if excess Pressure is applied. This mav cause gas leak. When attaching the control valve to the service port, make sure that the valve core is in closed position, and then tighten part A. Do not tighten part A or tum the body when valve core is in open position. 3) Evacuate the system to 4000 microns from both service valves. System manifold gauges must not be used to measure vacuum. A micron gauge must be used at all times. Break the vacuum with Nitrogen(N2) into the discharge service valve to 0 PSIG. 4) Evacuate the system to 1500 microns. Break the vacuum with Nitrogen(N2) into the discharge service valve to 0 PSIG. 5) Evacuate the system to 500 microns. 6) Close gauge manifold valves, stop the pump, and conduct a 30 minute rise test. 7) System should hold 500 microns for a minimum of 1 hour. 8) Fully open all stop valves on both sides of gas pipe and liquid pipe. Operating without fully opening lowers the performance and this causes trouble. 9) Refer to 1-3 and charge the prescribed amount of additional refrigerant if needed. Be sure to charge slowly with liquid refrigerant. Otherwise composition of the refrigerant in the system may be changed and affect performance of the air conditioner. 10) Remove gauge manifolds and replace service port caps and tighten. 11) Leak test minutes. If the upper lamp blinks every 0.5 seconds, inspect the indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (A). After the test run, emergency COOL mode (75°F [24°C] COOL) will start. 3) To stop operation, press the E.O. SW several times until all LED lamps tum off. Refer to operating instructions for details. Emergency operation switch (E.O. SW) Checking the remote (infrared) signal reception Press the OFF/ON button on the remote controller (3) and listen for an audible indicator from the indoor unit. Press the OFF/ON button again to tum the air conditioner off. • Once the compressor stops, the restart preventive device operates so the compressor will not operate for 3 minutes to protect the air conditioner. 4-3. AUTO RESTART FUNCTION This product is equipped with an auto restart function. When the power supply is cut off during operation, such as during blackouts, the function automatically starts operation in the previous setting once the power supply is resumed. (Refer to the operating instructions for details.) Caution: • After test run or remote signal reception check, turn off the unit with the E.O. SW or the remote controller before tuming off the power supply. If this procedure is not performed, the unit will automatically begin operation when power supply is resumed. To the user • After installing the unit, explain to the user about auto restart function. • If auto restart function is unnecessary, it can be deactivated. Consult the service rep- resentative to deactivate the function. Refer to the service manual for details. 4-4. EXPLANATION TO THE USER • Using the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, explain to the user how to use the air conditioner (the remote controller, removing the air filters, placing or removing the remote controller from the remote controller holder, cleaning methods, precautions for operation, etc.) Recommend that the user read the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS carefully. A WARNING ,5. RELOCATION AND MAINTENANCE 5-1. REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE PANEL ASSEMBLY Removal procedure 1) Remove the two screws that attach the panel assembly. 2) Remove the panel assembly. Be sure to remove its bottom end first. Installation procedure 1) Install the panel assembly following the removal procedure in reverse. 2) Be sure to press the positions as indicated by the arrows in order to attach the as- sembly completely to the unit. 5-2. REMOVING THE INDOOR UNIT Remove the bottom of the indoor unit from the installation plate. When releasing the comer part, release both left and right bottom comer part of indoor unit and pull it downward and forward as shown in the figure on the right. If the above method cannot be used Remove the front panel. Then, insert hexagonal wrenches into the square holes on the left and right sides of the unit and push them up as shown in the following figure. The bottom of the indoor unit lowers and releases the hooks. 5-3. PUMPING DOWN When relocating or disposing of the air conditioner, pump down the system following the procedure below so that refrigerant is not released into the atmosphere. 1) Connect the gauge manifold valve to the service port of the stop valve on the gas pipe side of the outdoor unit. 2) Fully close the stop valve on the liquid pipe side of the outdoor unit. 3) Close the stop valve on the gas pipe side of the outdoor unit almost completely so that it can be easily closed fully when the pressure gauge shows 0 psi [Gauge] (0 Mpa). 4) Start the emergency COOL operation. To start the emergency operation in COOL mode, disconnect the power supply plug and/or turn off the breaker. After 15 seconds, connect the power supply plug and/ or turn on the breaker, and then press the E.O. SW once. (The emergency COOL operation can be performed continuously for up to 30 minutes.) 5) Fully close the stop valve on the gas pipe side of the outdoor unit when the pressure gauge shows (0.1 to 0 psi [Gauge] (0.05 to 0 Mpa)). 6) Stop the emergency COOL operation. To stop operation, press the E.O. SW several times until all LED lamps turn off. Refer to operating instructions for details. When pumping down the refrigerant, stop the compressor before discon- necting the refrigerant pipes. The compressor may burst if air etc. get into it. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN M -SERIES SUBMITTAL DATA: MSZ-GL18NA & MUZ-GL18NA MITSUBISHI 18,000 BTU/H WALL -MOUNTED HEAT PUMP SYSTEM / ELECTRIC Job Name:Loomis Seattle Branch System Reference: IT Room HVAC Unit Date: Indoor Unit: MSZ-GL18NA Outdoor Unit: MUZ-GL18NA Wireless Remote Controller BILE GENERAL FEATURES • Slim wall -mounted indoor units provide zone comfort control • The outdoor unit powers the indoor unit, and should a power outage occur, the system is automatically restarted when power returns • INVERTER -driven compressor and LEV provide high efficiency and comfort while using only the energy needed to maintain maximum performance • Multiple fan speed options: Quiet, Low, Medium, High, Super -high, Auto • Multiple control options available: - Hand-held Remote Controller (provided with unit) - kumo cloud® smart device app for remote access - Third -party interface options - Wired or wireless controllers • Hot -Start Technology: no cold air rush at equipment startup or when restarting after Defrost Cycle • Quiet operation REVIEWED FOR • Smart Set: recalls a preferred preset temperature setting at the touch of a button C�D(`(1MPLIANCE • Blue Fin anti -corrosion treatment applied to the outdoor unit heat exchanger for increased coil protect' n an 1 P ,P PROVED CORRECTION LTR# � AUG 0 9 2019 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 470 JSirN ND::L MI 8- D00 b RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 26 2019 PERMIT CENTER Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. SPECIFICATIONS: MSZ-GL18NA & MUZ-GL18NA Cooling1 Heating at 47°F2 Maximum Capacity Btu/h 22,000 Rated Capacity Minimum Capacity Btu/h Btu/h 18,000 5,800 Maximum Power Input W 2,105 Rated Power Input W 1,340 Moisture Removal Pints/h 2.1 Sensible Heat Factor 0.87 Power Factor Maximum Capacity Rated Capacity 99 / 99 25,000 21,600 Minimum Capacity Maximum Power Input Btu/h W 5,400 2,455 Rated Power Input W 1,680 Power Factor 99/99 Heating at 17°F3 Maximum Capacity Btu/h 18,200 Rated Capacity Maximum Power Input Rated Power Input Heating at 5°F4 Maximum Capacity Btu/h W W Btu/h 13,800 2,105 1,435 14,900 Maximum Power Input Heating at -4°F5 Maximum Capacity Efficiency SEER EER1 HSPF (IV) COP at 47°F2 COP at 17°F in Maximum Capacity3 W 1,880 Btu/h 15,520 20.5 13.4 11.2 3.77 2.53 COP at 5°F in Maximum Capacity4 2.32 ENERGY STAR® Certified (ENERGY STAR products are third -party certified by ' YES • an EPA -recognized Certification Body.) Electrical Voltage, Phase, Frequency 208/230V, 1 phase, 60Hz Guaranteed Voltage Range V AC 187 - 253 Voltage: Indoor - Outdoor, S1-S2 Voltage: Indoor - Outdoor, S2 -S3 Voltage: Indoor - Remote Controller V AC Recommended Fuse/Breaker Size Recommended Wire Size (Indoor - Outdoor) 208 / 230 V DC 24 Wireless Type A 15 AWG 14 Indoor Unit MCA A 1 MOCP A 15 Blower Motor Full Load Amperage Blower Motor Output Airflow Rate at Cooling, Dry A 0.67 W 30 CFM 646-522-417-332-258 Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. SPECIFICATIONS: MSZ-GL18NA & MUZ-GL18NA Airflow Rate at Cooling, Wet CFM 581-470-375-299-232 Airflow Rate at Heating, Dry CFM 646-565-469-385-297 Sound Pressure Level (Cooling) dB(A) 49-44-38-33-28 Sound Pressure Level (Heating) dB(A) 48-43-38-33-28 Drain Pipe Size Heat Exchanger Type In. (mm) 5/8 (15.88) Plate fin coil External Finish Color Munsell 1.0Y 9.2/0.2 Unit Dimensions W: In. (mm) 36-5/16 (923) D: In. (mm) 9-13/16 (250) H: In. (mm) 12 (305) Package Dimensions Unit Weight W: In. (mm) 39 (990) D: In. (mm) 13 (330) H: In. (mm) Lbs. (kg) 15 (380) 28 (13) Package Weight Lbs. (kg) 33 (15) Indoor Unit Operating Temperature Range Cooling Intake Air Temp (Maximum / Minimum)* °F 90 DB, 73 WB / 67 DB, 57 WB Heating Intake Air Temp (Maximum / Minimum) °F 80 DB / 70 DB Outdoor Unit MCA MOCP Fan Motor Full Load Amperage Fan Motor Output Airflow Rate 14 15 0.93 77 1,691 / 1,691 Refrigerant Control LEV Defrost Method Reverse cycle Heat Exchanger Type Sound Pressure Level, Cooling1 Sound Pressure Level, Heating2 Compressor Type Compressor Model dB(A) Plate fin coil 54 55 DC INVERTER -driven SNB130FQBMT Compressor Rated Load Amps A 10.0 Compressor Locked Rotor Amps A 12.5 Compressor Oil Type // Charge oz. FV5OS // 11.8 External Finish Color Base Pan Heater Unit Dimensions Munsell 3Y 7.8/1/1 Optional 33-1/16 (840) 13 (330) H: In. (mm) 34-5/8 [880] Package Dimensions Unit Weight W: In. (mm) 38-9/16 (980) D: In. (mm) 16-9/16 (420) H: In. (mm) 39 (990) Lbs. (kg) 121 (55) Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. SPECIFICATIONS: MSZ-GL18NA & MUZ-GL18NA Outdoor Unit Operating Temperature Range Refrigerant Package Weight Cooling Air Temp (Maximum / Minimum)* Cooling Thermal Lock -out / Re -start Temperatures** Lbs. (kg) 141 (64) °F 115 / 14 °F -1 / 3 Heating Air Temp (Maximum / Minimum) °F 75/-4 Heating Thermal Lock -out / Re -start Temperatures** Type °F -9 / -4 R410A Charge Lbs, oz 3, 9 Piping Notes Gas Pipe Size O.D. (Flared) In. (mm) 1/2 (12.7) Liquid Pipe Size O.D. (Flared) In. (mm) 1/4 (6.35) Maximum Piping Length Ft. (m) 100 (30) Maximum Height Difference Ft. (m) 50 (15) Maximum Number of Bends 10 AHRI Rated Conditions (Rated data is determined at a fixed compressor speed) 1Cooling (Indoor // Outdoor) °F 80 DB, 67 WB // 95 DB, 75 WB 2Heating at 47°F (Indoor // Outdoor) °F 70 DB, 60 WB // 47 DB, 43 WB 3Heating at 17°F (Indoor // Outdoor) °F 70 DB, 60 WB 1/ 17 DB, 15 WB 4Heating at 5°F (Indoor // Outdoor) °F 70 DB, 60 WB // -4 DB, -5 WB Conditions 5Heating at -4°F (Indoor // Outdoor) °F 70 DB. 60 WB // -4 DB, -5 WB *Applications should be restricted to comfort cooling only; equipment cooling applications are not recommended for low ambient temperature conditions. ' **System cuts out in heating mode to avoid thermistor error and automatically restarts at these temperatures. Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. ACCESSORIES: MSZ-GL18NA Anti -allergy Enzyme Filter o MAC-408FT-E Backlit, Wall -mounted, Wireless Controller ❑ MHK1 Portable Central Controller o MCCH1 Wired MA Controller1 o PAR-33MAA Simple MA Controller1 ❑ PAC-YT53CRAU Touch MA Controller1 o PAR-CTO1 MAU-SB Wired Remote Sensor ❑ M21-EAA-307 Wireless Temperature and Humidity Sensor ❑ PAC-USWHS003-TH-1 Outside Air Sensor for MHK1 o MOS1 System Control Interfacet ❑ MAC -3331F -E Wireless Interface ❑ PAC-USWHS002-WF-1 Thermostat Interface ❑ PAC-US444CN-1 kumo station® o PAC-WHSO1HC-E USNAP Interface ❑ PAC-WHSO1UP-E IT Extender o PAC-WHS011E-E BACnet® and MODBUS® Interface ❑ PAC-UKPRC001-CN-1 Lockdown Bracket for Hand-held Remote Controllers ❑ RCMKP1CB Blue Diamond Sensor Extension Cable -15 Ft. o C13-103 Blue Diamond Alarm Extension Cable -6.5 Ft. ❑ C13-192 Blue Diamond MultiTank—collection tank for use with multiple pumps o C21-014 Blue Diamond Rubber Foot Pads ❑ F10-010 Mini Condensate Pump -230 volt application ❑ S130-230 MegaBlue Advanced Blue Diamond Condensate Pump w/ Reservoir & Sensor ❑ X87-835 - 110 to 250V MaxiBlue Advanced Blue Diamond Mini Condensate Pump w/ Reservoir & Sensor (110V) up to 48,000 Btu/h [recommended] o X87-711 - 110V Advanced Blue Diamond Mini Condensate Pump w/ Reservoir & Sensor (208/230V) [recommended] ❑ X87-721 - 208/230V MicroBlue Blue Diamond Mini Condensate Pump (110/208/230V) up to 18,000 Btu/h ❑ X85-003 Fascia Kit for MicroBlue Pump – mounts the MicroBlue and sensor directly beneath the indoor unit o T18-016 Drain Pan Level Sensor ❑ DPLS2 (30A/600V/UL) [fits 2" X 4" utility box] - Black o TAZ-MS303 (30A/600V/UL) [fits 2" X 4" utility box] - White ❑ TAZ-MS303W 1 Requires MAC -3331F -E 2 Allows indoor units to connect to an MA Controller Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. ACCESSORIES: MUZ-GL18NA Air Outlet Guide ❑ MAC-886SG-E Drain Socket ❑ MAC-860DS Optional Defrost Heater ❑ MAC-642BH-U1 Hail Guard ❑ HG -A7 Outdoor Unit 3-1/4 inch Mounting Base (Pair) - Plastic ❑ DSD -400P Condensing Unit Mounting Pad 16" x 36" x 3" ❑ ULTRILITE1 Outdoor Unit Stand —12" High ❑ QSMS1201 M Outdoor Unit Stand —18" High ❑ QSMS1801M Outdoor Unit Stand -24" High ❑ QSMS2401M Heavy Duty Wall Mounting Bracket—Coated Steel ❑ QSWB2000M-1 Heavy Duty Wall Mounting Bracket -316 Series Stainless Steel ❑ QSWBSS 15' x 1/4" x 15' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) ❑ MLS141212T-15 30' x 1/4" x 30' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) ❑ MLS141212T-30 50' x 1/4" x 50' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) 1 ❑ MLS141212T-50 65' x 1/4" x 65' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) ❑ MLS141212T-65 100' x 1/4" x 100' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) ❑ MLS141212T-100 Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. DIMENSIONS: MSZ-GL18NA 36-5/16 Installation plate Indoor unit 3-11/16 35-13/16 1/4 I'i---1 i--- -_-•'I 27-15/16 6-5/16 1X7/16 Oblong hole Unit: inch 7/16x13/16 Oblong hole 2-5/16 15-7/8 8-11/16 Air in 8-1/16 15-3/16 Wall hole 03 Installation plate Air out cr, Q Insulation 02 O.D Liquid line 05/16 15-3/8 (Flared connection 01/4) a Gas line 015/32 13-3/8 (Flared connection 01/2) Drain nose Insulation 01-1/8 Connected part 05/8 O.D Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. DIMENSIONS: MUZ-GL18NA REQUIRED SPACE *1 20 in. or more when front and sides of the unit are clear Drain hole 01-5/8 2 -holes 13/32 X13/16 Unit: inch A A 33-1/16 3-3/16 4-5/1§ FORM# MSZ-GL18NA / MUZ-GL18NA - 201902 *2 When any 2 sides of left, right and rear of the unit are clear Service panel Liquid refrigerant pipe joint Refrigerant pipe (flared) 0 1/4 (18 kBtu/h) Refrigerant pipe (flared) a 3/8 (24 kBtu/h) Gas refrigerant pipe joint Refrigerant pipe (flared) 01/2 (18 kBtu/h) Refrigerant pipe (flared) 0 5/8 (24 kBtu/h) Artek ME ITS COOLING & HEATING 1340 Satellite Boulevard, Suwanee, GA 30024 Toll Free: 800-433-4822 www.mehvac.com AMU CERTIFIED. o `:.:mow Intertek Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. M -SERIES SUBMITTAL DATA: MSZ-GLO9NA-U1 & MUZ-GLO9NA-U8 9,000 BTU/H WALL -MOUNTED HEAT PUMP SYSTEM MITSUBISHI /IL ELECTRIC Job Name: \00 W1iS System Reference: l teNl n R.00 14-1 Indoor Unit: MSZ-GLO9NA-U1 Wireless Remote Controller ACCESSORIES: Indoor Unit Date: Outdoor Unit MUZ-GLO9NA-U8 ❑ Condensate Pump (BlueDiamond X87-711/721; 115F❑ Condensate Pump (Sauermann S130-115/230; 115/ o Anti -Allergy Enzyme Filter (MAC-408FT-E) o Drain Pan Level Sensor (DPLS2) Outdoor Unit o Outdoor Mounting Pad (ULTRILITE1) o Drain Pan Heater (MAC-640BH-U) o 3-1/4" Mounting Base [Pair] (DSD -400P) a Drain Pan Socket (MAC-860DS) o Air Outlet Guide (MAC-889SG) o Wall Mounting Bracket (QSWB2000M-1) Controls Electrical Power Requirements 208 / 230V, 1 -Phase, 60 Hz Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA) Indoor / Outdoor A 119 CORRECTION LTR# o Wireless Controller (MHK1) o Wired Remote Controller PAR -31 MAA (Requires MAC-333IF-E) o Wireless Interface for kumo cloud TN' (PAC-WHSO1WF-E) o Thermostat Interface (PAC-US444CN-1) SPECIFICATIONS: 4.0 Rated Conditions (Capacity 1 Input) Cooling' Btu! / W 9,0b11/ ,5Y 1VR.,OP 1 illy !--.1 Heating at 47° F2 Btu h /W 10,900 / 720 Capacity Range 40 (12) JUL 26 2019 Minimum Maximum Cooling' Btum 3,600 12,200 Heating at 47° F2 Btu/h 4,500 14,100 Heating at 17° F3 Btu/h - 9,400 Heating at 5° F4 atuth - 7,600 ' Cooling 'Indoor: 80° F(27° C)DB / 67° F(19° C)WB; Outdoor: 95° F(55° C)DB / 75° F(24° C)WB' Heating at 47°F I Indoor: 70° F (2 ° C)DB / 60° F (16° C)WB; Outdoor: 47° F 8° C)DB / 43' F (6° C)WB' Heating at 17° F 1 Indoor: 70° F(2 ° C)DB / 60° 916° C)WB; Outdoor. 17° F(-8° C)DB /15° F(-9° C)WB' Heating at 5° F 1 Indoor 70° F (21° C)DB / 60° F(16° C)WB; Outdoor 5° F(-15° C) DB / 5° F(-15° C)WB ' Rating Conditions per AHRI Standard: Operating Conditons (Indoor Intake Air Temp.) (Max.; Min.) Cooling° Heating 90° F (32° C) DB / 67° F (19° C) DB 80° F (27° C) DB / 70° F (21° C) DB Operating Conditons (Outdoor Intake Air Temp.) (Max./ Min.) Cooling' Heating 115 F (46° C) DB / 14° F (-10° C) DB 75° F (24° C) DB / -4° F (-20° C) DB" Applications should be restricted to comfort cooling only, equipment cooling applications are not recommended for low ambient temperature conditions. .. System cuts out at -9° F (-27° C) to avoid thermistor error and automatically restarts at -4° F (-20° C). Energy Star` Yes ENERGY STAR products are third -party certified by an EPA -recognized Certification Body. Specifications are subject to change without notice. M Indoor Unit Blower Motor (ECM) Blower Motor Output SHF / Moisture Removal 0.820 / 1.5 pt./h Field Drainpipe Size O.D. In.(mm) 5/8 (15) Outdoor Unit Compressor Fan Motor (ECM) DC INVERTER -driven Twin Rotary FLA 0.76 Airflow Rate (Quiet - Lo - Med - Hi - Super Hi) Indoor (Cooling) DRY WET Indoor (Heating) DRY Outdoor CFM 145-170-237-321-399 109-134-201-286-364 145-170-237-321-406 1,229 / 1,172 Sound Pressure Level (Quiet - Lo - Med - Hi - Super Hi) ndoor Cooling Heating Outdoor Cooling Heating dB(A) 19-22-30-37-43 19-22-30-37-43 48 50 External Dimensions Indoor (H x W x D) :5L8x31-7/16 x 9-1/8 In.(mm) Outdoor (H x W x D) Net Weight Indoor Outdoor Lbs.(kg) s22 (10 81 (37) Indoor ISION Outdoor Munsell No. 3Y 7.8 / 1.1 Refrigerant R410A; 2 Ib. 9 oz. Refrigerant Piping (Flared) Liquid (High Pressure) In.(mm) 1/4 (6 °y OF TUKWILA �I� Gas (Low Pressure) 3/8 (9.52) Max. Total Refrigerant Pipe Length (Height Diff.) Ft. (m) 40 (12) JUL 26 2019 Max. Total Refrigerant Pipe Length (Length.) 65 (20) PERMIT CENTER 000 © 2016 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. DIMENSIONS: MSZ-GLO9NA-U1 & MUZ-GLO9NA-11$ MSZ-GLO9NA-U1 1116x1 Obloe. hole Installation plate 3-1/8 8-7/8 8 Unit: in. (mm) 1/16x13/16 Obloi hole 8 31-7116 6-I/8„ 13-9/16 / _2-1/8 all hole #2-9116 2-3/$ Indoor unit 13-5/16 Air in tnsfollafion .lofe 2-51161 1 3/4 <14 MUZ-GLO9NA-U8 15-3/4 REQUIRED SPACE '1 4 in. (100 mm) or more when front and sides of the unit are clear aLiquid it Insulation el - 3/8 0.D line 01/4 19 - 11/16 (Flared connection 01/4) Gas line 03/8 16 -15/16 (Flared connection: 8318 (GL86I09I12NA), 01/2 (GL15NA)) Drain hose Insulation el -1/8 0.D Connected part 05/8 0.D @tirt Me 01-21/32 fG181284 Drab Me 01-5116 tG IM9019 •2 When any 2 sides of left, right and rear of the unit are clear Sere 7/8 11/16 Liquid refrigerant pipe joint Refrigerant pipe (flared) e 1/4 Gas refrigerant pipe joint Refrigerant pipe (flared) 0 3/8 FORM# MSZ-GLO9NA-U1 / MUZ-GLO9NA-U8 - 201603 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 2-3/4 6-23/32 Unit: in. (mm) AkMITSUBISHI ELECTRIC COOLING & HEATING 1340 Satellite Boulevard. Suwanee, GA 30024 Toll Free: 800-433-4822 www.mehvac.com Intertek © 2016 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. ,7!'il',:1161116ts7 - 0% IN CORRECTION LTRIL_ NILL RECEIVED CITY OF TUK% JUL 26 20 PERMIT CENTER MITSUBISHI M® ELECTRIC SPLIT -SYSTEM HEAT PUMP Unitary Small HP AHRI Standard 210/240 Certification applies only when the complete system is listed with AHRI CONFORMS TO ANSI/UL STD 1995 US CERTIFIED TO CAN/CSA STD C22. 2 NO. 236 MODEL MUZ-GLO9NA (G) SERVICE REF. MUZ-GLO9NA - PT VOLTS PHASE Hz UNIT SUPPLY 208/230 1 60 MAX. VOLTAGE 253 MIN. VOLTAGE 187 APPROVED FOR HACR BREAKERS OR TIME DELAY FUSES. MAX. FUSE m AMPS MIN. CIRCUIT AMPACITY 9 .F LA. W (OUTPUT) FAN MOTOR 0.50 55 R.LA. LR.A. COMPRESSOR 6.2 7.7 REFRIGERANT R410A FACTORY CHARGED 2 LBS. 5 ,OZ, IF THE LIQUID LINE EXCEEDS 25 FT.. PER ADDITIONAL DESIGN PRESSURI 'SUITABLE FOR. WEIGHT SERIAL A 1.08. OZ. 1 mtMITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SPLIT -TYPE AIR CONDITIONERS INSTALLATION MANUAL JG79Y036H01 MSZ-GL06/09/1 2/1 5NA MSY-G L09/1 2/1 5NA When installing multi units, refer to the installation manual of the multi unit for outdoor unit installation. Required Phillips screwdriver Level Scale Utility knife or scissors 3 in. (75 mm) hole saw Torque wrench Wrench (or spanner) Tools for Installation 5/32 in. (4 mm) hexagonal wrench Flare tool for R410A Gauge manifold for R410A Vacuum pump for R410A Charge hose for R410A Pipe cutter with reamer 1. BEFORE INSTALLATION 1-1. THE FOLLOWING SHOULD ALWAYS BE OBSERVED FOR SAFETY • Be sure to read these safety precautions and instructions. • Be sure to observe the warnings and cautions specified here. • After reading this manual, be sure to store it with the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS for future reference. • Please report to your supply authority or obtain their consent before connecting this equipment to the power supply system. FILE A WARNING (Could lead to death or serious injury ) • Do not install the unit by yourself (user). Improper or incomplete installation could cause fire, electric shock, injury due to the unit falling, or water leakage. Consult a qualified installer or the dealer from whom you purchased the unit. • Follow the instructions detailed in the installation manual. Incomplete installation could cause fire or electric shock, injury due to the unit fall- ing, or leakage of water. • When installing the unit, use appropriate protective equipment and tools for safety. Failure to do so could cause injury. • Install the unit securely in a place that can bear the weight of the unit. If the installation location cannot bear the weight of the unit, the unit could fall causing injury. • Perform electrical work according to the installation manual and be sure to use an exclusive circuit. Do not connect other electrical appliances to the circuit. If the capacity of the power circuit is insufficient or there is incomplete electrical work, it could result in a fire or an electric shock. • Ground the unit correctly. Do not connect the ground wire to a gas pipe, water pipe, lightning rod or tel- ephone ground. Defective grounding could cause electric shock. • Do not damage the wires. • Damaged wires could cause fire. • Be sure to shut off the main power when setting up the indoor P.C. board or wiring. Failure to do so could cause electric shock. • Use the specified wires to securely connect the indoor and outdoor units. At- tach the wires firmly to avoid applying stress to the terminal block. Improper connection could cause fire. • Do not install the unit in a place where flammable gas may leak. If gas leaks and accumulates around the unit, it could cause an explosion. • Do not use intermediate connection of the power cord or the extension cord. Do not connect many devices to one AC outlet. It could cause a fire or an electric shock. • Use the parts provided or specified parts for the installation work. The use of defective parts could cause an injury or leakage of water due to a fire, an electric shock, the unit falling, etc. ■ When plugging the power supply plug into the outlet, make sure that there is no dust, blockage, or loose parts both in the outlet and on the plug. Verify that the power supply plug is completely in the outlet. If there is dust, blockage, or loose parts on the power supply plug or the outlet, it could cause electric shock or fire. If loose parts are found on the power supply plug, replace it. • Securely attach the electrical cover to the indoor unit and the service panel to the outdoor unit. If the electrical cover of the indoor unit and/or the service panel of the outdoor unit are not attached securely, dust, water, etc. could collect in the unit and could cause a fire or an electric shock. ■ When installing, relocating, or servicing the unit, make sure that no substance other than the specified refrigerant (R410A) enters the refrigerant circuit. Any presence of foreign substance such as air can cause abnormal pressure rise and may result in explosion or injury. The use of any refrigerant other than that specified for the system will cause mechanical failure, system malfunction, or unit breakdown. In the worst case, this could lead to a serious impediment to securing product safety. ■ Do not discharge the refrigerant into the atmosphere. Check that the refriger- ant gas does not leak after installation has been completed. If refrigerant Teaks during installation, ventilate the room. If refrigerant comes in contact with a fire, harmful gas could be generated. If refrigerant gas leaks indoors, and comes into contact with the flame of a fan heater, space heater, stove, etc., harmful gases will be generated. • Use appropriate tools and piping materials for installation. The pressure of R410A is 1.6 times higher than R22. Not using the appropriate tools and materials, or improper installation could cause the pipes to burst causing an injury. • When pumping down the refrigerant, stop the compressor before disconnecting the refrigerant pipes. If the refrigerant pipes are disconnected while the compressor is running and the stop valve is open, air could be drawn in and the pressure in the refrigeration cycle could become abnormally high, causing the pipes to burst. • When installing the unit, securely connect the refrigerant pipes before starting the compressor. If the compressor is started before the refrigerant pipes are connected and the stop valve is open, air could be drawn in and the pressure in the refrigeration cycle could become ab p�,�`,` • Fasten a flare n with ftLtlP rr�� <�, •fc this nanual. If fastened too tig L o 017 y l u t t leakage. • Install the unit flak: APPROVED AUG 0 9 2019 A CAUTION (Could lea 1 to serious injury when operated incorrectly.) ■ Depending on the installation area, install a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) circuit breaker. If the Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) circuit breaker is not installed, an electric shock could occur. • Perform the drainage/piping work securely according to the installation manual. If there is defect in the drainage/piping work, water could drip from the unit, and damage household items. ■ Do not touch th air inle Itt/ ilid ifdl M& outd This could cause ns cU p arQ,"I$ J •catiDo not install th ���1�( a�/r w. If small animals enter the unit and damage its electrical parts, it could cause a malfunction, smoke emission, or fire. Keep the area around the unit clean. R r unit. CORRECTION LTR# REVISION No.L MI80006 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 2 6 2019 PERMIT CENTER 1-2. SELECTING THE INSTALLATION LOCATION INDOOR UNIT • Where airflow is not blocked. • Where cool (or warm) air spreads over the entire room. • On a rigid wall to reduce the possibility of vibration. • Where it is not exposed to direct sunlight. Do not expose to direct sunlight also during the period following unpack- ing to before use. • Where it can be easily drained. • At a distance 3 ft. (1 m) or more away from a TV and radio. Operation of the air conditioner may interfere with radio or TV reception. An amplifier may be required for the affected device. • In a place as far away as possible from fluorescent and incandescent lights (so the infrared remote control can operate the air conditioner normally). • Where the air filter can be removed and replaced easily. • Where it is away from the other heat or steam source. Note: Install the indoor unit high on the wall where air can distribute over the entire room. REMOTE CONTROLLER • Where it is convenient to operate and easily visible. • Where children cannot easily touch it. • Select a position about 4 ft. (1.2 m) above the floor. Check that signals from the remote controller from that position are received by the indoor unit (beep' or 'beep beep' receiving tone sounds). Then, attach remote controller holder to a pillar or wall and install wireless remote controller. Note: In rooms where inverter type fluorescent lamps are used, the signal from the wireless remote controller may not be received. OUTDOOR UNIT • Where it is not overly exposed to strong winds. If the outdoor unit is exposed to a wind during defrosting, the defrosting time will be longer. • Where airflow is good and dustless. • Where neighbours are not annoyed by operation sound or hot (or cool) air. • Where rigid wall or support is available to prevent the increase of operation sound or vibration. • Where there is no risk of combustible gas leakage. • If installing the unit in a location high above the ground, be sure to secure the unit legs. • Where it is at least 10 ft. (3 m) away from the antenna of TV set or radio. Operation of the air conditioner may interfere with radio or TV reception in areas where recep- tion is weak. An amplifier may be required for the affected device. • Install the unit horizontally. • Please install it in an area not affected by snowfall or blowing snow. In areas with heavy snow, please install a canopy, a pedestal and/or baffle boards. 1-3. SPECIFICATIONS 1-3-1. POWER SUPPLY AND INDOOR/OUTDOOR Electrical specifications WIRE CONNECTION • Power should be taken from an exclusive branched circuit. • Wiring work should be based on applicable technical standards. • Wiring connections should be made following the diagram. • Securely tighten screws. Connecting wires and the ground wire • Use solid conductor Min. AWG14 or stranded conductor Min. AWG14. • Use double insulated copper wire with 600 V insulation. • Use copper supply wire. * Follow local electrical codes. Power supply cable and ground wire • Use solid or stranded conductor Min. AWG14. • Use copper supply wire. * Follow local electrical codes. Note: When the indoor unit is powered from the outdoor unit, depend- ing on local code, a disconnect switch needs to be installed to a power supply circuit. 1-3-2. REFRIGERANT PIPES • To prevent condensation, insulate the two refrigerant pipes. • Refrigerant pipe bending radius must be 4 in. (100 mm) or more. CAUTION Be sure to use the insulation of specified thickness (table on the right). Excessive insulation may cause incorrect installation of the indoor unit, and too little insulation may cause condensate to form. • The unit has flared connections on both indoor and outdoor sides. • Remove the valve cover from the outdoor unit, then connect the pipe. • Refrigerant pipes are used to connect the indoor and outdoor units. • Be careful not to crush or over bend the pipe in pipe bending. • Refrigerant adjustment... If pipe length exceeds 25 ft. (7.5 m), additional refrigerant (R410A) charge is required. (The outdoor unit is charged with refrigerant for pipe length up to 25 ft. [7.5 m]) Note: • It is advisable to make a piping loop near outdoor unit so as to reduce vibration. For increased efficiency, install the outdoor unit in a location where continuous direct sunlight or excessive water can be avoided as much as possible. Note: When operating the air conditioner in low outside tem- perature, be sure to follow the instructions described below. • Never install the outdoor unit in a place where its air inlet/outlet side may be exposed directly to wind. • To prevent exposure to wind, install the outdoor unit with its air inlet side facing the wall and a baffle board on the air outlet side. Avoid the following places for installation where air conditioner trouble is liable to occur. • Where flammable gas could leak. • Where there is an excessive amount of machine oil in the air. • Where oil is splashed or where the area is filled with oily smoke (such as cooking areas and factories, in which the properties of plastic could be changed and damaged). • Salty places such as the seaside. • Where sulfide gas is generated such as hot spring, sewage, waste water. • Where there is high -frequency or wireless equipment. • Where there is emission of high levels of VOCs, includ- ing phthalate compounds, formaldehyde, etc., which may cause chemical cracking. MODEL MSZ-GLO6NA MSZ-GLO9NA MSY-GLO9NA MSZ-GL12NA MSY-GL12NA MSZ-GL15NA MSY-GL15NA INDOOR UNIT For liquid Power supply (V, PHASE, Hz) 208/230, 1, 60 Min. CircuitAmpacity (A) 1.0 Fan motor (F.L.A.) (A) 0.76 OUTDOOR UNIT Power supply (V, PHASE, Hz) 208/230, 1, 60 Max. Fuse size (time delay) (A) * 15 15 15 Min. CircuitAmpacity (A) 9 9 10 Fan motor (F.L.A.) (A) * 0.50 0.50 0.50 Compressor (R.L.A) (A) MSZ * 6.2 6.6 7.4 MSY 4.9 4.9 6.8 (L.R.A) (A) MSZ * 7.7 8.2 9.3 MSY * 6.1 6.1 8.5 Control voltage Indoor unit - Remote controller: (Wireless) Indoor unit - Outdoor unit: DC12-24 V (Polar) MSZ-GLO6NA is a dedicated indoor unit for multi system. Refer to the installation manual of the multi unit for details. Pipe Outside diameter Minimum wall thickness Insulation thickness Insulation material inch (mm) For liquid 1/4 (6.35) 0.0315 (0.8) 5/16 (8) Heat resistant foam plastic 0.045 Spe- cific gravity For gas 3/8 (9.52) 0.0315 (0.8) 5/16 (8) 1/2 (12.7) 0.0315 (0.8) 5/16 (8) Limits Pipe length MSZ/MSY-GL09/12/15NA 65 ft. (20 m) max. Height difference MSZ/MSY-GL09/12/15NA 40 ft. (12 m) max. No. of bends 10 max. Pipe length Up to 25 ft. (7.5 m) No additional charge is required. Exceeding 25 ft. (7.5 m) Additional charge is required. (Refer to the table below.) Refrigerant to be added MSZ/MSY-GL09/12/15NA 1.08 oz each 5 ft. (20 g/m) 1-4. INSTALLATION DIAGRAM ACCESSORIES Check the following parts before installation. <Indoor unit> (1) Installation plate 1 (2) Attachment screws for the installa- tion plate 4x 25 mm 5 (3) Wireless remote controller 1 (4) Felt tape (For left or left -rear piping) 1 (5) Remote controller holder 1 (6) Screws for the remote controller holder 3.5 x 16 mm (Black) 2 (7) Battery (AAA) for (3) 2 (8) Air cleaning filter 2 FIELD -SUPPLIED PARTS (A) Indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire•1 1 (B) Extension pipe 1 (C) Wall hole sleeve 1 (D) Wall hole cover 1 (E) Pipe attachment strap 2 to 5 (F) Screw for (E) 4 x 20 mm 2 to 5 (G) Piping tape 1 (I -I) Putty 1 () Drain hose (or soft PVC hose, 19/32 in. [15 mm] inner diameter or hard PVC pipe VP16) 2 to 5 (J) Refrigerant oil 1 (K) Power supply cord *1 1 Note: *1 Place indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (A) and power supply cord (K) at least 3 ft. (1 m) away from the TV antenna wire. Use the wall hole sleeve (C) to prevent indoor/ outdoor connecting wire (A) from contacting metal parts in the wall and to protect the wiring from rodents. Indoor unit Wall hole sleeve (C) Wall hole cover (D) 7-7100 Seal the wall hole gap with putty (H). Attach the pipe to wall with pipe at- tachment strap (E). Cut off the extra length. Pipe attachment strap (E) Attachment screw (F) (1) (2) (D) (3)� (5) •2 4 in. (100 mm) or more when front and sides of unit are clear (6) •3 When any 2 sides of left, right and rear of unit are clear Unit: inch 2-3/8 x 13/16 slot Air outlet Units should be installed by licensed contractor according to local code requirements. After the leak test, apply insulating mate- rial tightly so that there is no gap. When the piping is to be attached to a wall comprised of tin plate or metal netting, use chemically treated wooden piece 25/32 in. (20 mm) or thicker between the wall and the piping, or wrap insulation vinyl tape 7 to 8 turns around the piping. To use existing piping, perform COOL operation for 30 minutes and pump down before removing the old air conditioner. Remake flare according to the dimension for new refrigerant. Unit: mm Air outlet 2-10 x 21 slot Drain piping for outdoor unit Install the unit horizontally. Do not use drain socket in cold regions. Drain may freeze and make the fan stop. The outdoor unit produces condensate during the heating operation. Select the installation place to ensure to prevent the outdoor unit and/or the grounds from being wet by drain water or damaged by frozen drain water. 2. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION 2-1. ATTACHING THE INSTALLATION PLATE • Find a stud in the wall to attach installation plate (1) horizontally by tightening the fixing screws (2) firmly. • To prevent installation plate (1) from vibrating, be sure to install the attachment screws in the holes indicated in the illustration. For added support, additional screws may also be installed in other holes. • When the indoor unit is to be attached to a concrete wall using recessed bolts, secure installation plate (1) using 7/16 in. x 13/16 in. • 7/16 in. x 1 in. (11 mm x 20 mm • 11 mm x 26 mm) oval hole (17-3/4 in. [450 mm] pitch). • If the recessed bolt is too long, change it for a shorter one (field -supplied). 2-2. DRILLING 1) Determine where the holes will be located on the wall. 2) Drill a e 3 in. (75 mm) hole. The outdoor side should be 6/32 to 9/32 in. (5 to 7 mm) lower than the indoor side. 3) Insert wall hole sleeve (C). 2-3. CONNECTING WIRES FOR INDOOR UNIT Note: When the indoor unit is powered from the outdoor unit, depending on local code, a discon- nect switch needs to be installed to a power supply circuit. 1) Remove the panel assembly. (Refer to 5-1.) 2) Place the upper part of the indoor unit on the installation plate. 3) Remove comer box and electrical cover. 4) Remove display panel, conduit cover and conduit plate. 5) Attach conduit pipe (for rear piping) / elbow joint (for right, left, or downward piping) to conduit plate with lock nut. The thread of the installed conduit pipe / elbow joint appearing inside should be less than 3/8 in. (10 mm). (Fig. 1) Elbow joint should appear less than 1-3/16 in. (30 mm) outside. (Fig. 2) 6) Process the end of ground wire (Fig. 3). Connect it to the ground terminal of electrical parts box. 7) Process the end of indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (A) (Fig. 3). Attach it to the terminal block. Be careful not to make mis-wiring. Attach the wire to the terminal block securely so that its core cannot be seen, and no external force affects the connecting section of the terminal block. 8) Firmly tighten the terminal screws. After tightening, verify that the wires are tightly fastened. 9) Reinstall conduit plate, conduit cover and display panel. 10) According to the piping direction, remove the shaded part of the left side of box (Fig. 4) or corner box (Fig. 5). Reinstall electrical cover, corner box and front panel. Remark: • A disconnect switch should be required. Check the local code. •• Use a ring tongue termi- nal in order to connect a ground wire to terminal. INDOOR UNIT Grounding [Terminal block terminal•• J 208/230 V AC 1phase, 60 Hz OUTDOOR UNIT I Power supply 208/230 V AC, 1phase 2wires. JOS' 60 Hz Ground Grounding terminal** Disconnect switch* fV7 d Ceiling 2-1/8 in. (54 mm) or more (Bind the line to the center hole. Installation plate (1) 3-7/8 in. (100 mm) or more Level 5-1/8 in. (130 mm) or more for left and left back piping (using spacer) 4-3/8 in. UuUUU (110 mm) • U :1 -•or more 5-1/8 in.(130 mm1j Attachment screw (2) Align the plumb line with the mark V. Plumb Insert the scale. Align the scale with the line. Wall , Center of a3in. (75 mm) hole * Same for left hole. Electrical cover Fixing screw Electrical box Grounding terminal Conduit cover Display panel Lock nut /i Conduit plate tt Indoor terminal block Conduit pipe (for rear piping) or�) „ 4Si Elbow joint (for right, left, or downward piping) • Connect wires to the appropriate terminals • For future servicing, leave some slack in the connecting wires. Conduit plate / Less than 3/8 in. (10 mm) Lock nut Conduit pipe or elbow joint Fig. 1 Conduit plate Less than 1-3/16 in. (30 mm) Elbow joint (for right, left, or downward piping) Fig. 2 19/32 in. (15 mm) Lead wire • Make ground wire a little longer than others. (More than 1-9/16 in. [40 mm]) Fig. 3 Remove box for piping on left side of unit Remove box for piping on bottom left side of unit Fig. 4 Remove comer box for piping on right side of unit Remove comer box for piping on bottom/ Comer box right side of unit r.1 I)._ i r 7" f Al Fig. 5 2-4. PIPE FORMING AND DRAIN PIPING 2-4-1. PIPE FORMING • Place the drain hose below the refrigerant piping. • Make sure that the drain hose is not crowded or bent. • Do not pull the hose when applying the tape. • When the drain hose passes the room, be sure to wrap it with insulation material (field - supplied). Note: Make sure not to damage the cover of refrigerant pipe when attaching it back on with screws. Left or left -rear piping Note: Be sure to reattach the drain hose and the drain cap if the piping is being installed on left or bottom left of unit, otherwise, water could drip down from the drain hose. 1)Place the refrigerant piping and the drain hose together, then firmly apply felt tape (4) from the end. Felt tape (4) overlap width should be 1/3 the tape width. Use a bandage stopper at the end of felt tape (4). 2) Pull out the drain cap at the back right of the indoor unit. (Fig. 1) • Hold the convex section at the end and pull the drain cap. 3) Pull out the drain hose at the back left of the indoor unit. (Fig. 2) • Hold the claw marked by the arrows and pull out the drain hose forward. 4) Put the drain cap into the section to which the drain hose is to be attached at the rear of the indoor unit. (Fig. 3) • Insert a screwdriver into the hole on the cap and insert the cap fully into the drain pan. 5) Insert the drain hose fully into the drain pan at the back right of the indoor unit. (Fig. 4) • Check if the hose is hooked securely to the projection of its inserting part at the drain pan. 6) Insert the drain hose into wall hole sleeve (C), and attach the upper part of indoor unit onto the installation plate (1). Then, shift the indoor unit completely to the left to make placing the piping in the back of the unit easier. 7) Cut out a piece of cardboard from the shipping box, roll it up, hook it onto the back rib, and use it as a spacer to lift the indoor unit. (Fig. 5) 8) Connect the refrigerant piping with the extension pipe (B). 9) Attach the lower part of the indoor unit into the installation plate (1). Rear or bottom piping 1) Place the refrigerant piping and the drain hose together, then firmly apply piping tape (G) from the end. 2) Insert the piping and the drain hose into the wall hole sleeve (C), and attach the upper part of the indoor unit on the installation plate (1). 3) Check if the indoor unit is attached securely on the installation plate (1) by moving the unit to left and right. 4) Attach the lower part of the indoor unit into the installation plate (1). Right piping Note: Before performing the following, make sure that wiring is completed, and the conduit cover is installed. (Refer to 2-3.) 1) Place the refrigerant piping and the drain hose together, shift them to left side of the unit, and then firmly apply piping tape (G) from the end. 2) Insert the piping and the drain hose into the wall hole sleeve (C), and attach the upper part of the indoor unit on the installation plate (1). 3) Check if the indoor unit is attached securely on the installation plate (1) by moving the unit to left and right. 4) Attach the lower part of the indoor unit into the installation plate (1). 2-4-2. DRAIN PIPING • If the extension drain hose has to pass through a room, be sure to wrap it with insulation (field -supplied). • The drain hose should point downward for easy drain. (Fig. 1) • If the drain hose provided with the indoor unit is too short, connect it with a field -supplied drain hose (I). (Fig. 2) • When connecting the drain hose to a hard vinyl chloride pipe, be sure to insert it securely into the pipe. (Fig. 3) Felt tape (4) Piping tape (G) Liquid pipe Gas pipe Indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (A) Remove comer box for piping on bottom side of unit Remove comer box for piping on right side of unit To the left O Fig. 1 Drain hose • Soft hose I.D. 19/32 in. (15 mm) Fig. 2 27-9/16 in. (70 cm) or more Different diameter joint Drain hose Hard vinyl chloride pipe I.D. 1-3/16 in. (30 mm) Insert securely Fig. 3 1 Do not make drain piping as shown below. Do not raise Water leakage Accumulated drain water Air Water leakage Waving Tip of drain hose dipped in water Water leakage Ditch At least 1-31/32 in. (50 mm) gap i;---- Piping tape (G) Remove box for piping on 'Felt tape (4) � 'eft side of unit. C j V. , A Wil ..., Drain cap / 1 Fig. 1 r_____, •.•. ,",, Fig. 2 Drain hose a F{ ` cap Fig. 3 v<` Drain hose Fig. 4 MWStikDrain Fig. 5 Remove comer box for piping on bottom side of unit Remove comer box for piping on right side of unit To the left O Fig. 1 Drain hose • Soft hose I.D. 19/32 in. (15 mm) Fig. 2 27-9/16 in. (70 cm) or more Different diameter joint Drain hose Hard vinyl chloride pipe I.D. 1-3/16 in. (30 mm) Insert securely Fig. 3 1 Do not make drain piping as shown below. Do not raise Water leakage Accumulated drain water Air Water leakage Waving Tip of drain hose dipped in water Water leakage Ditch At least 1-31/32 in. (50 mm) gap 3. OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION 3-1. CONNECTING WIRES FOR OUTDOOR UNIT 1) Remove the service panel. 2) Remove the conduit cover. 3) Attach the conduit connectors to the conduit plate with lock nuts then secure it against unit with screws. 4) Connect the ground wires of indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (A) and power supply cord (K) to the TB support. 5) Loosen the terminal screws, then attach indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (A) and power sup- ply cord (K) from the indoor unit correctly to the terminal block. Attach the wires to the terminal block securely so that the cores cannot be seen, and no external force affects the connecting section of the terminal block. 6) Firmly tighten the terminal screws. After tightening, verify that the wires are tightly fastened. 7) Install the conduit cover. 8) Install the service panel securely. 19/32 in. (15 mm) Lead wire Power supply cord (K) Service panel Lock nut Conduit cover Conduit plate Conduit pipe TB support to conduit cover • Make earth wire a little longer than others. (More than 3-7/8 in. [100 mm]) • For future servicing, leave some slack in the connecting wires. Indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (A) Power supply cord (K) 3-2. FLARE CONNECTION 1) Cut the copper pipe as straight as possible with a pipe cutter. (Fig. 1, 2) 2) Remove all burrs from the cut section of the pipe, ensuring that precautions are taken to avoid getting metal shavings into the piping. (Fig. 3) 3) Remove flare nuts attached to indoor and outdoor units, then put them on pipe. 4) Flaring work (Fig. 4, 5). Firmly hold copper pipe in the dimension shown in the table. Select A inch (mm) from the table according to the tool you use. 5) Check • Compare the flared work with Fig. 6. • If flare is defective, cut off the section and repeat procedure. Pipe diam- eter inch (mm) B inch (mm) A inch (mm) Tightening torque Clutch type tool for R410A Clutch type tool for R22 Wing nut type tool for R22 ft -Ib (kgf•cm) N•m e1/4 (6.35) 21/32 (17) 0 to 0.02 (0 to 0.5) 0.04 to 0.06 (1.0 to 1.5) 0.06 to 0.08 (1.5 to ) (140 to 180) 13.7 to 17.7 0 3/8 (9.52) 7/8 (22) 25 to 30 (350 to 420) 34.3 to 41.2 01/2 (12.7) 1-1/32 (26) 0.08 to 0.10 (2.0 to 2.5) 36 to 42 (500 to 49.0 to 56.4 0 5/8 (15.88) 1-5/32 (29) 54 to 58 (750 to 800) 73.5 to 78.4 Copper �%i 0 Fig. 1 No good 9L //GollodEIT3 El] Sj Tilted Uneven Burred Fig. 2 Burr Copper pipe VI Spare reamer N. Pipe cutter 'I 1 . ri Fig. 3 Flaring tool _ \. -' Q i;,, ,� •1 fClutch type Wing nut type Fig. 4 A Die r Copperpipe i e Fig. 5 ,-„ Flare nut Smooth all around Even length all around rdill p Inside is shin- ing without any scratches. Fig. 6 A WARNING 3-3. PIPE CONNECTION • Fasten flare nut with a torque wrench as specified in the table (refer to 3-2.). • When fastened too tight, flare nut may eventually break and cause refrigerant leakage. • Be sure to wrap insulation around the piping. Direct contact with the bare piping may result in bums or frostbite. Indoor unit connection Connect both liquid and gas pipings to indoor unit. • Apply a thin coat of refrigeration oil (J) on the flared ends of the pipes. Do not apply re- frigeration oil on screw threads. Excessive tightening torque will result in damage on the screw. • To connect, first align the center, then tighten the first 3 to 4 turns of flare nut. • Use tightening torque table above as a guideline for indoor unit side joints, and tighten using two wrenches. Excessive tightening damages the flare section. Outdoor unit connection Connect pipes to stop valve pipe joint of the outdoor unit following the same procedure detailed in Indoor unit connection. For tightening, use a torque wrench or spanner. When installing the unit, securely connect the refrigerant pipes before starting the compressor. 3-4. INSULATION AND TAPING 1) Cover piping joints with pipe cover. 2) For outdoor unit side, insulate the piping, including valves. 3) Apply piping tape (G) starting from the connection on the outdoor unit. • When piping has to be installed through a ceiling, closet or where the temperature and humidity are high, use additional field -supplied insulation to prevent condensation. • 4. PURGING PROCEDURES, LEAK TEST, AND TEST RUN 4-1. PURGING PROCEDURES AND LEAK TEST 1) Remove service port caps from stop valves on both sides of refrigerant lines. (The stop valves are fully closed when shipped.) Leave closed. 2) Connect gauge manifold to ports of stop valves. 4 to 5 tums 'Close 'Open Hexagonal w ench Service port cap (Torque 10 to 13 ft -Ib, 13.7 to 17.7 N•m, 140 to 180 kgf•cm) Stop valve cap (Torque 15 to 22 ft -Ib, 19.6 to 29.4 N•m, 200 to 300 kgf•cm) —14.7 psi [Gauge] (-0.101 Mpa) Stop valve for LIQUID Compound pressure gauge (for R410A) Pressure gauge (for R410A) Gauge manifold valve (for R410A) Handle Low Adapter for preventing the backflow Handle High Charge hose (for R410A) //7;N/////i Vacuum pump (or the vacuum pump with the function to prevent the back flow) Precautions when using the control valve A Control valve Open Close Body Service port Charge hose When attaching the control valve to the service port. valve core may deform or loosen if excess pressure is applied. This may cause gas leak. When attaching the control valve to the service port, make sure that the valve core is in closed position, and then tighten part A. Do not tighten part A or turn the body when valve core is in open position. 3) Evacuate the system to 4000 microns from both service valves. System manifold gauges must not be used to measure vacuum. A micron gauge must be used at all times. Break the vacuum with Nitrogen(N2) into the discharge service valve to 0 PSIG. 4) Evacuate the system to 1500 microns. Break the vacuum with Nitrogen(N2) into the discharge service valve to 0 PSIG. 5) Evacuate the system to 500 microns. 6) Close gauge manifold valves, stop the pump, and conduct a 30 minute rise test. 7) System should hold 500 microns for a minimum of 1 hour. 8) Fully open all stop valves on both sides of gas pipe and liquid pipe. Operating without fully opening lowers the performance and this causes trouble. 9) Refer to 1-3 and charge the prescribed amount of additional refrigerant if needed. Be sure to charge slowly with liquid refrigerant. Otherwise composition of the refrigerant in the system may be changed and affect performance of the air conditioner. 10) Remove gauge manifolds and replace service port caps and tighten. 11) Leak test 4-2. TEST RUN 1) Insert power supply plug into the power outlet and/or tum on the breaker. 2) Press the E.O. SW once. Test run will be performed for 30 minutes. If the upper lamp blinks every 0.5 seconds, inspect the indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (A). After the test run, emergency COOL mode (75°F [24°C] COOL) will start. 3) To stop operation, press the E.O. SW several times until all LED lamps tum off. Refer to operating instructions for details. Emergency operation switch (E.O. SW) Checking the remote (infrared) signal reception Press the OFF/ON button on the remote controller (3) and listen for an audible indicator from the indoor unit. Press the OFF/ON button again to tum the air conditioner off. • Once the compressor stops, the restart preventive device operates so the compressor will not operate for 3 minutes to protect the air conditioner. 4-3. AUTO RESTART FUNCTION This product is equipped with an auto restart function. When the power supply is cut off during operation, such as during blackouts, the function automatically starts operation in the previous setting once the power supply is resumed. (Refer to the operating instructions for details.) Caution: • After test run or remote signal reception check, tum off the unit with the E.O. SW or the remote controller before turning off the power supply. If this procedure is not performed, the unit will automatically begin operation when power supply is resumed. To the user • After installing the unit, explain to the user about auto restart function. • If auto restart function is unnecessary, it can be deactivated. Consult the service rep- resentative to deactivate the function. Refer to the service manual for details. 4-4. EXPLANATION TO THE USER • Using the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, explain to the user how to use the air conditioner (the remote controller, removing the air filters, placing or removing the remote controller from the remote controller holder, cleaning methods, precautions for operation, etc.) Recommend that the user read the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS carefully. A WARNING ,5. RELOCATION AND MAINTENANCE 5-1. REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE PANEL ASSEMBLY Removal procedure 1) Remove the two screws that attach the panel assembly. 2) Remove the panel assembly. Be sure to remove its bottom end first. Installation procedure 1) Install the panel assembly following the removal procedure in reverse. 2) Be sure to press the positions as indicated by the arrows in order to attach the as- sembly completely to the unit. 5-2. REMOVING THE INDOOR UNIT Remove the bottom of the indoor unit from the installation plate. When releasing the corner part, release both left and right bottom comer part of indoor unit and pull it downward and forward as shown in the figure on the right. If the above method cannot be used Remove the front panel. Then, insert hexagonal wrenches into the square holes on the left and right sides of the unit and push them up as shown in the following figure. The bottom of the indoor unit lowers and releases the hooks. 5-3. PUMPING DOWN When relocating or disposing of the air conditioner, pump down the system following the procedure below so that refrigerant is not released into the atmosphere. 1) Connect the gauge manifold valve to the service port of the stop vallve on the gas pipe side of the outdoor unit. 2) Fully close the stop valve on the liquid pipe side of the outdoor unit. 3) Close the stop valve on the gas pipe side of the outdoor unit almost completely so that it can be easily closed fully when the pressure gauge shows 0 psi [Gauge] (0 Mpa). 4) Start the emergency COOL operation. To start the emergency operation in COOL mode, disconnect the power supply plug and/or tum off the breaker. After 15 seconds, connect the power supply plug and/ or turn on the breaker, and then press the E.O. SW once. (The emergency COOL operation can be performed continuously for up to 30 minutes.) 5) Fully close the stop valve on the gas pipe side of the outdoor unit when the pressure gauge shows (0.1 to 0 psi [Gauge] (0.05 to 0 Mpa)). 6) Stop the emergency COOL operation. To stop operation, press the E.O. SW several times until all LED lamps turn off. Refer to operating instructions for details. When pumping down the refrigerant, stop the compressor before discon- necting the refrigerant pipes. The compressor may burst if air etc. get into it. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN "_SERIES SUBMITTAL DATA: MSZ-GLO9NA-U1 & MUZ-GLO9NA-U8 9,000 BTU/H WALL -MOUNTED HEAT PUMP SYSTEM I+ATSLBIS ELECTRIC Job Name: k\ -,e) W1 System Reference: Electrical Power Requirements 208 / 230V, hese, Indoor Unit MSZ.GL09NA-U' (Tireless Remove Contrciler ACCESSORIES: Indoor d Unit sre Ou:vocr Un i. MUZ-GL39NA: U8 ZQCondensate Pump (BlueDiamond X87-711,721; 11 )RRECTION • Condensate Pump (Sauermann S130-115/230; 115/0]i''111t�f 11 • Anti -Allergy Enzyme Filter (MAC-408FT-E) u Drain Pan Level Sensor (DPLS2) Outdoor Unit Outdoor Mounting Pad (ULTRILITE1) Drain Pan Heater (MAC-640BH-U) 3-1/4" Mounting Base [Pair] (DSD -400P) Drain Pan Socket (MAC -8600S) o Air Outlet Guide (MAC-889SG) Wall Mounting Bracket (CSWB2000M-1) Controls Wireless Controller (MHK1) Wired Remote Controller PAR -31 MAA (Requires MAC -3331E -E) Wireless Interface for kumo cloud" (PAC-WHSO1WF-E) m Thermostat Interface (PAC-US444CN-1) - '\ k h',,f, nN N •i • VSflI0 9. SPECIFICATIONS: Rated Conditions (Capacity / Input) 9,000 / 585 F.LA. Cooling'i Slut PA' Heating at 47° F2 l 3t im 1 w 10,900 / 720 SHF / Moisture Removal Capacity Range Cooling' 0.820 / 1.5 pt./h Btu1 Minimum 3,600 Maximum 12,200 Heating at 47° F, Btum 4,5001 14,100 Heating at 17° F3 Airflow Rate Indoor Stull - i 9,400 Heating at 5° F° WET Btuh - i 7,600 ' Cooling Indoor' 80' F(27° C)DB 67° F(19° C)WB, Outdoor. 95° F(35' C)DB / 75' F(24° C)WB' Heating at 47°F 1 Indoor: 70' F (2 ° C)DB /60° F (16° C)WB: Outdoor: 47' F (8° C)DB 43' F (6° C)WB' ' Heating at 17° F 1 Indoor: 70' 0(2 ° C)DB / 60° F(16° C)WB; Outdoor: 17° F(-8° C)DB 1 15° 9-9° C)WB' ' Heating at 5° F i Indoor. 70° F (21' C)DB 60° F(16° C)WB; Outdoor. 5° F(-15° C) DB / 5° F(-15° C)WB Rating Conditions per AHRI Standard. Operating Conditons (Indoor Intake Air Temp.) (Max./ Min.) Cooling, Heating 90° F (32° C) DB / 67° F (19° C) DB 80° F (27° C) DB / 70° F (21° C) DB Operating Conditons (Outdoor Intake Air Temp.) (Max./ Min.) Cooling, Heating 115 F (46° C) DB / 14° F (-10° C) DB 75° F (24° C) DB / -4° F (-20° C) DB" Applications should be restricted to comfort cooling only; equipment cooling applicetions are not recommended for low ambient temperature conditions. " System cuts our. at -9' F (-27° C) to avoid thermistor error and automatically restarts at -4° F (-20°C) AHRFEfficiency Ratings' SEER / HSPF COP at 47° F / 17° F 24.6 / 12.8 4.44 / 3.3 Energy Star" Yes ENERGY STAR products are third -party certified by an EPA -recognized C-fication dy.1 Specifications are subject to change without notice. Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA) Indoor Outdoor Indoor Unit y` Blower Motor (ECM) F.LA. 0.76 Blower Motor Output W 30 SHF / Moisture Removal 0.820 / 1.5 pt./h Field Drainpipe Size O.D. i in.(mm) 5/8 (15) Outdoor Unit Compressor t _g DC INVERTER -driven Twin Rotary Fan Motor (ECM) F.L.A. 0.76 Airflow Rate Indoor Quiet - i..o - Med DRY - Hi - Super Hi) 145-170-237-321-399 (Cooling) WET 109-134-201-286-364 Indoor (Heating) DRY CFM 145-170-237-321-406 Outdoor 1,229 / 1,172 Sound Pressure Level (Quiet Cooling - Lo - Med - Hi - Super Hi) 19-22-30-37-43 Indoor Heating 19-22-30-37-43 Cooling d3(A) 48 Outdoor Heating 50 External Dimensions Indoor (H x W x D) 11-5/8 x 31-7/16 x 9-1/8 (295 x 798 x 232) Outdoor (H x W x D) In.(mm) 21..- 5 ��. • • , OR Net Weight Indoor .1111 1 22(10) Outdoor .P1 _1 (37} AUG 0 9 2019 External Finish Indoor Mundell1.0 Tukwila Outdoor Mun +1(�9'�1, l DINCI DIVISION Refrigerant R410A; 2 Ib. 9 oz. Refrigerant Piping (Flared) Liquid (High Pressure) Intmm) 1/4 (6.35) Gas (Low Pressure) It�C..�VEQ 3/8 (9CITY OF TUK VILA (� ■ Max. Total Refrigerant Pipe Length (Height Diff.) Ft. (m) 40 (12) JUL Max. Total Refrigerant Pipe Length (Length.) 2 6 2019 65 (20) RMIT CENTER O 2016 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. •, MSZ-GLO9NA-U1 1)16x1 Oblon. hole Installation plate 3-1/8 Unit: in. (mm) 1116x13 16 Obloe hole A2•S/ib �y 3t<11 MUZ-GLO9NA-U8 REQUIRED SPACE 4 m. (100 mm) or more when front and sides of the unit are clear pnh ids 81-2V32 iotamIx+J Drain hole 1-51161aewiatiouel ELiquid a' Insulation e1 - 3/8 0.0 line e1/4 19 -11/16 (Flared connection 0114) Gas line o31818-1$/16 ,Flared connection. e3'8 (0L06/09112NAI, al)2 (GL15NA)) Drain hose Insulation o1-1/8 0.0 Connected part 05/8 0.D M F •2 When any 2 sides of left, right and rear of the unit are clear holes 3/8x13/16 Service 11 Liquid refrigerant pipe joint Refrigerant pipe (flared) o 114 Gas refrigerant pipe joint Refrigerant pipe (flared) 03/8 FORM# MSZ-GLOONA-U1 / MUZ-GLO9NA-U8 - 201603 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 2-314 Unit: in. (mm) APMITSUBISHI IS. ELECTRIC COOLING & HEATING 1340 Satellite Boulevard. Suwanee, GA 30024 Toll Free: 800-433-4822 www.mehvac.com .��aa CERTIFIED.. cIus Intertek 612016 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. M SUBMI TAL. DAT,.DATk.MXI.2C2 1.5 -TON MULTI -ZONE INVERTER HEAT -PIMP SYSTEM Job Name: Loomis Seattle Branch System Reference:Coin Office HVAC Unit ACME' GENERAL FEATURES • Variable speed INVERTER -driven compressor • Energy Star® certified.' (non -ducted) • M -NET connection through outdoor unit • Quiet outdoor unit operation as low as 50 dB(A) • New Intelligent Power Module (IPM) for reduced power Toss • Selectable thermal lockout/restart function • Optional base pan heater • High pressure switch for additional protection • Thermal differential of +1-1° F from setpoint CORRECTION LTR# 'I --D R.EVISION NO» VlI8000 b Date: E REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 0 9 2019 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION .'ENERGY STAR products are third -party certified by an EPA -recognized Certification Body. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 2 6 2019 PERMIT CENTER Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2018 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. PE IE1CAT O Cooling*1 1 Maximum Capacity rrRated Capacity Minimum Capacity Maximum Power Input Rated Power Input Power Factor Hort- Mix Ducted Btu/h Btu/h 18,000 19,000 20,000 20,000 Btu/h 5,700 w w 98.7 2,245 1,417 1,709 99.3 2,000 99.9 Heating at 47° F*2 Heating at 17° F *3 Heating at 5° F *4 Efficiency Maximum Capacity Rated Capacity Minimum Capacity Maximum Power Input Rated Power Input Power Factor Maximum Capacity Rated Capacity Btu/h Btu/h Btu/h w_... Btu/h Btu/h 25,000 22,000 1,641 7,400 2,455 1,706 1,771 96.2 15,500 12,500 97.9 15,000 13,000 99.6 14,500 13,500 Maximum Power Input Rated Power Input Maximum Capacity w w Btu/h 1,750 1,780 1,810 1,300 1,325 1,350 11,100 11,000 10,900 Maximum Power Input SEER w 1,600 1,625 20.00 18.00 EER *1 12.70 11.35 1,650 16.00 10.00 HSPF (IV) COP at 47° F *2 10.00 9.65 9.30 3.93 3.78 3.64 COP at 17° F *3 2.82 2.87 2.93 ENERGY STAR® Certified YES NO NO Electrical Voltage, Phase, Frequency 208 / 230V, 1 -phase, 60 Hz Guaranteed Voltage Range V AC 187-253 Voltage: Indoor - Outdoor, S1-S2 V AC 208V / 230 Voltage: Indoor - Outdoor, S2 -S3 V DC 12-24 Voltage: Indoor - Remote controller V DC 24 Recommended Fuse/Breaker Size A 20 Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2018 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. P If r Tto : .2C2 N Outdoor u Indoor unit typl�► NIXZ-2C2ONA2 Nord- . NA'rx Duct Ducted Outdoor unit Recommended Wire Size 1(Indoor - Outdoor) MCA Fan Motor Full Load Amperage Fan Motor Output AWG A A W AWG 14 17.2 1.77 64 Airflow Rate ! CFM Refrigerant Control Defrost Method Heat Exchanger Type Sound Pressure Level, Cooling*1 dB(A) Sound Pressure Level, Heating*2 dB(A) 1,342 / 1,458 Liner Expansion Valve Reverse Cycle Plate fin coil 50 54 Compressor Type Compressor Model Compressor Motor Output kW Twin Rotary type SNB140FQUH2T 1.5 Compressor Rated Load Amps Compressor Locked Rotor Amps Compressor Oil Type // Charge oz. NEO22 / 20.3 External Finish Color Base Pan Heater Munsell 3.0Y 7.8/1.1 Optional W: In. [mm] Unit Dimensions D: In. [mm] H: In. [mm] W: In. [mm] Package Dimensions D: In. [mm] H: In. [mm] Unit Weight 1Lbs. [kg] 1 Package Weight 1 Lbs. [kg] 33-1/16 [840] 13 [330] 27-15/16 [710] 40 [1,010] 18-1/2 [470] 33-1/2 [850] 126 [57] 147 [67] Outdoor unit operating temperature range Cooling Intake Air Temp °F (Maximum / Minimum) 14 to 115 Heating Intake Air Temp (Maximum / Minimum) ° 5 to 75 lThermal Lock -out / Re -start Temperatures °F Cooling: 10.4 / 14 Heating: 1.5 / 5 Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2018 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. M (Z-2C2ONA2` _�. Ducted Dttd Refrigerant Indoor unit connection Piping Type Charge 1 Maximum Number of Connected IDU Minimum Number of Connected IDU Maximum connected capacity Minimum connected capacity Gas Pipe Size O.D. (Flared) Liquid Pipe Size O.D. (Flared) R410A 3, 15 2 Lbs., Oz. 2 Btu/h Btu/h In. [mm] In. [mm] Total Piping Length Maximum Height Difference, ODU above IDU Ft. [m] Ft. [m] Maximum Height Difference, ODU below IDU Farthest Piping Length from ODU to IDU Ft. [m] Ft. [m] { 24,000 12,000 3/8 [9.52] 1/4 [6.35] 164 [50] 33 [10] 49 [15] 82 [25] Maximum Number of Bends 50 AHRI Rated Conditions (Rated data is determined at a fixed compressor speed) *1 Cooling (Indoor // Outdoor) ° 80°F DB, 67°F WB // 95°F DB, 75°F WB *2 Heating at 47°F (Indoor // Outdoor) *3 Heating at 17°F (Indoor // Outdoor) °F °F 70°F DB, 60°F WB // 47°F DB, 43°F WB 70°F DB, 60°F WB // 17°F DB, 15°F WB Conditions *4 Heating at 5°F (Indoor // Outdoor) °F 70°F DB, 60°F WB /1-4°F DB, -5°F WB For reference to connected capacity charts, please refer MXZ-2C20NA2-U1 Operational Performance. Notes: Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2018 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. I Joint Pipe Air Discharge Guide Base Pan Heater Port Adapter size: 3/8" x 5/8" Port Adapter size: 1/4" x 3/8" o PAC-SG76RJ-E o PAC-493PI o MAC-A454JP-E Port Adapter size: 3/8" X 1/2" Port Adapter size: 1/2" X 3/8" Port Adapter size: 1/2" X 5/8" o MAC-A455JP-E o MAC-A456JP-E o MAC-856SG o PAC-646BH-E o CW162S Control Cable 3-pole Disconnect M-NET Adapter o TAZ-MS303 o PAC-IF01 MNT-E j Wall Mounting Bracket (Powder-coated Steel) o QSWB2000M-1 1 Wall Mounting Bracket (316 Series Stainless Steel) Pad 24" x 42" x 3" o QSWBSS i ❑ ULTRILITE2 Outdoor Unit Mounting MiniSplit Mounting Stand-Dual Fan models - 12" MiniSplit Mounting Stand-Dual Fan models - 18" ❑ QSMS1202M ❑ QSMS1802M ❑ QSMS2402M w__ MiniSplit Mounting Stand-Dual Fan models - 24" i j I, Diamondback Linesets 1 1/4 x 1/2 x 15' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin-Tube Insulation) 1/4 x 1/2 x 30' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin-Tube Insulation) 1/4 x 1/2 x 50' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin-Tube Insulation) ❑ MLS141212T-15 o MLS141212T-30 ❑ MLS141212T-50 1/4 x 1/2 x 65' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin-Tube Insulation) ❑ MLS141212T-65 1/4 x 1/2 x 100' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin-Tube Insulation) o MLS141212T-100 3/8 x 5/8 x 10' / 1/2" LinesetTwin-Tube Insulation)❑ ( MPLS385812T-10 3/8 x 5/8 x 15' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin-Tube Insulation) ❑ MPLS385812T-15 3/8 x 5/8 x 30' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin-Tube Insulation) o MPLS385812T-30 3/8 x 5/8 x 50' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin-Tube Insulation) 0 MPLS385812T-50 3/8 x 5/8 x 65' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin-Tube Insulation) o MPLS385812T-65 3/8 x 5/8 x 100' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin-Tube Insulation) 0 MPLS385812T-100 "1 Linesets are indoor unit specific and will be listed in the IDU information - the Joint Pipe adaptors are used in this application Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2018 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. 0.1 3/ 29/32" 1.FREE SPACE 6-21/32" 19-11/16" 6-23/32 Air Inlet 3re(1.5116') Drain hole 13-25/32' or more 2.SERVICE SPACE FORM# MXZ-2C20NA2 - 201805 V Outlet 33-1/16" 4 13132 01 116' Oral Mole (Foundation Bolt M8 1-3/16" 7-7/8" 11-25/32" to 1-1/32" 13" Unit: inch (mm) 1/2" r � • MITSUBISHI Grounding lemma! �n�om ELECTRIC Specifications are subject to change without notice. 2-19/32" Unna 0* 141.951FCE GAS 1E'IuB.511FLWE UnnA COOLING & HEATING 1340 Satellite Boulevard, Suwanee, GA 30024 Toll Free: 800-433-4822 www.mehvac.com Susus �o Intertek © 2018 Mitsubishi Electric US, Inc. SUBMITTAL DATA: MSZ-GL18NA & MUZ-GLI8NA 18,000 BTU!H WALL»MQUP1TED HET PUMP SYSTEM! MffSUEOSHI Job Name:Loomis Seattle Branch System Reference: IT Room HVAC Unit Indoor Unit: MSZ-GL18NA Outdoor Unit: MUZ-GL18NA Wireless Remote ontroller . 1k GENERAL FEATURES • Slim wall -mounted indoor units provide zone comfort control • The outdoor unit powers the indoor unit, and should a power outage occur, the system is automatically restarted when power retums • INVERTER -driven compressor and LEV provide high efficiency and comfort while using only the energy needed to maintain maximum performance • Multiple fan speed options: Quiet, Low, Medium, High, Super -high, Auto • Multiple control options available: - Hand-held Remote Controller (provided with unit) - kumo cloud® smart device app for remote access - Third -party interface options - Wired or wireless controllers • Hot -Start Technology: no cold air rush at equipment startup or when restarting after Defrost Cycle • Quiet operation • Smart Set: recalls a preferred preset temperature setting at the touch of a button • Blue Fin anti -corrosion treatment applied to the outdoor unit heat exchanger for increased coil protection an CORRECTION LTR# I inN NO; 1 MIOOO la REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE 1 longer IiAPPROVED AUG 0 9 2019 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 2 6 2019 PERMIT CENTER Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. SPECIFICATIONS: MSZ-GL18NA & MUZ-GL18NA Cooling Maximum Capacity Rated Capacity Minimum Capacity Maximum Power Input Btu/h Btu/h Btu/h W W 22,000 18,000 5,800 2,105 1,340 — Rated Power Input Moisture Removal j Pints/h Sensible Heat Factor 2.1 0.87 99 / 99 Power Factor % Heating at 47°F2 Heating at 17'F3 Maximum Capacity Btu/h 25,000 Rated Capacity Btu/h 21,600 Minimum Capacity Btu/h 5,400 Maximum Power Input Rated Power Input Power Factor W W % Btu/h 2,455 1,680 99 / 99 18,200 Maximum Capacity Rated Capacity Maximum Power Input Btu/h W 13,800 2,105 1,435 Rated Power Input W Heating at 5°F4 Maximum Capacity Btu/h 14,900 Maximum Power Input W 1,880 Heating at -4°F5 Maximum Capacity Btu/h 15,520 Efficiency SEER 20.5 EER1 HSPF (IV) COP at 47°F2 13.4 -----11.2-------� 3.77 COP at 17°F in Maximum Capacity3 2.53 COP at 5°F in Maximum Capacity's 2.32 ENERGY STAR® Certified (ENERGY STAR products are third -party certified by an EPA -recognized Certification Body.) YES Electrical Voltage, Phase, Frequency 208/230V, 1 phase, 60Hz Guaranteed Voltage Range V AC 187 - 253 Voltage: Indoor - Outdoor, S1-S2 VAC 2081230 Voltage: Indoor - Outdoor, S2 -S3 V DC 24 Voltage: Indoor - Remote Controller Wireless Type Recommended Fuse/Breaker Size A 15 Recommended Wire Size (Indoor - Outdoor) AWG 14 Indoor Unit MCA A 1 MOCP A 15 Blower Motor Full Load Amperage A 0.67 Blower Motor Output W 30 Airflow Rate at Cooling, Dry CFM 646-522-417-332-258 Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. PECIFICATIONS: MSZ- LISNA & UZ-GL Airflow Rate at Cooling, Wet I Airflow Rate at Heating, Dry CFM CFM 581-470-375-299-232 646-565-469-385-297 Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. Sound Pressure Level (Cooling) dB(A) dB(A) 49-44-38-33-28 Sound Pressure Level (Heating) 48-43-38-33-28 Drain Pipe Size In. (mm) .. W: In. (mm) . __ D: In. (mm) _...._..._..H: In. (mm)_-.._-_}--.-__.___._._.._ W: In. (mm) 5/8 (15.88) Plate fin coil Munsell 1.0Y 9.2/0.2 36-5/16 (923) 9-13/16 (250) ..._.__12 (305) 39 (990) Heat Exchanger Type Extemal Finish Color F_ _r.__.__._...--.._ -..-..._-.._.. ..___-._ _._....._.._- ,.___..__. Unit Dimensions Package Dimensions D: In. (mm) 13 (330) H: In. (mm) 15 (380) Unit Weight Lbs. (kg) 28 (13) Package Weight Lbs. (kg) 33 (15) Indoor Unit Operating Temperature Range Cooling Intake Air Temp (Maximum / Minimum)* °F °F 90 DB, 73 WB / 67 DB, 57 WB Heating Intake Air Temp (Maximum / Minimum) 80 DB / 70 DB Outdoor Unit MCA A 14 MOCP Fan Motor Full Load Amperage Fan Motor Output A A W CFM 15 0.93 77 1,691 / 1,691 Airflow Rate Refrigerant Control LEV Defrost Method Reverse cycle Heat Exchanger Type Plate fin coil Sound Pressure Level, Cooling1 dB(A) 54 Sound Pressure Level, Heating2 dB(A) 55 Compressor Type DC INVERTER -driven Compressor Model A SNB130FQBMT 1 10.0 Compressor Rated Load Amps Compressor Locked Rotor Amps A 12.5 Compressor Oil Type // Charge oz. FV50S // 11.8 Extemal Finish Color Munsell 3Y 7.8/1/1 Base Pan Heater Optional Unit Dimensions W: In. (mm) 33-1/16 (840) D: In. (mm) 13 (330) H: In. (mm) 34-5/8 [880] Package Dimensions W: In. (mm) 38-9/16 (980) D: In. (mm) ----H: 16-9/16 (420) In. (mm) 39 (990) --_ - Unit Weight Lbs. (kg) 121 (55) Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. PECIFICATIONS. MSS- Li8NA UZ-G118 Outdoor Unit Operating Temperature Range Refrigerant Piping Package Weight Lbs. (kg) Cooling Air Temp (Maximum / Minimum)* °F 141 (64) 115/14 Cooling Thermal Lock -out / Re -start Temperatures** °F Heating Air Temp (Maximum / Minimum) Heating Thermal Lock -out / Re -start Temperatures** Type Charge _ i.-_ Gas Pipe Size O.D. (Flared) Liquid Pipe Size O.D. (Flared) Maximum Piping Length !Maximum Height Difference Maximum Number of Bends Notes -1 / 3 °F °F Lbs, oz 75/-4 -9 /-4 R410A 3, 9 In. (mm) I 1/2 (12.7) T--i--In. (mm) —_.. 1/4 (6.35) j Ft. (m) I 100 (30) — — ._._.i._. Ft. (m) ! 50 (15) AHRI Rated Conditions Cooling (Indoor 11 Outdoor) °F (Rated data is 2Heating at 47°F (Indoor //Outdoor) determined at a fixed 10 80 DB, 67 WB/195DB, 75WB °F 70 DB, 60 WB l/ 47 DB, 43 WB j compressor speed) 3Heating at 17°F (Indoor // Outdoor) F 70 DB, 60 WB // 17 DB, 15 WB I'.__.__._..._. 4Heatin at 5°F Indoor // Outdoor 9 ( ) °F W 70 DB, 60B//-4 DB, -5 WB I Conditions 5Heating at -4°F (Indoor // Outdoor) ! °F i 70 DB, 60 WB // -4 DB, -5 WB *Applications should be restricted to comfort cooling only; equipment cooling applications are not recommended for low ambient temperature conditions. 11 **System cuts out in heating mode to avoid thermistor error and automatically restarts at these temperatures. Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. Anti -allergy Enzyme Filter Backlit, Wall -mounted, Wireless Controller Portable Central Controller Wired MA Controllers c MAC-408FT-E ,., MHK1 c MCCH1 c PAR-33MAA Simple MA Controller1 o PAC-YT53CRAU Touch MA Controller1 o PAR-CTO1MAU-SB Wired Remote Sensor 1 a M21-EAA-307 Wireless Temperature and Humidity Sensor lc PAC-USWHS003-TH-1 Outside Air Sensor for MHK1 System Control Interfacet Wireless Interface Thermostat Interface kumo station w ' c MOS1 ! o MAC-333IF-E o PAC-USWHS002-WF-1 le PAC-US444CN-1 ! ❑ PAC-WHS01 HC -E11 USNAP Interface 1 o PAC-WHS01 UP -E IT Extender lc PAC-WHSOI IE -E BACnet® and MODBUS® Interface o PAC-UKPRC001-CN-1 a Lockdown Bracket for Hand-held Remote Controllers o RCMKP1CB Blue Diamond Sensor Extension Cable -15 Ft. le C13-103 Blue Diamond Alarm Extension Cable -6.5 Ft. ; c C13-192 Blue Diamond MultiTank—collection tank for use with multiple pumps 1c C21-014 Blue Diamond Rubber Foot Pads i c F10-010 ! ! Mini Condensate Pump -230 volt application I _ SI30-230 MegaBlue Advanced Blue Diamond Condensate Pump w/ Reservoir & Sensor 1 o X87-835 - 110 to 250V MaxiBlue Advanced Blue Diamond Mini Condensate Pump w/ Reservoir & Sensor (110V) up to 48,000 Btu/h [recommended] 1 ❑ X87-711 - 110V Advanced Blue Diamond Mini Condensate Pump w/ Reservoir & Sensor (208/230V) [recommended] 1 _ X87-721 - 208/230V MicroBlue Blue Diamond Mini Condensate Pump (110/208/230V) up to 18.000 Btu/h lc X85-003 Fascia Kit for MicroBlue Pump – mounts the MicroBlue and sensor directly beneath the indoor unit . e T18-016 Drain Pan Level Sensor IcDPLS2 ! (30A/600V/UL) [fits 2" X 4" utility box] - Black 1 c TAZ-MS303 (30A/600V/UL) [fits 2" X 4" utility box] - White 1 o TAZ-MS303W 1 Requires MAC-333IF-E 2 Allows indoor units to connect to an MA Controller Specifications are subject to change without notice. OO 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. ACCESSORIES: MUZ-GL18NA Air Outlet Guide Drain Socket Optional Defrost Heater Hail Guard Outdoor Unit 3-1/4 inch Mounting Base (Pair) - Plastic Condensing Unit Mounting Pad 16" x 36" x 3" Outdoor Unit Stand — 12" High Outdoor Unit Stand —18" High Outdoor Unit Stand —24" High 1Heavy Duty Wall Mounting Bracket—Coated Steel Heavy Duty Wall Mounting Bracket -316 Series Stainless Steel 15 x 1/4" x 15' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) 30' x 1/4" x 30' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) 50' x 1/4" x 50' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) 165' x 1/4" x 65' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) I 100' x 1/4" x 100' / 1/2" Lineset (Twin -Tube Insulation) 7 , Ei MAC-886SG-E o MAC-860DS I i o MAC-642BH-U1 o HG -A7 o DSD -400P o ULTRILITE1 a QSMS1201M I lo QSMS1801M -I 41 o Q S M S24 0 1 M I o QSWB2000M-1 -I I o QSVVBSS I 4 i 0 MLS141212T-15 1 o MLS141212T-30 I I --i o MLS141212T-50 I- I ---; o MLS141212T-65 o MLS141212T-100 Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. !Immo=11111 11111111111•1 -_-. Installation plate Indoor urit 36-5/16 35-13/16 1/4 _ 2-5/16 3/4 _Laujam ■ilii iici■ I2-9/16 N N • 311/16 1 X7/16 Oblong hole 8-7/8 8-7/8 Unit: inch 7/16x13/16 Oblong hole 3-11/16 ab 0 d, 2-9/16 3-11/16 2-5/16 8-11/16 8-1/16 15-7/8 15-3/16 co as c Air in Wall hole 03 Installation late Drain hose Air out .5. Cl: Insulation 02 O.D Liquid line 05/16 15-3/8 (Flared connection 01/4) Gas line 015/32 13-3/8 (Flared connection 01/2) Drain hose Insulation 01-1/8 Connected part 05/8 O.D Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. 16-7/16 Air in Air in DI ENS ONS: IUZ G .18NA' REQUIRED SPACE *1 20 in. or more when front and sides of the unit are clear Drain hole 01-5/8 6-7/8 Air out 19-11/16 CT m M CO C7 Ln 2 -holes 13/32 X 13/16 FORM# MSZ-GL18NA / MUZ-GL18NA - 201902 Unit: inch *2 When any 2 sides of left, right and rear of the unit are clear Service panel 7-11/16 Liquid refrigerant pipe joint Refrigerant pipe (flared) 01/4 (18 kBtu/h) Refrigerant pipe (flared) 0 3/8 (24 kBtu/h) Gas refrigerant pipe joint Refrigerant pipe (flared) a 1/2 (18 kBtu/h) Refrigerant pipe (flared) 0 5/8 (24 kBtu/h) MITSUBISHI MIL ELECTRIC COOLING & HEATING 1340 Satellite Boulevard, Suwanee, GA 30024 Toll Free: 800-433-4822 www.mehvac.com egus Intertek Specifications are subject to change without notice. © 2019 Mitsubishi Electric Trane HVAC US LLC. All rights reserved. SUILJAI ILE .Always ait Always ther'' ORRE LTR# Sullair: An Industry Leader Sullair Leadership Since 1965, Sullair has been recognized worldwide as an innovator and leader in rotary screw compression and vacuum technology. Sullair designs and manufactures its own rotors and air end assemblies. The award-winning rotary screw design sets the industry standard and delivers the quality and reliability you expect from a leader. Sullair TechnogV Using the most modern technologies, equipment and ad a Sullair designs, manufactures, assembles, and tests the most innovative compressed air and vacuum products in the industry. Sullair products are known around the world for their universally applicable design, outstanding craftsmanship and superior quality. 1010, TION Sullair Corn itrnent to Innovation Underlying Sullair leadership is a dedication to excellence and a commitment to innovation. We are constantly exploring new ideas and seeking new ways to meet the industry's need for increasingly energy efficient compressed air and vacuum solutions. 11 rotors are engineered and machined in the USA. ry Air. Power Sy st ith our expertise in analyzing, managing and ontrolling compressed air, Sullair offers total ompressed air solutions to help you reduce energy costs and improve productivity. • Plant air audits • Energy efficient products • Compressed air system controls • Equipment to monitor and manage air systems • Air treatment products • After -purchase support Plus a full complement of OEM parts and lubricants to help keep your compressors running optimally. Each component of the nECElVEO CITY OF TUKWILA JUL .26 2019 PERMIT CENTER system is carefully matched for capacity and pressure to provide maximum performance and energy efficiency. The Sullair Standard 7 ha,o the l du tr Standard Sullair ShopTekTm air compressors redefine industry standards for continuous duty compressors in the 5 to 50 hp range. Designed with the end customer in mind, ShopTek compressors feature a small footprint and are built to provide exceptional reliability and extremely low maintenance. All ShopTek air compressors come standard with: • Legendary Sullair air end • 10,000 hour Genuine Sullube® factory jell • 5 -year Erre,::;,‘lfa=;.;, — providing coverage on major components including the air end; air/fluid receiver; main drive motor; fluid cooler; and aftercooler .nda y r Air L..nd A continuous supply of compressed air. It's your biggest expectation in an air compressor. The legendary Sullair air end, at the heart of tens of thousands of compressors worldwide, will help keep your operation pumping, worry -free. Proven Reliability Bulletproof. It's a word often used in conjunction with the Sullair air end. Although the principle of rotary screw compression remains the same, as does the durability, Sullair continuously improves the materials, engineering and design of its air ends and compressor packages. Longer air end life Controlled pressure lubrication and bearing fluid reservoirs assure a reliable supply of fluid to rotating elements - helping extend air end life. no Feat( s r nd That Set Sultai Apart Simple, Compact Design Sullair compressors utilize design simplicity to provide exceptional reliability and extremely low maintenance. Designed with a small footprint, these compact machines redefine industry standards for continuous duty compressors in the 5 to 50 hp range. Reliable Sullair Air End • Patented rotor design • Bearing fluid reservoirs • Long life bearings Sound Enclosure for Quiet Operation • Reduces sound levels to as low as 66dBA • Easily removable for service Intelligent Electronic Controls Sullair ShopTek compressors are fitted with the latest technology microprocessor controller to ensure uniform operation and uninterrupted production. Deluxe Monitoring All essential parameters of the compressor are conveniently displayed on the controller. Pressure is controlled using transducers to minimize off-load running and reduce over -compression to help ensure optimum performance and savings in energy costs. Energy Efficient Features All ShopTek motors are designed for improved energy efficiency and a compact footprint. That's why Sullair provides premium efficient motors as standard. Plus, the Sullair air end is designed to deliver maximum output with minimum power consumption, giving ShopTek compressors a superior energy advantage. All ShopTek compressors are factory -filled with biodegradable Genuine Sultube® 10,000 hour fluid. • Protects and cleans (no varnish) • Controls operating temperatures • Optimal viscosity • Environmentally friendly • Reduces fluid loss • High flash point (263°C) ShopTek compressors are covered by the 5 year Emerald VAbi r r y - which provides coverage on major components including: • Air end • Air/fluid receiver • Main Drive Motor • Fluid cooler • Aftercooler For more information, contact your local authorized Sullair distributor. ShopTek'" Performance Air System All ShopTek 5-20 hp compressors may be upgraded to the ShopTek Performance Air System by adding matching dryers, filters and receiver tanks. Compressed air is a vital source of energy for applications such as general manufacturing, cabinet and trim shops, auto body and tire shops, and commercial laundries. To meet varying air quality requirements, Sullair responds to your needs by developing a total compressed air package. The Sullair Solution We've taken the guesswork out of putting your system together. Sullair offers the Performance Air System which includes a ShopTek compressor; a refrigerated dryer; a liquid and particulate filter; and a receiver tank. All components of the System have been perfectly sized to provide maximum performance. Plus, the Performance Air System is simple to install and requires a minimum amount of floor space. Clean, Dry Air is Essential Quality air treatment - the removal of condensate and particulate — is essential to protect your plant air system and air -using equipment. Plus, quality air can help improve the quality of your product and process. The Performance Air System helps achieve your goals with: • Matched refrigerated dryer — to help remove water vapor found in compressed air. The Sullair dryer features an oversized demister separator, dew point indicator and easy drain access. And the unit features environmentally compatible refrigerant. • High efficiency filter — to remove particles down to 1.0 micron. The filter also helps to remove coalesced liquid and lubricants. Features of the Receiver Tank Include: • ASME and CRN approval • 80 and 120 gallon tank availability • Pressure relief and ball valve as standard V -Belt System • Protective belt guard • Easily adjusted and aligned Easy Separator Maintenance • Simply unbolt the cover and lift it off • No tubing to disconnect • "0" Ring seal prevents leaking • Reduces service time Fluid and Air Cooler(s) • Easy access for maintenance • Air-cooled • Aftercooler an 15 hp and 20 hp models Heavy Duty Air Filter • Protects key components from premature failure • Extends separator, fluid filter and fluid life • Easy access for maintenance • Filter efficiency: 99.9% @ 4.9 Micron Environmental Protection Pan • Fully -sealed • Captures spills Fluid Sight Glass • Easily check fluid level IEC Motor • TEFC (IP54) • Available voltages include 208V, 230V, 460V and 575V Control Panel • Integrated full -voltage starter • ST Controller - Simple user interface - Clear and concise graphic display - Monitors status of key operating parameters Separator • ASME certified tank • High quality/low carryover (<2 ppm) • Access panel for easy removal and serviceability • Fluid sight glass Fluid and Air Coolers • Easy access for maintenance • Thermostatically controlled oil cooler helps eliminate condensation in oil at lower temps • Efficient combo cooler design • Aftercooler is single pass Control Panel • EC Controller - Clear and concise graphic display - Monitors status of key operating parameters • Modulation Control - Stabilizes system pressure - Reduces cycling — extends life of wearing components • Wye -Delta starter Heavy Duty Inlet Filter • Protects key components from premature failure • Extends separator, fluid filter and fluid life • Easy access for maintenance • Filter efficiency: 99.9% @ 4.9 Micron Direct -Coupled Gear Drive • Provides efficient power transmission • Ensures alignment and smooth operation Premium Motor • Slow -running, premium efficient 1800 RPM Siij!ci'.tom i Specifications r , � Model Motor HP (kW) 6 ilk. Pressure psis (bar) �P Capacity acini (m'/min) g dt3A' ' * . a ` Length in (mm) 32.5 (825.5) ,� j } .°> S OU TED Weight lbs (kg) Width in (mtill Height in (mm) ST410 5 (4) 150 (101 16 (0.47) 66 21.5 (546.1) 37 (939.8) 524 (237.7) ST510 7.5 (51 jjj ( ST709 f --------4 10 (7.5) 1 ST712 150 (101 125 (9) 26.5 (0.76) 35.5 (1.06) 67 68 546 (247.7) 567 (255.8) 175 (12) 301 (0.89) 68 ST1109 15 (11) i 125 (9) 63.5 11.81 69 39.3 (998.2) i ! 1 24.3 (617.2) 40.7 (1033.8) 772 (350.21 ST1112 175 (12) 46.5 (1.26) 69 ST1509 20 (15) 125 (9) 80.1 (2.2) 70 805 (365.1) ST1512 175 (12) 62 (1.7) 70 ST1808 25 (18) 115 (8) 103 (2.9) 75 53 (1340) i ( 29 (7401 51 (1300) 1280 (5801 ST2208 30 (22) 115 (8) 127 (3.61 75 1433 (650) ST3008 40 (30) 115 (8) 160 (4.6) 80 63 (1600) ( 34 (860) 56.7 (1440) 1984 (900) ST3708 50 (37) 115 (8) 219 (6.2) 80 2205 (1000) TANK TANK MOUNT.WIT)4 Length Model in (mm) ST410 Width in (mm) Height in (mm) 64 (1625.6) ? 23 (584.2) 63 (1600.2) • 66 (1676.4) j 25.5 (647.7) 71.5 (1816.1) Weight ) Length Ws (kg) 1 in (mm) 854 (387.4) 876 (397.3) 897 (406.9) 1192 (540.7) 66 (1676.4) 25.5 (647.7) 1225 (555.6) 1 Width in (mm) 64 (1625.6) 23 (584.2) Height in (mm) 63 (1600.2) Weight lbs (kg) 935 (424.1) 955 (433.2) 981 (444.01 1288 (584.2) 71.5 (1816.1) 1321 (599.11 To learn more about ShopTek, contact your Sullair distributor today. ULUkla A? ays ak. Always there.* aAS�''a=0fM1;>f�C2 2 € 201E ry S�e:�pc S lig r.com i4e Ar<uattxe 1+4trici MODEL EL-200H (SHOWN WITH 250 GALLON SW TANK) \= <0 \0 (Z/ V) \LO 0 /\ LTJ = U 00 ƒ _\ <� ƒ7 }7 U/ /_< c Lo Lo $LIJ / w± \ /\2/ ‹ \\\\ k/ \/\\\ V) m/ \ 1-\0 0J0-0 LU �G< 0 t- LLJ w 1 o0 7§»0 \<w (24 §§f \2203 z0 «<g z o v' 00 4 J . CF: 7� \� iLU \ ƒ±j 5I- DJ /0- /»«= o>ow»0 00 o&\� ¢¢ U» u 2 6 �[00 c 220§0 ?Q ƒ0 a 2\ /2// X290 0 030 00 0cam 21 0 ALL CN \ W U 1 u. 5. 0 ' 02u/0 f > t".1 §6/ 0 0u_uj , Q• (0 U -I /< icc /4:r lc{±c2 /%\ w0 R °zO < -72z2E < & 2» ITEM # 98030026 NuEra FIL 14409 NE 79th St, Vancouver, WA 98682 www.nueraheat.com 1-(800) 347-9575 Maintenance Schedule & Service Guide by Nuera Corp. LYZ Service Schedule Record Date & Hour -Meter Reading Clean Ash From: Every 800-1,000 Hours Heat Exchanger & Flue (pg M4) Burner Head (pg M8) Check/ Replace Burner Gasket (BG part # BH441) Annually REVIEWED FOR Clean Blower Wheel (pg M4) Annually CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED Clean Solenoid Valve (pg M9) Annually AUG 0 9 2019 Clean Nozzle Block & Check/ Annually ': City of Tukwila Replace Nozzle 0 -Ring (pg M7) Replace Air Compressor Filter: Annually BU LDING DIVISION (BG part # BA530) Fram CG20 Clean PTC Preheater (pg M6) Annually Clean Cad Cell Lens (pg T16) Annually Replace Primary Strainer: Annually, & When Vacuum Gauge Reads Fleetguard HF6522, Wix 85614, or Baldwin BT8420 More than 8" Drain Tank Bottom (pg N7) Check Monthly. Drain Water as Necessary. RECEIVED Clean Fuel Pickup Assembly (pg N5) Not on BG Workbench Tank Annually, or When Reduced Fuel Flow CITY OF TU10.1111 Clean Pump Check Valve (pg T21) Annually, or if Oil Drains Back during shutdown JUL 2 6 2019 T�(�N PERMIT Test fiGQE3 M '(t�hance & check for proper burn adjustment (S4) 1 -r Ji GENIE Properly Maintained, your furnace can save you thousands of $$'s each year ! ONLINE PARTS at: www.nueraheat.com or for Service Assistance & Parts Contact:. 4-0NuERA Corporation John Clemens, nueracorp@msn.com (800) 347-9575 Fax: (253) 661-4529 VISIONNO:: ' Website: www.nueraheat.com PTC Preheater Cleaning The PTC preheater should be cleaned once a year. Tools needed: 3/4" wrench, one gallon of over 140°F flash point parts washing cleaner First, unplug the preheater and let it cool. Disconnect the copper lines from the inlet and outlet caps of the preheater. Remove the mounting bolt and take the preheater off of the burner assembly. Drain the preheater into your oil tank by opening the valve. Hold the top cap securely and unscrew the housing. This exposes the finned aluminum extrusion for cleaning. Use a wire brush and non -chlorinated parts cleaning fluid or carb cleaner. You may want to fill the housing and screw it back on to let the finned extrusion soak in the cleaner before you use the wire brush. Never attempt to unscrew the finned extrusion from the outlet cap. This will damage electrical connections to the PTC heaters. DO NOT SUBMERGE OR SPRAY wiring harness with liquid when cleaning. THIS WILL DAMAGE THE HEATERS. Rinse the housing and inlet cap with parts cleaner. Reassemble the preheater by screwing the housing back into the top cap. Tighten the housing securely by hand - do not over tighten with wrenches! Follow the "Burner Start Up" instructions (page S2) and run the unit to check for leaks at the top cap. If leaks occur, tighten the housing more. If leak persists, replace the cap gasket. Check Gaskets - not cracked or brittle Model 140 & 200 Manual ver 0.0 M6 PTC preheater on burner Hob Top Cap Securely Loosen Bolt and Bracket Unscrew housing from top cap Ai Disconnect copper line aos ed Keep Insulation around Tube & on Cap Caution Disconnect 3/8 copper line Aluminum Bstrusbn Wire brush aeaning Fluid Housing and Insulation --> Caul i on NOTE: When burner is off for considerable time (Summer Season, etc.) Turn OFF POWER or UPLUG BURNER so Preheater Doesn't continue to heat & evaporate - bake the oil within. Last Updated: 5/14/2003 Nozzle Line Assembly Cleaning Tools: 3/4", 1/2" and 7/16" wrenches, 5/8" socket, pliers, vise, plain screwdriver or 1/4" nut driver, clean towel, parts cleaner, shop air. Warning: For this service, turn off power to the heater at the circuit breaker. Unplug the burner and disconnect the 3/8" copper fuel line from where it connects to the preheater inlet. Remove the 4 burner mounting nuts. Swing the burner open. Disconnect the oil and air lines from the nozzle assembly with a 7/16" wrench. Remove knurled nuts. Undo front holding screws to transformer and lift transformer open. Unplug nozzle line preheaters and slide the nozzle line assembly out from the front of the air tube. Remove electrode assembly. Set aside to avoid possible damage. Remove the nozzle using a 5/8" socket or wrench. Use pliers and a towel (protects the nozzle stem) to disassemble the nozzle as shown. Clean all parts of the nozzle and check the o -ring for damage. It is a good idea to replace the nozzle o -ring yearly. Reassemble the nozzle, holding the stem vertically as shown below to keep the distributor in place while the cap is threaded onto the stem. Tighten the cap by hand, then tighten just a quarter to one-half turn further with a wrench. When properly assembled, you can see through the center of the nozzle. Run parts cleaning fluid back through the block until completely free and clean of any sludge and solids. The oil port has a plug opposite the nozzle end for straight thur cleaning, with wire rifle brush or long 3/16" drill bit. Do not get cleaning fluid on the preheaters or wiring! Blow shop air through the oil and air passageways of the nozzle block. Thread the nozzle back into the nozzle block. Fasten electrodes to nozzle block and check electrode and flame retention head settings. See Flame Retention Head and Electrode Settings (page M8). Transformer Oil & Air Lines Screws & Knurled Nuts M7 3/8" Fuel Line Remove Tapping Plug for straight thru bore cleaning with rifle brush or long drill bit, etc. Check for correct nozzle: Models 140, 200, Boiler 200 use 30609-5 or 1007 3509 Model 400 and Boiler 500 use 30609-11 or 30609-28 Reassemble vertically Disassembled Nozzle Cap , Dstrbutor • Stem •aPong a a Emmi I 0 aean all parts Model 140 & 200 Manual ver 0.0 Last Updated: 5/14/2003 Electrode & Retention Head Settings Electrode settings and Flame retention head must mirror drawings exactly for optimum performance. Use needle nose pliers to move electrode arms into proper position The end of the 1/16" past the flame retention electrode tips nozzle extends vanes of the head and flush with nozzle 3/32" at closest point or about the width of a nickel Retention head is set back approximately 1 /16" into the end of the air tube opening For correct electrode placement the tips of electrodes must be 7/16" above the nozzle Flame retention head must be centered inside air tube. Spacing must be even all the way around. Re- position support legs to center Solenoid Valve Cleaning Tools needed: Pliers, Screwdriver, Non -Chlorinated Parts Cleaner or Spray Degreaser, Shop Air On the burner, remove the oil lines (1) from the inlet and outlet of the solenoid valve. Loosen (do not remove) the bracket clamp screws (2) and bracket that hold the valve body in place. Remove the C Clip (4). Unscrew the valve stem (3) by turning it counter- clockwise. The valve body comes away from the stem and windings. When pulling the body away from stem, the nucleus and spring (5) will come out of the stem. Take care to avoid dropping and losing the nucleus and spring. The spring fits in the upper end of the nucleus. Inspect the brass housing (6). Clean any debris from the inlet and outlet ports. Remove the flared fittings, clean passages and housing behind fittings, clean inside of stem & nucleus (Aerosol Brake Cleaner, Tobacco Pipe Cleaner Wire & Q -tips work well here). Rinse the brass parts and blow air through the body to clean them thoroughly. Inspect 0 -ring. Replace if damaged. Inspect the seal on the end of the nucleus to see if it is marred or damaged (7). Replace if damaged. This is where the valve seals when it is shut off. Reassemble in reverse order of dismantling. CLEAN HERE Check the 3/16" Cu Fuel Lines & Clean with Carb or Brake Cleaner and pipe cleaner wire, if necessary. Side v iew on bumer assembly Clean Ports & Flush Valve stem O HMI I IMO • Spring Nucleus 0 M9 Remove Adaptor Fittings & Clean Brass housing bawd 0 -ring Model 140 & 200 Manual ver 0.0 Last Updated: 5/14/2003 Heat Exchanger and Blower Cleaning Clean ash from the heat exchanger and flue about every 800 to L000 hours of operation. Tools Needed: 1/2" Socket, 5/16 Socket, 3/4 Open End Wrench, Chimney Brush, Small Pipe Brush, Work Gloves, Dust Mask or Respirator, Large Trash Bag and Duct Tape Warning: Turn off power at the circuit breaker before beginning this service. Wear protective clothing, including gloves and a dust mask or respirator. Allow heater to cool before cleaning. Unplug burner. Disconnect 3/8 copper fuel line where it connects to the burner assembly. Remove the 4 burner mounting nuts. Swing burner open. Carefully remove drip cap as shown by removing two sheet metal screws with 5/16" socket. The cap will be heavy with collected ash. Attach a trash bag to the drip leg with duct tape or strap a 5 gallon bucket to the cabinet to catch the ash. Using a 6" chimney brush or optional scraper, sweep the heat exchanger interior free of ash. Push the ash out of the heat exchanger into the bucket/bag attached to the drip leg, or use shop vacuum to remove the ash. Tap the flue and allow the ash to fall into the bag. Remove the bag and run a chimney brush into the flue. Reattach the bag to the drip leg, reach through the bag to brush the ash loose from the chimney. Remove bag and brush and dispose of ash properly. Reattach the drip cap to the drip leg. Swing burner close and reinstall nuts and fuel line. To clean the blower wheel, remove the wire guard from the open side of the blower. Use a small pipe cleaning brush and a shop vac to clean the dirt from the blower wheel blades. Reattach the wire guard when finished. Heat Exchanger Cutaway View Wire brush the interior. Remove the drip cap to allow ash removal. Note: Model 340, Clean Upper Heat Exchanger as well M4 e, w Shop Vacuum Blower Wheel Cleaning Shop Vacuum Model 140 & 200 Manual ver 0.0 Last Updated: 5/14/2003 Checks for Pump, Fuel Line & Check Valve Remove the pump cover and clean around the gear set inlet plates. Pumps sold before 1998 will have a strainer. Clean the pump strainer if it has one. Inspect the o -rings for tears or breaks. The o -ring on the strainer will pull apart. Slide the ends of this o -ring together firmly when reinstalling on the strainer. Check all fittings for tight seal and inspect copper tubing flares for cracks or distortions that might allow leaks. Make sure the pressure relief fitting is oriented properly with the arrow pointing toward the pump inlet. With the inlet and outlet lines disconnected at the pump and the pressure and vacuum gauges removed, remove check valve from pump assembly to clean. Take to vise and unscrew check valve body into two halfs. Note how needle and seat are assembled. Clean and reassemble using pipe dope to seal body threads & fittings. To check for suction fitting leaks, spray around the vacuum gauge (after reinstalling) and suction side fittings with soapy water. These connections should not leak. Blow air into the inlet at 30 psi maximum. Soap bubbles indicate a leak in the connection. If the pump will not prime and the vacuum reading will not go to 20" with the inlet blocked, contact your Black Gold Distributor for a replacement pump. To better check an uncertain pump, make up a short leak free inlet line (flared copper tube) and submerge into a container of clean used oil. Operate pump and check for priming, flow and for 15"+. suction with inlet plug after flow established. Model 140 & 200 Manual ver 0.0 Check all fittings for tight seal. Pressure Gauge T21 Vacuum Gauge Check valve Relief Valve Disassemble Check Valve for CLEANING. Body unscrews at seam. Reassemble with Pipe Dope to threads I, I ,I Allows flow in one direction only. Inspect for blockages. Check rrntor and purrp for free rotation Check for good wirng connections, no cut or pinched w ires. Check to make sure coupling holds fast & pump to motor shafts are in alinement Last Updated: 5/14/2003 Burner Start Up To preheat and start the burner, first make sure that the primary strainer (at inlet of pump assembly between pump and oil storage tank) is full of oil and that all fuel connections are tight and leak -free. Turn the preheater valve handle so that arrow points up towards the preheater. Loosen fitting going into solenoid valve (above burner, to the right of the copper tubing) to allow for bleeding of air. Loosen the fitting at the oil preheater outlet to allow the copper tube to rotate away from the burner. Caution: Use a small container to catch oil when it starts to bleed. Set the wall thermostat to call for heat or place a jumper on the "T" terminals of the primary control (gray box on top of burner). You may need to push the red reset button on top of the primary control. Immediately after the burner starts, place an additional jumper wire across the "F" terminals. Let the burner and pump run this way until you get a steady stream of oil out of the copper tubing. This takes 5 - 10 minutes to prime the system, you may want to initially check for flow directly out of pump discharge. Remove jumpers from the terminals to shut down burner. Move the lockout lever on the primary control to lock burner out. If your primary control does not have a lockout lever, set your room thermostat below room temperature. Reconnect the copper tubing to the solenoid and tighten the tubing to the preheater outlet. Wait 20 minutes for initial preheat (HOT to Touch). Then push the reset button and set your wall thermostat above room temperature to call for heat. The preheater must be 150 degrees F to close the internal thermostat and allow the burner to run. NOTE: Jumping the T -T terminals bypasses the preheater's internal T -stat (which is in series with the room T -stat) allowing the burner to come on when the oil is cold. Jumping the F -F terminals bypasses the fire eye safety control. (Do Not leave heater unattended with F -F jumpered !) Model 140 & 200 Manual ver 0.0 2 To Control Thermostat "111111111\ Burner with PT C preheater < lel Valve handle arrow p oints towards preheater Red reset button Last Updated: 5/14/2003 Proper Burn Adjustment If the flue draft is .05"+, then the flame should be bright yellow, an orange flame indicates a fuel rich flame. To check this, wear safety glasses and use caution while viewing flame and keep back at least 18" from view port. Raise the cover on the view port, located above the left burner mounting bolt. Close the cover after checking. With good fuel, the metering pump providing the correct amount of fuel, and the air shutter set at 7 for Model 200 and 5 for a Model 140, the CO2 should be around 11%. The ohm reading should be between 250 and 500 ohms. There should be no black on the smoke spot. A service person can check these as follows. See Draft Gauge Set Up and Checks (N15) for instructions on reading the flue draft. Make sure that it is .05" to .06" WC while burner is running. Start the burner and test the CO2 following the instructions that came with the test kit. If the CO2 is not between 10-11%, loosen the air shutter lock screw and adjust the air shutter to achieve a 11% CO2. To increase CO2, close the air shutter. To decrease CO2, open the air shutter. After adjusting the CO2, take a smoke test and compare it with the chart that came with your test kit. You should have a zero/trace smoke spot. Don't worry about a yellow- brown color on the smoke spot. This is normal when burning used oil because noncombustible compounds are present. The flame should be bright yellow. Put the draft gauge probe back in the flue pipe test hole. During operation a gray -white ash will build up on the probe. This indicates normal clean combustion. Next, take an ohm reading. While the burner is running, attach the leads from an analog multi -meter (a digital meter will not work) to the "F" terminals on the primary control. The reading should be 250-500 ohms. Secure all adjustment screws and nuts. Start and stop the burner several times to make sure there are no significant rumbles or pulsations. Check the unit for any oil leaks. Then enjoy the savings from your used oil. Air Stutter Lock Nut 4 Draft Gauge (.05"+) Probe 2 4 6 Adjust in g 11/.4E— l Marks # 7 for Model 200 # 4 for Model 340 Primary Control Multi -meter RECOMMENDED SETTINGS: for Bright YeVlow/White Flame Air Shutter: Model 200 set to # 7 Model 140: # 5, Model 340: # 4 Fuel Pump Pressure: 5-10 psi Fuel Pump SuctionNacuum: 0-8" Air Compressor Output: 9 psi (M200) For Service Assistance or Parts contact: Steve at Nuera Corp, nueracorp@msn.com Phone: 800-347-9575, Fax: 253-661-4529 Model 140 & 200 Manual ver 0.0 Last Updated: 5/14/2003 BlackGold / EnergyLogic BURNER REPLACEMENT PARTS Nozzle Line Assembly Parts 1) BH100 Ignition Transformer, Model 200 BH420 Ignition Transformer, Model 340/400 2) BH440 Burner Gasket 3) BA530 Air Compressor Filter 4) BA506 Coupler Air Comp. Filter 5) BA509 Pre-set Air Regulator, M200 6) BA500 Air Compressor 8) BN200 Air Compressor Coupling 9) BH150 Cad Cell -Flame Detector Assy 10) BH250 Burner Motor, M200 11) BA520 Air Compressor Vanes 12) BH200 Primary Control 13) BH310 Burner Wiring Box 14) BR620 Solenoid Valve 15) BN854 Cartridge Heater 8.7mm 16) BN770 Nozzle 0 -ring 17) BN780 Nozzle #5, Model 200 BN782 Nozzle #28, Model 340/400 18) BN750 PTC Nozzle Block w/cartridge htr. 19) BN710 1 pc Electrode 22) BN726 Oil/Air Bulkhead Fitting 23) BN757 Retention Head, M200 BN760 Retention Head, M340/400 24) BN850ASY Complete Nozzle Line Assy 26) BN747 Air Vane 27) BN748 Nozzle Block Sleeve insulation nueracorp(a�msn.com 800.347.9575 www.nueraheat.com BlackGold / EnergyLogic Pimip, Preheater & Filter Parts --4 0 0 Spin -on Fitter Element Steel Mesh J PTC Preheater Assembly Draft Gam Wall Thermostat 30 X070 80 90 SD iD TD ID OD 1) PP2001ASY Complete Pump Assy, M200 PP2002ASY Complete Pump Assy, M340/400 2) PP200ASY Fuel Pump w/fittings 3) PP400 Fuel Pump Coupling 4) PP116/SRV117 300RPM Gear Motor Assy, M200 Model 340/400 specify special gearbox 3GN3.6KA 5) PL245ASY Primary Strainer Assy 6) PH200ASY PTC Preheater, M200 PH400ASY PTC Preheater, M340/400 7) HF105 Spin on Oil Filter (# 5144) 8) PL254 Firomatic Safety Shut off Valve 9) DG100 Draft Gauge Manometer 10) PL222 Pressure Gauge 11) PL220 Vacuum Gauge 12) PH0051 Preheater Gaskel 13) PH032 Preheater Insulation 14) RT100 Room Thermostat nueracorp(a.msn.com 800.347.9575 www.nueraheat.com BlackGold / EnergyLogic Furnace Cabinet & Accessories 1) CS200 Complete Squirrel Cage Blower Assy, M200 *CS250 1/2 HP Blower Motor, M200 *CS255 3/4 HP Blower Motor, M340/400 2) CS-DC200 Drip Cap w/ Baffle, M200 3) CS-DC340 Drip Cap w/ Baffle, M340/400 4) CS341 Gasket Drip Cap 5) FG100 7" Barometric Damper 6) FG100ASY Barometric Damper 8" Tee Assy 7) RS2015 Louver, M200 8) DG100 Draft Gauge Manometer 9) DG101 Draft Gauge Probe 10) DG102 Draft Gauge Oil -Fluid (not pictured) 11) Cabinet Assy. 12) CS130 Receptacle Burner Plug 13) RS4200 SS Heat Exchanger 14) CS110 Fan Limit Control 16) CS118 Hour Meter 17) RT100 Room Thermostat #SRV201 Combustion chamber / heat exchanger Ash Cleanout Tool. Has telescoping handle with removable crescent scraper, optional 6' round chimney brush. (Provides for quick & easy straight thru ash cleanout into bag or bucket at chimney drip leg) nueracorp(a�msn.com 800.347.9575 www.nueraheat.com BlackGold / EnergyLogic Tune Up Kit / Service Package PN: SRV101 @ $169.00 Includes: • BN780 — Nozzle, #30609-5 • BN710 — Electrodes, 1 pc. Assy. • BR640 — 3/16" Cu Fuel Line (to solenoid) • BR625 — Solenoid Valve Replacement 0 -ring • BH400 — Burner Gasket • PH051 — PTC Preheater Gasket • PH032 — PTC Preheater Sleeve Insulation • BA530 — Air Compressor Filter • HF105 — 100 Mesh SS Spin -on Fuel Filter • SVCX. — Service Excerpts w/ Check List PN: GRF495 Pre -Filter @ $96.00 # GRF495, GoldenRod Pre -Filter with 40 or 80 mesh Washable SS Strainer & Water Trap PN: FT1618 Oil Drain Pan @ $139.00 (16" x 18") For Preheating Cold Fuels PN: HF140 HOT FILTER Band Heater • $89.00 140*F approx., 60 watt (filter not included) 800.347.9575 Email: nueracorp(c�msn.com Website: www.nueraheat.com , • • • • ••••• 4 www.energylogic.com 800-351-0643 MH 15602 NO: WASTE OIL BURNING APPLIANCE AS639315 www.energylogic.com 800-351-0643 Model No. Model EL -200H Bonnet Cap 01,4)4,BTU 160,000 BTU Fuel Input ' 1.4 GPH Nozzle Only No. 30609-5 Fuels #2 Fuel Oil, Waste ATF and Crankcase Oil Designed Outlet Air Temperature 250°F Maximum Flue Draft 0.05" WC Atomizing Air Pressure 9-11 PSI Blower Size 10" X 10" 0.28" WC Maximum External Static Pressure 25A 1/2 HP, 115V/60Hz, 8.1A 1/5 HP, 115V/60Hz, 3.3A 15 Watt, 115V/60Hz, 0.35A 115V/60Hz, 2.0A 115V/60Hz, 2.5A Maximum Top. Bottom & Rear 24" Front and Burner End 6., glower End and Ductwork 18" Chimney ---- Unit Heater or Ductable Maximum Fuse Size Blower Motor Burner Motor Metering Pump Motor Ignition Transformer & Control Circuit Oil Preheaters6" Min Clearance to Combustible Surfaces • For Commercial and n u For P-1-2rte �,nd Adcaiena� Patents Apphod Installation & Operation Manual BILE CORRECTION LTR# 4,0 Waste Oil Furnace Models: EL -140H, EL -200H, and EL -350H REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE . APPROVED AUG 09 2019 • City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REViSIONNOJ 115V/60Hz RECEIVED TKVILA energylogic. JUL 26 2019 Designed to save. Built to last. TM PERMIT CENTER C LISTED US Used Oil Buming Appliance Mil 15602 5901 Crossings Boulevard Nashville, TN 37013 www.enerdylodic.com 5) 471-5 0 0 0 Item #: 98030028 Issue Date: 28 April 2015 Caution! Before you begin installation and operation of your furnace, read this manual completely, and save it for future reference! IMPROPER INSTALLATION, OPERATION, OR MAINTENANCE OF THE FURNACE SYSTEM CAN CREATE HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS AND WILL VOID THE WARRANTY AND U.L. LISTING. • This furnace is UL listed for commercial and industrial use only.. • Refer to Section 1 for safety information and precautions. • Installation of the unit shall be made in accordance with all state and local codes which may differ from information provided in this manual. Installations in Canada shall be in accordance with the regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and installation practice shall be made according to CSA standard B139, Installation Code for Oil Burning Equipment. • Product improvements are occurring regularly, so the products may vary slightly from what is shown in this manual. • If you have any questions or concerns during the installation or operation of the furnace, contact your local service representative or EnergyLogic. Thank you for purchasing an EnergyLogic furnace. Record your Unit I.D. number below for future reference. Please register your unit to activate the warranty by visiting EnergyLogic's website at www.energylogic.com/register . If you have any issues with registering, please contact us at 615-471-5200. Unit I.D. #: (Six digit number located on the bottom of the furnace) Installed By: (Service Company, Address, Contact Name, Phone Number) Date of Installation: CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support energy/ogic Table of Contents Before you begin Table of Contents. 1. Safety, Codes and Regulations 1 1.1 Conventions Used in this Manual 1 1.2 General Warnings 2 1.3 Safety Hazards 2 1.4 Codes and Regulations 4 1.5 Fuels and Fuel Management 5 1.5.1 Fuels 5 1.6 Clearances to Combustible Surfaces 6 2. Installation Consliderations 7 2.1 Technical Guidelines 7 2.2 Tools Required 8 2.3 Furnace Placement Guide 8 3. Assembly and Installation — Cabinet, Tank, Pump and Suction Fuel Line. 10 3.1 Unpacking and Inspection 10 3.2 Warranty Registration 10 3.3 Furnace Cabinet Installation — On an EL Tank 12 3.3.1 Locate the EnergyLogic Used Oil Storage Tank 12 3.3.2 Tank Stands and Cabinet Installation (250 gallon tank shown) 12 3.4 Furnace Cabinet Installation — Not Mounted on a Tank 14 3.4.1 Ceiling Mount with Threaded Rod 14 3.4.2 Wall Mount with Optional Brackets 15 3.5 Preparing the EnergyLogic Used -Oil Tank 16 3.5.1 Tank Vent Installation — EnergyLogic Tanks 16 3.5.2 Drain Valve Installation — EnergyLogic Tanks 16 3.5.3 Low Fuel Cutoff Switch — EnergyLogic Tanks 16 3.6 Fuel Metering Pump and Filter Installation — EnergyLogic Tank (continue to section 3.7 if you don't have EL tank) 17 3.6.1 Fire Stop Valve and Filter Head Installation — EL Tank 17 3.6.2 Metering Pump Installation — EL Tank 17 CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support ij energy/ogic. 3.6.3 Gauge and Pump Tubing Installation — EL Tank 18 3.7 Metering Pump Installation — Non -EL Tank (skip if you have EL tank) 19 4. Installation of Furnace Components 20 4.1 Blower Assembly Installation 20 4.2 Burner/Preheater Assembly 22 4.3 Burner/Cabinet Assembly 23 4.4 Pump Outlet Tubing Installation 24 4.4.1 Pump Outlet Tubing Installation 24 4.4.2 Pump Outlet Tubing Installation — Ceiling or Wall Mounted Furnace (skip if you have a tank mounted furnace) 25 5. Exhaust Flue System Installation 26 5.1 Barometric Damper Tee Installation 26 5.2 Flue Piping Installation 26 5.3 Draft Gauge Installation (included with some packages) 29 6. Electrical System Installation 30 6.1 Wall Thermostat 30 6.2 Fuel Pump Power Connection 32 6.3 Main Electrical Connection 33 7. Startup and Operation 34 7.1 Do's and Don'ts/Tech Tips 34 7.2 Burner Primary Control Operation 34 7.3 Safety Systems and Warnings 35 7.4 Furnace Startup 36 7.4.1 Fuel System Priming 36 7.4.2 Starting the Furnace 38 7.4.3 Burner System Checkout 39 7.5 Everyday Operation of Your EnergyLogic Used Oil Furnace 42 8. Maintenance 43 8.1 Service Contracts 44 8.2 Safety Warnings — Lockout/Tagout 44 8.3 Monitoring System Performance over Time 44 8.4 Maintenance Schedule and Parts 44 8.5 Maintenance Procedures 46 8.5.1 Heat Exchanger Cleaning 46 8.5.2 Blower Cleaning 50 Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support efiewogic. iii 8.5.3 Fuel Oil Filter Replacement 51 8.5.4 Preheater Cleaning 52 8.5.5 Nozzle Line Assembly Cleaning 54 8.5.6 Retention Head and Electrode Settings 57 8.5.7 Solenoid Valve Cleaning 59 8.5.8 Air Compressor Maintenance 61 8.6 Seasonal Shut Down & Start Up 63 9. Troubleshooting 64 9.1 Troubleshooting Condition Table 65 9.2 Troubleshooting Trees 66 9.3 Testing Procedures 69 9.3.1 Wall Thermostat Testing 69 9.3.2 Blower Assembly Testing 70 9.3.3 Cad Cell Testing 71 9.3.4 Metering Pump Assembly Testing 72 9.3.5 Preheater and Nozzle PTC Testing Procedure 74 9.3.6 Primary Control Testing 76 9.3.7 Solenoid Valve Testing 77 9.3.8 Top Suction Kit Testing 78 9.3.9 Iron Core Transformer Testing 79 9.3.10 Fan and Limit Controller Testing 81 10. Appendices 82 10.1 Furnace Wiring and Oil Schematic 82 10.2 Carlin 50200E Primary Control 84 10.3 Furnace Specifications 86 10.4 Limited Warranty 90 CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 6 eflernlogic.. iv 1. Safety, Codes and Regulations Thank you for the purchase of an EnergyLogic used oil furnace. EnergyLogic furnaces are designed and tested for safe, reliable long term operation. However, proper installation, fuel quality control, and regular maintenance are required. Please read and understand this manual completely before attempting to install, operate, or service the furnace. Post this instruction manual and maintain it in legible condition. If you have any questions, call your local service provider or the number below for EnergyLogic Technical Service. 1.1 Conventions Used in this Manual For your safety, this manual uses the following definitions and signal words to identify hazards: rA DANOER■ Fi'1:4 1 11i[t Danger: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. This signal word is limited to the most extreme situations. Warning: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. £►CAUTION Caution: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. CAUTION Caution (without alert symbol): Indicates an unsafe practice which, if not avoided, may result in product or property damage. Also used for general alerts. Product safety labels and their meaning (labels not used on all products): Electrical Shock 1 Electrocution Explosion .111.0.01440. IIIMSMIN..1•40116 Hand Crush/Force From Side Bum Hazard 1 Hot Surface Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support Flammable Material Explosion / Release of Pressure 1 energy/ogic 1.2 General Warnings • i The EnergyLogic burner is to be used only in the EnergyLogic furnace provided. Do not attempt to use the burner for other purposes. • 1 Do not tamper with the unit or controls — call your service technician. • 1 1 =; Do not attempt to use unit with broken or damaged components. • A CAUTION If you are intending to use the furnace with existing building ductwork, make sure that the requirements are met for allowable external! static pressure (see specification table in appendix). • = Do not allow unqualified personnel to install or service the furnace, electrical system, or flue system. Contact EnergyLogic for help with finding a qualified installation and service company. Failure to install and maintain your heater properly will void your warranty and the UL listings. • a" ;' Do not attempt to start the burner when excess oil has accumulated, when the furnace is full of vapor, or when the combustion chamber is very hot. • 1 Do not start the burner unless all cleanout panels are secure in place. • t CAUTION KEEP THE FUEL VALVE NEAREST THE SUPPLY TANK SHUT OFF WHEN THE BURNER IS SHUT OFF FOR EXTENDED PERIODS. • A CAUTION Turn off power to the burner when the burner is off for extended periods. • iiMMUESiThe furnace is designed to be installed above head height, or in a manner that restricts access. • A CAUTION USED OILS CONTAIN HEAVY METALLIC COMPOUNDS AND FOREIGN MATERIALS. WHEN BURNED, THESE COMPOUNDS ARE EMITTED FROM OR DEPOSITED WITHIN THIS HEATING APPLIANCE AND THEREFORE CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN USING, CLEANING AND MAINTAINING THIS EQUIPMENT. • CAUTION EnergyLogic recommends that the building have a secondary heat source during times the furnace is down for maintenance or service. Used oil furnaces require maintenance. Also, used oil may sometimes be unavailable or burn poorly due to contaminates in the oil. The heat from the secondary heater should be directed away from the furnace. 1.3 Safety Hazards There are potential hazards associated with operation of this or any other furnace. In addition to the codes and regulations listed in the following section, general safety rules and the precautions should be followed at all times to prevent accidents that could lead to personal injury, death or property damage. Only those qualified should perform the tasks. Specific safety hazards include: A DANGER Electricity: The EnergyLogic furnace operates on 115V/60Hz electrical power. Turn power off at the circuit breaker and lock it out prior to performing any work on the furnace Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 2 6 energy/ogle system or any of the components. Make sure covers are in place during normal use. Use only copper conductors. 111111.111111111 Liquid Fuels: Used oils must be handled properly to prevent spills. Uncontained oil leaks may contaminate the local water supply. Ensure that all national and local codes are followed in regards to the requirements for spill containment and SPCC paperwork. Oil leaks pose slip/fall hazards, and pose a risk for fires. DO NOT USE GASOLINE OR ANY OIL CONTAINING GASOLINE. Do not add any cleaning fluids or oil additives to the used oil burned in this appliance. The use of unauthorized fuels will void the warranty and U.L. listing. See section 1.5.1 for a list of allowable fuels. The end user of the furnace is responsible for ensuring that all correct precautions are taken in managing their used oil. Combustion Exhaust Gases: The exhaust products from the combustion are dangerous to breathe. The furnace must be attached to a flue which properly vents the exhaust out of the building to the atmosphere at all times, to assure safe and proper operation of the burner. If proper draft cannot be established, changes to the building construction or a draft inducer will be required in order to provide adequate make-up air. £ AUTION Safe Maintenance: Used oil contains mineral additives and deposits called "ash" that will not burn. Ash collects in the furnace and flue with regular use over time. Ash must be cleaned out of the combustion chamber/heat exchanger and flue pipe on a scheduled basis. Follow the minimum maintenance instructed in section 8. Wear proper protective clothing; including gloves and face mask or respirator whenever any cleaning is performed, including the cleaning of the heat exchanger, flue piping and exhaust stack. Vapor/Dust Ignition: Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable liquids or vapors near this furnace, as they may be ignited by the burner. Do not operate the furnace in dusty or otherwise dangerous environments. Flammable liquids: Do not create a fire or explosion hazard by using or placing flammable liquids such as gasoline or solvents near the furnace. A flammable liquid is any liquid that has a closed -cup flash point below 100°F (37.8°C), as determined by the test procedures and apparatus set forth in 1.7.4 of NFPA 30. Minimum Clearance — Safe clearance to combustibles (Section 1.6) shall be adhered to. Height, Weight, Guarding and General Safe Practices: The furnaces are installed at heights which pose a risk for injuries due to a fall. Many of the components are heavy, and pose the risk of injury with improper lifting and handling. Always follow safe practices and use proper equipment. Never climb on the equipment. Do not take risks when installing or servicing the equipment. All cover plates, enclosures, and guards must be maintained in place at all times, except during maintenance and servicing. Failure to observe general safety rules and to follow safety rules specific to the tools and equipment used or being worked on may result in product/property damage, personal injury or death. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 3 efer ylogic 1.4 Codes and Regulations The installation, operation, and maintenance of the furnace system in the United States must be performed by qualified personnel in accordance with this manual and all national, state, and local codes / regulations, as well as the following standards of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 31 NFPA 30 NFPA 30A NFPA 70 NFPA 88A NFPA 88B NFPA 211 Standard for the Installation of Oil Burning Equipment Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code Code for Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and Repair Garages National Electric Code Standard for Parking Structures Standard for Repair Garages Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances These standards are available from the NFPA at www.nfpa.org. Similarly, the installation, operation, and maintenance of the furnace system in Canada must be performed by qualified personnel in accordance with this manual and in accordance with all the regulation authorities having jurisdiction, as well as CSA Standard B 139, Installation Code for Oil Burning Equipment. Electrical installation in Canada shall be in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code, Part I. CSA standards are available at www.csa.ca. A qualified installer is an individual or agency who is responsible for the installation and adjustment of the equipment and who is properly trained and licensed to install oil burning equipment in accordance with all codes and ordinances. In the United States, make sure you comply with all EPA regulations concerning the gathering and storing of used oil, and operation of the furnace. Specifically, CFR Title 40 Part 279 covers managing used oil. As well, make sure you comply with local codes and regulations. In Canada, only used oil generated on the premises of the owner may be used in this equipment unless written authorization is obtained from the regulatory authority. Comply with Canadian regulations regarding the management and storing of used oil, as well as any local codes and authorities having jurisdiction Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 4 6 mew/ogle. 1.5 Fuels and Fuel Management The furnace system is composed of several components and subsystems that work together for efficient and safe operation. In order for the system to function as designed, good fuel management practice must be followed. 1.5.1 Fuels EnergyLogic furnaces are listed by Underwriters' Laboratories (U.L.) for the U.S. and Canada, operating on the following fuels: • Used Crankcase Oil. • Used Automatic Transmission Fluid. • ASTM D396 No. 2 Fuel Oil. C LISTED US Used Oil Burning Appliance MH 15602 DO NOT USE GASOLINE OR ANY OIL CONTAINING GASOLINE. Fuel mixtures must have a minimum flash point of 140°F (60°C) and the maximum flash point of approximately 400°F (204°C). Mixtures shall not contain hazardous waste. �1:�►`1101N Never mix inappropriate or hazardous material with the used oil. Examples of substances that should never be added include but are not limited to: • Gasoline • Hazardous Waste • Anti -freeze • Carburetor Cleaner • Paint Thinner • Any Chlorinated Material • Parts Washer Solvents • Oil Additives • Animal Fats UOMMEEThe addition of inappropriate substances to the fuel is not approved and can lead to poor equipment performance, premature product failure, and/or explosive/hazardous conditions. Burning of fuels that contain unapproved substances will void the product warranty and the UL listing. If you have any question about what is contained in your used oil, it is your responsibility to have the oil analyzed prior to burning. Contact EnergyLogic Technical Services if you have questions about a particular fuel type, or if you need fuel analysis. For a nominal fee, EnergyLogic Technical Services will provide a professional fuel analysis. You will be provided with instructions in order to collect an oil sample to be sent out for analysis. Specify the type of analysis that is needed. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 5 energy/ogle. 1.6 Clearances to Combustible Surfaces It is of the utmost importance that the installation conform to the minimum clearances to combustible surfaces (Material made of or surfaced with wood, compressed paper, plant fibers, plastics, or other material that can ignite and burn, whether flame proofed or not, or whether plastered or unplastered). Consult applicable codes and regulations for precedence. Non-compliance to minimum clearances may result in fire, explosion, personal injuty or death. Minimum Clearances per U.L. Listing: Top - 6", Front - 24", Sides - 6", Rear - 6", Flue Pipe (Single Wall) - 18", Bottom - 6", Warm air duct within 3' of furnace (when ducted) - 6" 6" (15.24 cm) from top panel. 6" (15.24 cm) from rear of cabinet (24" if using rear air panel discharge). 6" (15.24 cm) from burner. (72" (183 cm) recommended for maintenance access.) Warm air duct minimum clearance: 6" (15.24 cm) within 36" (92 cm) of furnace. The unit may be suspended from the ceiling. 18" (46 cm) from outer surface of single-wall flue tee/pipe in all directions. 6" (15.24 cm) from blower edge. 24" (61 cm) from front of cabinet. 6" (15.24 cm) from bottom panel to combustible objects. Note: Repair facility code (NFPA 88B) requires 96" (244 cm) from burner to the floor. Minimum Clearances to Combustible Surfaces Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 6 ener gogic_ 2. Installation Considerations EnergyLogic furnaces are designed to operate reliably over a wide range of conditions. However, it is important to read this section before installation to prevent unnecessary work or problems. 2.1 Technical Guidelines 1. All components of your furnace are factory -tested to ensure proper operation. Do not tamper with controls. 2. Pre -assembled fittings are sealed with thread -locker sealant and do not require additional tightening. 3. Always supply power through a dedicated hard -wired (copper only), 115VAC/60Hz circuit with a 25 Amp maximum breaker. Check local codes. 4. Do not use the provided thread -locker sealant on flare fittings. Use the provided sealant on all NPT threaded connections only. 5. Do not use Teflon tape on any connections. Loose strands may block small orifices, affecting unit operation or may damage components. 6. Route all fuel lines inside building to prevent exposure to cold weather. If this is not practical, call EnergyLogic for application support. 7. Locate furnace and tank in a dry area above 50°F (10°C) at all times. 8. If not installing the pump to an EnergyLogic Tank, mount it according to guidelines in the EnergyLogic Top Suction Kit packaging instructions. 9. Do not kink copper tubing. Route tubing as straight and vertical as possible (no loops) to avoid air pockets. 10. Remember to remove the blower shipping strap prior to installation. 11. Maximize vertical run of flue, and minimize horizontal run. Allow access for clean-out. 12. Mount the wall thermostat to an interior wall. Do not allow it to hang by the wiring harness. Do not mount it to the furnace cabinet. 13. Do not allow your tank to run out of fuel. If the tank runs out of fuel, air and contamination will be introduced into the fuel delivery system. An EnergyLogic low- level cut off switch is recommended to prevent low fuel operation. 14. Never use compression fittings for tubing connections, as they will leak and cause the burner to shut down. 15. Care should be taken not to over -tighten or cross thread brass fittings. 16. Applying a thin film of anti -seize compound to cabinet side of burner gasket may reduce gasket sticking to cabinet when swinging burner open. 17. Another source of heat is recommended for periods when the furnace may be off-line for maintenance or for any other reason. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 7 6 energy/ogle 2.2 Tools Required Below is a recommended list of tools and equipment that may be used to aid in the installation of EnergyLogic furnaces. This is a minimum list for a Tank -Mount system. Additional tools and equipment are required for other mounting methods. Common Tools and Equipment • 5/16" Combination Wrench • 3/8" Combination Wrench • 7/16" Combination Wrench • 1/2" Combination Wrench • 9/16" Combination Wrench • 3/4" Combination Wrench • 1-3/8" Combination Wrench • Flat Blade Screwdriver • %" Hex Wrench or Driver • Wire cutter to remove tie straps. • Forklift or other lift device. • Safety ladder or man lift. • (Tools required for flue kit installation) 2.3 Furnace Placement Guide It is important to plan the furnace and tank placement, wiring, piping and flue prior to installation. Electrical Wiring - Will the layout of your building allow safe routing and installation of electrical wiring to the furnace? Check your local building codes. The EnergyLogic furnace requires 115 VAC/60 Hz power, supplied through a dedicated, hard wired, circuit breaker — 25 Amp maximum. Use copper conductors only Ak DANGER Electricity is very dangerous. Wiring must be installed by a qualified electrician. In the U.S., consult the National Electric Code (NEC) and local building codes for additional requirements. In Canada, consult the Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1. Flue Pipe - Is ceiling/roof or wall location suitable for a flue pipe to pass through? Are any obstacles or flammable materials present at interior or exterior locations? Check your roof warranty about penetration for the flue pipe. Check your local building and fire codes. Combustion and Make Up Air Requirements — It is necessary to ensure that adequate air for safe combustion is provided for oil -burning appliances and equipment. Refer to NFPA 31, chapter 5 for requirements based on the total input BTU rating of all appliances in the space. In Canada, reference CSA Standard B139/CGA B149. Tanks - The oil tank is to be vented to the outside of the building. Oil temperature should be maintained at 50°F (10°C) and above. Tank shall be at least 5 feet away from any source of heat and should not obstruct service meters, electrical panels, or shut off valves. Check building, environmental and fire codes for containment and other restrictions. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 0 • 8 Minimum Clearance — Safe clearances to combustibles (Section 1.6) shall be adhered to. Distance from Flammable Liquids — Do not create a fire or explosion hazard by using or placing flammable liquids such as gasoline or solvents near the furnace. A flammable liquid is any liquid that has a closed -cup flash point below 100°F (37.8°C), as determined by the test procedures and apparatus set forth in 1.7.4 of NFPA 30. Access - Position the used oil storage tank to provide adequate access to filling ports, filter, drain valve and pump. Leave an unobstructed path for shop vehicles and equipment. Consider access needed for service (heat exchanger cleaning, flue cleaning, removal of drip cap and baffle, burner access, etc.). If desired, the furnace can be wall mounted or hung from the ceiling at some distance from the oil tank. Cabinet Orientation vs. Air Flow Direction — Consider the workspace to be heated. Consider proximity to windows, doors, etc. The EnergyLogic used oil furnace is designed such that the louver and cabinet panels may be swapped and the cabinet can be rotated 180°. Consider whether or not this would be advantageous for your application. Contact EnergyLogic if louvers are needed on both sides. Structural requirements (Canada) — In Canada, the structure in which the used oil burning appliance is housed shall be no less than 4.6m (15ft) high at the point where the appliance is situated and have a minimum length and width of 6m (20ft) and a minimum floor area of 37m2 (400ft2). In addition, the installation including flue stack height requirements and distance from property line shall be in accordance with the authorities having jurisdiction concerning environmental quality as well as fuel, fire, and electrical safety and Table 7 in CSA B140.0-03 (clause 22.3.2). Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 9 6 energy/ogle- 3. Assembly and Installation — Cabinet, Tank, Pump and Suction Fuel Line. This section instructs installing the cabinet and the fuel metering pump. 3.1 Unpacking and Inspection After unpacking your new furnace, make sure you have received the proper parts and quantities shown in the checklist on the following page. For missing parts, contact EnergyLogic. If any parts were damaged during shipment, please contact your shipping carrier. 3.2 Warranty Registration IMPORTANT: You must register your furnace with EnergyLogic for the warranty to become active and to receive technical service. Please take a few minutes to fill out the Warranty Registration Card. Note: Your Warranty Registration Card may be found in the accessory box where you located this manual. You may fax the completed card to (615) 251-0682, or mail it. You may also register online at www.energylogic.com Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 10 enerr,�► logic_ -A Included with EnergyLogic Furnace Tank and Tank Options Checklist CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 11 6 energylogic_ No. Item Qtv, Furnace Complete (minus flue kit) Furnace Assembly 1 Furnace Cabinet Assembly 1 2 Blower with Guard &Screws 1 3 PreheaterAssembly 1 4 Burner Assembly 1 5 Air Compressor Filter 1 6 Burner Gasket 1 7 Alligator Clips 2 8 Filter Head and Fuel Filter 1 9 Fuel Pump Assembly & bolts 1 10 Vacuum Gauge 1 11 Pressure Gauge 1 12 Barometric Damper and Tee Assembly 1 13 Draft Gauge (provided with bundles only) (1) 14 Draft Gauge Probe (provided with bundles only) (1) 15 Wall Thermostat (White - Standard, Black - Smart Stat) 1 16 Wall Thermostat Harness (Two Cables for Smart Stat) 1 17 Thread Sealant Tube 1 Tank Assy 18 EnergyLogic Workbench Tank 1 19 Drain Valve Assembly 1 20 Swing -Arm Fuel Gauge 1 Tank Mount Kit 21 3/8" Copper Discharge Line with Flare Nuts 1 22 L -Shaped Tank Stands 2 23 Tank Stand Plastic Caps 2 24 Support Braces plus hardware (EL -350 only) 2 25 Cable Ties 2 26 Bolts 3/8" x 4" (to mount stands) 4 27 3/8" Flat Washers 8 28 3/8" Lock Washers 4 29 3/8" Nuts 4 Side Suction Kit 30 Low Fuel Cut Off Switch Assembly 1 31 FireStop Valve Assembly 1 32 3/8" Copper Suction Line with Flare Nuts 1 -A Included with EnergyLogic Furnace Tank and Tank Options Checklist CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 11 6 energylogic_ 3.3 Furnace Cabinet Installation — On an EL Tank Follow the directions in this section if you intend to mount the furnace to stands directly above the fuel tank. If you are mounting the furnace to a structural ceiling or wall proceed to Section 3.4. CAUTION Do not mount an EL -350H furnace to any EnergyLogic Tank smaller than 250 gallons. 3.3.1 Locate the EnergyLogic Used Oil Storage Tank EnergyLogic supplied workbench tanks are U.L. listed and pressure tested at the factory. However, new tanks must be leak tested by qualified installers prior to installation and use (refer to local codes and regulations). The tank must be located inside. If you are mounting the furnace to the tank, make sure that the tank is located beneath the desired location of the furnace. The tank must be on level flooring that will adequately support the full weight when loaded. Use a pallet jack or fork lift (on the bottom side of tank) to move the empty tank. Do not push or drag the tank. Maintain clearance from the tank to any source of heat (refer to local codes and regulations). The furnace cabinet is heavy and will need to be lifted to a height of 8 feet above the floor. Use appropriate lifting and safety equipment. 3.3.2 Tank Stands and Cabinet Installation (250 gallon tank shown) 1. Locate the two large "L-shaped" Support Stands, and slide the long end of each into the square tubes on the rear of the tank. Slide the stands all the way to the bottom and do not install any bolts at this time. Slide the L-shaped stands into the square tubes. Installation of support stands. 2. Inspect the furnace cabinet to make sure that the louvers for the heat output, the burner end, and the flue end are oriented as desired. If not, switch the louver panel on the front of the furnace with'the blank panel that is on the rear of the furnace prior to installing the cabinet. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 12 6 emergp'gic. 3. HEAVY! Using a forklift or other lifting device, lift the cabinet onto the stands. Position the lift forks close to the lower mounting bolts on the bottom panel, but leave enough room for tank stands. Continue to support the cabinet with the lifting device until all cabinet and support stand hardware have been properly secured. 4. Remove the four (4) 3/8 inch x 3 inch bolts and washers from the bottom of the cabinet. 5. Align the holes in the stands with the holes in the cabinet and secure the Endcaos 3" long 3/8" Bolts w/ washers Secure Cabinet to Stand Brackets cabinet to the stands using the same four (4) 3/8 inch x 3 inch bolts and flat washers. 6. Install the (2) plastic stand end caps by pressing them into the open tube ends. 7. HEAVY! Using the forklift or other lifting device, raise the cabinet and stands until the bolt holes are visible in the square tubing on the rear of the tank.(EL-140H r., and EL -200H only) Insert (4) 3/8 inch x 4 inch --; bolts with flat washers through the box tubing ! # and stands (2 sets per side). Install flat washers, lock -washers, and then nuts onto the --- - bolts and tighten (refer to figure). inch bolts with flat washers through the lower holes only on the box tubing and stands (1 set per side). Install flat washers, lock -washers, and then nuts onto the bolts and tighten. 9. (EL -350H only) The 350 furnaces require two additional angle braces for support. These are shown in figure. Secure the braces using the remaining (4) 3/8" X 4" bolts, washers and nuts. 10. You have completed the Tank Bracket and Cabinet Assembly for a Tank Mount System. Proceed to Section 4 to install the furnace CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support Secure Bolts on Tank Stand Brackets Install and secure braces (EL -340H and EL -350H only) 13 energy/ogic. 3.4 Furnace Cabinet Installation — Not Mounted on a Tank 3.4.1 Ceiling Mount with Threaded Rod �■ HEAVY! Use proper lift equipment. �■ not be near the furnace. See required clearances in Section 1.6. Bridge /secure structural steel across structural ceiling joists or beams. Make sure that the resulting structure will support the loads. Combustible materials must i CD Cil (2) Nuts. Flat Washer. Structural steel member (uni-strut, etc.). 7F----—= 3/8-16 all thread. Flat Washer. Lock washer. Nut. The furnace is hung i 1 from the structurel/ � using 3/8 inch ! threaded rods, fastened to the top of the cabinet. Ceiling Mount (Actual installations vary) Ceiling Mount Steps (Refer to figure): 1. Determine the desired location of furnace. Determine the length of the 3/8" threaded rod (3/8 — 16) that will be used to hang the furnace. Measure the hole pattern on the top of the furnace (where existing 3/8" bolts are). This is your reference for rod spacing. 2. Hang 3/8" threaded rod (4 pieces) from a secure structure such as unistrut. Use flat washers, lock washers and nuts to secure the rods to the structural member. Leave the connection just hand -tight until the rod has been threaded into the furnace on the other end. Next, you will work on the other end of the rods (furnace end). 3. Turn nuts onto the this end of each threaded rod, keep turning until the nuts are several inches up the rod. 4. Using proper lift equipment, carefully lift the furnace cabinet to the desired location. Remove the existing 3/8" bolts from the top of the cabinet. Place a lock washer and flat washer on each rod, while you screw the threaded rod 1" (2.54 cm) into the threaded holes in the top of the cabinet. After threading the rods 1" into the top of the cabinet, tighten the nuts. Measure and note the level in both directions, and continue to the next step. CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 14 6 energy/ogle. 5. After all (4) rods have been secured into the top of the cabinet, return to the top of the rods at the ceiling support structure. Noting your level readings, adjust the furnace level using the top nuts to raise or lower each rod. Re -confirm that the furnace is level. Then, tighten the nuts to the structural steel members. Use jam nuts on top. 6. Check all fastened joints to assure that the structure and the hardware are secure. 7. An alternate method: Instead of hanging the furnace from the top fasteners, a supporting structure may be built beneath the furnace using structural steel (unistrut, angle iron). This structure may be hung from structural ceiling supports. 3.4.2 Wall Mount with Optional Brackets HEAVY! Use proper lift equipment. not be near the furnace. Wall Mount Option (actual installations vary). Combustible materials must Steps to Wall Mount. Wall Mount Steps (Refer to figures): 1. Determine the desired location and height of furnace. From this, plan the installation. Make a list of materials required. Pre -manufactured Wall Mount: Brackets with the correct pitch for fastener holes and wall spacing are available from EnergyLogic. Call to order your parts. 2. Hang the EnergyLogic Wall Mount Brackets such that they are spaced 40 inches (101.6 cm) apart to match the hole pattern on the bottom or top of the cabinet. Hang the EnergyLogic Wall Mount Brackets directly to structural wall support only. If the wall does not have structural support in the location of the brackets, you may bridge across structural wall members using structural steel such as uni-strut and hang the brackets from the structural steel. The support structure must be strong enough to support the combined loads of furnace assembly and the flue structure. Check and level the brackets as necessary. 3. Using proper lift equipment, carefully lift the furnace cabinet (cabinet only — not including the burner or blower) onto the EnergyLogic Wall Mount Brackets. Remove the existing 3/8" bolts and washers from the bottom of the cabinet. Adjust the location of the cabinet such that the holes on the bottom of the cabinet align with the holes on the Mount Brackets. Using the 3/8" bolts and washers that were removed, mount the cabinet to the Mount Brackets. 4. Check all fastened joints to assure that the structure and the hardware are secure. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 15 ever Wogic 3.5 Preparing the EnergyLogic Used -Oil Tank If you are not installing an EnergyLogic Tank, first verify that your used oil storage system meets all applicable codes and requirements, then proceed to the instructions for installing the metering pump. 3.5.1 Tank Vent Installation — EnergyLogic Tanks Once the tank is in place, install a tank vent (not included). This requires a minimum 1.25 inch NPT steel pipe routed through an exterior wall, terminated with a 90° elbow turned down (figure). A mushroom -style cap may be used to terminate the vent as an alternative to the down -turned elbow. Install appropriate Emergency Venting. EnergyLogic offers an emergency vent cap with capacity of 53,000 cu. ft./hr./1501 cu. m/hr. This optional accessory can be installed into a 4 inch NPT port (figure). Emergency Vent Cap (sold separately). Min. 1.25" NPT Steel Pipe 3.5.2 Drain Valve Installation — EnergyLogic Tanks Install the tank drain valve in a port along the bottom of the tank provided thread sealer on the threads during installation. Note: Some tanks come with the drain valve already installed. CAUTION The drain valve is necessary for draining water from the bottom of the tank. The drain valve is shown in closed position in figure. A plug should be installed in the drain valve to prevent accidental spills. CAUTION After all components have been installed on the tank, make sure that all unused tank openings are properly plugged. Exterior Wall as shown in figure. Use the Apply Thread Sealer 2" NPT Port in Tank Side Drain Valve Drain valve installation. 3.5.3 Low Fuel Cutoff Switch — EnergyLogic Tanks The low fuel cutoff switch is an optional accessory that will automatically shut off the furnace if the tank is nearly out of fuel. This prevents the pump from losing prime. For the standard thermostat (white), the float switch operates by interrupting the thermostat circuit when the fuel level is too low. Install the accessory according to the packaged instructions. If your unit has the "Smart Stat" (black thermostat) the float switch is wired directly to the "Smart Stat". Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 16 6 energjlo* 3.6 Fuel Metering Pump and Filter Installation — EnergyLogic Tank (continue to section 3.7 if you don't have EL tank). On EnergyLogic Tanks, the fuel pump components are mounted on the side as shown. Follow the steps below to first install the firestop valve and filter head, and then install the pump. Fire -Stop Valve Metering Pump Assembly Filter Head Assembly Spin On Fuel Filter Fuel system - EL Tank 3.6.1 Fire Stop Valve and Filter Head Installation — EL Tank. Decide which end of the tank is the best location for your pump. On EL 250 gallon and 500 gallon tanks, the pump may be mounted to either end. To install the firestop valve, first apply gasket sealer to the 1/4" NPT fitting and screw the fire stop valve to the fuel filter head, fully tighten the NPT threads using a back up wrench. Then, apply sealer to the IA" NPT fitting and screw the entire filter head assembly with firestop valve into the '/2" NPT port in the side of the tank (located about 10" up from the floor). 3.6.2 Metering Pump Installation — EL Tank Mount the pump to the integrated bracket on Fuel Pump Assembly the EnergyLogic tank using (4) 1/4-20 bolts. Remove cover to install bolts. Replace cover after pump has been wired. CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support FireStop Valve 41 To Tank Filter Head Assy. 41 it Gasket sealer here, then tighten. (4) 1/4 - 20 Bolts Mount Pump to Tank 6 enewogic.. 17 3.6.3 Gauge and Pump Tubing Installation — EL Tank Install the gauges and tubing as follows: CAUTION The pump fittings Pressure are sealed and leak tested at Gauge the factory. Use a backup Vacuum wrench when installing the Gauge .... ,_ gauges and flare fittings to ft* ensure that you do not turn the Inlet Tee pump fittings and create a leak. Upper Flare �• 1. Remove the plugs on Fitting Fuel Pump Assembly the inlet and outlet tees •`- (refer to figure). Note: *i .. J ~ 3/8" Copper Tube The pumps are tested at the factory, so a Lower Flare Filter Head Assembly small amount of oil may Fitting be present. 2. Using the gasket sealer provided, install the pressure gauge on the outlet tee, and the combination vacuum/pressure gauge on the inlet tee. 3. Locate the short copper tube assembly. Carefully bend the tube without kinking into position as shown. 4. Thread (do not tighten) upper 3/8 inch flare nut onto the flare fitting on the fuel pump inlet. Do not apply gasket sealer to the flare fittings. 5. Thread lower fitting onto the filter head fitting. 6. Tighten both flare nuts. Use a backup wrench - do not over -tighten. NOTE: If your unit is equipped with a "Smart Stat" (black thermostat), there is an additional tee and vacuum switch on the inlet side of the pump. The wires for the vacuum switch are run directly to the Smart Stat. The purpose of the vacuum switch is to indicate when the filter is clogged and needs to be changed. Outlet Tee Gauge and Suction Tubing Installation. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 6 energy/ogle. 18 3.7 Metering Pump Installation — Non -EL Tank (skip if you have EL tank) If you are metering fuel directly from a tank not supplied by EnergyLogic, the top suction method may be used. Verify regulations prior to installation. Contact your authorized EnergyLogic dealer to purchase an EnergyLogic Top Suction Kit (if one was not included in your original purchase), which will help to avoid common fuel delivery issues. The optional AirScape may be used along with the Top Suction Kit to help remove air bubbles from the oil stream caused during tank filling and if there is high vacuum at the pump. Installation of the Top Suction System: 1. Install the vacuum and pressure gauges. Follow steps 1 & 2 in previous section. 2. If you purchased an EnergyLogic Top Suction Kit, follow the instructions included in the packaging. Refer to the following for general guidelines. AirScape Accessory (Optional) EL Top Suction Kit Installed Guidelines for Top Suction Method: MEW • Purchase an EL Top Suction Kit (if your package did not include one). • Keep in mind that the main storage tank will need to have enough capacity to allow for separation of water from the used oil. Never meter oil directly from oil drums or totes. • EnergyLogic's fuel pump is designed for interior use only (must be mounted inside a protective structure). The minimum recommended fuel temperature is 50°F. • The pump may be mounted to a nearby wall, within a few feet (less than 6') of the tank. The ideal placement of pump is with the inlet above the filter head assembly, which should be mounted above the tank fitting. Maximum vertical lift for the suction line should not exceed 6 feet (2m). This includes the portion of line inside of the tank. • The EL Filter Head Assembly is to be placed such that it filters the oil prior to pump. A shut off valve should be placed prior to the filter head in order to do a vacuum check. • The pump assembly and wiring connections must be at least 18 inches (46 cm) above the floor to meet National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) codes for repair garages. • The inlet to the suction line should be at least 8 inches (20 cm) off the bottom of the tank, to prevent water and sludge from entering the system. • Use minimum 3/8" OD x 1/32" wall thickness copper tubing. Never create loops. • Loose fittings / leaks on the suction side create problems. Suction leaks cause air to get sucked into the fuel system. All suction leaks must be eliminated. • Used -oil contains water. A drain valve on the bottom of the tank is used to remove water and sludge that separates out of the oil and settles to the bottom of the tank. If your tank does not have a drain valve, you must pump out the bottom of the tank periodically. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 6 energy/ogle. 19 4. Installation of Furnace Components With the cabinet in place, you are ready to attach the blower assembly, the burner assembly, and the preheater. Then, you will install the fuel tubing from the pump to the preheater. 4.1 Blower Assembly Installation The blower assembly provides warm air from the heat exchanger to the room. The blower is installed on the end of the furnace cabinet. The procedure for installing the blower is as follows: Remove Shipping Strap or Cardboard Support Spin Wheel Freely Remove shipping strap or cardboard support and check wheel. 1. Locate the side of the blower with the shipping strap or cardboard support, and remove the wire guard (if installed) on that side. 2. Remove the shipping strap or cardboard support. 3. CAUTION Spin the blower wheel by hand to ensure that it spins freely. 4. Align the three loops in the wire guard over the holes in the blower side panel. For 140 and 200 model blowers, insert a rubber washer under each loop. Attached the wire guard securely using three (3) sheet metal screws. Screws Screw Wire guard installation. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 20 energy logic_ 5. HEAVY — GET HELP TO LIFT! To mount the blower to the cabinet, slide the blower panel over the open end of the cabinet. Align the holes and attach with the sheet metal screws provided. Refer to the figure below for this step. 4 Screws for 140 and 200 (2 on each side) 10 Screws for 350 (3 on each side and 4 on the end) Blower junction box Installation of Blower to Cabinet 6. IF POWER HAS BEEN RUN TO THE CABINET ALREADY, MAKE SURE THAT IT IS SHUT OFF AND LOCKED OUT! Find the blower power conduit coming from the cabinet wiring box and running along the top of the cabinet (blue and white wires). 7. Remove the blower wiring junction box cover and install the conduit using one of the knock out holes in the junction box. 8. Connect the blue and white wires from the conduit to the two blower motor wires in the junction box — using wire nuts. Either color cabinet lead can go to either motor lead (blower motor will run correctly either way). 9. Reinstall the junction box cover. 10. CAUTION Make sure that the blower harness conduit (located on the top of the cabinet) is at least 2 inches away from the exhaust pipe or damper tee, as the heat from these could damage the wiring. 11. Once power to the cabinet wiring box is established, the blower can be tested by pushing in the white button on the Fan & Limit Controller on the burner end of the cabinet. CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 21 energy/ogic 4.2 Burner/Preheater Assembly Before installing the burner to the cabinet, assemble the preheater to it, as follows: 1. Remove the long bolt from the right side of the burner air compressor shown in figure. 2. Align the preheater bracket with the air compressor hole and reinsert (do not tighten) the long bolt into the air compressor (refer to figure). 3. Remove the shipping caps on the preheater and burner. Note: The preheater and burner are tested during manufacturing, so a small amount of oil may be present when the caps are removed. 4. Cut the tie strap holding the curled tubing, and thread (do not tighten) the fittings onto the burner solenoid valve and preheater, as shown in figure. 5. Tighten the fuel tubing fittings and the long preheater bolt. 6. Screw the plug end of the conduit into the receptacle on the burner wire box. 7. Install the air filter by pressing it onto the compressor inlet. Remove Long Bolt Install Air Filter Re -install Long Bolt Burner Assembly - Long Bolt a 3 Install Preheater Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support Plug in pre - heater. Install Fuel Tubing from preheater to solenoid valve Installation of preheater to burner. • 22 4.3 Burner/Cabinet Assembly Once the burner and preheater are assembled, they can be installed on the furnace cabinet. This is done as follows: The burner assembly is heavy and must be installed into the cabinet at heights. Use proper lifting and safety equipment when performing the installation. 1. Remove the four (4) nuts from the studs Plug in burner on the burner end of ..--�— ' plug. the cabinet (refer to figure.) 2. Install the burner -�- gasket onto the studs. NOTE: Gasket sealer should not be .... used on this gasket. Install Burner Gasket Hinge Apply a thin film of anti -seize compound to the cabinet side of the burner gasket to help reduce gasket sticking when swinging burner open for service. 3. Inspect the retention head and electrodes for proper settings (refer to Section 8.5.6). 4. Mount the burner assembly onto the cabinet by inserting the burner hinge pins into the cabinet hinge bracket (bottom pin first). 5. Swing the burner over the studs and reinstall and tighten the four (4) nuts. Note: If the burner is not centered over the studs, loosen the hinge bracket to adjust. 6. Align the pins with the receptacle and plug the burner harness into the cabinet wiring box. The plug fits only one way. Installation of Burner to Cabinet Burner and Preheater Installed on Cabinet Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 23 energnglc. 4.4 Pump Outlet Tubing Installation Now that you have installed the burner, you will install the fuel tubing between the pump and the preheater. 4.4.1 Pump Outlet Tubing Installation If you purchased a complete system (tank mount), the required fuel tubing is included. The tubing is installed as follows (refer to figure). Note: If your furnace is not mounted on the tank, refer to the next section for further guidelines. Preheater inlet Connection Long copper tubing routed next to and strapped to support stand (for tank mounted furnace). Fuel Metering Pump Connection Routing of Discharge Fuel Tubing - EL Tank Mount (250Gallon shown) 1. Remove the cap on the fuel pump discharge (outlet) port. 2. Locate the 3/8 inch diameter x 8.5 feet long copper tubing. CAUTION Be careful not to kink or place sharp bends in the fuel tubing. Do not form any loops in the tubing, trapped air will cause issues with burner performance. 3. Thread (do not tighten) the flare fitting on one end of the tubing to the fuel pump outlet. 4. Route the fuel tubing along the back side of the tank, vertically along the cabinet stand and over to the preheater inlet. Note: If not tank mounted, refer to next section for routing guidelines. 5. Remove the preheater inlet cap. Note: The preheater was tested during manufacturing, so a small amount of oil may be present when the cap is removed. Thread (do not tighten) the fuel tubing fitting to the preheater inlet. 6. Use plastic tie straps to secure the tubing to the stand. 7. Tighten the fuel line flare fittings. Make sure to use a backup wrench. Do not use gasket sealer on flare fittings. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 24 energy/ogic. 4.4.2 Pump Outlet Tubing Installation - Ceiling or Wall Mounted Furnace (skip if you have a tank mounted furnace) If installing the furnace with a remote tank, the required fuel discharge tubing is not included. The tubing is installed with the same procedure as in Section 4.4.1, except for tube routing. The following guidelines are provided: Pump Discharge Tubing Considerations: • Use 3/8" O.D. copper tubing, with 1/32" wall thickness. • The discharge line must have an upward slope towards the preheater, with no loops or high points to trap air. Run it as straight as possible. • If high points are unavoidable, install high -point -bleed kits (available accessory) wherever the discharge line routing steps down to provide a means to bleed trapped air in the line during priming. • Use 45° flare connections for copper tube. Never use compression fittings. • Maximum vertical run of discharge tubing is 30 feet. • Maximum total run of discharge tubing is 150 feet. • Discharge line from the metering pump must be run indoors, with a minimum ambient temperature of 50°F (10°C). • Installation of a shut-off valve after the fuel pump will make routine maintenance easier. It will prevent loss of oil in the discharge line if the pump discharge connection is to be loosened for priming or other maintenance. • The use of a remote system gauge kit (available accessory) is recommended in order to have convenient pressure readings available at the burner. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support energyogic_ 25 5. Exhaust Flue System Installation The exhaust system is critical for the safe operation of the furnace, as it exhausts the products of combustion out of the building to the ambient environment. 5.1 Barometric Damper Tee Installation The barometric damper tee helps to regulate draft pressure through varying ambient conditions. Install the tee with the tapered end pointing downward by sliding it into the heat exchanger outlet until snug (refer to figure). Secure using 3 sheet metal screws. 5.2 Flue Piping Installation The flue piping exhausts products of combustion out of the building into the ambient environment. Insert Tee with taper end down. (E, aa•:1r: • ....(,IMM N. Damper Tee Installation You may have a basic knowledge of carpentry and the use of hand tools. However, it is important that you review all safety rules in this section, and all safety rules in the manuals provided with your manufactured flue kit. If you have any doubt about your ability to complete the installation in a safe and workmanlike manner, you should arrange for a professional installation. For more regulatory information regarding flue pipe installation, consult NFPA 31 and your local fire protection and building codes. Flue System Installation Steps and Considerations: • Review this section completely. Choose and purchase a factory -built flue kit that complies with U.L. standard 103 Type HT, or Equivalent. • The EL -350H requires an 8 inch diameter flue and may not be reduced. • The flue connector for EL -140H and EL -200H may only be reduced down to 6 inch diameter flue provided that the following conditions are met without fan assist, otherwise use an 8 inch flue system: o Adequate Draft, with additional margin for adjustment of the damper door. o Minimum Stack Height requirements are met. o All other requirements in this document, as well as all regulations are met. • For your convenience, EnergyLogic offers flue kits for EnergyLogic furnaces. Contact your EnergyLogic dealer to purchase. • Read and follow the product and safety instructions included with your selected flue kit. If product instructions were not included, contact the manufacturer of your kit to obtain the instructions. If unsure of your ability to properly install the flue system, hire a professional installer or contact EnergyLogic for assistance. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 6 energyogia 26 • Contact your local building or fire officials about restrictions and an installation inspection. • Run the flue vertical from the damper tee out through the roof. If this is not possible, two offsets (30° maximum) are allowable for U.L. 103 Listed Flue Kits (refer to figure). • Single wall flue (minimum wall thickness of 24 Gauge steel) may be used in heated space, but must be kept a minimum distance (air space only) of 18 inches (46 cm) from combustible surfaces (check building and fire codes for precedence). THE PORTION OF THE FLUE SYSTEM THAT PASS THROUGH UNHEATED SPACE / CONCEALED AREAS AND THE PORTION OUTSIDE THE BUILDING IS TO BE A CLASS -A DOUBLE WALL FACTORY -BUILT FLUE KIT THAT IS APPROVED TO STANDARD U.L. 103, OR EQUIVALENT. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions on the minimum clearance required for the double-wall product used. Install flue system per the flue manufacturer's instructions, making sure that adherence to the instructions will fully comply with national safety standards such as NFPA 31, 54, and 211. Refer to fire and building codes for further requirements. Improper installation of the flue system could result in property damage, serious injury or death. • Avoid 90 degree elbows and horizontal runs. • Properly support the flue stack. Do not rely on the furnace to support the total load of the flue system. Follow the flue manufacturer's instructions for support kits. • Use a dedicated flue system for each EL appliance. Do not share a flue system with another appliance or fireplace. • The flue is required to extend at least 3 feet above the highest point where it passes through the roof of a building, and at least 2 feet higher than any portion of a building within 10 feet (NFPA 31, 54 and 211 — see figure). For increased margin, EnergyLogic recommends extending the flue further than the minimum guidelines. • Minimum stack height: 10 feet, plus 1 foot for each NFPA rules for flue height above roof additional tee or elbow. Refer to local codes, which Maximum of two offsets (30° maximum) are allowed for UL 103 Listed flue. 2 offsets = 4 elbows. Offset in flue stack Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 27 6 emery/og►ic may require additional stack height based on BTU input. • In Canada, installation including stack height requirements and distance from property line shall be in accordance with the authorities having jurisdiction concerning environmental quality as well as fuel, fire, and electrical safety and Table 7 in CSA B140.0-03 (clause 22.3.2). • Terminate the flue pipe with an all-weather wind cap. • During start up (section 7), you will verify that the flue system (along with conditions inside the room or building) provide for adequate draft. Do not operate your furnace if you cannot achieve proper draft. Contact EnergyLogic Technical Service for assistance. 24Gauge minimum Steel single wall flue with at least 18" of clearance to combustible surfaces - non -enclosed, heated space areas only (check local codes). Secure each joint with 3 screws or rivets. Each EL appliance must have its own flue. Do not share flue systems. Only "Class A" — Double Wall, Insulated Flue Stack / Kit using flue manufacturer instructions for clearances through ceiling, roof, and any enclosed space (check local codes). Minimum stack height: 10 feet, plus 1 foot for each additional tee / elbow (check local codes). Installation of vertical stack MOIMMMA negative pressure inside the building may impede intake of combustion air to the burner, which may result in a hazard from smoke inhalation and/or fire. Use of exhaust fans in your shop without adequate make-up air may create a negative pressure. There are other possible causes as well. Corrective measures must be taken before operating the appliance if the correct draft setting cannot be achieved. Contact EnergyLogic or consult a local professional for assistance. CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 28 5.3 Draft Gauge Installation (included with some packages) The draft gauge is a precision inclined -vertical manometer. Permanently installing the EnergyLogic draft gauge allows you to monitor the draft during operation. Installation (refer to figures) 1. Mount and level the draft gauge to the furnace cabinet using the screws provided with the gauge (refer to figure). Note: There is a level built into the gauge. 2. Turn Zero Adjustment Knob clockwise until it stops, then turn counterclockwise (3) full turns to allow for future adjustment. 3. Remove gauge Fill Plug and open red fluid bottle provided with gauge. 4. Pour small amounts of fluid (typically 1/4 of the bottle is used) into "fill" opening until it reaches zero on the scale. Replace the fill plug. Minor adjustments can be made by adjusting the knob to zero the gauge. 5. If a double flexible tube was included with the gauge, separate the tubes, as only one is needed. Attach the one end of a tube to the draft gauge port labeled "Low" at top of the gauge. Note: By doing this, the negative readings will now read positive on the gauge scale. This is to take advantage of the larger scale on the positive side. 6. Locate the draft gauge probe, which is a piece of stainless steel tubing with a "U" bend in it. Thread a 1/4 inch barbed fitting (included in the gauge packaging) to the draft gauge probe. Note: There is extra hardware in the gauge packaging that is not used. 7. Attach the free end of the tube to the 1/4 in. barbed fitting. 8. Confirm that the gauge is reading "zero" with the probe in your hand, in still air. If not, adjust the gauge to read zero using the zero adjust knob. 9. Insert the open end of probe into barometric damper tee draft gauge probe hole as shown in figure. Fill Plug Draft Gauge Zero Adjust Knob "Low" port Probe Hole Screws Draft Gauge Installation (0 Insert Probe f---______ Final Position Draft Gauge Probe Installation Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 29 enerjrlogic_ 6. Electrical System Installation Power requirements: a dedicated, hard -wired 115VAC/60Hz circuit with a 25 Amp maximum circuit breaker. Use copper conductors only. A wiring diagram is provided in the Appendix. Ai DANGER Electricity is very dangerous. Wiring should be completed by a qualified electrician. Consult the National Electric Code (NEC) and local codes for additional requirements. In Canada, consult the Canadian Electrical Code, Part I. 6.1 Wall Thermostat (Standard) NOTE: For "Smart Stat" (Black) see instructions in "Smart Stat" package. The standard thermostat is installed as follows: 1. Press down on top of battery holder and slide outward (refer to figure). 2. Separate the thermostat from the wall Hole -i plate base. 3. Locate the thermostat five feet (1.5 m) above the floor on an interior wall, not in the path of warm or cold air. Do not mount the thermostat on a cold exterior wall. Do not install the thermostat on the furnace. 4. Mark the wall plate screw -hole locations where the thermostat will be mounted. 5. Drill holes and install wall anchors (provided). 6. Pass the wire harness through the large opening found at center of the wall plate. 7. Mount the wall plate to the wall by threading the provided screws into the wall anchors. 8. Connect the black thermostat wire to the (R) Terminal (24V AC power) by loosening screw in (R) Terminal, inserting wire and tightening screw. AAA Batteries Hole 114_ Installing the Digital Thermostat (actual model may vary) NOTE: If installing an EnergyLogic low fuel cut off switch, or an EnergyLogic Top Suction Kit with an integrated low fuel cut off switch, the thermostat circuit passes through the switch. Refer to the wiring diagram on the following page or the package installation instructions provided with the accessories. Thermostat Cable Connector on Burner Connect the thermostat wire to the connector on the burner 9. Connect the red thermostat wire to the (W) Terminal (Heat relay) by loosening screw in (W) Terminal, inserting wire and tightening screw. 10. Hook the top of the thermostat into the top of the wall plate. 11. Align the thermostat over the wall plate. 12. Press the thermostat onto the wall plate. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 30 eflerylogic 13. Install (2) AAA alkaline batteries into the battery holder and place into thermostat. 14. Route the thermostat wire to the burner and connect the plug on the burner end of the cable to the receptacle at burner wiring box (refer to figure). White Thermostat Plug on Side of Burner Wall Thermostat Back Plate 0 R O O W G 24 VAC 24 VAC Thermostat Wiring with Low Fuel Cutoff Switch Wall Thermostat Back Plate Low Fuel Float Switch (Closed when Float is Up) White Thermostat Plug on Side of Burner 24 VAC Thermostat Wiring without Low Fuel Cutoff Switch CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 31 6 enerr,�►ylogc_ 6.2 Fuel Pump Power Connection A DANGER connections. Make sure that power is shut off and locked out prior to making electrical 1. Remove the fuel pump housing cover. 2. Use flexible metal conduit with white, orange and green wires, NEC size 14 AWG. Route the conduit from the cabinet wire box to the fuel pump housing. Connect one end of the conduit to the pump housing (hole provided on right side of housing). 3. Using the female crimp on terminals provided, connect the orange wire to one pump motor male terminal (it does not matter which one) and the white wire to the remaining terminal. Connect the green (ground) wire to the ground screw on the middle housing bracket. 4. Reinstall fuel pump housing cover. 5. NOTE: If making your own harness: Remove cabinet wire box cover. On the cabinet wire box terminal block, connect the orange wire to the terminal marked ORG, the white wire to the terminal marked WHT and the green ground wire to the terminal marked GND. Insert stripped ends of wires into the terminal holes. Gently tug on wires to make sure that the connections are secure. Ground Screw — Connect green (ground wire). Using crimp on, insulated terminals, connect leads on Pump Motor to Pump Harness (Orange and White) Cabinet Wire Box Cover CABINET WIRING BOX it ' rn m REO BLU ORG m m m C:= Connect conduit connector. m WHT WHT BU( GN GRN 16 RED 0/ ORG 09 WMT 12 WHT 16 ORG 11 Wire Connections to the Metering Pump. CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support METERING PUMP GRN 03 - WHT02 BLK 01 115 V, GO HZ POWER 12 AWG MIN Connect Pump using 14AWG Wire in Conduit (Orange, White, Ground) 32 6 energy/oak. 6.3 Main Electrical Connection Personally verify that the main circuit is OFF and Locked -Out before making any wiring connections. Use only copper conductors. All wiring installations should meet National Electric Code (NEC) and local guidelines. Canadian wiring installations are to be done in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1. /1 DANGER 1. Have a certified electrician install a wall mounted or ceiling mounted junction box near the furnace cabinet. It is recommended that the box be switchable with a Tock -out feature. Provide wiring to the junction box from the building service panel (with main power off). Verify the use of a dedicated circuit (115VAC/single phase circuit breaker — 25 Amp maximum per UL) - wired to code for the size and type of service used. 2. Use flexible metal conduit with white, black and green wires, NEC size 12 AWG. Route the conduit from the cabinet wire box to the installed junction box. Connect the conduit to wire box (knock -outs on box). 3. Using wire nuts connect the black wire (Load) from the conduit to the black wire of the junction box, the white wire (Neutral) to the white wire, and the green wire (Ground) to the bare copper wire inside the junction box. Install the junction box cover. 4. Note: If making your own harness: Remove cabinet wire box cover. On the cabinet wire box terminal block, connect the black wire to the terminal marked BLK, the white wire to the terminal marked WHT and the green ground wire to the terminal marked GND. Insert stripped ends of wires into the terminal holes. Gently tug on wires to make sure that the connections are secure. Reinstall cabinet wire box cover. Install switchable junction box for main wire harness power Cabinet Wire Box Connect Main Power in cabinet wire box. 12 AWG Wire in Conduit (Black, White, Ground) W1471 WHT BLK GND Main power connection (EL -200H shown) Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support METERING PUMP GRN 03 WHT 02 BLK 01 115 V, 60 HZ POWER 12 AWG MIN 33 energy/ogic_ 7. Startup and Operation Once setup properly, EnergyLogic furnaces are designed to operate reliably over a wide range of conditions with minimal adjustment. This section is provided to make sure that the furnace is set up properly, and to provide instructions on the initial start up. 7.1 Do's and Don'ts/Tech Tips 1. Read each procedure completely before performing the steps. 2. Do not burn gasoline or kerosene in your furnace. 3. Do not place chlorinated solvents into the tank. 4. Do not burn antifreeze coolant (ethylene glycol) in your furnace. 5. Regularly check for water and/or coolant in the tank at the tank drain. 6. Do not allow your fuel tank to run out of fuel (avoid the hassles of small particle contamination and re -priming of the fuel system). 7. Document the pressure and vacuum readings of the furnace after it has been operated several hours. This will assist with future diagnostics, if necessary. 8. Do not place fuel suspected of having debris, such as an oil dry product, into the tank. 9. Store this manual in an accessible location. 10. Only use EnergyLogic fuel filters. Do not use paper element filters. 11. PERFORM THE RECOMMENDED PERIODIC MAINTENANCE. 12. Unplug the burner during the off season (summer) to prevent coking of the preheater and nozzle. 7.2 Burner Primary Control Operation The burner operation is governed by the Primary Control (shown in figure on next page). This device is pre-programmed and is not adjustable. The important interface points are as follows: • The two T -Terminals are for the thermostat signal. To simulate a closed thermostat, you can jumper across the two T terminals with an alligator clip. • The two F -Terminals are for the cad cell signal. The cad cell is a Tight sensor inside the burner that senses the flame. To simulate a flame, you can jumper across the two F terminals with an alligator clip. Do not leave the T and F terminals jumped during normal furnace operation, as this bypasses several safety checks and may cause excessive oil to be deposited in the combustion chamber, creating a fire or explosion hazard. For the same reason, do not leave the T and F terminals jumped for more than 30 seconds if oil is being sprayed but not being burned. • The reset button is used to reset the controller, in case of multiple failed start attempts or flameouts. • The LED(s) (on some models) are used to indicate proper furnace operation or errors. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 6 energylogia 34 Burner Primary Control (models vary) During normal operation, the furnace operates as follows: Reset Button Primary Control 1. The wall thermostat closes. 2. If the preheater is hot enough to close the internal thermostat (120°F), then the controller is released to start the burner. 3. The burner motor comes on, which starts the combustion air blower and compressor. 4. The ignition transformer is powered to spark the igniter. 5. The fuel pump turns on to deliver fuel. 6. Within 30 seconds the flame lights, and is recognized by the cad cell. 7. The heat exchanger gets warm. 8. The Fan & Limit Control turns on the circulation blower to deliver warm air to the room. 9. The burner continues to operate until the room is warm and the thermostat opens. 7.3 Safety Systems and Warnings Several systems built into the burner controls ensure that the burner operates safely and will shutdown if something is wrong: Preheater Thermostat: This device prevents the primary control from attempting to start the burner with fuel that is too cold (below 120°F). In addition, if the oil temperature drops below the limit while the burner is firing, the burner will shut down. Cad Cell: The Cad Cell detects the Tight emitted by the flame to determine that the flame is on. If the burner does not light within 30 seconds, or if the flame goes out for any reason, the controller will shut down the burner. This prevents the accumulation of unburned fuel in the CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 35 6 energykg►ic_ combustion chamber, potentially generating smoke, rumbling and/or misfiring once the burner lights. Primary Control — Recycle Mode: If the burner loses flame for any reason, the Primary Control will enter Recycle Mode (Red LED flashes). After approximately 60 seconds, the Primary Control will attempt to restart the system. If no flame is seen by cad cell during the restart attempt, the Primary Control will lock out (Red LED light on). To reset, press/release the red reset button. If the cad cell sees a flame, the Primary Control will continue running the burner. Multiple resets may allow oil to accumulate in the heat exchanger, therefore do not reset more than one or two times. Call for service from an authorized professional if controller continues to trip. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO START THE BURNER WHEN EXCESS OIL HAS ACCUMULATED IN THE CHAMBER, WHEN THE FURNACE IS FULL OF VAPOR, OR WHEN THE COMBUSTION CHAMBER IS VERY HOT. Primary Control - Limited Reset/Lockout Mode: If several attempts to restart are not successful, the controller may go into lockout mode (*refer to controller instructions in Section 10.2 on page 84) with the red and amber LED lights on. If lockout mode occurs, do not continue to try to operate the burner until the problem has been resolved. Call for service. To reset the control from lockout, press and hold the reset button down for one minute. (*Note that controller models vary.) 7.4 Furnace Startup Prior to the initial startup of the furnace, it is important to make sure the fuel system is properly primed to remove air bubbles that will cause nuisance flameouts. Once the burner is operating, the system is checked and necessary adjustments are made. CAUTION Fuel vacuum side leaks that cause air to get into the fuel system are a major cause of nuisance burner shut -downs. It is critical to eliminate all vacuum side leaks from the fuel lines! DO NOT ATTEMPT TO START THE BURNER WHEN EXCESS OIL HAS ACCUMULATED IN THE CHAMBER, WHEN THE FURNACE IS FULL OF VAPOR, OR WHEN THE COMBUSTION CHAMBER IS VERY HOT. Refer to section 8.5.1 (heat exchanger cleaning) for instructions on removal of excess oil. DO NOT START THE BURNER UNLESS ALL CLEANOUT PANELS ARE SECURE IN PLACE. 7.4.1 Fuel System Priming This section explains how to prime the metering pump. CAUTION Use a backup wrench when removing or installing the flare fittings, plugs or caps to ensure that you do not loosen threaded fittings and create a leak. CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support efiergykak. 36 1. Make sure the used oil storage tank has adequate oil, with oil level above the low fuel cut off float switch (if installed). You may pre -fill the Fuel Filter with non -synthetic clean ATF to speed the priming process and to reduce amount of air in system. Do not pre -fill with new motor oil as new motor oil will not burn! Hand -tighten the filter (apply thin film of oil to gasket). Make sure all hand valves are open. 2. Unplug the thermostat cable connector at the burner. 3. Ensure the fire -stop valve and that ball valves are open. 4. Switch on the main power circuit to the furnace, and make sure that the burner and preheater are plugged in. 5. Have oil absorbing rags handy to catch oil. 6. Using two 7/16" wrenches, disconnect th valve (refer to figure). 7. Loosen the small tube fitting at the preheater outlet and pivot the fuel tubing so that it is pointed away from the burner. Then, re -tighten the fitting at the preheater outlet to seal during priming. 8. Place a container under the open end of the fuel tubing. 9. Jump one set of alligator clips across the T -T terminals (red wires) on the primary control to simulate the thermostat requesting heat. The primary control delays the start for 3 seconds. 10.Once the burner motor starts, immediately jumper wires) on the primary control with another alligator to simulate the cad cell seeing a flame. 11.1t will take some time (10 — 20 minutes, depending on the unit size and length of tubing between the pump and preheater) for the fuel to reach and fill the preheater. 12. Once fuel is flowing steadily from the tube at the top of the preheater into the container with no air bubbles visible, the system is primed. ACAUTION The preheater and fuel coming out of the preheater are hot. Ball valve open Fire stop valve open Fire stop valve closed e small fuel tubing from the inlet of the solenoid Solenoid valve. Disconnect fuel tubing from solenoid valve. across the F -F terminals (yellow clip Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support Jumping the T -T and F -F Terminals 37 enerrgy/ogic_ 13. Remove the alligator clips from the terminals. Do not leave the T -T and/or F -F terminals jumped during normal furnace operation, as this bypasses several safety checks. 14. Reconnect the fuel tubing to the solenoid valve and preheater outlet. ACAUTION The preheater and fuel coming out of the preheater are hot. 15. Plug the thermostat cable connector back into the burner. 16. Make sure that the preheater valve is open. 7.4.2 Starting the Furnace Prior to starting the furnace after power has turned off or the preheater unplugged, allow the preheater to heat the fuel for 20-30 minutes. The preheater thermostat circuit will close once fuel temperature reaches approximately 120°F. Once the fuel is hot, start the furnace as follows: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO START THE BURNER WHEN EXCESS OIL HAS ACCUMULATED, WHEN THE FURNACE IS FULL OF VAPOR, OR WHEN THE COMBUSTION CHAMBER IS VERY HOT. Refer to section 8.5.1 (heat exchanger cleaning) for instructions on removal of excess oil. �IIIIDO NOT START THE BURNER UNLESS ALL CLEANOUT PANELS ARE SECURE IN PLACE. 1. Verify the Red LED (on certain models) on the primary control is not on or flashing. You may need to reset the controller by pressing the reset button. 2. Set the wall thermostat to a high temperature to send a call for heat and start the furnace. 3. It may take a few attempts for the furnace to light on the initial start, as the nozzle block will not be filled with fuel yet. 4. If the furnace will not light, proceed to the troubleshooting section of the manual or call EnergyLogic for technical support. 5. Continue to the next section for important checks and adjustments. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 38 enerriy/ogic 7.4.3 Burner System Checkout Once the furnace starts operating, make the following checks and adjustments: If you are unable to obtain the proper adjustments, do not run the furnace. If you cannot resolve the issue, call EnergyLogic Technical Services for assistance. Blower Operation: Within the first two or three minutes after the furnace starts, make sure that the blower turns on and directs warm air into the room. If not, this may indicate a problem with the Fan & Limit Control or the fan wiring. Shut down the furnace and diagnose the issue, or call EnergyLogic Technical Service for assistance. Exhaust System: Check that the flue exhaust is flowing properly, and there are no exhaust leaks inside the building. Check the outside flue pipe to ensure that no black smoke is present. If smoke is present and the draft below is correct (see adjustment procedure below), call EnergyLogic Technical Service for assistance. Draft Adjustment: After operating the furnace for about 15 minutes, verify the draft gauge is reading 0.05 inches of water column, WC (refer to figure). Draft Gauge 0.05 Inches WC Draft reading and adjustment Knob / Weight Damper Door • If the draft gauge reading is less than 0.05 inches of WC: Loosen the adjustment weight on the barometric damper door, then slide it to the right or closer to the damper door pivot axis, and retighten it. • If the draft gauge reading is more than 0.05 in. WC: Slide the weight to the left or away from the damper door pivot axis, and retighten it. • Verify that the reading remains at 0.05 inches of WC with exhaust fans and vented appliances on in your building and all doors and windows closed. A negative pressure inside the building may impede intake of combustion air to the burner, which may result in a hazard from smoke inhalation and/or fire. Use of exhaust fans in your shop without adequate make-up air may create a negative pressure. There are other possible causes as well. Corrective measures must be taken if the correct draft setting cannot be achieved. If you are unable to adjust the damper door to obtain 0.05 inches WC, there is not enough draft for proper exhaust. Do not run the furnace under this condition. If you cannot resolve the issue, call EnergyLogic Technical Services for assistance. Note: The draft gauge should read 0.0 inches of WC when the draft gauge probe is removed from the stack (If not, make sure the gauge is level, and readjust the zero knob). If the furnace Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 39 energylogic. is not running, the draft gauge with the probe installed into the stack will read near zero, but depending on ambient conditions may fluctuate between 0 and 0.03 inches of WC. ACAUTION The probe may be hot. Fuel Pressure Gauge: The fuel pressure gauge on the pump outlet should read approximately 3-30 psi, with the higher pressures for longer runs or colder fuel. • If the fuel pressure reading is high, inspect the fuel tubing between the pump and burner. Look for crimped tubing or obstructions in the preheater or nozzle block assembly. Repair as necessary. Vacuum Gauge: The vacuum gauge on the inlet of the pump should read between 0 and 5 inches of mercury (Hg) for a Side Suction system. For Top Suction systems, the vacuum reading should be between 1 and 6 inches of Hg. • If the vacuum reading is reading above normal, check the following: o Inlet to the suction line is clear of obstructions and all valves (including fire stop valve) are open. o Fuel filter must be clean (was it clogged with sludge from the tank?). o Oil must be above 50°F (10°C). o Review how the pump is mounted compared to the instructions. Burn Quality— Visual Check: When the burner is operating properly, the flame is bright yellow. To verify the flame color, rotate the viewport cover on the burner door clockwise, as shown in figure. View from a distance of at least 18 inches (46 cm). Close the viewport after checking the flame. If the flame is other than bright yellow, this indicates improper combustion. Contact EnergyLogic Technical Service for help. ACAUTION The burner door and view port cover are hot. Wear gloves and safety glasses when inspecting the flame. View from a distance of at least 18 inches (46 cm). View Port Cover Visual Flame Inspection Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 40 enerrriogic_ Burn Quality — CO2 Exhaust Measurement: A qualified service technician with an exhaust combustion analyzer can make adjustments to the air shutter if required. Measurements are taken through the draft gauge probe port. Exhaust gas carbon dioxide readings should be as follows for a clean furnace: • EL-140H/EL-200H=10-11% • EL -350H=11-12% A qualified service technician may adjust the air shutter settings if necessary. Some burners have an adjustable inner slotted air band, along with the outer adjustment shutter plate. To adjust the plate, loosen the locking screws, then rotate the shutter and retighten the locking screws. The slotted air band should not require adjustment. A higher number allows more air into the burner. A lower number setting allows less air. The factory settings shown below normally work well, but higher altitude locations may require adjustments: • EL -140H: 5 for Plate — Closed Air Band • EL -200H: 7 for Plate — Closed Air Band • EL -350H: 4 for Plate — 4 for Air Band Shutter Adjustment Shutter Settings Burn Quality— Smoke Measurement: A qualified service technician may measure smoke content, following procedures of his smoke pump. • Acceptable results per smoke pump comparison chart = zero or #1 smoke spot. • A yellow- brown smoke spot color is normal when burning used oil due to the presence of non -combustibles. • The absence of black or dark grey soot indicates complete combustion. Flame Monitoring Cad Cell: A qualified service technician may check the cad cell [Flame on] • Disconnect the cad cell leads from the FF terminals on the controller. • Using TT and FF jumpers, run the furnace. • Measure the resistance (ohms) of the cad cell by probing across the cad cell lead wires. • An acceptable resistance is greater than 0 — 500 ohms for a new burner and heat exchanger with the flame on. • Remove the TT jumper to lose the flame. The resistance reading with no flame should be greater than 5000 ohms. Your meter may register "OL" if out of limit. • Make sure all jumpers have been removed when testing is complete. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 6 eneigy/ogic_ 41 7.5 Everyday Operation of Your EnergyLogic Used OiI Furnace Once installed and checked, operate your EnergyLogic Furnace as follows: Daily Operation. • Set the room thermostat to the desired temperature. • You should not let the temperature of the room get below 50°F (10°C), or the oil will become thick and may present fuel delivery issues. • To shut down the furnace in an emergency, turn off the power at the user -installed, switched junction box or main breaker. Manage the Used OiI. • Do not put unapproved substances into your used oil storage tank. See section 1.5.1 for a list of approved fuels. • Monitor the bottom of your tank for water and drain it off on a regular basis. • Don't let your oil tank run dry. Don't risk introduction of air into the fuel delivery system. You will save yourself much time and trouble by keeping your tank filled with oil. If you don't have one, consider installing an optional EnergyLogic Low -Fuel Cut -Off Switch to turn off the furnace at low fuel levels. • When filling the tank be careful not to agitate the oil so that air/sludge are not introduced into the fuel pump. • Pre-screen the oil prior to putting it into the tank. Occasionally have your tank drained and cleaned. Monitor the System. • After your initial set up, monitor the system gauge readings on a regular schedule to assure that the system is stable. Record the readings and any maintenance performed in the maintenance log (refer to section 8) to track your system performance over time. • Maintain your furnace. Regular maintenance will help to keep the furnace running reliable and efficient for many years. Summer Blower Operation and Shutdown • Perform seasonal maintenance. • In summer months, the blower may be used to circulate room air. To run the blower fan manually, the white button on the fan & high temperature limit controller may be pushed in. To set the controller back to automatic mode, the button may be pulled out. Make sure that the preheater is unplugged from the burner wire box if using the furnace blower in the summer. • Refer to shutdown procedure in Section 8.6. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 42 6 energylogic. 8. Maintenance Regular maintenance is required to keep your EnergyLogic furnace operating reliably and efficiently. For best results, purchase an EnergyLogic furnace annual maintenance kit (PN 05000027 for EL140/200 or 05000028 for EL350), which includes nozzle, preheater/drip cap/burner/solenoid gaskets and o -rings, as well as fuel and air compressor filters. An EnergyLogic burner maintenance brush kit (PN 05000071) and an EnergyLogic furnace cleaning tool are the best tools to use with the maintenance procedures. Compressor maintenance annually Clean preheater ti and replace gaskets annually. Clean / inspect nozzle and flame retention head and replace nozzle or o -ring annually. t Replace fuel filter at least every 800 - 1000 hrs. Ash removal every 800 — 1000 hrs. Ash removal every 800 — 1000 hrs. Drain water from tank as needed. Clean tank as needed. Inspect monthly. Check local codes. Inspect and adjust electrode and retention head settings annually. CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support Clean Blower Wheel every 800 — 1000 hrs. Clean / inspect solenoid valve and replace o - ring annually. 43 eneogic_ 8.1 Service Contracts If you are not qualified or do not wish to perform the furnace maintenance yourself, contact EnergyLogic for the location of our nearest dealer or service provider. Putting a service contract in place is the best way to make sure that the required maintenance is completed regularly and your system will operate reliably when needed, saving you both time and money. 8.2 Safety Warnings — Lockout/Tagout There are many potential hazards associated with working on this equipment, including electricity, heat, heights, dust and chemicals a DANGER Make sure the main electrical circuit is off and locked out / tagged out prior to performing maintenance. A CAUTION Wear proper safety equipment for the tasks, including a HEPA quality dust mask to avoid inhalation of ash dust when cleaning the heat exchanger or flue. Use suitable access aids/equipment when working on the furnace. Do not climb on the furnace. General safety rules and precautions should be followed at all times to prevent any accidents that could lead to personal injury or property damage. Only those qualified should perform these tasks. 8.3 Monitoring System Performance over Time EnergyLogic recommends that you monitor and record your system gauge readings regularly over time, in order to diagnose issues that may arise. For example, if the pump vacuum gauge initially read 2 inches Hg, but over time has risen to 10 inches Hg, it is an indication that the fuel filter is most likely clogged up. Record the system gauge readings on your maintenance schedule and log. Have this log handy if you call EnergyLogic for technical support. 8.4 Maintenance Schedule and Parts The recommended maintenance interval and log is shown on the following page. Check your local codes and regulations for maintenance frequency requirements that may take precedence. Use of certain fuels or other conditions may require more frequent maintenance. Make a copy of the maintenance log and use it to record the maintenance and system performance readings over time. Contact your EnergyLogic dealer or call EnergyLogic for service parts. EnergyLogic offers convenient annual maintenance kits and cleaning tools made specifically for your furnace. Economical bulk packs of fuel and air filters are available as well. /CAUTION The maintenance schedule is the minimum recommended, but if you see smoke or have trip outs then the unit must be shut down and serviced immediately before running it again. Increase the maintenance as your situation requires. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 44 enerrlogic. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 01 energy/wk.. Used Oil Burning Furnace Maintenance Schedule and Log Have this record available when calling for support. Customer / address: Unit ID Pump ID Service Schedule Initial and Date of Service: Clean ash from heat exchanger, flue, damper, and draft gauge probe 800 to 1,000 hours of operation (or as required by code) Replace fuel filtervacuum 800 to 1,000 hours or when gauge reading increases more than 5 in. Hg compared to clean filter readings. Drain fluid (water) from bottom of tank Check monthly, drain as necessary. Clean in -tank fuel pickup strainer for non-EnergyLogic Workbench Tanks As needed. Clean Fuel Tank As needed or required by code. 'Clean Preheater Assembly Annually Clean blower wheel Annually Clean nozzle line assembly Annually Check retention head & electrode settings Annually Clean solenoid valve Annually Check air compressor pressure performance, replace filter. Annually Clean cad cell lens Annually Check/replace burner gasket Annually Test fire furnace after maintenance and check for proper burner adjustment After Annual Maintenance Gauge Readings (After Maintenance) Pump Vacuum Reading: Pump Pressure Reading: Draft Gauge Reading: Hour Meter Reading: Service Company: Address: Contact: Phone: * This schedule is the minimum recommended. If you see smoke or have trip -outs then the unit must be shut down and serviced immediately. Increase the maintenance as your situation requires 8.5 Maintenance Procedures The following sections provide detail on how to perform the recommended maintenance. If you have questions or need assistance, contact EnergyLogic Technical Service. 8.5.1 Heat Exchanger Cleaning How often? Clean ash from heat exchanger once every 800 to 1,000 hours of operation (or if there are signs of incomplete combustion or smoke). Or, to remove accumulated oil as needed. Tools Required: 5/16 in. & 1/2 in. sockets, 3/4 in. open-ended wrench, EnergyLogic Furnace Cleaning Tool (PN 14033227 for the EL -140H and EL -200H; PN 04000223 for the EL -350H), chimney brush, small pipe brush, work gloves, dust mask and safety glasses, large heavy-duty plastic trash bag and duct tape. For your convenience, EnergyLogic offers flue brush accessories. Il DANGER breaker. Personally verify that the main power is turned off and locked out at the circuit 1 Remove drip cap/baffle for access. Tape trash bag and collect ash here. Insert flue brush here or push down from roof. Main Heat Exchanger Cleaning -140H and EL -200H Procedure for Heat Exchanger Cleaning, EL -140H and 200H: Clean ash from main heat exchanger using the furnace cleaning tool. 1. ACAUTION If furnace is hot, allow it to cool before cleaning. Wear all safety equipment. 2. Unplug the burner at the cabinet wiring box. 3. Close the hand valve on the bottom of the preheater. 4. Disconnect the 3/8 in. copper fuel tubing at the bottom of the preheater. 5. Remove the four burner mounting nuts and swing burner open. 6. Remove the two screws from the Drip Cap (located on the bottom of the unit away from the burner) and slowly lower the cap and baffle to keep as much ash in the cap as Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 46 enerr ylogic_ possible (refer to figure). ACAUTION Beware of falling parts that may create a crush hazard. 7. Tape the opening of a trash bag to the Drip Leg with duct tape, so ash will fall into the trash bag. 8. Accessing the interior of the heat exchanger through the burner opening, use the furnace cleaning tool or brush to push the ash to the opposite end of the exchanger, out the clean out port, and into the trash bag. A shop vacuum may also be used to remove ash 9. Gently tap the flue pipe and allow ash to fall into the trash bag. 10. Remove the trash bag and insert the chimney brush into the flue. 11. Reattach the trash bag, then reach through the bag, grab the brush and clean the ash from the flue pipe by running it through the flue pipe. Clean all flue pipe from other access points if extension rods do not reach from the bottom of the furnace. 12. Remove the trash bag/brush and properly dispose of the ash. 13. Inspect the cleaned heat exchanger and flue. If damaged, replace damaged parts. 14. Inspect the Drip Cap gasket. If damaged, replace the gasket (PN 20933118). 15. Reattach the Drip Cap. Make sure that the baffle is facing the burner (refer to figure). Use existing screw holes and replace screws. 16. Inspect Burner Gasket. If damaged, replace the gasket (PN 20910103). 17. Swing the burner over the four studs to close and reinstall the nuts. 18. Reinstall the fuel tubing on the preheater and open the hand valve. 19. Make sure to perform start up (7.4.2) and system checks (7.4.3) after every maintenance cycle. Record the checks, maintenance performed, and gauge readings in the maintenance log. Procedure for Heat Exchanger Cleaning, EL -350H: 1. ACAUTION If furnace is hot, allow it to cool before cleaning. Wear all safety equipment. 2. Unplug the burner at the cabinet wiring box. 3. Close the hand valve on the bottom of the preheater. 4. Disconnect the 3/8 in. copper fuel tubing at the bottom of the preheater. 5. Remove the four burner mounting nuts and swing burner open. 6. Remove the two screws from the Drip Cap (located on the bottom of the unit away from the burner) and slowly lower the cap off of the clean out port, keeping as much ash in the cap as possible. 7. Tape the opening of a trash bag to the clean out port, so ash will fall into the trash bag. 8. Accessing the interior of the heat exchanger through the burner opening, use the furnace cleaning tool (optional accessory — part # 04000223) or brush to push the ash to the opposite end of the exchanger into the trash bag. A shop vacuum may also be CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 47 enerr,log►ic_ used to remove ash. Gently tap the flue pipe and allow ash to fall into the heat exchanger and trash bag. 9. Make sure to clean the ash from the top of the baffle (where the flue pipe connects). 10. The flue pipe should be cleaned at least once a year, and whenever it becomes clogged with ash and/or soot. 11. The flue pipe can be cleaned with a flue brush from the roof by removing the rain cap, or from the bottom cleaning port by removing the blower from the cabinet and the baffle from the heat exchanger. 12.To remove the blower from the cabinet, make sure the power is off. Then disconnect the blower power wires in the junction box. Then remove the screws holding the blower to the cabinet and carefully slide it off ( ACAUTION Blower is heavy.). Personally verify that the main power is turned off and locked out at the Ai DANGER circuit breaker. 13. Remove the five nuts holding the baffle in the heat exchanger and pull the handle to slide it out. 14. Remove the trash bag and insert the chimney brush into the flue. 15. Reattach the trash bag, then reach through the bag, grab the brush and clean the ash from the flue pipe by running it up through the flue pipe. Clean all flue pipe from other access points if extension rods do not reach from the bottom of the furnace. 16. Remove the trash bag/brush and properly dispose of the ash. 17. Inspect the cleaned heat exchanger and flue. If damaged, replace damaged parts. 18. Inspect the Drip Cap gasket. If damaged, replace the gasket (PN 06000578). 19. Reattach the Drip Cap. Use existing screw holes and replace screws. 20. Clean and reinstall the baffle. Replace the baffle gasket if necessary (PN 06000584). 21. Clean up any ash that spilled inside the cabinet. 22. Clean and reinstall the blower (see next section), and reconnect the blower power wires. 23. Inspect Burner Gasket. If damaged, replace the gasket (PN 20910103). 24. Swing the burner over the four studs to close and reinstall the nuts. 25. Reinstall the fuel tubing on the preheater and open the hand valve. 26. Make sure to perform start up (7.4.2) and system checks (7.4.3) after every maintenance cycle. Record the checks, maintenance performed, and gauge readings in the maintenance log. CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 48 energy'ogic Blower and Internal Baffle Can Be Removed for Access to Clean the Flue from the Bottom - 350H Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 6 epic. 8.5.2 Blower Cleaning How often? Once every 800 to 1,000 hours of operation. Tools Required: Screw or 5/16" nut driver, pipe brush, shop vacuum, work gloves, dust mask and safety glasses. Ai DATER breaker. Personally verify that the main power is turned off and locked out at the circuit Procedure - All Models: 1. Wear all safety equipment. 2. Remove wire guard from the Blower Wheel side (refer to figure). 3. Using a small pipe brush and shop vacuum, gently clean dust from the Blower Wheel Blades. Be careful not to damage the blades. 4. When finished, reattach the wire guard. Remove screws and wire guard. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support Gently clean the blower wheel. Blower Cleaning 50 enerriy/ogic. 8.5.3 Fuel Oil Filter Replacement How often? Every 800 — 1000 hours of operation, or when the vacuum gauge reads 5 inches Hg higher than readings taken with a clean filter. Tools Required: Safety glasses, rubber gloves. Replacement Parts: EnergyLogic Spin -On Fuel Filter (PN 20270185) Spec: Hydraulic/140 Micron/Metal Mesh, max. working pressure 200 psi, 25 GPM capacity. Note: Use only genuine EnergyLogic parts to avoid damage and maintain UL status. Procedure - All Models: 1. Wear all safety equipment. 2. Close the Fire -Stop Valve or ball valve(s) at the filter head. 3. Use a filter wrench to spin the Fuel Filter off the Filter Head Assembly - counter- clockwise. Dispose of the fuel filter properly. 4. Clean any debris from the strainer housing. 5. You may fill new Fuel Filter with non -synthetic ATF to quicken the priming process. Do not use new motor oil or synthetic ATF to fill the filter. 6. Spin the Fuel Filter onto the Strainer Housing - clockwise. Hand -tighten the filter. Record the meter hours and date on the new filter. 7. Open Fire -Stop Valve or Ball Valve. 8. Refer to Section 7.4.1 "Fuel System Priming" for the priming procedure to ensure no air remains in the fuel system. Fire Stop Valve Fire stop valve open Fire stop valve closed Filter Head Assembly Fuel Filter Fuel Filter Replacement Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 51 6energy/ogle. 8.5.4 Preheater Cleaning How often? Once per year. Tools Required: 3/4 in. wrench, pipe wrench or vice, wire brush, one gallon of 140°F (60°C) + flashpoint parts washer fluid, safety glasses, rubber gloves. Replacement Parts: Preheater Gaskets (Qty=2) PN 20940122 (2 5/8" O.D.) Mounting bolt 'i; TTairs,♦ ; Unplug burner III. .0 Preheater Connector at burner wiring box. Preheater Outlet Tubing Preheater Inlet Valve Removing Preheater Procedure - All Models (refer to figures): 1. Wear all safety equipment. 2. Unplug the burner at the cabinet wiring box. 3. Disconnect the Preheater Connector at the Burner Wiring Box, allow it to cool. ACAUTION Until the preheater has cooled, the parts and the oil are hot. 4. Close the preheater inlet valve and disconnect the fuel tubing from the Inlet and Outlet Ports of the Preheater. 5. Remove the Preheater mounting bolt and Preheater from the burner. Cali 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 52 energylogic 6. Open the Preheater Valve and drain fuel into your tank. Gasket Top Cap Cleaning Preheater 7. Hold Top Cap (outlet) firmly in a vice or with a pipe wrench and unscrew the housing to expose the finned aluminum Extrusion. CAUTION Do not attempt to unscrew the Extrusion from the top cap. Do not spray the electrical wiring and components with parts washing fluid. This will damage the electrical circuits in the Preheater and void warranty. 8. Remove old gasket found in the cap above the Extrusion. 9. Use a wire brush and parts washer fluid to clean the Extrusion—clean thoroughly to remove all loose debris that could block passages. Note: Filling most of the housing with parts washer fluid and placing the Extrusion back into the housing to soak, may quicken the process. 10. Clean the housing and Top Cap with parts washer fluid. 11. Unscrew the Bottom Cap (inlet) from the housing. 12. Remove the old gasket from the cap. 13. Clean the cap and valve, then replace the gasket. 14. Reinstall the Bottom Cap onto the housing. 15. Replace the Top Cap gasket by carefully sliding it over the extrusion. 16. Reinstall the Extrusion/Top Cap onto the housing. Do not over -tighten. 17. Remount the Preheater onto the burner. 18. Reconnect the fuel tubing to the Inlet and Outlet ports of the Preheater. 19. Refer to Section 7.4.1. "Fuel System Priming" for the priming procedure to ensure no air remains in the fuel system. 20. Make sure no leaks are present at the Top and Bottom Caps of the Preheater. 21. ■ Make sure to perform start up (7.4.2) and system checks (7.4.3) after every maintenance cycle. Record the checks, maintenance performed, and gauge readings in the maintenance log. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 53 mew** 8.5.5 Nozzle Line Assembly Cleaning How often? Once per year or if the nozzle becomes blocked with debris (if blocked, a higher operating fuel pressure will be seen on the pump pressure gauge). Tools Required: 7/16 in., 1/2 in., 3/4 in. and 17mm (boxed end/12-pt.) wrenches, 5/8 in. socket/ratchet, 5/8 in. wrench, 1/4 in. nut driver, hex wrench, vise, flat -blade screwdriver, small wire brush or pipe cleaner (from optional maintenance accessory brush kit), parts washer fluid, shop air gun, safety glasses, rubber gloves. Replacement Parts: Nozzle 0 -ring (PN 20213152) or Nozzle (PN 20210123 for EL-140H/EL-200H, PN 20210124 for EL -350H) A DANGER breaker. Personally verify that the main power is turned off and locked out at the circuit Procedure - All Models (Refer to figures): 1. Wear all safety equipment. Loosen tabs and swing up the transformer cover. Disconnect 2 -pin connector (underneath cover). Ignition Transformer Flare and knurled nuts. Loosen fuel and air tubing connections from nozzle assembly. Disconnecting Nozzle Block 2. Remove the preheater and burner from the furnace (refer to previous sections). 3. Using a 7/16" wrench, disconnect the fuel and air tubing from the Nozzle Block. 4. Using a 17mm boxed-end/12-pt.wrench, remove the knurled nuts from the Nozzle Block (refer to figure). 5. Using a flat -blade screwdriver, loosen the Ignition Transformer screws. Rotate tabs out of the way and lift the Ignition Transformer back on its hinge. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 54 6 energy/ogle. 6. Disconnect nozzle heater Two -Pin Connector. Slide nozzle assembly out of burner assembly. Nozzle Block Assembly 2 -Pin Removing Nozzle Block 7. Slide Nozzle Block Assembly out through the air tube. Nozzle Block Assembly 2 -Pin Connector Nozzle Retention Head Air Vane Disassemble Nozzle Block iElectrode Assembly Set Screw 8. Unscrew the Electrode Screw and remove the Electrode from the Nozzle Assembly. 9. Inspect the electrode wire for excessive wear and the porcelain for cracks - replace as necessary. Worn Electrodes. New Electrodes Narrowed wire diameter and increased gap. I Inspect Electrodes for Wear 10. Remove the Retention Head by loosening the collar set screw. 11. Slide the Air Vane off the Nozzle Line Assembly. 12. Using a 5/8 in. socket/ratchet, remove the Nozzle from the Nozzle Block Assembly. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 55 6 energy/ogle. 13. Using a pair of pliers and a towel, gently clamp the stem of the Nozzle (a small spinner is loosely contained inside the Nozzle) and spin (counter -clockwise) the cap from the stem. *Skip stepsl3-17 if installing new nozzle. 14. Clean all the parts with parts washing fluid. 15. Replace the stem o -ring. 16. Holding the stem vertically, place the spinner on top of the stem. Then, thread the nozzle Cap onto the stem. 17. Tighten the nozzle Cap to the stem. Passage Plug Nozzle spinner Zing 18. The passage through the nozzle block for the nozzle has a plug at the opposite end of the nozzle which must be removed for complete cleaning of the Passage - use thread sealer during reinstallation (refer to figure). 19. IMPORTANT!—Being careful not to apply parts washer fluid to the heater wiring harness, clean the nozzle passage of the Nozzle Block. Make sure parts are clean and dry prior to reassembly. 20. Refer to the following section (8.5.6) for Flame Retention Head and Electrode Settings and reassemble the Nozzle Line Assembly. CAUTION Be sure to re -install the air vane (shown in figure) in the proper location – opposite side of bulkhead fitting). Failure to install this component properly will result in an off -center flame, which may damage the heat exchanger and void the heat exchanger warranty. 21. Make sure to perform start up (7.4.2) and system checks (7.4.3) after every maintenance cycle. Record the checks, maintenance performed, and gauge readings in the maintenance log. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 56 enepy/egic_ 8.5.6 Retention Head and Electrode Settings How often? Once per year (refer to 8.5.5, Nozzle Line Cleaning) Procedure - All Models. NOTE: There are two Electrode/Retention Head designs: one where the electrodes wires make two 90 degree bends (called "Double Bend"), and one with a single angled bend. The "Single Bend" design only goes with Retention Heads with the added center cutout. Nozzle must extend approx. 1/16 to 1/8" (1.5 to 3 mm) beyond air vanes. Center Retention Head within Air Tube. Air Vane 1/16" - 1/8" (Flame Retention Head recessed inside Air Tube) (1.5 - 3 mm) Retention Head 3/32" (2.4 mm) Gap 7/16" (11 mm) 1/16" (1.6 mm) 41— (Electrode behind tip) Settings for Retention Head & Electrodes — "Double Bend" Electrodes Refer to Section 8.5.5 for removal of nozzle block and electrode assembly. Inspect the locations of the electrode components. If adjustments are necessary, use needle -nose pliers to adjust electrode wires. Use the following specifications: • The Electrode Gap: 3/32" (2.4 mm). • Electrode Tips must be 1/16" (1.6 mm) behind the Cap of the Nozzle. • Nozzle protrudes approximately 1/8" (3 mm) beyond Retention Head vanes. • Vertical location of electrode wires: 7/16" (1.6 mm) from center nozzle to wires. Make sure that there is a gap between the electrode wires and the nozzle. Make sure there is a gap between the retention head inner diameter and the electrode wires. NOTE: For the "Single Bend" electrode, the same settings are used, but the electrode wires come down at an angle, as shown below. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 57 enerjlogic_ • Retention Head is recessed approximately 1/16" - 1/8" (1.5 — 3 mm) into the Air Tube. • Retention Head is centered within the Air Tube. If not centered, straighten the centering Tabs of the Retention Head if they are bent. Loosen the knurled nuts, center the Retention Head and retighten the knurled nuts if necessary. • Make sure air vane is properly installed, on the left side when looking from the nozzle end. It should be locked in place by the retention head base. • For the "Double Bend" electrodes, the retention head should be installed with one leg vertical, and the electrodes straddle that leg. • For the "Single Bend" electrodes, the extra cutout in the center hole of the retention head should be centered vertically, and the electrodes are mounted in that cutout between two legs. A tab on the collar of the retention head fits into the channel on the bottom of the electrode ceramic for alignment. (See figures below.) Single Bend Retention Head & Electrode Orientation Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support Double Bend Retention Head & Electrode Orientation 58 6 enewlogic_ 8.5.7 Solenoid Valve Cleaning How often? Once per year or if the solenoid valve is blocked with debris (higher operating pressure will be seen on the pressure gauge). Tools Required: 5/16 inch and 7/16 inch wrenches, flat -blade screwdriver, small wire brush or pipe cleaner, pocket pick, parts washer fluid, shop air gun, rubber gloves, safety glasses. Replacement Parts: Solenoid 0 -ring (PN 20293199). Nucleus w/ Spring (PN 20293198). A DANGER Personally verify that the main power is turned off and locked out at the circuit breaker. CAUTION Small parts — do not drop / lose. Procedure - All Models (refer to figures): Loosen Disconnect Fuel Tubing Solenoid Valve Disconnect Fuel Tubing Disconnect Solenoid Valve Loosen 1. Wear all safety equipment. 2. Using a 7/16 inch wrench, remove the two fuel tubing fittings from the Solenoid Valve (refer to figure). 3. Loosen the fittings at the other end of the fuel tubing at the preheater and burner nozzle block, then rotate the tubing out of the way (refer to figure). 4. Remove the E -Clip from the top of the solenoid. Slide the solenoid body and stem from the bottom of the housing (you may need to rotate the housing). 5. Using a 5/16 in. wrench, unscrew the valve stem from the body by turning the stem counterclockwise. Secure the body while turning the stem. 6. Inspect the Body for any abnormalities or debris in the inlet/outlet ports and internal cavity. 7. Inspect the 0 -ring. Replace if damaged. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 59 6 energy/ngic_ 8. Inspect the seal at the end of the nucleus and note if it has an excessive impression from where it seals in the internal cavity of the body. Replace if damaged — nucleus and spring, sold separately. 9. Clean out the inside of the stem with parts washer fluid, then blow dry. 10. Remove excessive carbon build up with a small pick, making sure not to damage any surfaces. 11. Reassemble the Solenoid Valve in reverse order of disassembly. Make sure the arrow is pointing in the correct direction of flow. 12. Make sure to perform start up (7.4.2) and system checks (7.4.3) after every maintenance cycle. Record the checks, maintenance performed, and gauge readings in the maintenance log Remove E -Clip Remove Valve. Slide Valve out CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support r—\ Rotate 1 Stem Spring Washer Av — Spring E. 4— Nucleus <o) 4-- 0 -Ring Disassemble Valve 4— Body 6 energyogic. 60 8.5.8 Air Compressor Maintenance How often? Once per year. More often for dusty conditions. Tools Required: 1/8 inch Allen wrench, 7/16 inch wrench, flat -blade screwdriver, EnergyLogic Air Compressor Pressure Gauge Kit (PN 05000092), Gast compressor cleaning fluid, shop towel, rubber gloves, safety glasses. Procedure - All Models (refer to figures): 1. Wear all safety equipment. 2. Replace the compressor air filter annually (PN 20210112). Remove Filter 3. Check the air compressor output by using the EnergyLogic compressor test kit (PN 14012100). Remove the copper tubing Inlet from the outlet of the compressor and from the bulkhead fitting on the burner. Attach one of the tubes in the kit to the 3/16" 3/16" Outlet Fitting outlet fitting on the compressor, and the other tubing to the bulkhead fitting. Attach both tubes to the gauge in the kit. Be careful to not make kinks in the tubing. 4. Start the burner by moving the wall thermostat above room temperature and note the air compressor output on the gauge. If the gauge reading is in the 9-11 PSI range, the air compressor is operating as designed and no further maintenance is required. Remove the test kit and reinstall the 3/16" tubing, for normal operation. 5. If the gauge reading is below 9 PSI, check/do the following: Air Compressor A. Coupling 1. Inspect the air compressor coupling by unplugging the burner, loosening the Ignition transformer screws, then lifting it back on its hinge. Set Screws Coupling to Compressor Coupling (Parts removed from illustration for clarity.) 2. Spin the squirrel cage and note if the coupling slips on the burner motor or air compressor shaft. 3. If the coupling is slipping, use a 1/8 inch Allen wrench to tighten the set screw. 4. If the set screws are tight, inspect the metal ends of the coupling for damage. Replace as necessary. B. Vanes Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 61 enerrgylogic. (4) Vanes Carbon Gasket Cover Plate Compressor Vanes 1. Using a 9/64 inch Allen wrench, carefully remove the air compressor cover plate and carbon gasket. 2. Inspect the carbon gasket for wear—reverse if worn or replace as necessary. 3. Spin the squirrel cage using a screwdriver. 4. If the vanes do not move in their slots as the rotor turns, clean the vanes. Clean the vanes and compressor body using Gast compressor cleaning fluid or suitable equivalent. Note: Do not use petroleum solvents, such as engine degreasers. These fluids leave unwanted residues behind that may cause the vanes to stick and/or bind. If the vanes are worn out, you may purchase a vane replacement kit (PN 10013106). 5. Reassemble the air compressor. Be careful not to over -tighten the cover plate. C. Cleaning a CAUTION Wear Safety Glasses. 1. Disconnect the fitting at the air compressor outlet. 2. Disconnect the preheater outlet tubing from the solenoid valve and run into a bucket to catch the oil. 3. Jump the primary control T -terminals, then F -terminals to operate the burner. 4. Feed several drops of the Gast compressor cleaning fluid into the air compressor inlet and catch the spray at the outlet using a shop towel. 5. Allow the burner to run 3-4 minutes to flush out all the fluid from the air compressor, then remove the jumpers. 6. Replace the air compressor filter, reconnect the outlet tubing. 7. Reconnect the preheater outlet tubing. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 62 ever logic_ 8.6 Seasonal Shut Down & Start Up EnergyLogic strongly recommends that you remove power from the preheater when the furnace will not be in use for two weeks or longer. Leaving the preheater on for prolonged periods without fuel flow through it will cause fuel carbonization and sludge to form. A preheater in such a state will not adequately preheat the oil. Shut Down Procedure (refer to figure): 1. Turn power off to the furnace at the breaker in the building service panel or unplug the burner at the cabinet wiring box. 2. Close the preheater valve—rotate clockwise. 3. Disconnect the fuel line at the preheater inlet. 4. Open the preheater valve and drain the oil from the preheater. 5. Perform annual maintenance. Refer to maintenance log. Start Up Procedure: 1. Inspect the flue wind cap for obstructions such as bird nests or leaves. 2. Perform annual maintenance tasks if not yet completed. Refer to maintenance log. 3. Make sure that the used oil storage tank has enough oil. 4. Turn power on to the furnace at the breaker or plug the burner in at the cabinet wiring box. 5. Refer back to Section 7.4.1 to re -prime the fuel system. 6. Make sure everything is in place and start the furnace (Section 7.4.2). 7. Perform system checks (Section 7.4.3), and review section 7.5 for operation. 8. Recheck the systems (Section 7.4.3) to make sure the furnace is operating properly. Burner Plug I Preheater Valve (shown open) Season shutdown and startup Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 63 6 energylogic. 9. Troubleshooting Your EnergyLogic furnace is designed and built for years of reliable service with regular maintenance. Should you experience trouble, refer to this section for troubleshooting guidance. A qualified serviceman may perform the tests in this section. Lir CAUTION Do not tamper with the unit or controls — call your service technician or EnergyLogic for support. A DANGER Only qualified servicemen are to perform the testing procedures. Testing may include working with high voltage electricity, which if mishandled may cause serious injury or death. Start Here — First Steps of Trouble Shooting. It has been our experience that many problems can be traced to improper installation, improper maintenance, or unintended results from changes made to the system or surrounding structures. So, the first steps in troubleshooting shall always begin with the following: 1. Verify installation and environmental factors. Remember that even if the original installation was properly performed, there can be unintended results from changes made to the building or structure. Common things to verify are: a. Is the fuel in the tank low? Has it run dry, and the pump lost prime? b. Fuel Pump and Filter Installation. Dirty Filter? c. Fuel condition changed (bad fuel, water in fuel)? d. Adequate combustion and make up air. Have exhaust fans or other devices been added to the building that may create a negative pressure within the building? Has another fuel burning appliance been added to the building or room? Consider make up air requirements for all appliances. e. Exhaust Flue System: Check draft setting. Have changes taken place on the roof that might affect the flue stack? Any obstructions (birds nest, etc.). f. Is the circuit still dedicated, or has it been compromised by the addition of other appliances to the circuit? Is the power clean? g. Do unauthorized persons have access to the system? Have the controls been tampered with? Check factory settings (start up section). 2. Verify maintenance. If maintenance has not been performed timely and properly — STOP — perform ALL maintenance (Sec. 8) before troubleshooting. Smoke, soot, trouble in lighting -off or tripping out can all be caused by lack of maintenance or improper maintenance. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 64 ete ever loiic_ 9.1 Troubleshooting Condition Table Behavior Part to Check 01. The furnace does not operate when you set the wall thermostat to a high temperature. 1. Wall T-Stat (See Section 9.3) 2. Blower/Fan Limit (See Section 9.3) 3. Burner Motor (See Section 9.2) 4. Burner Plug (See Section 9.2) 5. Primary Controller (See Section 9.3) 6. Preheater (See Section 9.3) 02. The burner runs around 15 seconds then stops and the red button of the primary control requires reset. 1. Burner Motor (See Section 9.2) 2. Primary Controller (See Section 9.3) 3. Cad Cell (See Section 9.3) 4. Tank/Tank Controls (See Section 9.2) 5. Pump/Filter (See Section 9.2) 6. Fuel Quality (See Section 9.2) 7. Transformer/Electrode (See Section 9.3) 8. Air Compressor (See Section 9.2) 03. The burner will not light and fuel pressure is between 3 and 15 PSI (normal) on the pressure gauge at the fuel pump outlet. 1. Go to Behavior Tree 2 Component 6 (See Section 9.2) 04. The furnace has a build-up (coke tree) at the front of the burner in the heat exchanger (combustion chamber) after running many hours. 1. General Action/Question - Boiler ONLY! (See Section 9.2) 2. Solenoid Valve (See Section 9.3) 3. Heat Exchanger (See Section 9.2) 4. Damper Tee/Manometer (See Section 9.2) 5. Air Compressor (See Section 9.2) 6. Pump/Filter (See Section 9.2) 7. Fuel Quality (See Section 9.2) 05. Smoke is seen from the external flue cap or internal damper door, or the furnace is running rough. 1. Go to Behavior Tree 4 06. The unit frequently requires reset in the mornings. 1. Pump/Filter (See Section 9.2) 2. Go to Tree 2 (See Section 9.2) 07. The wall thermostat will not shut the burner off. 1. Wall T-Stat (See Section 9.3) 2. Blower/Fan Limit (See Section 9.3) 3. Primary Controller (See Section 9.3) 08. The furnace no longer provides enough heat. 1. Heat Exchanger (See Section 9.2) 2. Damper Tee/Manometer (See Section 9.2) 3. Burner Motor (See Section 9.2) 4. Air Compressor (See Section 9.2) 09. The burner cycles on and off every few minutes 1. Heat Exchanger (See Section 9.2) 2. Go to Behavior Tree 1 (See Section 9.2) Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 65 mew** 9.2 Troubleshooting Trees Part Action/Question Response Air Compressor 1. Check Air Shutter Setting. What is the air shutter setting? Correct settings are: 140H=5 and 200H=7 with closed Inner Band; 350H=4 with 4 on Inner Band. 2. See Air Compressor Maintenance (Section 8.5.8) for testing air pressure. Follow procedure in Section 8.5.8 for Air Compressor Maintenance Burner Motor 1. Verify the burner motor reset status. In operational mode - Go to next Action/Question Popped up (thermally tripped) - Reset motor by pressing in red button 2. Verify electrical connections to the terminal strip from the burner under the primary control If connections are loose, frayed or missing, repair and go to next Action/Question 3. Visually inspect the coupling and blower wheel on the burner by flipping back the transformer. Is everything tight and free of interference? Yes - Go to next Action/Question No - Remedy the Issue or Replace damage/worn parts 4. With burner unplugged, try to spin the burner blower wheel. Yes - Go to Next Component No - Verify operational status by following the steps in the Air Compressor Maintenance in Section 8.5.8 starting with section B of the Procedure. If okay, replace burner motor Burner Plug 1. Check the connections underneath the burner plug casing (male end). Are the connections tight and free of damage? Yes - Go to Next Action/Question No - Repair connections Damper Tee /Manometer 1. Verify that the door swings freely. What is the reading on the draft gauge with the probe unit running? Is it 0 with the probe removed. If not zero the gauge per instructions in Section 5.3. Between 0.03 and 0.07, then go to next Component. Otherwise adjust the weight on damper door. If still less than 0.03, then add one piece of flue to exterior or add a draft inducer. If greater than 0.07, add another damper tee and adjust its weight. Fuel Quality 1. If the oil in the tank is below 50°F, allow for oil to warm or add filter band heater. Oil going through the pump should be at a minimum of 50°F. This might require heat tape or other methods of heating the fuel 2. Was fuel recently added? Yes - Go to Next Action/Question No - {Skip Next Action/Question} Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 66 6 ene, yingic CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 67 enerriy/og►ic. 3. What was in the recently added fuel? Standard Mix - Go to Next Action/Question/Component Unknown/Cold/New Oil/Non Standard Mix - Call EnergyLogic Technical Services group for an Oil Analysis to be performed 4. When was the tank last drained of water and other fall out materials? Used Oil Storage Tanks should be drained on an annually from the bottom most drain port until only oil flows from the tank 5. When was the oil last analyzed? EnergyLogic recommends that an oil analysis be performed annually 6. Analysis Results (If EL does not have the results, could we get them) Consult EnergyLogic Technical Services group for oil analysis interpretation Heat Exchanger 1. Clean Heat Exchanger and Flue: See Heat Exchanger Cleaning in Section 8.5.1. The entire furnace should be maintained and clean every 800 to 1000 run hours Pump/Filter 1. Check Fuel Pump Motor. Is the fuel pump motor running while the burner is running? Yes - Go to Next Action/Question/Component No - See Metering Pump Assembly Testing in Section 9.3 2. Check Fuel Pressure: Turn furnace on or reset the red button of the primary control. What is the fuel pressure reading (gauge at pump outlet -PSI) while burner is running? 0 or erratically fluctuating then Go to Action/Question 4, or greater than 20 psi, see Nozzle/Solenoid cleaning, or between 3 and 15 (normal) go to Component 3. Fuel line check. Do the fuel lines contact an exterior/cold wall? Yes - If fuel line is in contact with an exterior wall, this could result in extra load on the pump. If fuel line is cold, add spacers (at least .5 inches) to eliminate contact with the exterior wall No - Go to Next Acton/Question 4. Check Fuel Vacuum: Turn furnace on or reset the red button of the primary control. What is the fuel vacuum reading (gauge at pump inlet- inches Hg) during the time the burner is running? Zero or erratically fluctuating then Go to Next Action/Question, or 1 to 10 In./Hg then Go to Action/Question 6, or 10 in./Hg or higher (for more vertical suction distance, allow more vacuum) then Replace oil filter -see filter replacement. If you are using a non- EnergyLogic tank with strainer, inspect the strainer for debris. 5. See Metering Pump Assembly Testing Procedure in Section 9.3 If Metering Pump Assembly Tested Good, go to next Component. Otherwise repair/replace necessary components. CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 67 enerriy/og►ic. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 68 6 ener yogic_ 6. (SKIP - for Gravity Fed Pumps w/plenty of fuel) Check for Air Leaks: Check all fittings from the pump back to the tank for suction side air leaks (make sure pipe sealant is used for all threaded connections). Inspect for cracked flares, tighten fittings and look for cracked lines. If you see no evidence of leaks, try soap and air pressure test on the suction side lines by pressurizing at the inlet where the 3/8 inch copper line that leaves the fire -stop valve at the tank. Yes - Repair/Replace leaking component(s) No - Go to Next Component Tank/Tank Controls 1. In the tank from which the metering pump is supplied, is the fuel pickup submerged into the oil source? Yes - Go to Next Action/Question No - Fill Tank 2. Is there continuity across the wires for the Low Level Cutoff Switch? Yes - Go to Next Action/Question No - Replace Switch 3. Check wire connections from Switch to thermostat plug on primary control. Are all connections properly secured? Yes - Go to Next Component No - Repair connections Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 68 6 ener yogic_ 9.3 Testing Procedures Only qualified servicemen are to perform the testing procedures. Many of the tests involve high voltage electricity, which if mishandled may cause serious injury or death. Ai DANGER 9.3.1 Wall Thermostat Testing (Standard T-Stat — White) Tools Needed: Digital Multi -Meter Wall Thermostat Function: Monitors the temperature of the room and compares it to the set desired temperature. When the room temperature falls below the desired, it sends a signal (by closing a switch providing continuity) to the primary controller initiating the call for heat. Note: During this test, if the thermostat does not function as stated, call Technical Services for assistance, or Customer Service to order a new thermostat. Procedure: 1. Disconnect the Thermostat wires from the burner by removing the T-Stat plug (see image below) and verify the pins on the plug and receptacle are straight and secure. Thermostat Cable Connector 2. If the system has a Fuel Low Cutoff Switch a. Verify the fuel level in the tank is above the switch float. If not, then remedy. b. Check for continuity across the wires of the float switch. If no continuity, remove the fuel switch and verify when the float is in the up position, the continuity status. No continuity = replace switch, Continuity = check fuel status 3. Set the thermostat to a temperature higher than the current reading. 4. Using the ohm meter, connect the leads to each of the T-Stat wires at the plug. Check Probe 1 Continuity Probe 2 5. You should see continuity across the leads, check the wire connections at the thermostat and recheck. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 69 eflergylogic 9.3.2 Blower Assembly Testing Tools Required: 1/8" Allen wrench, 5/16" & 3/4" wrench, Flat -blade screwdriver, 120VAC capable Digital Multi - Meter, alligator clips or a jumper wire and Tachometer Blower Assembly Function: Moves air across the Heat Exchanger, once it is above 130°F during the call for heat. Note: During this test, if the Blower Assembly does not function as stated, call Technical Services for assistance, or Customer Service to order components of the blower assembly. Make sure the blower has recently been maintained. A DANGER During a portion of this test, high voltage electrical components will be energized. Only a certified electrician is to perform the following procedures, and with extreme caution. ACAUTION Be aware of spinning blades! Procedure: 1. Verify power to cabinet wire box by testing for 120V across the receptacle terminal indicated in the figure and ground. 2. Set the Fan Limit Control to Manual (Push the white button in). The blower should start immediately. If so, check rotation direction. If spinning correct, go to step 8. If spin direction is incorrect, the leads on the motor will need to be switched (call). 3. If not, turn the power supply breaker off and return the fan limit control to Auto (white button out) 4. Remove blower wheel safety cage and verify the blower will freely spin and is clear of interference. If a non -correctable interference is present, replace the blower assembly. 5. Return cage to assembly, and turn on the power at the supply breaker. 6. Move the Fan Limit Control to Manual (white button in) and verify 120V at the blower wiring box. If OV, check Fan Limit wiring connections. 7. Return the Fan Limit Control to the Auto and locate the blower motor capacitor. 8. Remove cover and leads from the capacitor. Place a screwdriver across the capacitor terminals to discharge the capacitor. Using a multi -meter that is set on capacitance, measure. The reading should be 7.5 pF for an EL140, 10 pF for an EL200,15 pF for an EL 340, and 20 pF for an EL 350. Tolerance is plus or minus the limit on the capacitor (usually 5 or 10%). If bad, replace capacitor. Reconnect the leads and the cover. 9. Set the Fan Limit Control to Manual. Note: If the blower does not start with a good capacitor, the blower will need to be replaced. 10. Using the tachometer, measure the speed of the blower wheel as assembled on the furnace (should be near 1075 RPM). If the rpm is slow, replace the blower. 11. Measure the voltage across the capacitor leads with the blower running. If the voltage is over the rated voltage (370V), the motor is over -loaded. If so, call for assistance. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support efiersiogia 70 9.3.3 Cad CeII Testing Tools Required: Flat -blade screwdriver, 120VAC capable Digital Multi -Meter (Ohms) Cad CeII Function: The Cad CeII senses the flame via a resistance measurement, so the primary controller will continue to power the burner during the call for heat. The normal flame sensing range is less than 1600 ohms. With a reading greater than 1600 ohms, the primary controller does not recognize that a flame is present and will stop the burner as a safety precaution. Note: During this test, if the Cad Cell does not function as stated, call Technical Services for assistance, or Customer Service to order a new Cad Cell. Procedure: 1. Unplug the burner plug from its receptacle. 2. Loosen or remove two ignition transformer screws. The cad cell is located on the underside of the ignition transformer. Lift the ignition transformer and inspect the yellow cad cell leads for cuts or breaks. 3. Inspect the cad cell for signs of overheating, such as melted plastic or coating of soot. Clean or replace if you see any of these signs. 4. Gently wipe dust off the cad cell lens with a soft clean cloth (DO NOT use solvents on lens). 5. Set your multi -meter to the 100 ohm or 1K ohm range. 6. On the primary control, use the multi -meter to check across the "F" terminals. a. The reading should be very high in the dark (30K ohms* with ignition transformer closed) and very low in light (below 1600 ohms with ignition transformer lifted open). 7. Return the Transformer to its operating position and plug in the burner. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 71 eneragic_ 9.3.4 Metering Pump Assembly Testing Tools Required: 1/8" Allen wrench, 3/4" wrench, Flat -blade screwdriver, 120VAC capable Digital Multi -Meter, alligator clips or a jumper wire, Tachometer, stop watch and a graduated cylinder (ounce or milliliter). Metering Pump Assembly Function: Pumps fuel from the tank to the preheater and burner during the call for heat (given the preheater is up to temperature) Note: During this test, if the Pump Assembly does not function as stated, call Technical Services for assistance, or Customer Service to order service parts. di DANGER During a portion of this test, high voltage electrical components will be energized. Only a certified electrician is to perform the following procedures, and with extreme caution. Procedure: 1. Remove the pump assembly cover. 2. Inspect the coupler for damage or wear and make sure the set screws are tight and positioned on the flats of the two shafts. If worn or damaged, replace. 3. Inspect the condition of, and rotate by hand, the shafts (pump and gear box). If worn or damaged, replace. 4. Jumper the T -T terminals, as soon as you hear the burner start, jumper the F -F terminals. 5. ACAUTION Use Caution when approaching the pump assembly, rotating parts will be in operation. 6. Chattering from the gear box usually means damaged gearing. If chattering is heard or felt, replace the gear box. 7. Close the ball valve at the bottom of the preheater. 8. Using a multi -meter, verify the voltage across the wires going to the pump motor, should be around 115V AC. a. If voltage is not present, check the wires from the pump conduit to the wiring box and in the primary control to ensure a secure fit and connections are proper (refer to wiring diagram for wire location and colors). b. If voltage is present, but the motor does not function i. Remove jumper terminals from the T -T and F -F terminals. ii. Unhook the pink wire from the pump motor capacitor and hook it into the conduit wire feeding the black wire going to the capacitor. iii. Jumper the primary as in Step 5. 1. If the motor runs, the capacitor is bad and must be replaced. 2. If the motor does not run, remove jumpers from the primary. 3. Remove the coupler from the pump assembly, and jumper the primary as in Step 5 a. If the motor runs i. Remove jumpers and test with capacitor. 1. If the motor runs with the capacitor, then the pump is seized and should be replaced. 2. If motor does not run, replace capacitor. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support mew** 72 b. If motor does not run, replace motor. 9. With pump operating and preheater ball valve closed, verify that the pump outlet pressure is around 60 psi (pump is now in bypass). Speed testing with a tachometer 10. Test pump shaft speed per tachometer instruction and compare to values found in the table under step 4. Perform a suction test on system 11. Close fire stop valve and push down on the stem. Or, close ball valve. 12. Run pump until the vacuum gauge reads 15 in/Hg (should quickly reach), and stop pump. 13. Cap the discharge side of the pump and note the vacuum gauge reading. 14. Wait 30 minutes. 15. Vacuum gauge reading should be the same as noted in step 14. a. If not, check fittings and connections and retest, looking for signs of vacuum leaks. Flow test 16. Disconnect the 3/16" copper line from the inlet of the solenoid valve at the top of the preheater (you will use this tube to catch oil coming from the preheater.). 17. Have the graduated cylinder located so as to catch oil from the tube in step 17. 18. Start timing once the burner turns on by applying jumpers to the T & F terminals. 19. Allow to run for 120 seconds (2 minutes) and remove jumpers. 20. Fluid levels should be near the listed values in the following table. Model Listed Flow Rates [gph] Flow [oz/120 seconds] Flow [m1/120 seconds] 140 1.0 4.3 126.2 200 1.4 6.0 176.7 350 2.5 10.7 315.5 CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 73 6 mew** 9.3.5 Preheater and Nozzle PTC Testing Procedure Tools Required: 1/4", 5/16" wrenches, alligator clips or jumper wire, 120 VAC capable Digital Multi -Meter DMM, temperature probe, or the TPI combustion analyzer with a type K thermocouple attached. Preheater/Nozzle PTC Function: Heats the fuel to a temperature over 120°F for proper combustion. There are standby PTCs in the Preheater and the Nozzle that are energized whenever there is power to the burner in order to keep the fuel warm for immediate start up. When the burner is firing, there are extra run PTCs in the Preheater that energize to heat the fuel as it flows to the nozzle. Note: During this test, if the preheater does not function as stated, call Technical Services for assistance, or Customer Service to order a new preheater. ACAUTION The preheaters are on at all times, making the nozzle block and external preheater assembly very hot to the touch. CAUTION Make sure the Preheater has recently been maintained. Neglect will negatively affect the results of testing During a portion of this test, high voltage electrical components will be energized. Only a certified electrician is to perform the following procedures, and with extreme caution. A DANGER Procedure: 1. With the burner unplugged, verify the pins at the preheater plug and receptacle are straight and secure. 2. Check the 8 Amp fuse (refer to figure below). If the fuse is blown, there is a high probability that at least one of the run PTCs has shorted out. 3. Remove the wall thermostat connector from the side of the primary control and/or any jumpers across the T -T terminals. Preheater Plug Burner Plug Thermostat Cable Connector 8 Amp Run Fuse 4. Disconnect the preheater plug. Allow the preheater to cool, and check the following with the digital multimeter: Preheater Plug Wide Key at Top a. Verify that the circuit between the two thermostat pins is open. Run Heaters - Neutral . Standby Heater- Neutral b. Verify that there is a resistance of 100-1000 ohms between the Run Heaters- 115V 'tell �:Standby Heater- 115V standby power and neutral pins. ,� c. Verify that there is a resistance of z 100-1000 ohms between the run 7 (center Pin Not used) power and neutral pins. If any of these tests fail, the preheater will need to be replaced. Preheater Thermostat Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 74 ! i eflergy/ogic_ 5. Plug the burner in. Unplug the preheater. Turn the preheater ball valve off. Verify power by testing for 120VAC across the preheater receptacle (see figure). a. Verify power across the preheater receptacle Standby Heater pins. b. Note: This should only be performed Standby Run with the burner fully attached to the Heaters Keyway Heaters furnace cabinet. Next, jump across the Neutral Neutral TT and FF terminals on the Primary Standby 0 Run Control. Verify power across the Heaters • t Heaters preheater receptacle Run Heater pins. 115vac 4 Q 115vac c. Remove the jumpers from the TT and FF terminals, return the plug to the receptacle and open the ball valve T-Stat T-Stat when finished. 6. If the tests in step 4 and 5 are successful, plug the preheater into the receptacle and allow the preheater to heat up. After 30 minutes, the standby PTC should have heated the oil to the point where the preheater thermostat should have closed. Note: If the room temperature is below 50°F, allow additional time. Preheater Receptacle • • a. Using the temperature probe (or TPI combustion analyzer with a Preheater Pluq Wide Key at Top type K thermocouple attached), Run Heaters - Neutral � Standby Heater- Neutral touch the thermocouple probe to •�' • the surface of the top preheater Run Heaters— 115V 'rig �. Standby Heater— 115V cap (under the insulation). It should register above 120°F. Ntoi tt„,t b. Unplug the preheater and check 7 (center Pin Not used) for continuity across the thermostat pins of the preheater plug (refer to figure). If the preheater is hot, but there is no continuity across the thermostat pins, the preheater will need to be replaced. 7. If the burner does not light off well, there may be a problem with the Nozzle Block Standby PTC. To check the Nozzle Block Standby PTC: Remove the screws and flip back the transformer on top of the burner to expose the nozzle block. a. Using the temperature probe (or TPI combustion analyzer with a type K thermocouple attached), touch the thermocouple probe to the surface of the nozzle extrusion, it should register above 120°F b. Unplug the burner and check the physical connection and pins of the white PTC electrical plug. c. Return the transformer to its operational position. Plug the burner in. 8. If the burner starts okay, but then trips after a few minutes, then restarts again repeatedly, then the run pills may not be providing enough heat or the incoming oil is cold. If the incoming oil to the preheater is above 50°F and the preheater cannot maintain temperature, the preheater will need to be cleaned or replaced. Preheater Thermostat Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 75 energylogic 9.3.6 Primary Control Testing Tools Required: Flat -blade screwdriver, alligator clip or piece of jumper wire. Primary Controller Function: Processes the call for heat and distributes power to the necessary components in order to operate the furnace or boiler. During the startup and heating cycle, the primary controller looks for a flame to insure that there is combustion, and shuts down the burner if there is no flame. Note: During this test, if the Primary Controller does not function as stated, call Technical Services for assistance, or Customer Service to order a new Controller. Note: With the T -T terminals jumped, if the Burner does not operate, verify that the primary is sending power by checking the voltage across the orange and white terminals beneath the primary control. i► DANGER During a portion of this test, high voltage electrical components will be energized. Only a certified electrician is to perform the following procedures, and with extreme caution. Procedure: 1. Set the Wall Thermostat to a temperature setting lower than current ambient temperature. 2. Disconnect one of the wires going to the F -F terminals on the primary Testing the Limited Recycle Mode function of the Primary Control 3. Use the alligator clip or jumper wire to connect the T -T terminals a. Burner should run for —several seconds, resulting in reset. b. —If this happens, the primary control is working properly. i. If the burner does not operate, unplug the burner and check the connections in the burner wiring box. Then, repeat the testing. If the burner still does not operate, replace the primary control. ii. Go to step 7 if complete, else go to continue to step 4. Testing the Recycle function of the Primary Control 4. Use the alligator clip or jumper wire to connect the T -T terminals. 5. When burner starts, use alligator clip or jumper wire to connect the F -F terminals and allow to run for 1 minute. 6. Remove jumper from F -F terminals a. Burner should run for several seconds, resulting in reset. If this happens, the primary control is working properly. b. If the burner does not operate, unplug the burner and check the connections in the burner wiring box. Then, repeat the testing. If the burner still does not operate, replace the primary control. Completing the Test 7. Reconnect the wire removed in Step 2. 8. Return the Wall Thermostat setting to an appropriate temperature. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 76 6 energy/ogle. 9.3.7 Solenoid Valve Testing Tools Required: 7/16" wrench, Flat -blade screwdriver, 120VAC capable Digital Multi -Meter and alligator clips or jumper wires. Solenoid Valve Function: Blocks flow of the fuel from the preheater to the nozzle block when burner is not operating, and allows for flow during burner operation. The valve is a Normally Closed Valve. Note: During this test, if the Solenoid does not function as stated, call Technical Services for assistance, or Customer Service to order a new Solenoid Valve. CAUTION Make sure the Solenoid has recently been maintained. Neglect will negatively affect the results of testing. 1► DANGER During a portion of this test, high voltage electrical components will be energized. Only a certified electrician is to perform the following procedures, and with extreme caution. Procedure: 1. Unplug the burner plug from its receptacle. Unplug preheater. 2. Remove the primary control cover plate, allowing access to the terminal strip under controller. 3. Find the solenoid valve wires, purple and white of the same gauge, and remove from terminal strip. 4. Using a multi -meter, test for continuity across the solenoid wires. There should be continuity across wires. 5. Leaving the purple and white wires disconnected, loosely replace the primary cover. 6. Remove copper tubing from between the solenoid and the nozzle (have cup or disposable towel ready to catch oil). 7. ACAUTION Wear Safety Glasses for the following steps! 8. Plug in the burner and jumper the T -T terminals. 9. After the burner starts, jumper the F -F terminals. 10. Holding the cup near the open end of the solenoid valve, observe to see if the valve leaks while the burner is running. The valve should not leak during operation. 11. Remove the T -T and F -F terminal jumpers. 12. Unplug the burner plug from its receptacle. Reconnect the solenoid to the terminal strip. Plug the burner back in. 13. Apply the jumpers as in steps 9 and 10. 14. The solenoid should open and oil should flow out of the solenoid. a. If oil does not flow, verify 105-120VAC is supplied to the solenoid from the terminal strip. 15. Remove the jumpers from the T -T terminals, then the F -F terminals and unplug the burner. 16. Return the wires, primary, copper and preheater plug to their operational positions. 17. Plug in the burner. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 77 6 energy/oak 9.3.8 Top Suction Kit Testing Tools Required: Adjustable wrenches, alligator clips Top Suction Kit Function: Save time/money and increase reliability when delivering fuel from the top of various types of tanks. An EnergyLogic Top Suction Kit combines fuel pick-up with a foot valve and a low fuel cut off switch. The fuel pick-up line has a copper tube, increasing reliability of the fuel delivery. An EnergyLogic Low Fuel Cutoff Switch is provided to interrupt operation when the fuel level in the tank is low, reducing the chance of introducing air into the fuel lines. Note: During this test, if the Top Suction Kit does not function as stated, call Technical Services for assistance. Note: To check low fuel cut-off function, see Thermostat Testing (Section 9.3.1). Procedure : 1. Run the pump vacuum check (Section 9.3.4, steps 12 —16) and make sure that you have proper and tight flare connections. If there is a leak, repair it or call for assistance. 2. Disconnect the 3/8" copper tube at union above the tank. Disconnect wiring for low fuel cut-off switch. 3. Remove the suction copper and foot valve from tank. 4. Clean the oil from the suction copper and foot valve thoroughly. 5. With the suction copper vertical (as it mounts in the tank), fill the tube with oil. Place a clean paper towel under the foot valve. 6. Let the filled assembly set for 20 minutes. Inspect for oil leaks on the paper towel. 7. If there is evidence of a leak, and it can be located, repair if possible using thread sealant. If repair is not possible, call for assistance or order replacement parts. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 78 6 energp'oy►ic. 9.3.9 Iron Core Transformer Testing Tools Required: Flat -blade screwdriver, 120 VAC capable Digital Multi -Meter (must have mA AC capability) and alligator clips or a jumper wire. Transformer Function: Transforms 120 Volts into a low ampere, high voltage (10,000 V) supply to the electrode. This provides the spark needed for combustion. Note: During this test, if the Transformer does not function as stated, call Technical Services for assistance, or Customer Service to order a service part. EnergyLogic does not recommend the use of a screwdriver or any other conductor to contact the transformer springs other than the testing procedure below! A DANGER During a portion of this test, high voltage electrical components will be energized. Only a certified electrician is to perform the following procedures, and with extreme caution. Procedure: 1. Unplug the preheater. 2. Use the screwdriver to loosen the primary control mounting cover and lift to allow access to terminal strip underneath. 3. With the burner plugged in, jumper the T -T terminals to simulate a call for heat. When the burner starts, jumper the F -F terminals on the primary control. 4. Find the Black wires coming from the transformer and cautiously check the voltage across the terminals. Should read between 105 and 120 volts AC. a. If reading is not within range, call your electrician to rectify voltage issue. There may be an issue with your local power company. 5. Remove jumpers from T -T and F -F terminals. 6. Unplug the burner plug from its receptacle. 7. Loosen or remove two ignition transformer screws. 8. Tilt back the transformer. 9. Verify that the springs are making contact with the electrode extensions by visually aligning the springs with the extensions. If they are misaligned, reshape the springs to ensure good contact. If soot is present, clean with wire brush or emery cloth. 10. Use Caution when approaching the transformer springs! They will be energized with step 11. 11. Plug in the burner and replace the jumpers as in step 3. You will need to disconnect the yellow wires from the terminal strip to the cad cell for the burner to restart. Using a digital multi -meter: 12. Using your digital multi -meter a. Without an amp clamp (must have mA AC capability) i. Set the reading to amperes. ii. Test amperes from spring to spring. iii. Reading should be between 20mA and 26mA with a nominal of 23mA. (transformer should be labeled) CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 79 ! i ever logic. b. With an amp clamp (must have mA AC capability) i. With burner plug unplugged, run wire from spring to spring of the transformer. ii. Plug in the burner and apply jumpers as in step 11. iii. Using the amp clamp around the wire, read the amperes. 1. Reading should be between 20mA and 26mA with a nominal of 23mA. (transformer should be labeled) 13. Remove jumpers from T -T and F -F terminals. 14. Unplug the burner plug from its receptacle. 15. Return the Transformer and Primary Controller to its operating position and plug in the burner. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 80 ote energy/ogle. 9.3.10 Fan and Limit Controller Testing Tools Required: Screwdriver Fan and Limit Controller Function: Turns fan on and off at designed temperatures. For safety, the controller prevents overheating of the furnace by turning off the burner at a designated limit temperature. Note: During this test, if the Controller does not function as stated, call Technical Services for assistance, or Customer Service to order a service part. Procedure: 1. The fan and limit control is the small silver box next to the hour meter on the furnace cabinet above the burner for models 140H/200H/350H. 2. Remove the Fan and Limit switch cover by squeezing and pulling it off. 3. The Fan Off, Fan On, and High Limit tabs should be set as follows: Models 140H and 200H Fan Off at 90°F/32°C Fan On at 130°F/54°C High Limit at 250°F/121 °C Models 350H: Fan Off at 110°F/32°C Fan On at 150°F/54°C High Limit at 230°F/121 °C 4. Turn the furnace on and watch the fan and limit dial as the furnace rises in temperature. The blower should come on when the Fan On temp is reached and stay on. Turn the wall thermostat down to stop the burner. The blower should stay on to cool the heat exchanger (combustion chamber) until it reaches the Fan Off temp on the dial. 5. To check the high limit function, turn power to the furnace off at the breaker box and lock out. Disconnect a blower lead in the blower wiring junction box above the blower. Cap the wire to prevent accidental shorting once power is restored. Turn the power back on and start the furnace. Watch the fan and limit dial. Your burner should shut off when the dial reaches the High Limit setting. 6. Now, turn off and lock out the power and reconnect the blower. When you turn the power back on, the blower will come on to cool the heat exchanger. 7. If the fan and limit control does not operate as described above, replace it with an identical fan and limit control, following the instructions provided with the control. Ai DANGER Fan Off Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 81 ener yogic 10. Appendices 10.1 Furnace Wiring and Oil Schematic Furnace System Wiring Diagram z 1— - O • CO NOZZLE PREHEATER ✓ Y • l 0 111 0 o. z O 0'?' 0 0 1 Or z Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support O W J O h 82 ene gjl gic_ Preheater Plug Pin Diagram Wide Key at Top Run Heaters - Neutral Run Heaters — 115V Standby Heater - Neutral Preheater Thermostat Standby Heater —115V (Center Pin Not Used) Primary Control Circuit (with 24 VAC thermostat) Cad Cell Oil Schematic T of T° Primary Control Tank Float Switch (Optional) Wall Thermostat 0. O Preheater Thermostat BURNER ASSEMBLY DISCHARGE SIDE PUMP ASSEMBLY SUCTION SIDE PRESSURE RELIEF? RECIRCULATION LOOP FILTER ASSEMBLY Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support ROM TANK 83 energyieg►ic_ 10.2 Carlin 50200E Primary Control Car/in Combustion Technology, Inc. Motor load Alarm contacts Model 50200 CAD Cell Oil Primary Control Data Sheet • Interrupted duty ignition • Recycle on flame failure • Serviceman Reset Protection Latch -up after 3 consecutive lockouts • Diagnostic LED's Status. lockout, flame • 15 -second TFI/30-second TFI '_ FL4.. 60 LF,;- VAC.60HZ.633 24... -C DC. 24 +3 1 +:140•F. • Thermostat/aquastat compatible • SMC Technology • Pump Prime • Alarm contacts Thermostat anticipator current IreStietaftil *oh Agencies **Jo, ecog^'z<_d:US S Canadai Installing and wiring Warning — The 50200 control must be installed and serviced only by a qualffied service technician. 1. Always disconnect power source before wiring to avoid electrical shock or damage to the control. All wiring must comply with applicable codes and ordinances. 2. Thermostat terminals (T–T) provide a current source. Never apply external power to these terminals under any circumstances. 3. Alarm terminals provide a 24 VACNDC-rated dry contact, suitable for use with security/fire alarm systems such as Carlin Secure Hear'. Mounting • The control may be mounted on a 4" x 4" junction box in any convenient location on the bumer, fumace or wall. The location must not exceed the ambient temperature limit, 140°F. Wiring • Wiring must comply with local and national electrical codes, and with the wiring diagram. Field checks 1. Safety timing (TFI) test — Remove one cad cell wire (F -F). Start burner. The control should lockout within the TFI time limit. Replace cad cell wire. 2. Flame failure test— Start burner. After flame is established (after TFI period), close the oil supply hand valve. This will cause a flame failure sequence as described on the reverse side of this Data sheet. The control should recycle (restart after 65 seconds). 3. If control does not operate as described, check the wiring. L2 L2 L2 MIN LIMIT IN ■ IGNITOR seova Start-up & operation NOTICE Do not start the burner if the combustion chamber contains oil or oil vapor. Model 50200 diagnostic LED's – Amber OFF ® – Green OFF Q – Red OFF iO – Amber ON ® – Green ON o - Red ON -Amber FLASHING – Green FLASHING - Red FLASHING Per UL requirements, the control will not tum on if the cad cell senses flame during the self -test. If the cad cell sees light (flame) at the beginning of a cycle, the control will remain in self -test mode until the cad cell no longer senses light (flame). The amber LED will blink momentarily * every 3 to 4 seconds and green LED will be on or blinking. OOO Power ON Open all manual oil line valves. Close the line switch. (If Red LED tums on constant 0, control is in lockout. See below to reset.) DOO Self -test 1 The control performs a "boot -up" test to verify internal operation each time power is applied to the black wire. The amber LED tums on and the test continues for about 5 seconds. If the test fails, the control tums the amber LED off and repeats this test sequence until successful. COO Stand-by (Thermostat circuit open and/or limit circuit open) If Self -test 1 is successful, amber LED tums off and control waits for thermostat circuit to close and a limit input. 0®® Call for heat Set thermostat to call for heat. Thermostat circuit must be closed and black wire must receive power from the limit circuit. Self -test 2 If a failure occurs in this self -check, the control won't start and the amber LED blinks 1 second on, 4 seconds off, until serviced or the problem clears. These failures include CAD cell seeing light, intemal failure, or line voltage <90V. See service section. COO Burner on After the self -test, amber LED tums off. The ignitor starts, followed 2 seconds later by the motor. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 84 energyogic_ Start-up & operation continued... Pump Prime To enter pump prime: 1. Start a CFH cycle. During Pre -Ignition or Pre -Purge, press Reset until motor tums off (10 seconds), then release the button. When motor turns back on, within 5 seconds, press the Reset button until the amber LED starts to flash. You are in Pump Prime, release Reset button. Optional Pump Prime notes: 1) If lost, press Reset for 1 second and release, then if the control is not in Pump Prime, restart the se- quence. 2) If Reset is released before end of first 10 seconds, the control retums to Standby and restarts another CFH cycle. 3) If reset is not pressed the second time, a normal CFH cycle will continue. 4) If motor and igniter are on and amber LED is flashing, the control is in Pump Prime. 5) Pump Prime will exit standby if flame is detected, or 60 seconds has elapsed. or loss of TT or Limit, or Reset button is pressed. The cad cell must sense flame within the TFI time limit (trial for ignition). After CAD cell senses flame, the ignitor stays on another 10 seconds. (flame stabilization period). The bumer continues firing during call for heat if the CAD cell is sensing flame. Only the green LED is on during normal running. If cad cell does not sense flame within the TFI time limit after the burner starts, lockout occurs. The control tums the red LED on constant, and closes the alarm contact. To Reset Push in and hold reset button for 1 second, then release. ®0® TFI ®•® Run ®DO Lockout Q®Q Latch -up ®0® ®©® ®CD® NOTICE If the control locks out 3 times during a single call for heat, latch -up occurs. The control turns on both the amber and red LED's constant. You must use the special procedure below to reset the control after latch -up. Reset after latch -up- only a qualified service technician should attempt to reset the control after atchup. The problem that caused the repeated burner lockouts must be corrected before returning the burner to normal operation. Push in and hold the reset button for 10 seconds. The amber LED will begin to flash. After the LED begins flashing, continue holding the reset button for 20 seconds. The LED's will turn off. Release the reset button and the control will restart (releasing the button before the LED's tum off will cause the control to remain in latch -up). The 50200 control will not reset from lockout or latch -up if power is interrupted. Flame failure If the CAD cell loses flame signal during operation (after the TFI), the red LED flashes. The burner shuts off within 2 seconds. Recycle: Control waits for 65 seconds (with red LED flashing), then begins again at Self -test. Red LED goes off ®. End cycle Set thermostat (or aquastat) to stop call for heat. The bumer shuts off within 2 seconds after end of call for heat. Stand-by Control remains in stand-by mode until limit circuit sends power to the black wire and thermostat circuit closes (call for heat). Service & Troubleshooting Bumer (control) will not come on ®n® No power to control • Check limit circuit to the control (at least 102 vac). • Check all electrical connections. ®Q Control is in lockout • Red LED will be on. Press the reset button for 1 second. • If the control returns immediately to lockout, the Safety Monitor- ing Circuit may have detected an intemal control problem. Replace the control. !•® CAD cell seeing light Green LED on, and amber LED blinking 1 second on, 4 seconds off. Remove one yellow lead from FF terminals, and the flame test plug. If the amber LED remains flashing, the control is defective. If the amber LED goes OFF, the control is OK, and; • light is leaking into the bumer housing, OR • CAD cell is defective, OR • there is a problem with the CAD cell wiring or holder. • If appliance was recently shut down, CAD cell may see residual hot spots in chamber. To troubleshoot: • Attach multimeter to monitor CAD cell resistance. Dark resistance should be over 50K ohms, and room light resis- tance (control flipped open) should be at most 10K ohms Replace cell if necessary, or reinstall and close the burner housing. • Check for stray light by measuring the CAD cell resistance looking into the inactive combustion chamber. It should read at least 50 KOHMS. Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support Repeated flame failures ( ®Jif flashing red LED) Check for: • CAD cell is defective. Replace. • Air leaking into oil line causing flame out- check oil line connections and filter gasket. • Defective nozzle causing flame to be erratic- change nozzle. • Excessive airflow or draft causing flame to leave burner head - check for proper air band setting and draft. • Excessive back pressure causing flame to be erratic- check appliance and flue for soot:nglplugging. Control locks out after TFI (®®Q red LED on) Check for: • No oil to bumer- check oil :supply. filters, lines. • Shorted electrodes- inspect for cracked porcelain and replace as needed. • Poor spark- check electrode spacing and condition per burner manual. Replace or realign if necessary. • Nozzle clogged- replace nozzle. • Airflow too high- check air band setting. • Ignitor module defective- replace if no spark. • CAD cell defective • Oil valve (if used) stuck in closed position. • Check wiring connections. 85 6 ene gy/og%C_ 10.3 Furnace Specifications Multi -Fuel Burning Appliance Model Number EL -140H EL -200H EL -350H Bonnet Capacity Output BTU 112,000 BTU 160,000 BTU 280,000 BTU Fuel Input 1.0 GPH 1.4 GPH 2.5 GPH Nozzle Only No. 30609-5 No. 30609-5 No. 30609-28 Fuels ASTM D396 No. 2 Fuel Oil, Used Crankcase Oil, and Used Automatic Transmission Fluid Designed Outlet Air Temperature 250°F Maximum Flue Draft -0.05" WC (Minimum 10' Stack) Atomizing Air Pressure 9-11 PSI Blower Size 9" X 9" 10" X 10" 12" X 9" Unit Heater or Ductable 0.28" WC Maximum External Static Pressure Maximum Fuse Size 25A Blower Motor 1/3 HP, 115V/60Hz, 6.1A 1/2 HP, 115V/60Hz, 8.1A 1 HP, 115V/60Hz, 11.8A Burner Motor 1/5 HP, 115V/60Hz, 3.3A 1/5 HP, 115V/60Hz, 3.3A 1/5 HP, 115V/60Hz, 3.3A Metering Pump Motor 15Watt, 115V/60Hz, 0.35A Ignition Transformer & Control Circuit 115V/60Hz, 2.0A Oil Preheaters 115V/60Hz, 2.0A Maximum 115V/60Hz, 2.5A Maximum 115V/60Hz, 3.0A Maximum Minimum Clearance to Combustible Surfaces Top - 6" Front - 24" Sides 6" Rear - 6" Flue Pipe - 18" Bottom - 6" Warm air duct within 3' of furnace (when ducted) - 6" For commercial and industrial use only. In buildings where gas vapors may be present, the furnace must be mounted at least 8' above the floor. The furnace may be suspended from the ceiling. Normal continuous sound level: 77dBA CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 86 d enery/ogic. MODEL EL -140H (SHOWN WITH 250 GALLON SW TANK) EA . 824 §� 2=r 0 �§■ }2E IM �1 .q 0 iP El" °- <I�$ . / 1 `Ni I 16' CEILINGS zz /§ 0 5 0 I }kk 0uj \j§ CLMOO QW (40.14C woo 2°0z ¥y90 \2 e 2. 7i2\ ___-1— 0 oUJ y; ZZ-0-5)Ife ft ug k oi C@|1-615-471-5290 for Tech5clSupp rt f ITEM # 98030025 87 6 energy/00a MODEL EL -200H (SHOWN WITH 250 GALLON SW TANK) C ct <6 � LL wm J CO z < J io w .c(3 LL h wce =a 8 Ce 0Ww>I 020< Zj''1125.00 0<z �- 0 nww r2 0 z W 0 2 z g w U w U zz y O i ODiIle U Z < OJ hc0 V' d y W J 'r WIZ Z —0 <L.90 3Atne a (' LL, m a o wZ 0 i. J OC o- < < io CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 88 ene gylogic. ITEM # ?8030026 MODEL EL -350H (SHOWN WITH 250 GALLON SINGLE WALL TANK] e -)E2 `Lori -u, LiD8zn9 9c1 wo5.— :7128 7,7 o 0 zo- 8 <ZZ$ Ce WO 2,,`.2 08 Zo c L.L.1 U- ciLcc.; § Nr 8 .00io co= z z zlmuuk- C r - w 0 z. zo 2LT LIC uJ 0 W 00-145 ZU.dc) L'30 >•• 0- Lt.00 WNJ CLOW< Z 0.1 0 wc,u <1. LI]WO .-JZz UW— MZ tu, ;0 U z Z 64$ Z ce Z . Z Call 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support c,(11 c.:17; uou 89 eflersiogic. 10.4 Limited Warranty EnergyLogic, LLC, MANUFACTURER, warrants to the buyer that MANUFACTURER's furnace be free from defect in material and workmanship according to the provisions and limitations set forth herein for a period of one (1) year from the Effective Date (as defined below) or 1,500 hours of operation, whichever occurs first. The buyer is responsible for registering the unit with the MANUFACTURER. If the unit is not registered, the buyer is responsible for maintaining proof of the purchase date of the unit. The warranty coverage period begins on the date (the "Effective Date") of purchase, as established by the buyer, or otherwise on the date of manufacture as indicated by the serial number. No warranty claim examination shall commence until the unit is registered with the MANUFACTURER. Non -consumables or parts that are not associated with a maintenance service interval because of normal wear shall be warranted for a period of one (1) years from the Effective Date or 1,500 hours of operation, whichever occurs first. A second year will be activated when the product is registered with the Manufacturer with in the first 30 days of receipt of the Product. The heat exchanger chamber/combustion chamber shall be warranted for a period of ten (10) years from the Effective Date or 15,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first. The Furnace Limited Warranty includes 100% of parts coverage for heat exchanger replacement during the first five (5) years from the Effective Date or 7,500 hours of operation, whichever occurs first, with prorated coverage (from the Effective Date) for the remainder of the ten (10) year term. Parts (including heat exchangers) replaced during the original equipment warranty period as detailed herein shall carry either a one (1) year warranty from the date of purchase or the remainder of the factory warranty for the original equipment, whichever occurs last. In no event shall a part replaced under the original warranty carry a warranty that extends beyond one year from the expiration of the original factory warranty period. Warranty Exclusions: 1. Consumable parts or any part that is associated with a normal maintenance interval because of normal wear and tear (filters, seals, gaskets, air compressor vanes, batteries, insulation, furnace cabinets). 2. Products or parts which are not maintained in accordance with the service frequency and methods described in the MANUFACTURER'S instructions furnished and / or available upon request from the buyer. 3. Parts and products that are not installed and operated according to MANUFACTURER'S instructions furnished and / or available upon request from the buyer. 4. Repairs made with parts or accessories which are not genuine EnergyLogic LLC or EnergyLogic LLC approved 5. Installations not in accordance with Manufacturers Installation Manual, UL, NFPA guidelines, federal, state, and local codes and regulations, 6. Labor or other costs incurred in troubleshooting, repair, removal, transportation, installation, service or handling of parts. 7. Claims, representation, or warranty made by any dealer, distributor, or other person that is inconsistent with or is more expansive than the provisions provided herein. 8. Parts that are altered from original specifications of the MANUFACTURER or are damaged because of misuse, improper handling, storage, or use in conjunction with other parts not authorized by MANUFACTURER. 9. Products that have been moved from the original installation site or that have been sold or exchanged to a person other than the original buyer. 10. Equipment or products installed outside of the continental U.S. or Canada. 11. Products or parts in which the serial number has been altered, defaced, or removed. The buyer must assist the MANUFACTURER'S Technical Support group during over -the -phone problem diagnosis in order to help substantiate a warranty condition. A course of action will be determined by the MANUFACTURER if repair or replacement is deemed necessary. MANUFACTURER'S liability under this warranty shall be limited to the repair or replacement of any part or parts that may prove to be defective under such normal operation and use, subject to MANUFACTURER'S examination and determination to its satisfaction that such part or parts are so defective. Obtaining Warranty Service: If the local Service Provider is unknown, contact EnergyLogic, LLC at 5901 Crossings Blvd, Antioch, TN 37013, or at 1-615-471-5290. A representative will assist you in locating the nearest authorized service provider or in verifying the warranty coverage. The Unit Registration identification number will be required. Please refer to our website at www.energylogic.com for more information. In order for a warranty claim to be acknowledged by the MANUFACTURER, the buyer must be issued a Return Authorization (RA) number and the product must be Warranty Registered. After obtaining an RA number, the buyer must properly package the part to avoid damage during shipment with the.RA.number visible on the outside of the box. A credit card number must be provided in order for the replacement part to be shipped and the part must be returned within 30 days of receipt of the replacement part in order to avoid charges. If MANUFACTURER determines that a problem with a product or part is not covered under the Limited Warranty, the buyer will be notified and informed of service alternatives available on a fee basis. DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF DAMAGES: THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, TO THE EXCLUSION OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS THAT MAY BE EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED BY ANY LITERATURE, PACKAGING, SAMPLES, MODELS, DATA OR PERSONS. MANUFACTURER DOES NOT ASSUME, NOR DO WE AUTHORIZE ANY EMPLOYEE, AGENT, OR OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR US, ANY OTHER RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE OF THE GOODS COVERED HEREBY. MANUFACTURER HEREBY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE. MANUFACTURER'S MAXIMUM LIABILITY HEREUNDER SHALL NEVER EXCEED THE COST OF THE PRODUCT. MANUFACTURER IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR OR LIABLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THE GOODS COVERED HEREBY OR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO CONTRACT, TORT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, LOST PROFITS OR GOODWILL, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, LOST FUEL, LOST SAVINGS, LABOR CHARGES OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO PERSONS, BUSINESS OR PROPERTY WHETHER AS A RESULT OF BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO THE PRECISE TERMS SET FORTH ABOVE, AND PROVIDES EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER REMEDIES. CaII 1-615-471-5290 for Technical Support 90 energy/ogle. 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Mechanical Summary 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 MECH-SUM Revised January 2017 Project Information Project Title: Loomis US - Tukwila, WA Date 1/7/2018 Applicant Information. Provide contact information for individual who can respond to inquiries about compliance form information provided. For Building Dept. Use Company Name: Loomis US Company Address: 15450 Nelson Place Tukwila, WA 98188 Applicant Name: Mark Kartchner PE Applicant Phone: 509-922-0383 Project Description Briefly describe mechanical systems in the text box provided 0 Total Bldg Performance (TBP) This path includes all mandatory provisions per C401.2 Option 2. MECH-SUM, MECH-CHK, and C407 Energy Analysis forms required. ❑ New Building 0 Building Addition 0 Tenant Improvement 0 System Retrofit 0 No System Changes trung. *MOO Design Load Calculations building heating, cooling or includes all applicable G Load calculation summary • MECH-LOAD-CALC Form Provide design load calculations for all mechanical systems and equipment serving the ventilating needs. If a load calculation summary is provided with the permit documents That compliance information then the MECH-LOAD-CALC form is not required. Mechanical Schedules 13 Mechanical Plans 0 MECH-EQ Forms (TBD) Indicate location of equipment compliance information. If provided on plans then MECH-EQ forms are not required, however, include on plans all applicable compliance information listed in MECH-EQ tables. Dedicated Outdoor Air System Requirements and High Efficiency VAV Alternate 0 DOAS is required per C403.6 effective July 1, 2017 (office, retail, education, library and All occupied, conditioned areas shall be served by a DOAS that delivers required ventilation not require space conditioning fan operation. Space conditioning fans cycled off when no fire station occupancies) air in a manner that does heating or cooling is required. Exception 1) lieu of DOAS (C403.6, Exception library or fire station) C402.4.1.4 with 100% of • Ventilation provided via natural ventilation per 2015 IMC in lieu of DOAS (C403.6, 0 Ventilation and space conditioning provided by a HEVAV system per C403.7 in ❑ DOAS included in project, although not required (occupancy not office, retail, education, 0 DOAS related allowances included in project: • Prescriptive vertical fenestration maximum area allowance increased to 40% per conditioned floor area in building served by DOAS. • Exception to air economizer per C403.3 Exception 1, include MECH-ECONO form. Fan Power 0 Project includes HVAC air distribution systems that provide heating and/or cooling If yes, provide a MECH-FANSYS -SUM form. 0 For one or more systems, the total fan motor nameplate hp of all fans in HVAC system exceeds 5hp. If yes, provide a seperate MECH-FANSYS form for each HVAC system exceeding the 5 horsepower threshold. Refer to Section C403.2.11 and MECH-FANSYS-DOC for requirements and exceptions. HVAC Hydronic Systems ❑ Hydronic chilled water ■ Water -loop heat pump El No hydronic systems • Hydronic heating water • Geothermal C406 Additional Efficiency Options - ❑ C406.2 More efficient HVAC equipment and fan systems Requires 90% of heating and cooling capacity to be equipment listed in tables C403.2.3(1)-(9) or air -to -wafer heat pumps and heat recovery chillers. All equipment listed in tables C403.2.3(1)-(7) must be 15% more efficient than minimum requirements. All stand alone supply, retum, and exhaust fans over 1hp must have FEQ t 71 and must be selected within 10% of maximum total or static pressure. 0 C406.6 Dedicated outdoor air system (DOAS) Requires 90% of conditioned floor area to be served by a DOAS per C403.6 that delivers required ventilation air in a manner that does not require space conditioning fan operation. 0 C406.7 Reduced energy in service water heating Requires 90% of floor area be in occupancy types listed in C406.7.1 and that 60% ggpya((l0iiy�tp[ p�ergy use be provided by heat pump, waste heat recovery or solar water -heating systems. t V C V c u meRIEIbliNVED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR 11 2018 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION CITY OF TUKVNILA M I a..- 0 00 6 PERMIT CENTER 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and alt RI Mechanical Summary, pg. 2 MECH-SUM 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised January 2017 Service Water Heating■ Systems Equipment Type (s) D Hot water heating tank(s) • Instantaneous ID No service water systems Heat exchange from Dedicated boiler ■ 9 space heat boder or central hot water/steam Distribution Type (s) ■ Circulation System • On -demand Commissioning Commissioning is required for: Li Mechanical systems per C408.2 ■ Service water heating systems per C408.4 If required, commissioning shall be performed for all applicable systems regardless of individual equipment capacity. Exceptions to commissioning requirements: ❑ Total output capacity of all mechanical space conditioning systems in the building do not exceed 240,000 Btu/h cooling or 300,000 Btu/h heating. Mechanical systems commissioning not required. D Capacity of largest service water heating system in building does not exceed 200,000 Btu/h. Service water heating systems commissioning not required. Low Energy and Semi -Heated Spaces (Note 6 and 7) Space Type Location in Plan(s) Space(s) Served Area Served, square feet Heating Capacity, Btu/h (Note 4) Cooling Capacity, Btu/h (Note 5) Peak Space Conditioning Capacity, Btulh-sf Compliance Check Notes Note 4 - Provide total installed heating output capacity of systems serving Low Energy or Semi -Heated space(s) in btuh. Note 5 - Provide total installed cooling capacity of system serving Low Energy space(s) in Btu/h. Not allowed for semi -heated spaces. Enter 0 if no cooling. Note 6 - Refer to Section C402.1.1 Low Energy Building. lntalled peak space conditioning capacity, heating or cooling, may not exceed 3.4 Btu/est Note 7 - Refer to Section C402.1.1.1 and Semi -Heated Space definition in Chapter 2. Total heating output capacity may not exceed 8 Btu/h sf. Only systems without electric resistance heating and no cooling are eligible for the wall insulation exception under semi -heated. 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 - Page 5 of 20 Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist MECH-CHK 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings includktaR2 & R3 over 3 stories and al R1 Revised January 2017 Project Title: Loomis US - Tukwila, WA (Date 1/7/2018 The folowng information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechanical systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicable (ves.no.na) Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location in Documents_ Building Department Notes Equipment - Sizing, Performance and Type NA C403.1 Exempt process equipment Identify equipment to be used in manufacturing, industrial or commercial processes that do not provide space conditioning; identify provisions applicable to this equipment per C403.1 exception Yes C403.2.1 Load calculations Provide bad calculations performed per ASHRAE Std 183 or equivalent, using design parameters per C302 and Appendix C; include load adjustments to account for energy recovery Yes C403.2.2 Equipment and system sang Indicate that output capacities of heating and cooing equipment and systems are no greater than the smallest available equipment size that exceeds the calculated bads; note exceptions taken Yes C403.2.3 0403.2.3.2 0403.2.13.1 HVAC equipment performance requirements (efficiency) Provide equipment schedules on plans or complete MECH-EQ forms indicating type, capacity, rated and WSEC minimum efficiencies for all heating and cooling equipment; include supply and OSA cfms and operating hours for all air systems; identify heating and cooling equipment that does not have a corresponding WSEC mnirnum efficiency (manufacturer rated) Yes 0405.8 C403.2.14 Electric motor efficiency List al motors a 1/12 hp (that are not ntegral to a rated piece of equipment) in the mechanical or electrical equipment schedules on plans; indicate hp, rpm, number of poles and rated efficiency, or exception applied For fractional hp motors (1/12 - 1 hp), indicate whether they are an electronically commutated motor, have rated efficiency of at least 70%, or exception taken NA C403.2.11.1 Fan power limitation For all HVAC fan systems that provide heating and / or cooling, provide system total nameplate hp in MECH-FANSYS-SUM form For all applicable HVAC systems with total fan motor hp > 5hp, verify fan system motor hp or bhp complies with fan power limits per equations in Table C403.2.11.1(1), provide MECH- FANSYS form for each system NA C403.2.11.2 Motor nameplate hp For all applicable HVAC systems with total fan motor hp > 5hp, indicate fan motors specified are the smallest available motor hp size greater than fan bhp, note exceptions taken NA 0403.2.11.3 Fan efficiency For al applicable HVAC systems with total fan motor hp > 5hp, identify in equipment schedule all fans required to comply with fan efficiency grade and indicate rated FEG is 2 67, or exception taken; indicate these fans are sized so total efficiency is within 15% of the fan maximum total efficiency NA 0403.2.11.4 Group R occupancy exhaust fan efficacy For all exhaust fans < 400 cfrn in Group R occupancies, indicate in equipment schedule the fan flow rate and efficacy (cfm/watt), or exception taken; refer to Table 0403.2.11.4 (CE -57) NA 0403.2.13 Variable flow capacity - fans For fan motors a 7.5 hp, indicate method of variable flow control (VSD or equivalent method) in equipment schedule, or exception taken; for equivalent method for an HVAC system refer to HVAC System Controls for additional requirements NA C403.2.3 Maximum air cooled chiller capacity For chilled water plants and buildings with > 500 tons of cooling capacity, indicate air-cooled chiller capacity is s 100 tons, or exception taken NA NA C403.4 Large capacity cooling systems For buildings with k 300 tons of cooling capacity, Indicate method of multi -stage or variable capacity control (VSD, multiple staged compressors, or max capacity of any sngte unit < 66% of the total) NA NA 0403.2.3.1 Non-standard water-cooledFor centrifugal chillers water-cooled centrifugal chllers not designed for operation at standard conditions, provide calculations documenting maximum full load and part bad rated equipment performance requirements NA NA 0403.2.13.1 0403.4.3.2 Centrifugal fan open -circuit coolnq towers For open -circuit centrifugal fan cooling towers with a 1,100 gpm capacity, indicate cooling towers comph, with efficiency requirements for axial fan open circuit cooling towers NA NA 0403.4.2 C403.4.2.5 Large capacity toiler systems For single boilers with > 500,000 Btu/h capacity, indicate multi -stage or modulating bumer NA For boiler system (single or multiple) with > 1,000,000 Btu/h capacity, indicate tumdown ratio per Table 0403.4.2.5 and method (multiple single input boiers, modulating boilers, or combination) NA NA C403.2.13 Variable flow capacity - pumps For pump motors i 7.5 hp, indicate method of variable flow control (VSD or equivalent method) n equipment schedule, or exception taken; for equivalent method for a hydronic system refer to Hydronic Svstem Controls for additional requirements NA NA 0403.2.3 Gas and oilfired forced air fumace and unit heaters For forced air fumaces with capacity a 225,000 Btu/h and all unit heaters, indicate in equipment schedule intermittent ignition or IID, flue or draft damper, and rated jacket loss NA Y. 0403.2.4.8 Combustion heating equipment For combustion heating equipment with output capacity > 225,000 Btu/h, indicate modulating or staged combustion control M4.01 NA C403.2.3.3 Packaged electric heating / cooing equipment Verify all packaged electric equipment with > 6,000 Btu/h cooling capacity and any amount of heating is a heat pump; include in equipment schedules NA 0403.2.12 Heating outside a buildingIndicate systems providing heating in non -enclosed outdoor occupied spaces are radiant systems; refer to HVAC System Controls for additional requirements NA 0403.2.7.1 Kitchen exhaust hoods Indicate on plans the type, duty and exhaust air rate of each kitchen hood, refer to HVAC System Controls for additional requirements Yes C403.2.4.3 Outdoor supply air, exhaust and relief dampers Indicate locations of OSA intake, and exhaust and relief outlet dampers on plans; indicate whether dampers are Class 1 motorized, or gravity and exception taken (include leakage rating, cfm/sf); refer to HVAC System Controls for additional requirements for OSA dampers Yes 0403.2.4.3 Return air dampers Indicate locations of retum air dampers that are integral to economizer operation; verify dampers are motorized; indicate whether dampers are Class 1, or within packaged equipment eligible for leakage rating exception (include leakage rating, cfm/sf) NA 0403.2.4.3 Stairway and shaft vent dampers Indicate location of stairway and shaft vent dampers on plans; verify dampers are Class 1 motorized; refer to HVAC System Controls for additional requirements NA 0403.2.4.4 Zone isolation dampers For systems serving areas > 25,000 sf or spanning more than one floor, that include areas that are expected to be occupied non -simultaneously; identify isolation zone areas on plans and locations of associated isolation dampers in HVAC distribution system; refer to HVAC System Controls for additional requirements NA 0403.2.3.4 Humidification For cooing systems with humidification equipment that are also required to have air economizer, indicate humidifier is adiabatic (direct evaporative or fog atomization), or exception taken 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 - Page 6 of 20 Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist MECH-CHK 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial BuNdin s including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and al R1 Revised January 2017 Project Title: Loomis US - Tukwila, WA Date 1/7/2018 The folowing information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechanical systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicable (ves.no.nal Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location in Documents Building Department Notes Additional Efficiency Package Option, More Efficient HVAC Equipment & Fan Performance - Must comply with all 3 provisions to be eligible NA 0406.2.1 C403.2.3 HVAC system selection To comply with additional efficiency package option, calculate the percentage of heating and cooling equipment in the project (based on output capacity) that do not have a corresponding WSEC fisted efficiency; shal be less than 10% to comply NA C406.2.2 C403.2.3 Minimum equipment efficiency To comply with additional efficiency package option, indicate that al listed heating and cooling equipment have a rated efficiency that exceeds WSEC listed efficiency by at least 15% NA 0406. 2,3 0403.2.11.3 Minimum fan efficiency To comply with additional efficiency package option, indicate rated FEG of stand alone fans is a 71; indicate these fans are sized so the fan efficiency at design conditions is within 10% of the maximum total or static efficiency HVAC System Controls Yes C403.2.4.1 Thermostatic controls (thermostats and humidistats) Indicate locations of thermostatic and humidity control devices and the zones they serve on plans, including perimeter system zones Where adjacent (neighboring) zones are controlled by separate thermostats (including perimeter systems used to offset heat gain or loss), and are connected by permanent openings > 10% of either zone sf area, indicate controls configured to prevent adjacent zones from operating in conflicting modes (one in heat, other in cool); applies to adjacent perimeter zones, adjacent nonperimeter zones, and adjacent perimeter and nonperimeter zones If applying Exception 2 to nonperimeter zones adjacent to perimeter zones, indicate that setpoints and deadband settings in these zones are coordinated so cooling in a nonperimeter zone does not occur until the temperature in that zone is 5°F higher than the adjacent Perimeter zone temperature in heating NA 0403.2.4.1.1 Heat pump supplementary heat Indicate staged heating operation with compression as the frst stage of heating and supplemental heating controlled with outdoor lock -out temperature set to 40°F or less YES 0403.2.4.1.2 Deadband Indicate zone thermostatic controls configured with 5°F mininum deadband for systems that control both heating and cooling NA C403.2.4.1.3 Setpoirt overlap restriction (thermostats) If separate heating and cooling systems with separate thermostatic control devices are used to serve a zone, indicate locations of both thermostatic control devices and the zone they serve on plans Indicate a limit switch, mechanical stop or DDC control with programming to prevent simultaneous heating and cooling YES C403.2.4.2 C403.2.4.2.1 0403.2.4.2.2 Automatic setback and shutdown Indicate zone thermostatic controls configured with required automatic setback and manual override functions, setback temperatures, and control method (automatic time clock or programmable controls); note exceptions taken YES 0403.2.4.2.3 Automatic (optimum) start Indicate system controls that adjust equipment start time required to bring each area served up to design temperature just prior to scheduled occupancy Yes C403.2.4.3 Outdoor su pply air dampers Indicate automatic controls configured to close OSA damper during unoccupied equipment operation; not including economizer cooling, night flush or IMC required OSA / exhaust NA 0403.2.4.3 Stairway and shaft vent dampers Indicate method of activation of stairway and shaft vent dampers (fire alarm or interruption of power) NA C403.2.4.4 Zone isolation controls For systems serving areas > 25,000 sf or spanning more than one floor, that include areas that are expected to be occupied non -simultaneously; indicate controls that allow for independent space conditioning of isolation zones; or exception taken NA 0403.2.12 Heating outside a buildingIndicate occupancy sensing or timer switch controls configured to automaticaly shut off heating system when area served is unoccupied NA 0403.2.4.5 Snow melt systems Indicate automatic controls configured to shut off system when pavement temperature exceeds 50°F and no precipitation is falling, and when outdoor air temperature exceeds 40°F NA C403.2.4.6 Freeze protection system controls Indicate automatic controls to shut off system when outdoor temperature exceeds 40°F, or conditions protect fluid from freezing NA C403.2.4.9 Group R1 hotel / motel guest rooms For hotels and motels with over 50 guest rooms, indicate automatic controls serving guest rooms that are capable of setback (heating) and set-up (cooling) of temperature setpoint by at least 5°F; indicate control method - activated by room entry or occupancy sensor 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stones and all R1 - Page 7 of 20 Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist MECH-CHK 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buidings ncludin R2 & R3 over 3 stories and al R1 Revised January 2017 Project Title: Loomis US - Tukwila, WA Date 1 /7 /2018 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechanical systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicable (ves.no.na) Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location in Documents Binding Department Notes 0403.2.4.10 0403.2.4.11 Group R2 / R3 dwelling units, Group R2 sleeping units For primary space conditioning system, indicate 5-2 programmable thermostats capable of two setback periods per day; for all thermostats indicate purpose (heating only, cooing only, or both), required temperature range and at minimum a 10°F deadband; or exception taken Yes Yes C403.2. 0403.2.11.4 Indicate method of ventlation ar delivery (natural or mechanical) for each zone If mechanicaly delivered, ndicate that systems are configured to provide not more than 150% of, but at least the minimum required volume of outdoor ar to each zone per IMC, ASHRAE 62.1 or other applicable code (WAC, OSHA, etc); or exception taken If delivered via natural ventilation, identify requred elements per IMC nGudng minimum openable area to the outdoors or qualifying adjoining spaces YES C403.2.6.2 Demand controled ventilation Identify spaces > 500 sf with occupant load > 25 people/1,000 sf per IMC; for each space indicate whether it is served by an HVAC system with total design OSA > 3,000 cfm, and / or the system has arside economizer or automatic modulating OSA damper, indicate OSA controls are configured to provide demand controlled ventilation or provide supporting documentation for applied exception NA C403.2.6.3 Occupancy sensors For gyms, classrooms, auditoriums and conference rooms > 500 sf, indicate occupancy -based OSA damper or shuts-off OSA control when space is unoccupied and method (closesft equipment); or alternate means provided to automatically reduce OSA when space is partially occupied NA C403.2.6.4 0403.2.6.4.1 Enclosed loading dock ventilationdetection For enclosed loading docks, indicate ventilation / exhaust system method of activation (gas system for CO and NO2, or occupancy sensors), and control method (staged or modulating) NA C403.2.6.4 C403.2.6.4.2 Enclosed parking garage ventilation For enclosed parking garages, indicate ventilation / exhaust system activated by gas detection system for CO and NO2, and control method (staged or modulating); or exception taken NA C403.2.7.1 Kitchen exhaust hoods Provide calculations that show a balanced accounting of total kitchen exhaust (include al hoods) with % of: supply air, transfer ar from adjacent spaces, and make-up air; 11 applicable, indicate that direct make-up air to each hood does not exceed 10% of hood exhaust For kitchens with total hood exhaust exceeding 2,000 cfm, indicate exhaust air rate per Table 0403.2.7.1 and compliance method (DCV, energy recovery, or transfer ar that would otherwise be exhausted) NA C403.2.7.2 Laboratory exhaust systems Refer to Systems Requiring Energy Recovery for requirements NA C403.2.13 Variable flow capacity - HVAC system fans For HVAC fan motors a 7.5 hp, indicate method of variable flow control (VSD, or equivalent control method that reduces design ar volume by 50 % at 1/3 static design pressure); note exception taken NA C403.3.1 DX air handler variable cooing control (Under Integrated Economizer) For DX air handlers with economizer and cooling capacity 5 85,000 Btu/h, indicate number of cooing stages provided and method (multiple compressors and / or variable speed compressors); indicate minimum displacement (capacity reduction) as % of full bad Indicate control method (cooling capacity controlled in response to space temperature, space temperature controlled by modulating supply airflow, or both) NA C403.2.11.5 Fan airflow control For DX ar handling units with cooing capacity 5 65,000 Btu/h and evaporative and chilled water air handling units with fan 5 0.25 hp, indicate whether system is single zone or multiple zone and related control method (cooling capacity controlled in response to space temperature, space temperature is controlled by modulating supply airflow, or both) For mechanical cooling systems (includes DX and chilled water coils) that control cooling capacity in response to space temperature - Provide a minimum of two stages of fan control; indicate minimum fan speed is 5 66% of full speed drawing s 40% of full speed fan power during periods of low cooling or ventilation only For other mechanical cooling systems (includes DX and chiled water coils) that control space temperature by modulating airflow (in leu of, or in addition to, controlling capacity in response to space temperature) - Provide fan controls for modulating supply airflow, indicate minimum fan speed is 5 50% of full speed drawing 5 30% of full speed fan power during periods of low cooling or ventilation only: or exception taken C403.2.4.12 DDC system capabilities Provide central and zone level DDC controls as requred based on system application, capacity or size thresholds and other qualification per Table C403.2.4.12.1 Identify all DDC system Input / output control points; indicate capability for trending and graphical display Ducting Systems Yes 0403.2.8.1 C403.2.8.3 Duct construction Indicate on plans that al ductwork is constructed and sealed per IMC For OSA ductwork, also indicate on plans that ductwork meets ar leakage requirements per C402.5 and vapor retarder requirements per the IBC YES C403.2.8.3 Duct pressure classifications Identify location of low, medium and high pressure ductwork on pians NA 0403.2.8.3.3 High pressure duct leakage test Indicate high pressure duct leakage testing requirements on plans; provide test results to jurisdiction when completed 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stones and all R1 - Page 8 of 20 Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist MECH-CHK 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Fors for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and al R1 Revised January 2017 Protect Title: Loomis US - Tukwila, WA 'Date 1/7/2018 The following information is necessary to check a pert application for compliance with the mechanical systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicable (ves.no.na) Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location in Documents Building Department Notes YES 0403.2.8.1 C403.2.8.2 Duct insulation For supply and retum ductwork located in unconditioned space or outdoors, indicate R -value of insulation on ductwork on plans; identify climate zone; note exceptions taken For supply ductwork located in conditioned space, identify if design supply temperature is < 55°F or> 105°F and indicate R -value of insulation on this ductwork on plans; note exception taken For OSA ductwork, shafts and plenums, indicate R-vakie of insulation on these elements on Plans per Table C402.1.3 for steel -framed wads: note exception taken Piping Systems NA 0403.2.9 Piping insulation Indicate design temperature range of fluid conveyed in piping and thickness of insulation (in inches) on hydronic piping plans; or exception taken NA 0403.2.9.1 Piping insulation exposed to fittt V Indicate method of protection of pipe insulation from damage / degradation on hydronic piping plans - Economizers NA C403.3 Ar economizer required Identify in equipment schedules an plans or in MECH-EQ fors all cooling systems requiring air economizer controls Provide MECH-ECONO for indicating systems utlizng arm economizer exceptions, including those with water -side economizer in lieu of air economizer, indicate on plans eligible exception(s) taken and measures to comply with exception(s) NA 0403.3.1 Integrated economizer operation - air and water Indicate air and water -side economizers are configured for partial cooling operation even where additional mechanical cooing is required to meet the load NA 0403.3.2 Economizer heating system impact - air and water Verify control method of HVAC systems with economizers does not increase building heating energy usage during normal operation NA C403.3.3.1 Ar economizer capacity Indicate modulating OSA and retum airdampers are configured to provide up to 100% OSA for cooling NA 0403.3.1 0403.3.3.2 Integrated air economizer Verify mechanical cooing controls are interlocked with air economizer controls so the outside air damper remains in 100% open position when mechanical cooling is also required to meet the cooling load until the leaving air temperature is < 45°F For systems with cooling capacity x 65,000 Btu/ h, verify that control of economizer dampers is not based only on mixed air temperature; or exception taken NA C403.3.3.3 Air economizer high limit controls Indicate high Fmk shut-off control method and requred high kink per Table C403.3.3.3 NA C403.3.4.1 Water economizer capacity For eligible systems where water -side economizer may be provided in lieu of air economizer, ndicate system is capable of 100% design cooling capacity at 50°F db / 45°F wb OSA temperatures NA 0403.3.4.2 Water economizer maximum pressure drop indicate pressure drop across precooing coils and heat exchangers in water economizer system do not exceed pressure drop limit NA 0403.3.1 DX airhandling equipment control For DX airhandlers with economizer and cooling capacity z 65,000 Btu/h, refer to HVAC System Controls for requirements NA C403.2.4.7 DX equipment economizer fault detection and diagnostics For DX air handlers with economizer and cooling capacity z 54,000 Btu/h, provide a fault detection and diagnostics (FDD) system to monitor economizer system operation and report faults Systems Requiring Energy Recovery NA 0403.5.1 Energy recovery (ER) - ventilation /exhaust systems For systems with design OSA > 5,000 cfm, or design supply air cfm and % OSA exceeding the values in Tables C403.5.1(1) or (2), indicate exhaust air ER method; or exception taken with supporting calculations For rooms served by muliple systems with aggregate design OSA > 5,000 cfm, or aggregate design supply aircfmand % OSA exceeding the values in Tables C403.5.1(1) or (2), indicate exhaust air ER method; or exception taken with supporting calculations Indicate ER rated effectiveness that increases OSA enthalpy by 2 50% based on delta between OSA and retum air enthalpies at deslon conditions NA C403.2.7.2 Laboratory exhaust systems (energy recovery) For buildings with total lab exhaust > 5,000 cfm, indicate method of energy recovery used to pre -condition laboratory make-up air; ER effectiveness (min 25°F); or akemative method per exception NAV exhaust, semi -conditioned makeup, or CERM calculation) NA C404.10.4 (under C404.11) Pools and permanent spas exhaust systems (energy recovery) For buildings with pools or spas with water surface area > 200 sf, indicate exhaust air ER method and use of waste heat (preheat ventilation arm, pool water or service hot water); or exception taken Indicate ER system has the rated effectiveness and is configured to decrease the exhaust ar temperature at design conditions by 5 36°F NA C403.5.29y E recov steam condensate systems For buildings with on-site steam heating systems, indicate condensate water ER Fa buildings that use off-site generated steam where condensate is not returned to the source, indicate on-site condensate water ER 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 - Page 9 of 20 Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist MECH-CHK 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and al R1 Revised January 2017 Project Title: Loomis US - Tukwila, WA Date 1/7/2018 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechanical systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicable (ves,no,nal Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location n Documents Building Department Notes NA C403.5.3 Energy recovery - cooler / freezer condensers For buildings with food service, meat or deb departments that have z 500,000 Btu/h of remote refrigeration capacity for coolers / freezers, indicate condenser ER and use of captured energy (service water heating, space heating, or dehumidification reheating) For buildings with z 40,000 sf conditioned floor area and with z 1,000,000 Btu/h of remote refrigeration capacity for coolers / freezers, indicate condenser ER and use of captured energy for service water heating and also for space heating, or dehumidification reheating NA C403.5.4 Energy recovery - condenser systems For buildings with 24-hour operation and with > 1,500,000 Btu/h of heat rejection capacity and design service hot water load > 250,000 Btu/h, indicate condenser ER to pre -heat service water, or exception taken. Provide calculations showing the amount of recovered heat that is utilized (60% of oeak heat rejection load or ore -heat service water to 85°F). Hydronic System Controls NA C403.2.13 C403.4.2.7 Variable flow control - hydronic system pumps For hydronic system pump motors z 7.5 hp, indicate method of variable flow control (VSD or equivalent method that requires z 30% design wattage at 50% design fluid flow); note exception taken Identify whether hydronic coils have DDC controls and associated manner of pump speed control (differential pressure, zone hydronic demand, etc) NA C403.2.5 C403.4.2.4 Hydronic system setback and part load controls For boilers that provide budding heating, indicate controls that provide heating water temperature setback based on outdoor temperature For heating and chilled water systems a 300,000 Btu/h, ndicate systems are configured to automatically reset supply water temperature based upon demand; or exception taken. Ifsystem pump motor hp z 3 hp, also indicate controls automatically reduce flow by z 50%. For chiled water systems (2 300,000 Btu/h, pump motor hp z 3 hp) that serve water-cooled unitary air conditioners, indicate VSD or staged pumps in chitled water system and heat rejection loop that reduce pump flow so that one control valve is nearly wide open, or to maintain a minimum differential pressure; or exception taken NA 0403.4.2 Boder sequencing Indicate automatic controls that sequence operation of muitiple boilers NA 0403.4.6 Hot gas bypass limitation For cooling equipment with hot gas bypass, provide either multiple step unloading or continuous capacity modulation; indicate bypass capacity per Table 0403.4.6 NA 0403.4.2.2 Two -pipe changeover systems Indicate changeover deadband (min 15°F), heating / cooing mode scheduling and changeover temperature range (Knit 30°F) NA 0403.4.2.6 ChIer / boiler plant pump isolation indicate controls are configured to automatically reduce overall plant flow and shut-off lbw through individual chillers and boilers when not in use NA C4012'13'1'1 C403.4.3.1.1 0403.4.3.1.2 Heat rejection equipment - variable flow control For cooling towers with fan motors z 7.5 hp, indicate VSD and method to adjust fan speed (adjusted based on leaving flub temperature or condenser temperature / pressure of heat rejection device) For multiple -cell heat rejection equipment with VSD, indicate controls that ramp all fans in unison NA 0403.4.3.3 Heat rejection equipment - cooling tower flow turndown Indicate open -circuit cooling towers with multiple pumps or VSD control are designed so ab cells can be run in parallel NA C403.4.2.3.1 Water loop heat pump - deadband Indicate capability of central equipment to provide minimum 20°F water suppty temperature deadband between heat rejection and heat addition modes; or exception taken NA C403.4.2.3.2.1 Water loop heat pump - heat rejection equipment, Zone 4 indicate type of cooing tower (open- or closed-circuit) in equipment schedule; indicate method used to limit system heat loss when heat rejection is not needed NA C403.4.2.3.2.2 Water loop heat pump - heat rejection equipment, Zone 5 For open- or closed-circuit cooling towers, provide a heat exchanger that separates the cooling tower and heat pump loop NA 0403.4.2.3.3 Water loop heat pump - isolation valves For hydronic heat pump systems with total system power > 10 hp, indicate 2 -way isolation valves on each heat pump and variable flow system control Dedicated Outdoor Air Systems (DOAS) - Optional through 6/30/16, Prescriptive 7/1/2016 NA 0403.6 0403.6.3 Dedicated outdoor air systems For buildings with office, retail, education, library and fire station spaces, identify these spaces on plans; indicate that ventilation air in each occupied space is provided via a DOAS system; or document compliance with C403.6.3 Impracticality; or exception taken (buildings complying with 0402.4.1.4 or 0406.6 may not utilize exceptions) NA C403.6.1 Energy recovery ventilation DOAS withdeka For al DOAS systems, indicate exhaust air ER method; or exception taken with supporting calculations. Indicate ER rated effectiveness that increases OSA enthalpy by z 50% based on between OSA and retum air enthalpies at design conditions. NA C403.6.2 Heating / cooling system controls with DOAS Indicate equipment associated with the delivery of zone level heating and cooling (fans, hydronic pumps, primary air dampers, etc) are configured to shut off, and central equipment is configured to tum down, when there is no call for heating or cooling in the zone they serve If applying Exception to heating / cooling fans used for air mixing in the space during deadband periods, include fan watts per cfm in equipment schedule 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 - Page 10 of 20 Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist MECH-CHK 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buldri s including R2 8 R3 over 3 stories and al R1 Project Title: Loomis US - Tukwila, WA (Date 1/7/2018 The following Information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechanical systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicable (ves.no.na) Code Sedan Code Provision Information Required - Must be in q permit documents Location in Documents Building Department Notes NA 0402.4.1.4 C403.6 Increased prescriptive maximum vertical fenestration area with DOAS Indicate that al occupied, conditioned spaces are served by a DOAS per C403.6 Additional Efficiency Package Option, Dedicated Outside Air Systems (DOAS) NA C406.6 __ ._ _ Budding provided with PQM To comply with additional efficiency package option, indicate that 90% or more of all occupied, coslitOoiclYR99§ arqienhesl kY A DO.A$ r Q40q.6 Multiple Zone Air Systems NA C403.4.4 Ar systems serving multiple zones Identify supply air systems serving multiple zones and the zones they serve on plans; Indicate whether system is VAV and method of primary air control; or provide supporting documentation for applied exception to VAV NA C403.4.4 VAV systems serving multiple zones Provide equipment schedules on plans or MECH-EQ form that fist alt VAV alt terminals and types For each alt terminal include: maximum airflow rates for primary supply air during zone peak heating and zone peak cooling; maximum airflow during reheating, recooling or mixing; minimum airflow rate to maintain required ventilation, and the basis for these values; if IMC or ASHRAE 62.1 multiple zone equation is basis for minimum flow rates, provide calculation on clans NA C403.4.4.1 Single duct VAV tennlnal units Indicate single duct terminal units are configured to reduce primary supply air before reheating orrecooing NA 0403.4.4.2 Dual duct systems - temmnal units For systems with separate warn air and cool alt ducts, indicate terminal units are configured to reduce the flow from one duct to minimum before mixing with air from the other duct NA 0403.4.1.1 C403.4.1.2 VAV system static pressure sensors - sensors and DDC set points Indicate locations of duct static pressure sensors on plans; include at least one sensor per major duct branch; verify controller setpoint pressure at each sensor Is 5 1.2 inch w.g. For systems with zone level DDC, indicate controls are configured to monitor zone damper positions and reset static pressure setpoint based on the zone requiring most pressure; include control logic that automatically detects and generates an alarm if any zone excessively drives reset logic, and alows budding operators to exclude zones from reset logic NA 0403.4.4.3 Multiple -zone VAV system ventilation optimization controls For systems with zone level DDC controls, indicate controls are configured to automatically reduce outdoor airflow in response to changes in system ventilation efficiency; or exception taken NA 0403.4.4.4 VAV system supply air reset Indicate controls automatically reset supply air temperature in response to building loads or outdoor alt temperature: or exception taken Multiple Zone HVAC Systems, High Efficiency VAV - Required for systems utilizing C403.6 DOAS Exception 2, must comply with all 16 provisions NA C403.7, Item 1 Ar ecwmomizer Indicate system is configured for 100% alt economizer operation and complies with alt related economizer requirements per C403.3 (without economizer exceptions) NA C403.7, Item 2 Died digital controls (DDC) Provide DDC controls for al components of system; identify alt DDC system input / output control points; indicate capability for trending and graphical display NA C403.7, Item 3 Outdoor airflow measurement and reduction For systems with minimum OSA > 2,500 cfm, indicate outdoor airflow monitoring station that measures OSA intake under alt load conditions; indicate control sequence that increases or reduces system OSA cfm based on VAV terminal feedback of ventilation efficiency (per 0403.4.4.3 without exceptions) or DCV (per 0403.2.6.2) NA C403.7, Item 4 Supply airflow measurement For systems with minimum OSA > 2,500 dm, indicate supply airflow monitoring station capable of measuring supply air delivered to VAV terminals under alt load conditions NA 0403.7, Item 5 Zone isolation and maximum area served Verify maximum area served by a single HEVAV system is s 50,000 sf, or one entire floor, whichever is greater; in addition if a system serves > 25,000 sf, that incudes areas that are expected to be occupied non -simultaneously, indicate zone isolation controls per C403,2.4.4 NA C403.7, item 6 Interior / exterior zone design supply air temperature Verify that VAV terminals serving interior cooling driven loads are sized per design supply air temperature that is 5"F higher than VAV terminals serving exterior zones NA C403.7, Item 7 Maximum air terminal inlet velocity Identify air terminals with minimum primary airflow setpoints > 50% of maximum setpoint in equipment schedule or MECH-EQ form; indicate alt terminal inlet velocity does not exceed 900 fpm NA C403.7, Item 8 Sequence of operation Indicate DDC system sequences of operation are designed and configured per ASHRAE GPC 36 NA C403.7, Item 9 Maximum allowable system brake horsepower Verity fan system bhp is 5 90% of the bhp limit per Option 2 equation in Table C403.2.11.1(1), provide MECH-FANSYS form for each system NA C403.7, Item 10 Fan -powered terminal unit motor and control Indicate all series and parallel terminal fans have electronically commutated motors; indicate DDC control system is configured to vary air terminal fan speed as a function of the load; indicate fan speed during periods of low heating, low cooling, or ventilation only is 5 66% of peak design air flow or provide supportive documentation for applied exception 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 - Page 11 of 20 Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist MECH-CHK 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forams for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and al R1 Revised January 2017 Project Title: Loomis US - Tukwila, WA Date 1/7/2018 The folowing information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechanical systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicable (ves.no.na) Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location n Documents Building Department Notes NA C403.7, gem 11 APP of single duct and fan powered terminal units Indicate VAV terminal types on plans; verify fan -powered terminal units only serve perimeter zones with envelope loads; verify all other zones are served by single duct terminal units NA 0403.7, Item 12 Fan powered terminal unit primary al reset Indicate DDC controls are configured to automatically reset the primary supply air cfm setpoint of al fan -powered terminal units to the minimum required to maintain ventilation during occupied heating or deadband, based upon the VAV air handling unit OSA ventilation fraction NA C403.7, Item 13 High occupancy space controls For spaces > 150 sf with occupant density a 25 people / 1000 sf, indicate space is served by a dedicated terminal unit with DCV control that resets terminal unit ventilation setpoint; also indicate occupancy sensor control that automaticaly reduces minimum ventilation to zero and sets back room heating and cooling setpoints by 2 5°F NA C403.7, Item 14 Dedicated HVAC systems For server, electronic equipment, telecom or similar spaces with cooling bads > 5 W/sf, indicate spaces are served by independent HVAC systems that are separate from HPVAV systems serving rest of building; indicate dedicated HVAC systems have air economizer controls or energy recovery per C403.3 Exception 9 NA C403.7, ttem 15 Central plant efficiency Indicate whether systems are served by a high efficiency heating water plant, or a high efficiency chilled water plant If complying via high efficiency heating water plant: Indicate all VAV terminals have hydronic heating coils served by heating water system with either gas-fred boiler(s) with thermal efficiency a 90%, air -to -water heat pumps, or heat recovery chilers If complying via high efficiency chiled water plant: Indicate alt VAV air handlers have cooling cols served by chillers with rated IPLV efficiency that exceeds WSEC listed IPLV by at least 25% per Table C403.2.3(7) (note water-cooled IPLV is max, all others are min); indicate smallest chiller or compressor in plant is s 20% of total plant capacity, or provide thermal storage sized for s 20% of total plant capacity 0403.7, Hem 16 Fault detection and diagnostics Indicate DDC system includes a fault detection and diagnostics (FDD) system configured to monitor operation and provide fault reporting of required parameters for all VAV air handlers an4AY itir3kitilun3_in,tie11PYyl/.ID1201. __ HVAC Equipment Energy Use Metering NA 0409.3.1 HVAC a u" emt energyFor q use metering new buildings > 50,000 sf and building additions > 25,000 sf, verify energy use metering of ail equipment used to provide space heating and cooling, dehumidification and ventlation will be provided oer C409: indicate eauioment eliaibfe for exception Documentation and System Specific Requirement To Support Commissioning NA C408.2 Scope of mechanical systems commissioning Indicate that alt mechanical systems, equipment, and controls for which the WSEC requires control functions and / or configuration to perform specific functions are required to be commissioned; For buildings with a 240,000 Btu/h total output cooling capacity ora 300,000 Btu/h total output heating capacity, indicate that all mechanical systems regardless of individual capacity are required to be commissioned; or provide building heating / cooling capacity calculation demonstrating eligibility for exception NA 0403.2.10 0408.1.1 C408.1.2 C408.1.4.2 C103.6 Commissioning requirements in construction documents Indicate In plans and specifications that Cx per C408 is required for all applicable mechanical systems; Include general summary with at a minimum of hems 1 thru 4 of the Cx plan per C408.1.2 including: narrative description of activities, responsibilities of the Cx team, schedule of activities including verification of project close out documentation per C103.6, and conflict of interest plan (if required); Include in general summary that a Cx project report or Compliance Checklist (Figure C408.1.4.2) shat be completed by the Certified Cx Professional and provided to the owner prior to the final mechanical inspection. Yes C408.2.2 Air system and hydronic system balancing Indicate in plans that airand fluid flow rates shallbe tested and balanced within the tolerances defined in the specifications; indicate systems shallbe balanced in a manner to first minimize throttling losses, then adjusted to meet design flow conditions No 0408.2.2.1 Air system balancing devices Indicate devices that provide the capability to balance all supply airoutlets, zone terminals and air handling equipment requiring system balancing No C408.2.2.2 Hydronic system balancing devices Indicate devices that provide the capability to isolate, balance and measure flow across al hydronic equipment requiring system balancing including heating and cooing cols and pumps NA C408.2.3 Functional performance testing criteria Identify in plans and specifications the intended operation of all equipment and controls during alt modes of operation. indudna nterfacina between new and existino-to-remain systems Project Close Out Documentation YES C103.6 Documentation and project close out submittal requirements Indicate in plans that project close out documentation and training of building operations personnel is required for all mechanical components, equipment and systems govemed by this code; indicate close out documentation shallinclude: record documents, O&M manuals, applicable WSEC comoiance forms and calculations 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 - Page 12 of 20 Service Water Heating Permit Plans Checklist SWH-CHK 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial BuNdngs including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and al R1 Revised January 2017 Project Title: Loomis US • Tukwila, WA Date 1/7/2018 The folowing information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechanicial systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicable (ves.no.na) Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location in Documents Budding Department Notes Equipment - Sizing, Performance and Type NA C404.2 SWH equipment type and efficiency Provide equipment schedule on plans indicating type and capacity; indicate efficiency complies with required federal standard NA 0404.2.1 High input -rated SWH systems For individual SWH equipment serving an entire building with x 1,000,000 Btulh capacity, indicate thermal efficiency 2 90%; or exception taken For buildings with aggregate capacity of ad SHW equipment x 1,000,000 Btu/h (exclude < 100,000 Btulh equipment from threshold calculation), indicate average capacity weighted thermal efficiency x 90%; or exception taken If applying Exception 1 for site -solar or site -recovered energy, provide calculations and source of annual service water heating energy use estimate NA C404.4 Heat traps Indicate piping connected to equipment have heat traps on supply and discharge NA C404.5 Insulation under electric water heater For electric water heaters located in unconditioned spaces or on concrete floors, indicate R-10 insulation under equipment Piping Systems YES C404.6 Insulation of piping Indicate thickness of piping insulation on plans per Table 0403.2.9; verify insulation is provided - from the water heater to the final fbxture in a Ire, from the Inlet / outlet piping at water heater to heat trap (up to 8 feet), and on piping that is heat traced; note exceptions taken YES 0404.3 Efficient SWH supply piping Indicate method of compliance on plans for ad piping runs connecting service hot water source to hot water fixture (maximum pipe length or maximum pipe volume method per Table 0404.3.11: provide calculations for all Moho runs documenting the total length and / or volume Service Water Heating System Controls NA C404.7.1 C404.8 Heated water circulating systems For circulation systems with dedicated return piping, indicate controls are configured to automatically start pump based on demand for hot water and shut-off pump when there is no demand and when the desired water temperature is met For circulation systems with cold water supply piping serving as the retum, indicate controls are configured to automatically start pump based on demand for hot water and shut-off pump when there Is no demand, or when temperature of water entering the cold water suppty pipe Is x 104°F NA 0404.7.2 Heat trace system controls For heat trace systems provided to maintain temperature of service hot water in piping, indicate controls are configured to de -energize system when there is no demand for hot water and when the desired water temperature is met NA 0404.7.3 Controls for hot water storage For systems with separate water heater and storage tank, indicate controls are configured to limit operation time of pump after end of heating cycle to s 5 minutes NA 0403.2.13 0403.4.2.7 Variable flow control - pumps For SWH, pool / spa and pressure boosting pump motors x 7.5 hp, indicate method of variable flow control (VSD or equivalent method that requires x 30% design wattage at 50% design fkiid flow); note exception taken Identify basis of pump speed control (differential or static pressure setpont, pressure, zone load demand. etc) Pools and Permanent Spas - Equipment and Controls (Sections are under C404.11) NA C404.10.1 Pod heating equipment efficiency Provide equipment schedule on plans indicating type and capacity for al pool heating equipment; indicate efficiency complies with required federal standard; for heat pump water heaters indicate COP x 4 NA C403.2.13 Variable flow control - pumps Refer to Service Water Heating System Controls NA C404.10.1 0404.10.2 Pool heater on / off controls Indicate automatic on / off control based on scheduling and readily accessible on / off switch on heater that operates independent of thermostat setting; note exceptions taken NA C404.10.3 Pod covers For ad pools and in -ground permanent spas, indicate a vapor retardant cover on plans For al pools and in -ground spas heated to > 90'F, indicate cover shall include insulation a R- 12 NA 0404.10.3 Pool assembly insulation For at pools and In -ground spas heated to > 90°F, Indicate on plans that sides and bottom are provided with insulation x R-12 NA 0404.12 Ener-- onsumption of portable spas Indicate portable spa complies with Association of Pool and Spa Professionals APSP-14 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 - Page 13 of 20 Energy Recovery (ER) Systems - Service Water Heating and Pool Systems 0404.10.4 For buildings with pools or permanent spas with water surface area > 200 sf, indicate exhaust (Section Pools and permanent spas airER method and use of waste heat (preheat ventilation air, pool water or service hot water); NA exhaust systems or exception taken under 0404.11) (enemy recovery) Indicate ER system has the rated effectiveness and is configured to decrease the exhaust air temperature at design conditions by 5 36°F For buildings with food service, meat or deb departments that have s 500,000 Btu/h of remote refrigeration capacity for coolers / freezers, indicate if condenser ER will be used to pre -heat NA 0403.5.3 Energy recovery - cooler / freezer condensers service water For buildings with t 40,000 sf conditioned floor area and with 5 1,000,000 Btu/h of remote refrigeration capacity for coolers / freezers, indicate if condenser ER will be used to pre -heat service water For buildings with 24-hour operation and > 1,500,000 Btu/h of heat rejection capacity and NA 0403.5.4 Energy recovery - condenser systems design SWH bad > 250,000 Btu/h, indicate condenser ER to pre -heat service water; or exception taken. Provide calculations showing the amount of recovered heat that is utilized (60% of peak heat rejection load or pre -heat service water to 85°F). NA 0404.10 Drain water heat recovery For systems incorporating drain water ER, indicate system design complies with CSA B55.2 (or 4LM;i CSA @$,.i f9f Gnr14 R); indiciAq.994140 W9le[51S1q Pfe.PRFP19s31S 99Sign fitt)Y ifi..` 1Q P@i. Service Water Heating Energy Use Metering NA 0404.9 SWH energy usage in dwelling units For Group R-2 multi-familybuildings with central SWH systems, provide metering of hot water energy usage per dwelling unit; Indicate metering and data reporting method NA 0409.3.2 SWH equipment energy use For new buildings > 50,000 sf and building additions > 25,000 sf, with total SWH equipment capacity t 50 kW ( t 170,600 Btu/h), verfiy energy use metering of all SWH equipment will be metering Provided per C409 Additional Efficiency Package Option, Reduced Energy Use In Service Water Heating - Must comply with both provisions to be elig ble To comply with additional efficiency package option, verify that t 90% of the conditioned floor NA 0406.7.1 Eligible building type area of the building is one or more of the occupancies identified in this section, OR; Provide whole building energy analysis per C407 that demonstrates the SWH bad in the building is t 10% of total building energy loads To comply with additional efficiency package option, provide documentation that verifies t 60% of building annual SWH energy is provided by high efficiency sources (heat pump water NA 0406.7.2 0403.5.4 Load fraction heater with COP t 3, waste heat recovery, solar water -heating system); For buildings with 24-hour operation and with > 1,500,000 Btu/h of heat rejection capacity and design service hot water bad > 250,000 Btu/h (per C403.5.4); provide documentation that verifies t 100% of building annual SWH energy is provided by condenser energy recovery or other f JLeff)ci, rwy SQWSR Documentation and Specific System Requirements to Supporting Commissioning Scope of service water Indicate that ail SWH equipment and controls for which the WSEC requires control functions and / or configuration to perform specific functions are required to be commissioned;+D7 NA C408.4 heating systems commissioning For buildings where the largest SWH system has ? 200,000 Btu/h total output capacity, indicate that all SWH systems regardless of individual capacity are required to be conmissioned. Scope of pool and Indicate that al pool and permanent spa water heating systems regardless of individual capacity are required to be commissioned; Indicate that energy recovery equipment that heats pool water regardless of capacity is required to be commissioned; NA 0408.4.1.3 permanent spa systems commissioning Identify all pool heating and energy recovery equipment and controls that the WSEC defines as being capable of and / or configured to perform specific functions. Indicate in plans and specifications that Cx per C408 is required for all appbcable service water heating systems; C404.13 Include general summary with at a minimum of Items 1 thru 4 of the Cx plan per C408.1.2 C408.1.1 Commissioning Including: narrative description of activites, responsibilities of the Cx team, schedule of activities YES C408.1.2 requirements in construction including verification of project close out documentation per C103.6, and conflict of interest C408,1.4.2 documents plan (11 required); C103.6 Include in general summary that a Cx project report or Compliance Checklist (Figure C408.1.4.2) shall be completed by the Certified Cx Professional and provided to the owner prior to the final mechanical inspection. YES 0408.4.1 Functional performance testna criteria Identify in plans and specifications the intended operation of all equipment and controls during all modes of operation. ncludna interfacna between new and existina-to-remain systems Project Close Out Documentation Documentation and project Indicate in plans that project close out documentation and training of buNdng operations YES 0103.6 dose out submittal requirements personnel is required for all SWH components, equipment and systems governed by this code; indicate close out documentation shall include: record documents, O&M manuals, applicable WSEC compliance forms and calculations 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Mechanical Fan System Power Allowance MECH-FANSYS-SUM 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised January 2017 Project Title: Loomis US - Tukwila, WA Date 1/7/2018 For Building Dept. Use HVAC Air Distribution System Schedule List all HVAC systems that have the capability to provide heating and/or cooling to the spaces they serve. System or Primary Supply Fan ID Speed Control (Note 1) Description (Note 2) System Total Nameplate HP (Note 3) Fan Power Calculation Required (Note 4) RTU -1 CV RTU 1 No RTU -2 CV RTU 1 No RTU -3 CV RTU 1 No EF -1 CV VEHICLE EXHAUST SYSTEM 1 No EF -2 CV VEHICLE EXHAUST SYSTEM 1 No EF -3 CV VEHICLE EXHAUST SYSTEM 1 No EF -4 CV VEHICLE EXHAUST SYSTEM 1 No EF -5 CV VEHICLE EXHAUST SYSTEM 1 No EF -6,7 CV RESTROOM EXHAUST 1 No EF -8,9 CV RESTROOM EXHAUST 1 No Note 1 - Constant Volume (CV), Variable Air Volume (VAV), or Hospital/Lab CV system that qualifies for VAV budget per C403.2.11.1 Exception 1. Single zone VAV systems shall comply as CV. Note 2 - Describe system type and list all fans (or groups of fans) associated with the delivery and removal of conditioned air by the system. Include all supply, retum/relief, exhaust and exhaust hoods (>1 hp), make-up air, dedicated outside air (DOAS), booster fans, and series fan powered terminals. VAV parallel fan -powered terminals and economizer relief fans do not need to be included if the fans do not operate at peak conditions. Note 3 - Enter the total nameplate hp of all fans associated with the delivery and removal of conditioned air by the system. Note 4 - This form automatically identifies whether a MECH-FANSYS form is required to demonstrate compliance with the fan power allowance (Yes), or this information is not required because the system has a combined total nameplate motor hp that is 5 hp or less (No) MECH-FANSYS Forms A MECH-FANSYS form shall be provided for each system with total nameplate hp greater than 5 hp. Select (Add Fan System Form) to generate an additional form. Added forms can be deleted with button in cell E32 of the added form. 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, R2 and R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Mechanical Fan System Power Allowance MECH-FANSYS 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised January 2017 Project Title: Loomis US - Tukwila, WA Date 1/7/2018 A separate MECH-FANSYS form must be completed for every HVAC system that exceeds the 5 hp threshold. For Building Dept. Use Fan System ID System Supply Fan Y pp Y Speed Control Constant Volume (CV), Variable Air Volume (VAV), or Hospital/Lab CV system that qualifies for VAV budget per C403.2.11.1, Exception 1 Com liance O tion p p Compliance is based upon either the fan motor nameplate horse power (Option 1), the fan brake horsepower (Option 2), or C403.7 high efficieny VAV fan brake horsepower (10% less than Option 2). The bhp calculation provides adjustments for special equipment per Table C403.2.11.1(2). Fan System Supply Y pp y CFM Total 8,000 In Fan Equipment Schedule below, provide maximum design supply airflow rate (CFM) of all supply fans serving the conditioned space in Fan Equipment Schedule below. Fan System CFM Total is the supply airflow of the central air handler at peak design conditions. Additional volumetric air flow provided at zone fan terminals, booster fans, or through induction is not included in the supply CFM total. However, the fan power of this equipment is included in the HP and BHP calculations. Fan System Supply CFM Total Is automatically calculated by the form. Fan Equipment Schedule Fan ID and Location Fan Type Quantity of Fan Type Total CFM (Note 1) Total Nameplate HP (Note 2) Total BHP (Note 3) RTU -1 SUPPLY 1 1,600 1.5 RTU -2 SUPPLY 1 4,000 3 RTU -3 SUPPLY 1 2,400 2 EF -1 EXHAUST 1 1,500 0.25 EF -2,3,4,5 EXHAUST 1 5,625 1.5 EF -6,7 EXHAUST 1 300 0.15 EF -8,9 EXHAUST 1 50 0.004 Note 1 - Total CFM is the maximum CFM of the listed fan(s) when operating at peak design operating conditions. Note 2 - Total namplate hp of the listed fan(s). Note 3 - Total brake horsepower (bhp) of the listed fan(s) at peak design operating conditions. Not required if Nameplate HP compliance option chosen. Compliance Message: Total Proposed: Total Allowance: 8.4 Enter speed control in B6 Brake Horsepower Allowance Adjustments Device Type Description and Location CFM thorough this device (CFMD) Assigned Pressure Drop, PD in w.c. (Note 6) Calculated Pressure Drop, PD in w.c. (Note 7) Adjustment, A in bhp (Note 8) Note 4 - Bhp allowance for energy recovery devices and run around coil loops includes both air Total Adjustment (bhp): the device. Note 5 - Energy recovery effectiveness is defined as change in the enthalpy of the outdoor air supply divided by the enthaply difference between the outdoor air and return air at design conditions. Note 6 - Assigned pressure drop (PD) adjustment per Table C403.2.11.1(2). Note 7 - Pressure drop (PD) adjustment shall be calculated per the applicable method defined in Table C403.2.11.1(2) based on specific system conditions. Note 8 - A = PD * CFMD/4131 where A is the allowed system brake horse power adjustment, PD is pressure drop allowance, and CFMD is the cfm through the device. Unit 1 DINNING ROOM - NOT APPLICABLE System Checksums By Kartchner Engineering COOLING COIL PEAK Peaked at Time: Mo/Hr: 7 / 18 Outside Air: OADB/WB/HR: 76 / 60 / 53 Space Sens. + Lat. Btu/h Envelope Loads Skylite Solar Skylite Cond Roof Cond Glass Solar Glass/Door Cond Wali Cond Partition/Door Floor Adjacent Floor Infiltration Sub Total =_> Internal Loads Lights People Misc Sub Total =_> Ceiling Load Ventilation Load Adj Air Trans Heat Dehumid. Ov Sizing Ov/Undr Sizing Exhaust Heat Sup. Fan Heat Ret. Fan Heat Duct Heat Pkup Underflr Sup Ht Pkup Supply Air Leakage CLG SPACE PEAK Mo/Hr: 7 / 19 OADB: 74 Plenum Net Percent Space Sens. + Lat Total Of Total Sensible Btu/h Btu/h (%) Btu/h 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3,556 3,556 6 0 14,184 0 14,184 24 14,333 214 0 214 0 175 1,119 376 1,495 2 1,150 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -675 -675 -1 45 14,841 3,932 18,773 31 15,702 6,440 0 6,440 11 6,440 34,480 0 34,480 57 21,012 396 0 396 1 396 41,316 0 41,316 69 27,849 799 -799 0 0 805 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 8 0 8 -132 -132 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 Grand Total => 56,964 3,001 59,965 100.00 44,363 Percent Of Total (%) Envelope Loads 0 Skylite Solar 0 Skylite Cond 0 Roof Cond 32 Glass Solar 0 Glass/Door Cond 3 Wall Cond 0 Partition/Door O Floor O Adjacent Floor 0 Infiltration 35 Sub Total =_> Internal Loads 15 Lights 47 People 1 Misc 63 Sub Total =_> 2 Ceiling Load 0 Ventilation Load 0 Adj Air Trans Heat Ov/Undr Sizing O Exhaust Heat OA Preheat Diff. RA Preheat Diff. Additional Reheat Underflr Sup Ht Pkup Supply Air Leakage 100.00 Grand Total =_> HEATING COIL PEAK Mo/Hr: Heating Design OADB: 26 Space Peak Coil Peak Percent Space Sens Tot Sens Of Total Btu/h Btu/h (%) 0 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 0 -2,614 3.46 0 0 0.00 -4,511 -4,511 5.97 -1,212 -1,627 2.16 0 0 0.00 -2,393 -2,393 3.17 0 0 0 -4,317 -4,317 5.72 -12,433 -15,462 20.48 0 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 -637 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 0 0 0 -28,807 -28,807 38.16 104 -0.14 0 0.00 0 0.00 -31,335 41.50 -41,877 0 0.00 0 0.00 -75,499 100.00 COOLING COIL SELECTION Total Capacity Sens Cap. Coil Airflow Enter DB/WB/HR ton MBh Main Gig 5.0 60.0 47.3 1,955 Aux CIg 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 Opt Vent 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 MBh cfm °F °F gr/Ib Total 5.0 60.0 76.4 63.0 66.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Leave DB/WB/HR °F °F gr/Ib 54.4 52.5 56.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Project Name: Loomis, Tukwila Dataset Name: LOOMIS TUKWILA HEATING.TRC AREAS Gross Total Glass ft2 (%) Floor Part Int Door ExFIr Roof Wall Ext Door 1,887 0 0 109 1,778 0 0 1,194 399 33 44 44 100 Rooftop Multizone TEMPERATURES Cooling SADB 54.4 Ra Plenum 76.3 Return 76.4 Ret/OA 76.4 Fn MtrTD 0.0 Fn BIdTD 0.0 Fn Frict 0.0 Heating 89.5 68.9 68.9 68.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 AIRFLOWS Cooling 1,955 1,955 1,955 0 0 0 89 0 2,044 89 0 0 0 0 Diffuser Terminal Main Fan Sec Fan Nom Vent AHU Vent Infil MinStop/Rh Return Exhaust Rm Exh Auxiliary Leakage Dwn Leakage Ups Heating 1,955 1,955 1,955 0 0 0 89 0 2,044 89 0 0 0 0 ENGINEERING CKS % OA cfm/ftz cfm/ton ft2/ton Btu/hr•ftz No. People Cooling 0.0 1.04 391.23 377.62 31.78 86 Heating 0.0 1.04 -40.01 HEATING COIL SELECTION CapacityCoil Airflow Ent MBh cfm °F Main Htg Aux Htg Preheat Humidif Opt Vent Total -75.5 0.0 Lvg °F 1,955 54.4 89.5 O 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -75.5 O 0.0 0.0 O 0.0 0.0 TRACE® 700 v6.3.2 calculated at 04:35 PM on 12/27/2017 Alternative - 1 System Checksums Report Page 1 of 4 System Checksums By Kartchner Engineering Unit 2 RTU -1 COOLING COIL PEAK Peaked at Time: Outside Air: Space Sens. + Lat. Btu/h Envelope Loads Skylite Solar Skylite Cond Roof Cond Glass Solar Glass/Door Cond Wall Cond Partition/Door Floor Adjacent Floor Infiltration Sub Total =_> Internal Loads Lights People Misc Sub Total =_> Mo/Hr: 8 / 15 OADB/WB/HR: 78 / 64 / 66 Plenum Net Percent Sens. + Lat Total Of Total Btu/h Btu/h (%) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 816 816 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1,669 332 2,000 7 205 205 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 642 642 2 2,515 1,148 3,663 12 14,328 0 14,328 48 11,860 0 11,860 39 259 0 259 1 26,447 0 26,447 88 Ceiling Load 385 -385 0 0 Ventilation Load 0 0 0 0 Adj Air Trans Heat 0 0 0 Dehumid. Ov Sizing 0 0 Ov/Undr Sizing 0 0 0 Exhaust Heat -67 -67 0 Sup. Fan Heat 0 0 Ret. Fan Heat 0 0 0 Duct Heat Pkup 0 0 0 Underfir Sup Ht Pkup 0 0 Supply Air Leakage 0 0 0 Grand Total => 29,348 696 30,043 100.00 CLG SPACE PEAK Mo/Hr: 7 / 16 OADB: 79 Space Sensible Btu/h 0 0 0 0 0 1,632 205 0 0 977 2,813 14,328 6,456 259 Percent Of Total (%) Envelope Loads 0 Skylite Solar 0 Skylite Cond 0 Roof Cond 0 Glass Solar 0 Glass/Door Cond 7 Wall Cond 1 Partition/Door 0 Floor 0 Adjacent Floor 4 Infiltration 12 Sub Total =_> Internal Loads 59 Lights 27 People 1 Misc 21,044 87 Sub Total =_> 461 2 Ceiling Load 0 0 Ventilation Load 0 0 Adj Air Trans Heat Ov/Undr Sizing 0 0 Exhaust Heat OA Preheat Diff. RA Preheat Diff. Additional Reheat HEATING COIL PEAK Mo/Hr: Heating Design OADB: 26 Underfir Sup Ht Pkup Supply Air Leakage 24,318 100.00 Grand Total > Space Peak Coil Peak Percent Space Sens Tot Sens Of Total Btu/h Btu/h (%) O 0 0.00 O 0 0.00 0 -622 1.46 O 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 -1,569 -1,881 4.42 -1,228 -1,228 2.88 -1,531 -1,531 3.60 0 0 0 -10,148 -10,148 23.83 -14,477 -15,410 36.19 0 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 -430 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 0 0 0 -9,986 -9,986 23.45 75 -0.18 0 0.00 0 0.00 -17,264 40.54 -24,893 0 0.00 0 0.00 -42,586 100.00 COOLING COIL SELECTION Total Capacity Sens Cap. Coil Airflow Enter DBANB/HR Leave DB/WB/HR ton MBh MBh cfm °F °F grllb °F °F gr/lb Main Clg 2.5 30.0 24.7 1,206 75.3 62.6 65.8 56.7 54.1 59.4 Aux Clg 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Opt Vent 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Total 2.5 30.0 Project Name: Loomis, Tukwila Dataset Name: LOOMIS TUKWILA HEATING.TRC AREAS Gross Total Glass Floor 4,198 Part 727 Int Door 0 ExFIr 70 Roof 416 Wall 915 Ext Door 0 fta (% ) 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rooftop Multizone TEMPERATURES Cooling Heating SADB 56.7 88.8 Ra Plenum 75.3 69.7 Return 75.3 69.7 Ret/OA 75.3 69.7 Fn MtrTD 0.0 0.0 Fn BIdTD 0.0 0.0 Fn Frict 0.0 0.0 AIRFLOWS Cooling 1,206 1,206 1,206 0 0 0 210 0 1,416 210 0 0 0 0 Diffuser Terminal Main Fan Sec Fan Nom Vent AHU Vent Infil MinStop/Rh Return Exhaust Rm Exh Auxiliary Leakage Dwn Leakage Ups Heating 1,206 1,206 1,206 0 0 0 210 0 1,416 210 0 0 0 0 ENGINEERING CKS OA cfm/ft2 cfm/ton ft'/ton Btulhr•ft2 No. People Cooling 0.0 0.29 481.66 1,676.79 7.16 25 Heating 0.0 0.29 -10.14 HEATING COIL SELECTION CapacityCoil Airflow Ent MBh cfm °F Lvg °F Main Htg -42.6 1,206 56.7 88.8 Aux Htg 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 Preheat 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 Humidif 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 Opt Vent 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 Total -42.6 TRACE® 700 v6.3.2 calculated at 04:35 PM on 12/27/2017 Alternative - 1 System Checksums Report Page 2 of 4 System Checksums By Kartchner Engineering Unit 3 RTU -3 COOLING COIL PEAK Peaked at Time: Mo/Hr: 7 / 14 Outside Air: OADB/WB/HR: 79 / 64 / 67 Space Sens. + Lat. Btu/h 0 0 0 0 0 2,441 308 0 0 940 3,688 Envelope Loads Skylite Solar Skylite Cond Roof Cond Glass Solar Glass/Door Cond Wall Cond Partition/Door Floor Adjacent Floor Infiltration Sub Total ==> CLG SPACE PEAK Mo/Hr: 7 / 15 OADB: 80 Plenum Net Percent Space Percent Sens. + Lat Total Of Total Sensible Of Total Btu/h Btu/h (%) Btu/h (%) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 487 2,928 5 2,265 5 308 1 308 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0: 0 0 940 2 1,337 3 487 4,175 7 3,910 9 Internal Loads Lights 17,519 0 17,519 30 17,519 41 People 36,943 0 36,943 62 20,846 48 Misc 614 0 614 1 614 1 Sub Total ==> 55,076 0 55,076 93 38,979 91 Ceiling Load Ventilation Load Adj Air Trans Heat Dehumid. Ov Sizing Ov/Undr Sizing Exhaust Heat Sup. Fan Heat Ret. Fan Heat Duct Heat Pkup Underflr Sup Ht Pkup Supply Air Leakage Grand Total => 194 -194 0 0 180 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -34 -34 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 58,958 259 59,218 100.00 43,069 100.00 HEATING COIL PEAK Mo/Hr: Heating Design OADB: 26 Envelope Loads Skylite Solar Skylite Cond Roof Cond Glass Solar Glass/Door Cond Wall Cond Partition/Door Floor Adjacent Floor Infiltration Sub Total =_> Internal Loads Lights People Misc Sub Total ==> Ceiling Load Ventilation Load Adj Air Trans Heat Ov/Undr Sizing Exhaust Heat OA Preheat Diff. RA Preheat Diff. Additional Reheat Underflr Sup Ht Pkup Supply Air Leakage Grand Total =_> Space Peak Coil Peak Percent Space Sens Tot Sens Of Total Btu/h Btu/h (%) 0 0 0.00 O 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 O 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 -2,418 -2,900 3.89 -1,845 -1,845 2.48 -2,728 -2,728 3.66 0 0 0 -12,409 -12,409 16.65 -19,400 -19,882 26.68 0 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 -210 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 0 0 0 -20,977 -20,977 28.15 36 -0.05 0 0.00 0 0.00 -33,705 45.22 0 0.00 0 0.00 -40,587 -74,528 100.00 COOLING COIL SELECTION Total Capacity Sens Cap. Coil Airflow Enter DB/WB/HR ton MBh MBh cfm °F °F gr/lb Main Clg 4.9 59.2 43.0 1,661 75.1 62.6 66.0 Aux CIg 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Opt Vent 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Total 4.9 59.2 Leave DB/WB/HR °F °F gr/lb 51.4 50.0 52.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Project Name: Loomis, Tukwila Dataset Name: LOOMIS TUKWILA HEATING.TRC AREAS Gross Total Glass ft2 (%) Floor Part Int Door ExFlr Roof Wall Ext Door 5,133 1,315 0 124 0 1,410 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rooftop Multizone TEMPERATURES Cooling SADB 51.4 Ra Plenum 75.1 Return 75.1 Ret/OA 75.1 Fn MtrTD 0.0 Fn BIdTD 0.0 Fn Frict 0.0 Heating 92.2 69.9 69.9 69.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 AIRFLOWS Cooling 1,661 1,661 1,661 0 0 0 257 0 1,918 257 0 0 0 0 Diffuser Terminal Main Fan Sec Fan Nom Vent AHU Vent Infil MinStop/Rh Return Exhaust Rm Exh Auxiliary Leakage Dwn Leakage Ups Heating 1,661 1,661 1,661 0 0 0 257 0 1,918 257 0 0 0 0 ENGINEERING CKS % OA cfm/ft2 cfm/ton ft2/ton Btu/hr•ft2 No. People Cooling 0.0 0.32 336.67 1,040.16 11.54 84 Heating 0.0 0.32 -14.52 HEATING COIL SELECTION CapacityCoil Airflow Ent MBh cfm °F Main Htg Aux Htg Preheat Humidif Opt Vent Total -74.5 0.0 Lvg °F 1,661 51.4 92.2 O 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -74.5 O 0.0 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 TRACE® 700 v6.3.2 calculated at 04:35 PM on 12/27/2017 Altemative - 1 System Checksums Report Page 3 of 4 System Checksums By Kartchner Engineering Unit 4 RTU -2 COOLING COIL PEAK Peaked at lime: Mo/Hr: Outside Air: OADBMB/HR: Space Sens. + Lat Btu/h Envelope Loads Skylite Solar Skylite Cond Roof Cond Glass Solar Glass/Door Cond Wall Cond Partition/Door Floor Adjacent Floor Infiltration Sub Total =_> Internal Loads Lights People Misc Sub Total =_> Ceiling Load Ventilation Load Adj Air Trans Heat Dehumid. Ov Sizing Ov/Undr Sizing Exhaust Heat Sup. Fan Heat Ret Fan Heat Duct Heat Pkup Underflr Sup Ht Pkup Supply Air Leakage Grand Total == 7/17 78/62/58 CLG SPACE PEAK Mo/Hr: 7 / 17 OADB: 78 Plenum Net Percent Space Percent Sens. + Lat Total Of Total Sensible Of Total Btu/h Btu/h (%) Btu/h (%) o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7,327 7,327 9 0 178 0 178 0 178 26 0 26 0 26 2,359 450 2,809 4 2,376 368 368 0 368 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -302 -302 0 704 2,629 7,777 10,406 13 3,653 13,905 0 13,905 18 13,905 52,812 0 52,812 67 31,920 2,642 0 2,642 3 2,642 69,359 0 69,359 87 48,467 HEATING COIL PEAK Mo/Hr: Heating Design OADB: 26 Envelope Loads 0 Skylite Solar 0 Skylite Cond 0 Roof Cond 0 Glass Solar 0 Glass/Door Cond 4 Wall Cond 1 Partition/Door 0 Floor 0 Adjacent Floor 1 Infiltration 7 Sub Total =_> Internal Loads 25 Lights 58 People 5 Misc 89 Sub Total =_> 2,578 -2,578 0 0 2,570 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 62 62 0 62 0 -447 -447 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 74,628 4,752 79,380 100.00 54,751 100.00 Ceiling Load Ventilation Load Adj Air Trans Heat Ov/Undr Sizing Exhaust Heat OA Preheat Diff. RA Preheat Diff. Additional Reheat Underflr Sup Ht Pkup Supply Air Leakage Grand Total => Space Peak Coil Peak Percent Space Sens Tot Sens Of Total Btu/h Btu/h (%) 0 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 0 -5,903 6.70 0 0 0.00 -302 -302 0.34 -2,887 -3,452 3.92 -2,209 -2,209 2.51 0 0 0.00 0 0 0 -9,849 -9,849 11.18 -15,247 -21,715 24.66 0 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 -2,166 0 0.00 0 0 0.00 0 0 0 -27,596 -27,596 31.34 376 -0.43 0 0.00 0 0.00 -39,122 44.43 0 0.00 0 0.00 -45,009 -88,058 100.00 COOLING COIL SELECTION Total Capacity ton MBh Sens Cap. Coil Airflow Enter DB/WB/HR MBh cfm °F °F gr/lb Main Clg 6.6 79.4 59.5 2,130 77.0 63.2 66.0 Aux Clg 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Opt Vent 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Total 6.6 79.4 Leave DB/WB/HR °F °F gr/Ib 51.6 50.2 52.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Project Name: Loomis, Tukwila Dataset Name: LOOMIS TUKWILA HEATING.TRC AREAS Gross Total Glass ft2 (%) Floor 4,074 Part 1,574 Int Door 0 ExFIr 0 Roof 4,074 0 0 Wall 1,688 0 0 Ext Door 23 23 100 Rooftop Multizone TEMPERATURES Cooling SADB 51.6 Ra Plenum 77.0 Return 77.0 Ret/OA 77.0 Fn MtrTD 0.0 Fn BIdTD 0.0 Fn Frict 0.0 Heating 89.2 68.3 68.3 68.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 AIRFLOWS Cooling 2,130 2,130 2,130 0 0 0 204 0 2,334 204 0 0 0 0 Diffuser Terminal Main Fan Sec Fan Nom Vent AHU Vent Infil MinStop/Rh Return Exhaust Rm Exh Auxiliary Leakage Dwn Leakage Ups Heating 2,130 2,130 2,130 0 0 0 204 0 2,334 204 0 0 0 0 ENGINEERING CKS % OA cfm/ft= cfm/ton ft=/ton Btu/hr-ft2 No. People Cooling 0.0 0.52 322.00 615.88 19.48 130 Heating 0.0 0.52 -21.61 HEATING COIL SELECTION CapacityCoil Airflow Ent MBh cfm °F Main Htg -88.1 2,130 51.6 Aux Htg 0.0 0 0.0 Preheat 0.0 0 0.0 Humidff Opt Vent Total 0.0 0.0 -88.1 Lvg °F 89.2 0.0 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 TRACE® 700 v6.3.2 calculated at 04:35 PM on 12/27/2017 Alternative - 1 System Checksums Report Page 4 of 4 8/5/2019 !� 4 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development PAUL HARRINGTON 3421 S HENRY RD GREENACRES, WA 99016 RE: Permit No. M18-0006 LOOMIS 15450 NELSON PL Dear Permit Holder: Allan Ekberg, Mayor Jack Pace, Director In reviewing our current records, the above noted permit has not received a final inspection by the City of Tukwila Building Division. Per the International Building Code, International Mechanical Code, Uniform Plumbing Code and/or the National Electric Code, every permit issued by the Building Division under the provisions of these codes shall expire by limitation and become null and void if the building or work authorized by such permit has not begun within 180 days from the issuance date of such permit, or if the building or work authorized by such permit is suspended or abandoned at any time after the work has begun for a period of 180 days. Your permit will expire on 9/14/2019. Based on the above, you are hereby advised to: 1) Call the City of Tukwila Inspection Request Line at 206-438-9350 to schedule for the next or fmal inspection. Each inspection creates a new 180 day period, provided the inspection shows progress. -or- 2) Submit a written request for permit extension to the Permit Center at least seven(7) days before it is due to expire. Address your extension request to the Building Official and state your reason(s) for the need to extend your permit. The Building Code does allow the Building Official to approve one extension of up to 180 days. If it is determined that your extension request is granted, you will be notified by mail. In the event you do not call for an inspection and/or receive an extension prior to 9/14/2019, your permit will become null and void and any further work on the project will require a new permit and associated fees. Thank you for your cooperation in this matter. Sincerely, ,,e)C—<5/ ) Kandace Nichols2 Permit Technician File No: M18-0006 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 outh n en r� studios oollaboratton 3 innovation - design 3421 south henry road greenacres, WA 99016 509.714.6301 t www.southhenry.com info@southhenry.com July 16, 2019 Allen Johannessen Plans Examiner Kandace Nichols, Permit Technician City of Tukwila, Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Located at: 15450 Nelson Place Project No. M18-0006 To whom it may concern: Please see my plan check comment responses to the correction letter dated 07/05/19. 1. See photos and mfr data for the generator. See photos from the general contractor of the concrete pour of the mechanical pad. 2. See revised M1.01 and C5 of 11 from the civil engineer which shows the location of the generator and air compressor.. 3. See attached photos and mfr data for the oil heater. Attached are (2) copies of sheet M1.01. (2) copies of civil C5 of 11, photos of the equipment requested, photos of the concrete slab during construction. If you have any questions or need additional information, please contact me at 509.714.6301. CORRECTION 4-0 REVISION N01__.1 ML8000(o RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 262019 PERMIT CENTER July 05, 2019 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development PAUL HARRINGTON 3421 S HENRY RD GREENACRES, WA 99016 RE: Correction Letter # 2 MECHANICAL Permit Application Number M18-0006 LOOMIS - 15450 NELSON PL Dear PAUL HARRINGTON, 0 Allan Ekberg, Mayor Jack Pace, Director This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the following departments: BUILDING - R DEPARTMENT: Allen Johannessen at 206-433-7163 if you have questions regarding these comments. • (GENERAL INFORMATION NOTE) PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to a preferably maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size; larger sizes may be negotiable. "New revised" plan sheets shall be the same size sheets as those previously submitted.) "STAMP AND SIGNATURES" (If applicable) For Engineers: "Every page of a plan set must contain the seal/stamp, signature of the licensee(s) who prepared or who had direct supervision over the preparation of the work, and date of signature. Specifications that are prepared by or under the direct supervision of a licensee shall contain the seal/stamp, signature of the licensee and the date of signature. If the "specifications" prepared by a licensee are a portion of a bound specification document that contains specifications other than that of an engineering or land surveying nature, the licensee need only seal/stamp that portion or portions of the documents for which the licensee is responsible." It shall not be required to have each page of "specifications" (calculations) to be stamped and signed; Front page only will be sufficient (WAC 196-23-010 & 196-23-020). Architects: "date" only not required (WAC 308-12-081). (BUILDING REVIEW NOTES) 1. Revision indicates installation of a generator. Provide manufactures specifications for the generator, and provide details showing how it is anchored, and indicate if new concrete pad is to be installed for the generator. Include concrete specs if applicable. 2. Show on the plan location of the new generator installation. 3. Provide manufactures specifications for the new oil heater. 4. Provide plans with engineer's stamp updated with signature and current date of signature on all plan sheets. Note: Contingent on response to these corrections, further plan review may request for additional corrections. FIRE - R DEPARTMENT: Al Metzler at 206-971-8718 if you have questions regarding these comments. • 1. Fire review will take place when corrections issued by Building Plans Examiner Allen Johannessen dated 06/20/2019 have been addressed. Please address the comments above in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that two (2) sets of revised plan pages, specifications and/or other documentation be 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 resubmitted with the appropriate`,ision block. To better expedite your resubmittal, a 'Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. Sincergly, calitt Kandace Nichols Permit Technician File No. M18-0006 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 2/7/2019 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development PAUL HARRINGTON 3421 S HENRY RD GREENACRES, WA 99016 RE: Permit No. M18-0006 LOOMIS 15450 NELSON PL Dear Permit Holder: Allan Ekberg, Mayor Jack Pace, Director In reviewing our current records, the above noted permit has not received a final inspection by the City of Tukwila Building Division. Per the International Building Code, International Mechanical Code, Uniform Plumbing Code and/or the National Electric Code, every permit issued by the Building Division under the provisions of these codes shall expire by limitation and become null and void if the building or work authorized by such permit has not begun within 180 days from the issuance date of such permit, or if the building or work authorized by such permit is suspended or abandoned at any time after the work has begun for a period of 180 days. Your permit will expire on 3/26/2019. Based on the above, you are hereby advised to: 1) Call the City of Tukwila Inspection Request Line at 206-438-9350 to schedule for the next or final inspection. Each inspection creates a new 180 day period, provided the inspection shows progress. -or- 2) Submit a written request for permit extension to the Permit Center at least seven(7) days before it is due to expire. Address your extension request to the Building Official and state your reason(s) for the need to extend your permit. The Building Code does allow the Building Official to approve one extension of up to 180 days. If it is determined that your extension request is granted, you will be notified by mail. In the event you do not call for an inspection and/or receive an extension prior to 3/26/2019, your permit will become null and void and any further work on the project will require a new permit and associated fees. Thank you for your cooperation in this matter. Sincerely, Permit Technician File No: M18-0006 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 9/5/2018 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development PAUL HARRINGTON 3421 S HENRY RD GREENACRES, WA 99016 RE: Permit No. M18-0006 LOOMIS 15450 NELSON PL Dear Permit Holder: Allan Ekberg, Mayor Jack Pace, Director In reviewing our current records, the above noted permit has not received a final inspection by the City of Tukwila Building Division. Per the International Building Code, International Mechanical Code, Uniform Plumbing Code and/or the National Electric Code, every permit issued by the Building Division under the provisions of these codes shall expire by limitation and become null and void if the building or work authorized by such permit has not begun within 180 days from the issuance date of such permit, or if the building or work authorized by such permit is suspended or abandoned at any time after the work has begun for a period of 180 days. Your permit will expire on 10/24/2018. Based on the above, you are hereby advised to: 1) Call the City of Tukwila Inspection Request Line at 206-438-9350 to schedule for the next or fmal inspection. Each inspection creates a new 180 day period, provided the inspection shows progress. -or- 2) Submit a written request for permit extension to the Permit Center at least seven(7) days before it is due to expire. Address your extension request to the Building Official and state your reason(s) for the need to extend your permit. The Building Code does allow the Building Official to approve one extension of up to 180 days. If it is determined that your extension request is granted, you will be notified by mail. In the event you do not call for an inspection and/or receive an extension prior to 10/24/2018, your permit will become null and void and any further work on the project will require a new permit and associated fees. Thank you for your cooperation in this matter. Sincerely, Bill Rambo Permit Technician File No: M 18-0006 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 outh II stuios collaboration + innovation = design 3421 south henry road greenacres, WA 99016 509.714.6301 t www.southhenry.com info@southhenry.com March 28, 2018 Mr. Jerry Hight, Building Official Allen Johannessen Plans Examiner % Rachelle Ripley Permit Technician City of Tukwila, Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Located at: Project No. 15450 Nelson Place M18-0006 - Correction Letter #2 To whom it may concern: Please see my plan check comment responses to the Mechanical Correction Letter #2 dated March 7, 2018. 1. Sheet G001 has been revised to remove the generator installation from this permit. The back up generator will be applied for under a separate permit at a later date. Attached are (2) copies of the revised sheets G001. If you have any questions or need additional information, please contact me at 509.714.6301. Thank You, Paul Harrington RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA APR 0 6 2018 PERMIT CENTER GORRF TION LTR# Mt'€- 000(v March 07, 2018 es w.r City of Tukwila Department of Community Development PAUL HARRINGTON 3421 S HENRY RD GREENACRES, WA 99016 RE: Correction Letter # 2 MECHANICAL Permit Application Number M18-0006 LOOMIS - 15450 NELSON PL Dear PAUL HARRINGTON, Allan Ekberg, Mayor Jack Pace, Director This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the following departments: BUILDING - C DEPARTMENT: Allen Johannessen at 206-433-7163 if you have questions regarding these comments. • (GENERAL INFORMATION NOTE) PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size. New revised plan sheets shall be the same size sheets as those previously submitted.) (If applicable) "STAMP AND SIGNATURES" "Every page of a plan set must contain the seal/stamp, signature of the licensee(s) who prepared or who had direct supervision over the preparation of the work, and date of signature. Specifications that are prepared by or under the direct supervision of a licensee shall contain the seal/stamp, signature of the licensee and the "date" of signature. If the "specifications" prepared by a licensee are a portion of a bound specification document that contains specifications other than that of an engineering or land surveying nature, the licensee need only seal/stamp that portion or portions of the documents for which the licensee is responsible." It shall not be required to have each page of "specifications" (calculations) to be stamped and signed; Front page only will be sufficient. (WAC 196-23-010 & 196-23-020) (BUILDING REVIEW NOTES) 1. Previous review memo item #1 requested information about the generator. The response only included a site plan of the location and simple drawing of the slab and enclosure. 2. Provide generator manufacturer's specifications for the generator to include installation specifications with size, weight, specifications for seismic anchoring etc. 3. Provide a clearer detail for the enclosure framing, type of materials, assembly and show details for the gate and access. Specify concrete strength and show the concrete design strength is sufficient for the size/weight of the generator. Note: Contingent on response to these corrections, further plan review may request for additional corrections. Please address the comments above in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that two (2) sets of revised plan pages, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a 'Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 Mr If you have any questions, I can be reached at (206)433-7165. Sincerely, atA4Lt Lt lq6111/19 Rachelle Ripley Permit Technician File No. M18-0006 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 SSSS uth student wll.bor.iun + innovation _ design 3421 south henry road greenacres, WA 99016 509.714.6301 t www.southhenry.com info@southhenry.com February 26, 2018 Mr. Jerry Hight, Building Official %Allen Johannessen Plans Examiner % Bill Rambo Permit Technician City of Tukwila, Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Located at: 15450 Nelson Place Project No. M18-0006 To whom it may concern: Please see my plan check comment responses to the plan check comments dated January 24, 2018. I would have responded sooner, but I was delayed upon receiving a secondary plan check letter from Reid Middleton regarding the structural items. In the future it would good to be notified as the applicant, when there will be additional plan review required. 1. See Sheet G001. I have added a site plan with the location of the generator and a section cut showing the concrete pad, specifications for screening and its location relative to the property line. 2. See sheet revised M401 for attachment detail. The analysis for the roof framing is being reviewed by Reid Middleton. 3. The correct number of diffusers should be 69. Attached you should received(2) copies of the revised sheets G001 and M401. If you have any questions or need additional information, please contact me at 509.714.6301. Thank You, Paul Harrington ORRECTION CITY OF TUK':4` !_ A MAR PERMIT CENTER tine Mat January 19, 2018 0 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development PAUL HARRINGTON 3421 S HENRY RD GREENACRES, WA 99016 RE: Correction Letter # 1 MECHANICAL Permit Application Number M 18-0006 LOOMIS - 15450 NELSON PL Dear PAUL HARRINGTON, Allan Ekberg, Mayor Jack Pace, Director This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the following departments: BUILDING - M DEPARTMENT: Allen Johannessen at 206-433-7163 if you have questions regarding these comments. • (GENERAL INFORMATION NOTE) PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11 x 17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size. New revised plan sheets shall be the same size sheets as those previously submitted.) (If applicable) "STAMP AND SIGNATURES" "Every page of a plan set must contain the seal/stamp, signature of the licensee(s) who prepared or who had direct supervision over the preparation of the work, and date of signature. Specifications that are prepared by or under the direct supervision of a licensee shall contain the seal/stamp, signature of the licensee and the "date" of signature. If the "specifications" prepared by a licensee are a portion of a bound specification document that contains specifications other than that of an engineering or land surveying nature, the licensee need only seal/stamp that portion or portions of the documents for which the licensee is responsible." It shall not be required to have each page of "specifications" (calculations) to be stamped and signed; Front page only will be sufficient. (WAC 196-23-010 & 196-23-020) (BUILDING REVIEW NOTES) 1. Scope of work is marked for installation of a generator. Please clarify if you are to include the generator installation where the generator installation is to be installed by your company. Otherwise if another contractor is installing the generator, this is typically done under a separate mechanical permit. In either case all specifications for the generator installation shall be required with engineer's specifications of the concrete pad where generator is anchored too. Location of the generator shall be shown on a site plan with dimensions from building, property lines and specifications for screening. 2. Provide engineers analysis for the roof where the new HVAC units are to be placed. Details shall show how the units are anchored for seismic and wind. Specify if the units are to replace existing and indicate the weight of the existing units to be replaced for comparison. 3. On the application specify the number of diffusers. Note: Contingent on response to these corrections, further plan review may request for additional corrections. Please address the comments above in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that two (2) sets of revised plan pages, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 In order to better expedite your resu5mittal, a 'Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany na y every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. Sincerely, Bill Rambo Permit Technician File No. M 18-0006 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 PROJECT NAME: LOOMIS SITE ADDRESS: L Sji 6-) A) L Q' PERMIT NO L tg 00 D (0 ORIGINAL ISSUE DATE: 11-)-7-1 REVISION LOG REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS (9`i —f ► f► L 0— —v Summary of Revision: `'t t 3 py S a L� *I C vN1,••6 i ,1r-, c p m C leets, h JJ' - of ✓1 emlor ,s d t- W7' I T (Ji � �il7W' ''' qp `� Received by:.//AT f<�S/f/ REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: Received by: (please print) REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) PERMIT COORD COPY. PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: M18-0006 PROJECT NAME: LOOMIS DATE: 07/26/19 SITE ADDRESS: 15450 NELSON PL Original Plan Submittal Revision # before Permit Issued X Response to Correction Letter # 1 X Revision # 1 after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division in Public Works n Fire Prevention di Planning Division Structural ❑ Permit Coordinator PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable ❑ (no approval/review required) DATE: 07/30/19 Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved DUE DATE: 08/27/19 ❑ Approved with Conditions Corrections Required (corrections entered in Reviews) Notation: Denied (ie: Zoning Issues) 1\_?1,c.,0,(A\63 co(\(,(.4,m5 ()dela -1--4( t/t-ki eJ- o r ) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire 0 Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 C1ERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: M18-0006 DATE: 06/19/19 PROJECT NAME: LOOMIS SITE ADDRESS: 15450 NELSON PL Original Plan Submittal Revision # before Permit Issued Response to Correction Letter # X Revision # 1 after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: AilA (-O /'" ef QTS ea Vtf l(Z-c-) 0-11 Building Division gm Public Works n Fire Prevention Structural Planning Division nPermit Coordinator IN PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable ❑ (no approval/review required) DATE: 06/20/19 Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved Corrections Required n Approved with Conditions Denied (corrections entered in Reviews) I- (ie: Zoning Issues) DUE DATE: 07/18/19 C Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg Fire Ping D PW ❑ Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 'PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: M18-0006 PROJECT NAME: LOOMIS SITE ADDRESS: 15450 NELSON PL Original Plan Submittal DATE: 04/09/18 Revision # before Permit Issued X Response to Correction Letter # 2 Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works E Fire Prevention Structural Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable ❑ (no approval/review required) DATE: 04/10/18 Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 05/08/18 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions Corrections Required ❑ Denied (corrections entered in Reviews) (ie: Zoning Issues) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Perndt Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire 0 Ping 0 PW ❑ Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 q'ERMIT COORS COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: M18-0006 DATE: 03/05/18 PROJECT NAME: LOOMIS SITE ADDRESS: 15450 NELSON PL Original Plan Submittal Revision # before Permit Issued X Response to Correction Letter # 1 Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works 1 Fire Prevention Structural Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable ❑ (no approval/review required) DATE: 03/06/18 Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 04/03/18 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ Corrections Required ❑ Denied ❑ (corrections entered in Reviews) (ie: Zoning Issues) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center LTse Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg Fire 0 Ping 0 PW ❑ Staff Initials: 12/18@013 PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: M18-0006 PROJECT NAME: LOOMIS SITE ADDRESS: 15450 NELSON PL X Original Plan Submittal _ Response to Correction Letter # DATE: 01/09/18 Revision # before Permit Issued Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: AT( l -f 8 c 1-1 6-16 Building Division Public Works ❑ Fire Prevention III Structural Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator wit PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable C (no approval/review required) DATE: 01/11/18 Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions Corrections Required (corrections entered in Reviews) Denied (ie: Zoning Issues) DUE DATE: 02/08/18 Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg '1 Fire 0 Ping ❑ PW 0 Staff Initials: Vur 12/18/2013 City of Tukwila REVISION SUBMITTAL Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.go� Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: ! la, Idol, Plan Check/Permit: M t — OOo Number. `e ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # Er Response to Correction Letter # 1 [r Revision # / after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner ❑ Deferred Submittal # Project Name:j(YN\ Project Address: `5kASb Contact Person: --CAS Phone Number: 5121- X07 - Summary of Revision: V\-ci giQnec4c4eAk 5c -or o L v RECEIVED CITY A JUL 2 6, 2019 PERMIT -CENTER Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: I2 -----Entered in TRAKiT on 7;2-4 "( W:Permit Centeraemplates'Forn, Revision Submittal Form doe Revised' August 2015 Ask City of Tukwila REVISION SUBMITTAL Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.;ov- Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, eta Date: 6,-)01-1 Plan Check/Permit Number: ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # ❑ Response to Correction Letter # 8-- Revision # 1 after Permit is Issued Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner ❑ Deferred Submittal # Project Name: /x7rZ,i7 f44a' E g—opo �v Project Address: /5 Li 51:2 /Vg /SW Pkt.Ce / Contact Person:3-05h VO1 F rift_ Phone Number( 3) t7—/ 977 Summary of Revision: ,kcal t a JJ 5 te Di J l-)ea-fer a.yld je. efa-I-rr /AJDrK i5 CD/11p fe-/145-Fe c1 ir►.Sli%ot RECEIVED CITY OF-T131— JUN 19 2019 PERMIT CENTER Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including o revisiglz ci) Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: �— Entered in TRAKiT on W:Wermit CenteATemplatesWormeAReviaioa Submittal Formate Revised: August 2015 Date: City of Tukwila REVISION SUBMITTAL Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite # 100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.gov Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Plan Check/Permit Number: ,41110-07).‘, ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # 7 ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner ❑ Deferred Submittal # RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA APR 0 6 2018 Project Name: 4 7(e 01 PERMIT CENTER Project Address: /5 (3-0 /L k /s oy:, Pla_ce. Contact Person: o�S)) LA �D r r S ( Phone Number: (P3 J UD7 - )' 7 7 Summary of Revision: 1 _ l e-5 rooc 7 Cov�r�'C;l) �1 L�-F e( Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of�revisi Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: d Entered in TRAKiT on i W:\Permit Center (Brenda»Forms\Permit Center Documents (Word)\Revision Submittal Form.doc Revised: August 2015 s City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206-431-3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us REVISION SUBMITTAL Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: ff Plan Check/Permit Number: 1\41 8-0006 ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # ® Response to Correction Letter # 1 ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner R .. i V `- r CITY OF TUKWILA Project Name: Loomis Project Address: 15450 Nelson P1 14.g 0 Zi13 PERMIT CENTER Contact Person: Ale-' 1/U407A) Phone Number: _ 572 T .?" Y Summary of Revision: /Cikre, �� 66el `Ora7rit.J ad /h4o( (M11 01*-4coi,t C a'c, ‘4144) /`etraal 441,71 Sheet Number(s): 469( /4/1/07 - "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date,of rgvision 12[flfWm Received at the City of Tukwila Perm't Center by: Entered in TRAKiT on \applications\forms-applications on line\revision submittal Created: 8-13-2004 Revised: ACE COMMUNICATION SERVIt INC Home Espanol Contact Safety & Health Claims & Insurance Washington State Department of CI) Labor & Industries 0 Search L&I Page 1 of 2 A -Z index Help My L&I AR Workplace Rights Trades & Licensing ACE COMMUNICATION SERVICES INC Owner or tradesperson Principals FORRESTER, JOSHUA 1 D Doing business as ACE COMMUNICATION SERVICES INC WA UBI No. 601 786 886 PO BOX 1286 ROSEBURG, OR 97470 503-807.1477 Business type Corporation License Verify the contractor's active registration / license / certification (depending on trade) and any past violations. Construction Contractor License specialties GENERAL License no. ACECOSI036KL Effective — expiration 05/13/1997— 09/29/2019 Bond Hudson Insurance Company Bond account no. 10052017 Active. Meets current requirements. $12,000.00 Received by L&I Effective date 01/27/2017 04/30/2017 Expiration date Until Canceled Bond history Insurance Ohio Cas Ins Co $1,000,000.00 Policy no. BKS54944225 Received by L&I Effective date 09/15/2016 10/28/2014 Expiration date 10/28/2018 Insurance history Savings No savings accounts during the previous 6 year period. Lawsuits against the bond or savings No lawsuits against the bond or savings accounts during the previous 6 year period. L&I Tax debts Help us improve https://secure.lni.wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=601786886&LIC=ACECOSI036KL&SAW= 4/27/2018 ACE COMMUNICATION SERVIC INC No L&I tax debts are recorded for this contra,~ 'icense during the previous 6 year period, but some t may be recorded by other agencies. License Violations ...._..._......._................................... No license violations during the previous 6 year period. Workers' comp Do you know if the business has employees? If so, verify the business is up-to-date on workers' comp premiums. L&I Account ID 115,285-00 Doing business as ACE COMMUNICATIONS SERVICES IN Estimated workers reported N/A L&I account contact T1 / LINDSEY BOOTH (360)902-5596 - Email: B000235@lni.wa.gov Account is closed. Public Works Strikes and Debarments Verify the contractor is eligible to perform work on public works projects. Contractor Strikes No strikes have been issued against this contractor. Contractors not allowed to bid ......................_................_....._..._.................................... No debarments have been issued against this contractor. Workplace safety and health No inspections during the previous 6 year period. Page 2 of 2 G Washington State Dept. of Labor & Industries. Use of this site is subject to the laws of the state of Washington. Help us improve https://secure.lni. wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=601786886&LIC=ACECOSI036KL&SAW= 4/27/2018